Modified Part 2 Tender Document - Naya Raipur

NRDA F-1 

NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY 

Modified Tender document 

For 

The Construction of Forest and Water Resources 

Department Buildings at Sector-19 of Naya Raipur 

(Following Three-Envelope Tender Procedure) 

TENDER DOCUMENT (PART ONE) 

NIT no. 8 /F & WRD / EE-IV/CE(E)/NRDA/2011-12, Raipur Dated: 19.01.2012 

Issued by: 

Chief Executive Officer, 

Naya Raipur Development Authority (NRDA) 

Near Mantralaya Mahanadi Dwar 

Raipur 492 001, Chhattisgarh 

Tel: (0771) 4066011, Fax: (0771) 4066188, 

E-mail: ceo@nayaraipur.com

Tender document for the Construction of Forest and Water Resources Department Buildings at Sector-19 of Naya Raipur 

NRDA 

Tender Document Contains 

(a) Only schedule “A” and Section-I of schedule “D” are to be filled & singed by the tenderer 

(b) All the certificates as per pre qualification criteria shall be appended with relevant forms of schedule”D” 

1. PART ONE (NRDA F-1)-(Attached herewith, to be submit along the tender) 

Part (A) 

Part (B) 

a) Press Notice 

b) Detailed NIT 

a) Schedule-A 

(i) Cost Abstract 

(ii) Bill of Quantities 

b) Schedule-B –NIL 

c) Schedule-C –NIL 

d) Schedule-D 

Section-I................ Technical tender forms 

(i) Letter of Technical Tender 

(ii) Tenderer’s Information Sheet 

(iii) Annual Turnover 

(iv) Specific Construction Experience 

(v) Declaration 

(vi) Check list for Technical tender evaluation 

Section –II ……………....Scope of work 

Section –III..................... Technical specifications of work 

Section –IV.................... Special Conditions of Contract 

Section –V.................... List of approved makes. 

Section –VI..................... Drawings 

e) Schedule-E 

f) Schedule-F 

2. PART TWO (NRDA F-2/3) )-Standard form (Not Attached herewith, and not to be submitted along the tender) 

Important note: - Link site http:// nayaraipur.com/documents/gcc.pdf 

1. General Guidelines 

2. Tender 

3. General rules and directions 

4. Conditions of contract 

5. Clauses of contract 

6. Model rules relating to labour, water supply and sanitation in labour camps safety code 

7. Sketch of cement Godown 

8. Contract forms 

(a) Draft Format for Performance Security 

(b) Earnest Money Deposit Form (Bank Guarantee) 

(c) Format of Contract Agreement 

(d) Draft Format for Performance Guarantee for Water Proofing and Anti-termite Works 

(e) Indemnity Bond 

(f) Indenture Bond 

(g) Notice for Appointment of Arbitrator 

9. Proforma of schedules (Schedule ’A’ to Schedule ’F’) 

Signature of Contractor…………………………….... 

Signature of NRDA………………………..…………

Press Note 

NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY 

Near Mahanadi Dwar, Mantralaya, Raipur-492001,Chhattisgarh 

Ph:0771-4066011 Fax:0771-4066188, Website: www.nayaraipur.com 

Tender Notice 

NIT no. 8/F & WRD / EE-IV/CE(E)/NRDA/2011-12, Raipur, Dated: 19 .01.2012 

Sealed tenders are invited from enlisted or registered contractor with any Central / state Govt. or PSU in 

unlimited class (A-5 in category in CG PWD or equivalent.), who fulfill the Pre-Qualification criteria, for the 

work of “ Construction of Forest and Water Resources Department Buildings at Sector-19 of Naya 

Raipur”. 

Pre -Qualification Criteria 

Average Should have completed satisfactorily 

Time 

Estimated 

Cost of Annual similar works during last 5years i.e. after 

allowed 

EMD 

Cost in 

Tender turnover in 31/01/2007, in any Govt. or PSUs as 

including 

(INR 

INR 

Document last three below: - 

rainy 

Lacs) 

Crores 

(INR ) financial a) One similar work costing not less 

season 

years in INR than INR 43Crores 

Crores 

OR 

b) Two similar works costing not less 

24month 53.55 53.55 20,000 27 

than INR 27Crores each. 

Note: - Similar work shall mean a project consisting of Building work in a single project. 

Tenders can be downloaded from the website www.nayaraipur.com from 24.01. 2012. A pre-tender meeting will 

be held on 31.01.2012 at 12.00hrs in NRDA at the above mentioned address. The last date for submission of the 

tenders by speed post/registered post/ courier is 16.02.2012, upto 15.00 hrs. Documents shall be opened 

thereafter on same day after 15.30hrs. Amendment in tender, if any, will only be uploaded on the website and 

shall not be published in any newspaper. 

Chief Executive Officer 


Signature of NRDA………………………..………… 

Page 1 of 8

NRDA F-1 – Detailed NIT 

Construction of Forest and Water Resources Department Buildings at Sector-19 of Naya Raipur 

NRDA 

NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY (NRDA) 

RAIPUR, CHHATTISGARH 

DETAILED NIT 

NIT No.: 8/F & W R D / E E -IV/C E (E )/N R D A /2011-12, R aipur, Dated: 19.01.2012 

Last date and time for submission of tenders: 1500 hrs on 20.03.2012 

1. Item Rate Tenders are invited in the prescribed tender documents by the Chief Executive Officer, 

Naya Raipur Development Authority (NRDA), Raipur Chhattisgarh from eligible contractors 

registered with any Central / state /semi Government of India or public sector undertaking. Who 

fulfill the prequalification criteria, detailed NIT is as under:- 

Name of work Construction of Forest and Water Resources 

Department Buildings at Sector-19 of Naya Raipur 

Estimated Cost (INR in Crores) 

EMD (INR in Lacs) 

Time allowed including rainy season 

50.88 (Modified) 

50.88 (Modified) 

24month 

Cost of Tender (In INR) 20000.00 

Tender to be uploaded on NRDA website to enable 

download 

Date of submission of queries if any, by email / 

post 

Date and time of Pre tender meeting with the 

tenderers 

24-01-2012 

30-01-2012 

31-01-2012 & 12.00Hrs in NRDA conference hall 

near Mantralaya Mahandi dwar, Raipur-492001 

Pre tender Clarification/ amendments 04-02-2012 

Last Date and time of submission of Tender 

Date and time of opening of Tender 

20-03-2012 & 15.00Hrs (Modified) 

20-03-2012 & 15.30Hrs (Modified) 

2. Intended eligible Tenderers may obtain further information from the office of Employer and 

inspect the Tender Document at, NRDA Raipur from 11 AM to 4 PM on all working days. 

3. Pre Qualification Criteria -To be eligible under the contract, the intending tenderer should meet 

the following mandatory criteria 3.1 and 3.2 (A & B): 

3.1 Financial Criteria 

Average Annual Turnover: The intending tenderer’s average annual turnover for last three (3) 

years ending 31st March ( i.e 2008-09, 2009-10 & 2010-2011) of the previous financial 

year,should be INR 26 Crores or more. Annual turnover is total certified payments received for 

contracts in progress or completed during the financial year. 

For above, the Tenderer has to submit audited balance sheets of their financial turn over/ 

accounts along with profit and loss acount for the last three(3) years, along with the 

Tender. Where necessary, the Employer can make enquiries with the Tenderer’s Bankers. 



Page 2 of 8



NRDA 

3.2 Technical Criteria 

A 

B 

Intending tenderer shall be enlisted or registered contractor with any Central / state Govt. or PSU 

in unlimited class (in A-5 category in CG PWD or equivalent). 

AND 

Intending tenderer should have completed satisfactorily similar works during last 5 years i.e after 

31/01/2007, in any Government. or Public sector undertaking as below: - 

(a) One similar work costing not less than INR 41Crores. 

OR 

(b) Two similar work costing not less than INR 26Crores each. 

Note: - 

a) Similar work shall mean a project consisting of Building work in a single project 

b) Ongoing project / part project experience shall not be considered for evaluation. 

c) For the benefit of the intending tenderer’s a checklist is enclosed at Schedule-D (vi), for the documents 

to be submitted along with tender. 

d) The Contractor shall have to engage specialized experienced sub vendors for Electrical, Plumbing, 

Firefighting and HVAC works. The same shall be got approved from NRDA before start of work. 

That sub vendor shall be a specialized agency in the particular field and should have successfully 

completed work in any central/ state Govt./ PSU in respect of particular component as below. 

i. One competed work of 80% of the value of that component 

OR 

ii. Two completed works of 50% of the value of that component. 

In a Central/State Govt. department/PSU 

Certificates: 

a) All tenderers should submit the valid registration certificate. Commercial tax certificate, 

balance sheet with profit and loss statement for at least 3 years. 

b) The tenderers shall also submit satisfactory completion certificates in support of each quoted 

experience along with work order. The satisfactory completion certificate should be signed 

by an officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer concerned in case of Government 

department or the rank of General Manager in case of public/ private sector as the case may 

be. 

c) All the documents to be submitted shall be duly notarized. 

4. The tender document for the above work is available on NRDA’s websites: 

www.nayaraipur.com and www.cg.gov.in Tenderer will have to download the tender 

document, and shall submit the tender along with the tender cost as mentioned in the Para 1 

above. For tender cost, DD drawn in favor of “CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER, NRDA” should be 

enclosed. The tenderers shall attach the cost of tender document along with EMD as mentioned 

in the Para 1 above. 

5. Three envelope Tender procedures shall be followed. Tenderer has to submit three sealed 

envelopes containing the documents as detailed below simultaneously, enclosed in a Fourth 

Envelope duly mentioned in the top the name of work and firm address. 

ENVELOPE-1 

ENVELOPE-2 

ENVELOPE-3 

EMD & Cost of tender in the prescribed format 

Technical Tender consisting of the documents/certificate in proof of 

prequalification criteria PART ONE and (NRDA F-1) excluding schedule-A 

Financial Tender PART ONE (Schedule-A) 

( Price Bid should also be submitted as soft copy in MS Excel 2007,in CD) 



Page 3 of 8



NRDA 

All the three tenders shall be put in a fourth envelope which shall be dully sealed. All the 4 

envelopes shall be super-scribed with the Name of Work and Name of intending tenderer. 

Respective envelopes shall also be marked as envelope 1, envelope 2, and envelope 3 as 

detailed above. Tenders who do not conform to the specified requirements will be held nonresponsive. 

Initially, only the envelope -1 shall be opened, if found responsive then the envelope-2 

(Technical tender) shall be opened at the date and time given in the Tender Document. The 

Price tender shall remain sealed and unopened in the custody of NRDA. 

After technical evaluation, date and time of opening of price bid shall be communicated by NRDA 

to the successful tenderer in technical evolution. The Price tenders of only the tenderer found 

qualified as per the PQ criteria shall be opened in presence of the tenderer who wish to be 

present.. The Contract shall be awarded to the tenderer whose tender has been determined to 

be the lowest evaluated as per tender conditions. 

6. All Tenders must be accompanied with the Earnest money as mentioned in the Para 1 above. 

The Earnest money shall be payable in favour of Chief Executive Officer NRDA, in the form of a 

Bank Draft payable at Raipur/ / Bank Guarantee operatable at Raipur drawn from a 

nationalized bank/ Scheduled Bank which shall be valid for a period of 6 (Six) months from the 

date of submission of tender. 

7. Tenders shall be submitted at the address below on or before due date.Tenders received after 

the due date or time for tender submission (Late tenders) will either not be accepted or if 

inadvertently accepted, will not be opened and shall be rejected and returned back to the 

tenderer subsequently. 

8. (a) NRDA reserves full rights to reject any or all the tenders without assigning any reason, and to 

seek any further information from the tenderers. The selection shall be at the entire discretion of 

NRDA and the NRDA's decision in this respect shall be final and binding. Further NRDA reserves 

right to split the contract in two or more parts. This shall be at the entire discretion of NRDA and 

NRDA's decision in this matter shall be final and without appeal. 

(b) The competent authority on behalf of NRDA does not bind himself to accept the lowest or any 

other tender, and reserves to himself the authority to reject any or all of the tenders received 

without the assignment of a reason. All tenders in which any of the prescribed conditions is not 

fulfilled or any condition including that of conditional rebate is put forth by the tenderer, shall be 

summarily rejected. 

9. Tenders shall be valid for 90 (Ninety) days from the last date of submission of the tender. NRDA 

will not be responsible for any costs or expenses incurred by Tenderers in connection with the 

preparation or delivery of Tenders. If any tenderer withdraws his tender before the said period 

or issue of letter of acceptance/intent, whichever is earlier, or makes any modifications in the 

terms and conditions of the tender which are not acceptable to the NRDA, then the NRDA 

shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, be at liberty to forfeit entire amount of 

Earnest Money as aforesaid. 

10. Pre tender meeting with the tenderers will be held as mentioned above in the Office of Chief 

Executive Officer, NRDA, Raipur. Tenderers are advised to participate in the pre-tender 

meeting. The intending tenderers are advised to send their queries to NRDA either by post or by 

email to ceo@nayaraipur.com and cee@nayaraipur.com upto the date mentioned in the 

clause 1 as above. 

11. Clarification/ amendments, if any shall be posted on website only. 

12. Period for completion of work as mentioned above at Para 1is inclusive of rainy season. 

13. Approved hard copy of the standard document is available in the office of the employer and could 

be seen on any working day during office hours at the following address:- 

Chief Engineer( Engg), NRDA 

2 nd floor, Guru Govind Sarang Complex, New Rajendra Nagar, 

Raipur-492002, Phone: 0771-4094035 



Page 4 of 8



NRDA 

14. The intending tenderers are advised to cross check the downloaded version of the tender 

document with the hard copy available with NRDA. 

15. In case of any discrepancy between the downloaded tender and the approved hard copy, the 

approved hard copy shall hold good for contractual as well as legal purposes. 

16. Tenderers are advised to inspect and examine the site and its surroundings and satisfy 

themselves before submitting their tenders, as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil (so 

far as is practicable), the form and nature of the site, the means of access to the site, the 

accommodation they may require and in general, shall themselves at their own cost obtain 

all necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other circumstances which may 

influence or affect the execution of work and shall incorporate the cost of such effects while 

quoting the tender, A tenderer shall be deemed to have full knowledge of the site whether he 

inspects it or not and no extra charges consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise 

shall be allowed, The tenderer shall be responsible for arranging and maintaining at his own 

cost all materials tools & plants, water, electricity, access facilities for workers and on all 

materials tools & plants, water, electricity, access facilities for workers and on all other 

services required for executing the work unless otherwise specifically provided in the 

contract documents. Submission of tender by a tenderer implies that he has read this notice 

and all other contract documents and has made himself aware of the scope and 

specifications of the work to be done and local conditions and other factors having a bearing 

on the execution of the work. 

17. Canvassing whether directly or indirectly, in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and 

the tenders submitted by the contractors who resort to canvassing will be liable to rejection. 

18. The successful tenderer shall be required to execute an agreement on a non judicial stamp 

paper of appropriate value with the Engineer-in-charge in the Proformas annexed to the 

tender document, within 7 days of the issue of letter of acceptance/ award by the NRDA. 

The cost of non judicial stamp paper shall be borne by contractor. In the event of failure on 

the part of the successful tender to sign the agreement within 7 days, the entire earnest 

money will be forfeited and tender shall be cancelled. 

19. The successful tenderer, upon issue of letter of acceptance, in addition to execution of an 

agreement on a non judicial stamp paper of appropriate value, shall also be required to 

furnish an irrevocable Performance Bank Guarantee of requisite amount to the Engineer-in- 

Charge in the Performa annexed to the tender document, within 7 days of the issue of the 

letter of acceptance /award of Tender by the NRDA. In the event of failure on the part of the 

successful tenderer to furnish the Performance Bank Guarantee within 7 days, the earnest 

money will be forfeited and tender shall be cancelled. 

20. This Notice Inviting Tender shall form a part of the contract document. In accordance with 

clause 1 of the contract, the letter of acceptance/ award shall be issued in favour of the 

successful tenderer/ contractor. After submission of the performance guarantee, by the 

contractor, the General arrangement drawings and other details for commencement of work 

shall be issued. The contract shall be deemed to have come into effect on issue of 

communication of letter of acceptance of the tender. On such communication of acceptance, 

the successful Tenderer/Contractor shall, within 7 days from such date, formally sign the 

agreement consisting of:- 

a) PART ONE of the Tender documents along with detailed NIT as issued to the 

contractor at the time of invitation of tender and acceptance thereof together with 

any correspondence leading thereto and 

b) PART TWO of the Tender document i.e. “General conditions of contract duly 

modified / corrected to the extent as specified under PART ONE (though not issued 

to the contractor but always available for inspection on written demand at the office 



Page 5 of 8



NRDA 

of the officer inviting tenders specified under Schedule F of PART ONE of the 

Tender Document) and deemed to have been consulted, inspected, understood and 

considered by the tenderer before quoting and submitting his tender. 

c) Agreement signed on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value as per 

prescribed proforma of tender documents. 

21. GCC is available as a standard NRDA Publication and can also be downloaded free of 

cost from the NRDA web site under title “General conditions of contract” for 

Contractors in construction Contracts” However contractors are advised to refer to 

PART ONE of the tender document carefully and thoroughly for corrections/ 

modifications in the “General conditions of contract” Standard form NRDA F-2/3 is 

also available for inspection in the office of the Engineer in charge on written demand 

from contractors. Link site http:// nayaraipur.com/documents/gcc.pdf 

22. While submitting the tender the contractor shall clearly and legibly write his full mailing 

address including PIN code, Telephone/ mobile no. / Fax Numbers / e-mail address etc for 

communication purposes and shall inform the Engineer in Charge about any change from 

time to time in his postal / mailing address. The communication shall be dispatched only at 

the contractor’s such latest informed address and NRDA shall in no way be responsible for 

non-receipt of correspondence by the contractor. 

23. It is found that the contractor has misrepresented that facts or has attempted to secure or has 

secured the work by misrepresenting the facts or by submitting false or forged documents then 

the Entire Earnest Money submitted by the contractor and or the Performance Guarantee and/ or 

the Security Deposit as the case may be, shall be liable to be absolutely forfeited and such 

contractor / individuals shall also be liable to be prosecuted for cheating / forgery / fraud etc as 

per law. 

24. Bill of quantities is enclosed with tender document, the rate shall be quoted against each 

item separately in figures as well as in words 

During price Tender evaluation, the Employer will correct arithmetical errors on the following 

basis: 

a) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, following procedure shall be followed: 

i. the unit price which correspond to the total price for the item worked out by the Tenderer 

shall be followed; 

ii. 

If the total price of an item is not worked out by the Tenderer or it does not correspond 

with the rates written either in words or figures then the rate quoted by the Tenderer in 

words shall be taken as correct. 

b) if there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the total price that is obtained by 

multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the total price shall be 

corrected; 

c) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or subtraction of subtotals, the 

subtotals shall prevail and the total shall be corrected. 

d) The unit wise amounts will be rounded to the nearest rupee 

e) The tendered rates of items against which no rate or price is entered by the tenderer will be 

taken as zero and the price of the same shall be deemed to have been covered by the 

rates/amount quoted in other items. 

25. The tender document shall be written legibly and free from erasure, overwriting or conversion of 

figure. Any correction where unavoidable shall be made by crossing out, rewriting and attestation 

by the tenderer. 



Page 6 of 8



NRDA 

26. All royalties be paid by the contractor as also all tolls, duties, local and other levies including 

sales tax, insurances & workman compensation act etc. 

27. Contractor will be bound to follow CG Model rules relating to its water supply & sanitation in 

labour camp. 

28. The contractor shall pay not less than the minimum wages to labours engaged by him on the 

work. 

29. Department reserves the right to take up the work departmentally or to award any work on 

contract in the vicinity without prejudice to the terms of contract. 

30. If the rate quoted by the lowest (Ll) of the tenderer is considered unbalanced (in relation to the 

Department's estimate of cost of work to be performed under the contract) by the CEO, NRDA, 

then tenderer shall submit detail price/rate analysis of major items of the work within 7 days of 

such notice so as to demonstrate the internal consistency of these price/rate(s) with his quoted 

price/rate(s). After evaluation by tender sanctioning authority CEO, NRDA may require the 

tenderer to submit additional Security upto 5% of the estimated cost put to tender for the 

performance of the agreement in the shape of F.D. or a BG receipt in favor of the CEO, NRDA 

before signing of the agreement, which shall be refunded along with the normal S.D. after 

Completion of work. If he fails to complete the work or leave the work in complete, this 5% 

additional SD, shall also be forfeited by the department, & the agreement shall be terminated and 

action shall be taken in accordance of relavent contract clause of the agreement. 

31. Important Instructions to Tenderers :The tenderers who have down loaded the tender 

documents from the web site, should read the following important instructions carefully before 

actually quoting the rates & submitting their tender on the tender document downloaded from the 

web site: 

a) The tenderer should see carefully & ensure that all the pages of PART ONE (NRDA F-1) of 

the tender document including schedule of quantities of items of work (NRDA F-1 Schedule- 

A) has been down loaded properly & completely. 

b) The printout of the downloaded tender document shall be taken on A-4 size plain white paper 

only & the printer settings shall be dept to ensure that the downloaded document is printed in 

the same manner and pattern / setting as appearing on the web site & there is no change in 

the formatting, number of pares etc. 

c) The tenderer should ensure that no page in the down-loaded tender document is missing 

and all pages in the down-loaded tender document as printed are legible & clear & are 

printed on a good quality paper. 

d) The tenderer should ensure that every page of the down-loaded tender document is signed 

by tenderer himself. 

e) The tenderer should ensure that the down loaded tender document is properly bound and 

wax sealed before submitting the same in the envelope. Loose / Spiral binding shall be liable 

to be rejected. 

f) In case of any correction/ addition / alteration/ omission in the downloaded tender document 

vis a vis that in the Standard DRAFT Tender Document available in the office of NRDA, it 

shall be liable to be rejected. 

g) The tenderer shall furnish a declaration to this effect that no addition/ deletion/ corrections 

have been made in the downloaded tender document being submitted by him and it is 



Page 7 of 8



NRDA 

identical to the tender document appearing on the Web-site and with the Standard DRAFT 

Tender Document available in the officer of the office inviting the tenders. 


NRDA Near Mantralaya Mahanadi Dwar, 

Raipur 492 001 Chhattisgarh 

Phone No (0771) 4066011, 4268643. 



Page 8 of 8

NRDA F-1- Schedule-D-Section-I- Technical Tender Forms 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

Section-I 

Technical Tender Forms

NRDA F-1- Schedule-D-Section-I Technical Tender Forms 


NRDA 

Schedule-D 

Section I - Tender Forms Technical 

This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Tenderer and submitted as part of his 

PART ONE (NRDA F-1). 

Table of Forms 

LETTER OF TECHNICAL TENDER ............................................................................................................. 2 

TENDERER’S INFORMATION SHEET ....................................................................................................... 4 

ANNUAL TURNOVER ................................................................................................................................... 5 

SPECIFIC CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE ................................................................................................ 6 

DECLARATION ............................................................................................................................................ 7 

CHECK LIST FOR TECHNICAL TENDER EVALUATION ........................................................................... 8 



Page 1 of 9



NRDA 

(i) Letter of Technical Tender 

Date: _______________ 

Tender Package No.: _______________ 

NIT No.: ________________________ 

To: 


NRDA, Near Mantralaya Mahanadi Dwar, Raipur 492 001, 

Chhattisgarh. 

Ref for NIT no:----------------------------------- 

Subject: Name of the work:- -------------------------------------- 

Dear Sir, 

I/We, the undersigned, declare that: 

(a) I/We have examined and have no reservations to the Tender Document, including 

Addendum if any, minutes of meeting, clarification to the queries etc. 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

I/We offer to execute the subjected under in conformity with the Tender Documents and 

the addendums. 

I/We have satisfied ourselves as to the location of the site and working conditions, 

examined the requirements of NRDA and have obtained all the information necessary 

for the successful and timely completion of the work. 

I/We have submitted the Earnest Money Deposit as specified in the tender document 

which will not bear any interest and shall be subjected to forfeiture on following defaults. 

(i) 

(ii) 

if we withdraw our Tender during the period of tender validity as specified in Detailed NIT 

para 9 or 

if we fail to: 

• furnish a Performance Security in accordance with Detailed NIT Para 19 or 

• sign the Contract in accordance with Detailed NIT Para 18; or 

• accept the correction of its Tender Price pursuant to Detailed NIT Para 24. 

(e) 

(f) 

(g) 

(h) 

(iii) 

if we have given the false documents in support of qualification with the technical tender. 

My/Our Tender shall be valid for a period of 90 days from the date fixed for the tender 

submission deadline in accordance with the Tender Document, and it shall remain 

binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period; 

If my/our Tender is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Security in the 

amount as specified in the tender document for the due performance of the Contract 

and sign the agreement; 

I/We are not participating, as Tenderers, in more than one Tender in this Tendering 

process, in accordance with the Tender Document; 

My/our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any subcontractors or suppliers for 

any part of the Contract, has not been declared ineligible by NRDA, Raipur; 



Page 2 of 9



NRDA 

(i) 

(j) 

(k) 

(l) 

(m) 

I/We understand that this Tender, together with your written acceptance thereof 

included in your letter of acceptance, shall constitute a binding contract between us, 

until a formal Contract is prepared and executed; 

I/We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated tender or any 

other tender that you may receive. 

I/We hereby pay the Earnest Money Deposit of required amount in the form of a 

demand draft on a nationalized bank (-----------Bank Name and address) and operatable 

at Raipur in favour of the 'Chief Executive Officer, NRDA, Raipur' for the said amount 

and is attached. 

I/We hereby declare that, the entire work including Addendum/ Corrigendum, if any, 

shall be completed in all respect within the time limit specified in the NIT. 

I/We here by authorize the Employer to get all bank guarantee verified and got 

confirmed from concerned Bank. 

Signature: --------------------- 

Signed by: -------------(Name) 

Designation: ----------------- 

For and on Behalf of --------(Name of Tenderer) 

Date: 



Page 3 of 9



NRDA 

(ii)Tenderer’s Information S heet 

Tenderer’s Information 

Tenderer’s legal name 

Tenderer’s legal address 

Tenderer’s authorized representative 

(name, address, telephone numbers, fax 

numbers, e-mail address) 

Tenderer’s details of Incorporation 

Name: 

Telephone : 

Fax : 

Place of incorporation/ 

registration: 

Address: 

E-Mail: 

Year of incorporation: 

Attached are copies of the following original documents. 

1. 

2. 

Articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above. 

In the case of government-owned entity, documents establishing legal and financial autonomy and compliance with 

commercial law. 

Details of the office closest to Raipur (if available) 

1. Address of Office 

2. Telephone : Contact : 

3. Fax : E-Mail : 

Signature of Tenderer 

Date:_____________ 



Page 4 of 9



NRDA 

(iii) Annual Turnover 

Year 

Annual Turnover Data for the Last 3 Years 

Amount and 

Exchange 

Currency 

Rate if any 

INR 

Equivalent 

2008-09 

2009-10 

2010-11 

Average Annual Turnover for the last 3 years in INR 

All Tenderers are requested to complete the information in this form 

The information supplied should be the Annual Turnover of the Tenderer in terms of the amounts billed to 

clients for each year for contract in progress or completed, converted to INR at the rate of exchange at 

the end of the period reported. 

As a proof of the above, the contractor shall submit the copies of the balance sheet for last three years 

along with audited profit & loss statement duly signed by the charted accountant. 


Date:_____________ 



Page 5 of 9



NRDA 

(iv) S pecific Cons truction E xperience 

Fill up one (1) form per contract. 

Details of Contract 

Contract No . . . . . . of . . . 

. . . 

Name of work 

Award Date 

Completion Date 

Role in Contract Contractor Sub-contractor 

Total Contract Amount 

INR 

Employer’s Name 

Address 

Telephone/Fax Number 

E-mail 

Description of the work executed 

Note: Attach copies of work order and satisfied completion certificates in support of each quoted 

experience. The completion certificate should be signd by the officer not below the rank of concerned 

Executive Engineer in case of Government department or in the rank of General Manager in case of 

public sector/private sector as the cases may be. 


Date:_____________ 



Page 6 of 9



NRDA 

(v)DECLAR ATION 

(TO BE SIGNED BY THE TENDERER SUBMITTING THE TENDR 

ON DOWNLOADED TENDER DOCUMENT) 

I/We hereby declare and certify that: 

1. I/We are submitting the tender in the tender document downloaded by me /us from the website & 

we certify that there is no change in formatting, numbering of pages etc. In the downloaded 

documents. 

2. I/We are submitting the tender in the tender document which is exactly similar and identical to the 

one available on the website and also as available with the officer inviting tenders. 

3. I / We have no made any modifications / corrections / additions / omissions etc in the tender 

documents downloaded from web by me / us. 

4. I / We have checked that no page in the downloaded tender document is missing and all the 

pages as per web site are available & that all the pages of tender document submitted by us are 

clear & legible. 

5. I / We have signed (with stamp) all the pages of the tender document before submitting the 

same. 

6. I / we have wax sealed the tender documents properly before submitting the same. 

7. I / We have submitted the application for issue of tender documents on the prescribed format 

separately along with the cost of tender documents and also the attested Xerox copies of the 

eligibility documents prescribed for respective work in the NIT. 

8. I / We have read carefully & understood the entire Tender document including important 

instructions to the tenderers submitting the downloaded tender. 

9. In case at any stage whatsoever at a later date it is found/ revealed that there is a difference in 

our downloaded tender documents from the original Standard DRAFT Tender Document, 

NRDA shall have the absolute right to take any action as deemed fit without any prior intimation 

to me / us. 

10. In case at any stage whatsoever at a later date it is found that there is difference in our 

downloaded tender document from the Standard DRAFT Tender Document, we clearly 

understand that our work shall be liable to be cancelled and Earnest Money/ Performance 

Guarantee / Security deposit etc all are liable to be forfeited by NRDA and in such an eventuality 

I / We shall have no right or claim for any damages / compensation from NRDA on this account. 

Further in such case I / We may also be debarred by NRDA for further participation in the 

tendering in the concerned NRDA & be removed from the approved list of contractors of NRDA. 

Dated………………………… 

(TENDERER) 

(SIGNATURE WITH SEAL/ STAMP) 



Page 7 of 9



NRDA 

(vi) CHECK LIST FOR TECHNICAL TENDER EVALUATION 

Name of the Agency: 

S. 

No 

Document 

Details 

Enclosed at annexure 

Page No 

From To 

Amount 

Downloaded from NRDA Website 

Details of DD 

1 

Tender Document 

Cost 

Name of the Bank & 

Branch 

Date 

D.D no & 

Photo copy attached 

Yes 

No 

. 

. 

Amount 

2 

Earnest Money 

Deposit (EMD) 

Form of EMD 

Issuing Bank & 

Branch 

No & Date 

Photo copy attached 

Yes 

DD 

No 

. . 

Class in which 

registered 

Contractor 

Registration 

Certificate 

Name of 

Department 

Registration 

Number & Date 

Validity 

Notarized 

Yes/No 

. 

4 

Commercial Tax 

Certificate 

Registration 

Number: 

Name of the 

Office 

Notarized 

Yes/No 

5 

Average Annual 

Turnover in Lacs 2008-2009 

. 



Page 8 of 9



NRDA 

Name of the Agency: 

S. 

No 

Document 

(For the Financial 

year2008-09,2009- 

09,2010-11) 

2009-2010 

Details 

Enclosed at annexure 

Page No 

From To 

2010-2011 

. 

Charted accountant certificate in original or 

photo copy duly notorized can be 

submitted 

6 

Details of the 

projects/works 

completed as prequalification 

criteria 

Name of the 

Work 

Work 

Completed 

Cost of the 

Project 

Certificate 

Enclosed 

Notarized 

Name of the 

Work 

Work 

Completed 

Cost of the 

Project 

Certificate 

Enclosed 

Notarized 

Yes/No 

Yes/No 

Yes/No 

Yes/No 

Yes/No 

Yes/No 

. 

Note: The above check list only provides for those documents which are mandatory for the tender prequalification 

criteria. Tenderers are required to append, other documents also with the technical tender as 

required in the detailed NIT or elsewhere in the PART ONE (NRDA F-1). 


Date:_____________ 



Page 9 of 9

NRDA F-1-Schedule-D- Section-II – SCOPE OF WORK 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

Section-II 

Scope of work 



Page 1 of 9



NRDA 

Works Requirement 

This section contains the brief idea of scope of work, supplementary information drawings 

etc. regarding the work to be executed under instant tender, may vary as per site 

requirement. In case of any change the decision of Engineer-in-charge will be final and 

binding to the contractor. The work however shall be executed as per BOQ and Drawings. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE FOR ALL SCOPES OF WORK 

1. WORKING DRAWINGS :The Contractor shall at all times maintain on site, in good order 

and condition, a complete set of all Drawings duely laminated and Documents 

necessary for the proper execution and checking of the Works. These Drawings and 

Documents shall be made available on request to the Engineer in Charge or other 

authorized persons on site. Any amendment shall be indicated on the Drawing, dated 

and signed by the Authorized person in charge, with reasons stated if possible. 

2. AS‐INSTALLED DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall prepare two (2) sets of paper prints of 

the As‐Installed Drawings, diagrams and schedules as in the opinion of the Consulting 

engineers, shows an accurate record of the work as installed by the Contractor and 

submit to the Engineer in Charge for approval. When approved, the Contractor shall 

submit three (3) sets of paper prints and one (1) CD ROM of the approved As‐Installed 

Drawings for reference and record 

3. SHOP DRAWINGS: The contractor shall also provide shop drawings for various subparts 

of the tender for approval by the Engineer in Charge. Areas of detailing shall 

include (but will not be limited to) Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Structural Glazing .The 

shop drawings shall be conformance to the actual site conditions and final selection of 

the equipment. 

4. SAMPLES: The contractor shall submit to the Engineer in Charge samples of all 

materials for approval and no work shall commence before such samples are duly 

approved. The cost of the samples shall be borne by the contractor. 

5. TESTS: The entire mandatory test shall be carried out at the frequency as mentioned in 

the specification. All materials and methods of tests shall conform to the latest rules, 

regulation and/or individual specifications as laid out in the technical specs section. The 

Engineer in Charge will have the option to have any of the materials tested and if the 

test results show that the materials do not conform to the specifications, such materials 

shall be rejected. A reasonable number of representative tests will be deemed to be 

included in the rates tendered. 

6. SITE CLEANING: Upon completion of the scope of the work all the areas should be 

cleaned. All floors, doors, windows, surface, etc. shall be cleaned down in a manner 

which will render the work acceptable to the Engineer in Charge and employer. All 

rubbish due to any reason, shall be removed daily from the site and an area of up to ten 

meters on the outer boundaries of the premises will be cleaned by the contractor as a 

part of the contract. 

7. MAINTENANCE IN DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD: The CONTRACTOR shall be obliged to 

remove / repair / replace/ the defects for the entire system during defect liability 

period (DLP) of twenty four (24) months after the final official hand over date of the 

civil work/other installation, duly approved by the consultants and project managers. 



Page 2 of 9



NRDA 

This period shall include maintenance replacement of parts, regular periodic visit by 

qualified personnel of the CONTRACTOR and attending to emergency call at short 

notice. 

8. Maintaining the installation against defects for a minimum of specified defect liability 

,from the date of commissioning and imparting training to the workers/staff as asked 

for maintaining the installations as per IS requirement and exercising. 

9. Items not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or 

additional works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications or the latest N.B.C. 

manual up to date amendments as applicable in the work. 

10. The contractor shall be responsible for Making good the wall/slab/beam/column chases 

and cut-outs wherever provided on account of plumbing cross-overs and shall handover 

the site in finished condition. 

11. SCOPE OF WORK 

The scope for the proposed work shall include the following main subheads 

(i) 

(ii) 

(iii) 

(iv) 

(v) 

Civil works including Finishing items. & Site Development including road network 

and landscaping 

Electrification Works. 

Public Health including external site work and connections. 

Fire Fighting Works 

HVAC Works 

I. Civil Works 

a) General Civil items 

• Site Clearance and preparation 

• Establishment of Site Levels through proper survey of the site and co-coordinating 

the road level benchmark data with NRDA. 

• Site investigation-Supplementary site investigation will be carried out by the 

contractor to ensure proper levels as required by construction documents and also 

confirming to the requirements of NRDA. 

• Earthwork including excavation and leveling 

• Casting of R.C.C. foundations and R.C.C. Retaining walls for basement areas 

• R.C.C work in Framed Structure including necessary formwork and scaffolding 

• C.C work in flooring/Outer Area 

• Block work using Fly ash Bricks and/or Concrete blocks/AAC Blocks/Regular Bricks 

• RCC waterproofing for Roof /Retaining wall and water tanks. 

• Construction of Underground and overhead RCC water tanks 

• Construction of Special Architectural Design elements in RCC over Roof Areas. 

• Construction of Structural steel work (Truss) over Entrance areas. 

b) Finishing items as follows 

• Internal and external plaster work 

• Structural Glazing and spider glazing work 

• Aluminum/PVC door, windows and joinery including all necessary hardware 

• Fully Glazed internal partition work 



Page 3 of 9



NRDA 

• External Glass Reinforced Concrete (GRC) jail work secured using MS sub frames 

• Provision and installation of Metal jail work in external areas 

• Provision and installation Stainless steel railing work 

c) Detailed Interior Items 

• False ceiling work in Gypsum and mineral fiber grid ceilings 

• Flooring work using Natural stone( Granite, Kotha stone, Vitrified tiles/Ceramic 

tiles) 

• Dado work in toilets/pantry area using Ceramic tiles 

• Laminated paneling work on walls- 

• Wall finishing using Putty, Acrylic emulsion and Textured paint finishes 

• Acoustical panel installation in Auditorium works 

• Internal GRC work 

Site Development including road network and landscaping 

• Cutting, filling and leveling of the site as per the site layout and achieving the desired 

site levels 

• Preparation and laying of Road work in Bitumen and Concrete as per the 

specification laid down in the detailed site drawings, preparation of pave red and 

tiled areas. 

• Road side curbstone ,appropriate road markings and signage 

• Surface preparation and tree plantation as per the details provided under the 

horticulture scheme 

• Preparation of landscape features, installation of artwork as specified. 

• Clearing and finishing the site in a manner that it shall be deemed t be completely fit 

for operation and use according to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge. 

II. Electrification Works 

The work to be carried out under this contract comprises of internal and external electrical 

Installation of the project as called in the tender documents. The Electrical Contractor shall 

include for the supply of the whole of the materials in accordance with the Specifications 

and the whole of the work of fixing necessary for the complete installation as set out in 

these Specifications and with the accompanying schedule and drawings, commencing from 

the supply authority’s terminals. This also include any material, appliances, equipment not 

specifically mentioned herein or noted on the drawings as being furnished or installed but 

which are necessary and Customary to make the installation complete in all respects. In 

general the work to be performed under this contract shall comprise supply, installation, 

testing & commissioning of the following 

• All conduit work including junction boxes, outlet boxes, wiring & earthing for lighting 

& power. 

• All conduit work including junction boxes, outlet boxes & wiring for LV systems such 

as voice, data, fire alarm, paging, CCTV, Access control & MATV etc. 

• Switches, plug sockets, cover plates and wiring accessories. 

• Emergency lighting, wiring, Inverter/UPS. 

• DG Sets Installation and commissioning. 

• Earth pits & earth strip for earthling the body of the motors is being provided by the 

Electrical Contractor. 

• Substation, HT Switchgear and HT Cabling. 



Page 4 of 9



NRDA 

• Mains and sub‐mains between various distribution boards, cables, sub main wiring, 

cable trays, Rising Mains & Bus Ducts. 

• Distribution Boards, Panels, meter boards & final DB’s. 

• Earthing system. 

• Lighting Fixtures and Fans. 

• Lightning Arrestor System 

• External lighting, cabling, lighting fixtures and poles. 

• Training of owner’s staff/representative. 

• Preparation of “As Built Drawings & Documents”. 

III. Public Health including external site work and connections. 

• Provision and installation of complete Chinaware, CP fitting including all necessary 

accessories required for installation and proper functioning of the supplied 

equipment. 

• Laying of Internal Soil, Waste, Rain Water & Water Supply Lines as per the approved 

makes & specifications of quality. 

• Laying of External Storm Water pipes, Water supply lines, Sewerage pipes as per the 

detailed external plumbing drawings, to the final tap-off point and making functional 

the connections to the external utilities. 

• Installation of Pumps in the U.G.Tank complete as required starting from suction line 

from underground tank to O.H.Tank/ distribution Ring Main Ball Valves, N.R.V, Elect- 

Panel & Wiring for Motor Necessary Foundation work for Pumps, Supports for Piping 

Bends, Tee’s Dead ends, Tail pcs. Valves, Vessel etc. as required. 

• Supports for vertical risers/vertical pipes. Painting etc. as required. 

• Pump & equipments, accessories and fitting as required. 

• Installation, testing and commissioning of the entire Plumbing installations to the 

satisfaction of engineer in charge. 

• Work under Plumbing Services installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance 

with specifications attached with the tender. 

IV. FIRE FIGHTING 

a) Installation of Pumps in the Terrace lvl. Complete as required starting from suction 

line from over head water tank. The distribution Main butterfly Valves, N.R.V, Air 

Vessel, Pressures Gauges, Pressure Switches, Elect-Panel & Wiring for Motor & Pr. 

Switches. Necessary Foundation work for Pumps, Supports for Piping Bends, Tee’s 

Dead ends, Tail pcs. Valves, Vessel etc. as required. 

b) Laying of Main of MS pipe Heavy Grade (class) for the Hydrant on terrace and down. 

comer inside the building. 

c) Supports for vertical risers/vertical pipes. Painting etc. as required. 

d) Fire fighting equipments, accessories and fitting as required. 

e) Installation, testing and commissioning of the entire installations to the satisfaction 

of employer, Consultant and Local fire. Authorities. 

f) Obtaining NOC for the installations from Local fire Authorities. 

g) Maintaining the installation minimum for a period of 1 year from the date of 

commissioning and imparting training to the workers/staff of the factory as asked 

for maintaining the installations as per IS requirement and exercising. Fire drills as 

asked for by the client/Local fire Authorities. 

h) Earth pits & earth strip for earthing the body of the motors is being provided by the 




Page 5 of 9



NRDA 

V. HVAC 

The general character and the scope of work to be carried out under this contract 

are illustrated in Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities. The Contractor 

shall carry out and complete the said work under this contract in every respect in 

conformity with the contract documents and with the direction of and to the 

satisfaction of the Engineer in charge. The contractor shall furnish all labour, 

materials and equipment (except those to be supplied by the Owner) as listed under 

Schedule of Quantities and specified otherwise, transportation and incidental 

necessary for supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete air 

conditioning system as described in the Specifications and as shown on the 

drawings. This also includes any material, equipment, appliances and incidental 

work not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings / Documents as 

being furnished or installed, but which are necessary and customary to be 

performed under this contract. The central Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning 

(HVAC) system shall comprise of following: 

a. VRV Systems 

b. Air-cooling system 

c. Indoor units 

d. Motor control centres, Wiring and ear thing from MCC panels to various air 

conditioning equipment, control wiring and interlocking. 

e. Refrigerant & condensate drain piping inclusive of all valves and fittings. 

f. Sheet metal ducts inclusive of external insulation, acoustic lining, canvas 

connections, volume control dampers and smoke dampers as required, 

Supply and return air registers and diffusers. 

g. Insulation of pipes ducts. 

h. Automatic controls and instruments. 

i. Vibration isolators for all HVAC equipment. 

j. Wiring and ear thing from MCC panels to various refrigeration, air 

conditioning and mechanical ventilation equipment, control wiring and 

interlocking. 

k. Balancing, testing and commissioning of the entire HVAC and mechanical 

ventilation installation. 

l. Test reports, list of recommended spares, as-installed drawings, operation 

and maintenance manual for the entire HVAC installation. 

m. Training of Customer’s Staff. 

12. Project Execution and Management: The Contractor shall ensure that senior planning 

and erection personnel from his organization are assigned exclusively for this project. 

They shall have minimum experience in this type of installation as detailed in the 

document. The Contractor shall appoint one Project manager. He shall be assisted on 

full time basis by erection engineers & supervisors. The entire staff shall be posted at 

site on full time basis. 

The project management shall be through modern technique. The Contractor’s office at 

site shall be fully equipped with fax, modem, computers, plotter etc. Erection engineer 

and supervisors shall be provided with mobile communication system so that they can 

always be reached. 



Page 6 of 9



NRDA 

For quality control & monitoring of workmanship, contractor will establish full fledge 

laboratory and will assign at least one full-time engineer with minimum 5 years 

relevant experience, who would be exclusively responsible for ensuring strict quality 

control, adherence to specifications and ensuring top class workmanship for the air 

conditioning installation. 

The Contractor shall arrange to have mechanized & modern facilities of transporting 

material to place of installation for speedy execution of work. 



Page 7 of 9

NRDA F-1- Schedule-D- Section III- Technical Specification of Works 

Construction of Forest and Water Resource department buildings, North Block at Naya Raipur 

NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

S ection-III 

Technical S pecification of Works 

P art 1- Civil S pecifications 

P art 2-E lectrical S pecifications 

P art 3-Plumbing, Water S upply 

and Fire Fighting S pecifications 

P art 4-HVAC S pecifications



NRDA 

P art 2- E lectrical S pecifications 

CONTENTS 

. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 

. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 

. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

. LIST OF ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

. SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES 



Page | 1 of 174


Construction of Forest and Water Resources department buildings, North Block at Naya Raipur 

NRDA 

GENERAL SPECIFICATION 

1. Scope 

In general, the contractor shall supply, store, erect test and commission all the equipment 

required for electrical installation. The contractor shall furnish all the materials, labour, 

tools and equipment for electrical work, as shown in the accompanying drawings and in the 

bill of quantities and specifications hereinafter described. 

2. Contractor 

The contractor shall be a licensed electrical contractor, possessing a valid electrical contractor's 

licence, in the state, employing licensed supervisors and skilled workers having valid permits as per 

the regulation of Indian Electricity Rules and Local Electrical Inspector's requirements. 

3. Definitions. 

The following abbreviations used in the bill of quantities, specifications and drawings 

represent : 

ABCB 

AC 

ACB 

ACSR 

AL 

Amp./A 

APLSTS 

ASS 

Amb 

B 

BOCB 

BS 

BLC 

Air Blast Circuit Breaker- 

Alternating Current 

Air Circuit Breaker- 

Steel Reinforced Aluminium Conductor 

Aluminium 

Amperes 

Aluminium Conductor, paper insulated lead 

sheated double steel tape armoured and 

serving 

Ammeter Selector Switch 

Amber Colour 

Blue 

Bulk Oil Circuit Breaker 

British Standard 

Black 

Page 2 of 174



NRDA 

BSCP 

CI 

CFS 

CT 

CU 

DB 

DC 

DP 

ELCB 

FDB 

Freq 

G.I. 

HRC 

HT 

HV 

IER 

IDMT 

IC TPN 

IL 

IS 

ISL 

KA 

KV 

KVA 

British Standard Code of Practice 

Cast Iron 

Combined Fuse Switch 

Current Transformer 

Copper 

Distribution Board 

Direct Current 

Double Pole 

Earth Leakage Current Circuit Breaker 

Fuse Distribution Board 

Frequency in Hertz 

Hot Dip Galvanized Iron 

High Rupturing Capacity 

High Tension 

High Voltage 

Indian Electricity Rules 

Inverse Definite Minimum Time 

Iron Clad Triple pole and Neutral 

Indicating Light 

Indian Standards 

Insulator 

Kilo Amperes 

Kilo Volts 

Kilo Volt Amperes 

Page 3 of 174



NRDA 

KVAHR 

KW 

KWH 

KG 

LA 

LT 

LV 

Lts 

MCB 

MCC 

MCCB 

MDB 

MOCB 

MS 

MT 

MV 

MVA 

MW 

N 

NC 

NO 

NV 

OC 

OCB 

Kilo Valt Ampere Hour 

Kilo Watts 

Kilo Watt Hour 

Kilogram 

Lightening Arrestor 

Low Tension 

Low Voltage 

Liters 

Miniature Circuit Breaker 

Motor Control Centre 

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker 

Main Distribution Board 

Minimum Oil Circuit Breaker 

Mild Steel 

Medium Tension 

Medium Voltage 

Mega Volt Ampere 

Mega Watts or Millie Watts 

Neutral 

Normally Closed Contacts 

Normally Open Contacts 

No Volt Coil 

On Coil 

Oil Circuit Breaker 

Page 4 of 174



NRDA 

O/C 

O/L 

OV 

PB 

PCC 

PF 

PI 

PILCA 

PT 

PVC 

Ph 

R 

SDB 

SFU 

SP 

SPN 

ST 

SWG 

TC 

TP 

TPN 

UV 

VA 

VC 

Over Current 

Over Load 

Over Voltage 

Push Button 

Power Control Centre 

Power Factor 

Post Insulator 

Paper Insulated Lead Sheathed Aluminium 

Conductor Cable 

Potential Transformer 

Poly Vinyl Chloride 

Phase 

Red 

Sub Distribution Board 

Switch Fuse Unit 

Single Pole 

Single Pole and Neutral 

Shunt Trip 

Standard Wire Gauge 

Tap Changer 

Triple Pole 

Triple Pole and Neutral 

Under Volt 

Volt Amperes 

Vacuum Contactor 

Page 5 of 174



NRDA 

Volt/V 

VSS 

VT 

XLPE 

Y 

Voltage 

Voltmeter Selector Switch 

Voltage Transformer 

Cross Linked Poly Ethylene 

Yellow 

4. Regulations and Standards 

The Installation shall conform in all respects to Indian Standard Code of Practice for Electrical wiring 

installation IS:732 - 1989. It shall also be in conformity with the current Indian Electricity Rules and 

the Regulations and requirements of the Local Electric Supply Authority is so far as these become 

applicable to the installation. Wherever this specification calls for a higher standard of materials 

and/or workmanship than those required by any of the above regulations, this specification shall 

take precedence over the said regulations and standards. In general, the materials, equipment and 

workmanship not covered by the above shall conform to the following Indian Standards, unless 

otherwise called for. 

IS:335-1993 : Transformer Oil 

IS:371-1979 : Ceiling Roses 

IS:374-1977 : Electrical Ceiling type Fans & Regulators (3rd rev.) 

IS:398(Pt-I)-1976 : Aluminium conductors for overhead transmission purposes. 

IS:692-1973 : Paper insulated lead sheathed cables for electricity supply. 

(Second Revision) 

IS:694-1990 : PVC insulated cables for voltages upto and including 1100 

Volts. 

IS:722 : AC electricity meters. 

IS:731-1971 : Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a 

nominal 

voltage greater than 1000 Volts (Second Revision) 

IS:802 : Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead 

transmission line towers. 

IS:732-1989 : Code of practice for electrical wiring installations. 

IS:933-1989 : Portable chemical foam fire extinguisher, (Third Revision). 

Page 6 of 174



NRDA 

IS:934-1989 : Portable chemical fire extinguisher soda acid type (Third 

Revision). 

IS:1180(Pt-1)-1989 : Three phase distribution trans-formers upto and including 

100 

KVA, 11 KV, outdoor Part-1 Nonsealed type (Second 

Revision). 

IS:1180(Pt-2)-1989 : Three phase distribution trans-formers upto and including 

100 

KVA, 11 KV, outdoor Part-2 sealed type. 

IS:1248 : Directacting Electrical Indicating Analogue Electrical 

Measuring Instruments and their accessories. 

IS:1255-1983 : Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power 

cables (Upto and including 33 KV). 

IS:1293-1988 : 3 pin plugs & sockets. 

IS:1554 (Pt-1)-1988 : PVC insulated (heavy duty) electrical cables Part-1, for 

working voltages upto and including 1100 volts. 

IS:1554 (Pt-2)-1988 : PVC insulated (heavy duty) electro cables Part-2, for 

working 

voltages from 3.3 KV upto and including 11 KV. 

IS:1646-1982 : Code of practice for fire safety of building (General) 

Electrical 

installation (First Revision). 

IS:1651-1991 : Stationery cells and Batteries-Lead Acid Type (with tubular 

positive plates). 

IS:1652-1991 : Stationery cells and Batteries-Lead Acid Type (with planet 

positive plate. 

IS:1653-1972 : Rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring. 

IS:1777-1978 : Industrial Luminaries with metal reflectors. 

IS:1860-1980 : Code of practice for installation, operation and 

maintenance of 

electric passenger and good lifts. 

IS:1866-1983 : Code of practice for maintenance and supervision of 

insulating 

oil in equipment. 

Page 7 of 174



NRDA 

IS:1885-1971 : Electro technical vocabulary. 

IS:1913-1978 : General & safety requirements for Electrical light fittings. 

IS:1944 : Lighting of public through fares. 

IS:2026 (Pt-1)-1977 : Power transformers Part 1 : General (First revision). 

IS:2026 (Pt-2)-1977 : Power transformers Part 2 : Temperature rise (First 

revision). 

IS:2026 (Pt-3)-1981 : Power transformers Part 3 : Insulation level and di-electric test 

(Second revision). 

IS:2026 (Pt-4)-1977 : Power transformers Part 4 : Terminals, marking 

tappings and connections (First revision). 

IS:2032 (Pt-2)-1962 : Graphical symbols used in electro-technology, Pt-2 : 

Kind of current distribution system and methods of 

connections. 


Rotating machine and transformers. 


Generating stations and substations. 


Switchgear and auxiliaries. 

IS:2099-1986 : Bushing for alternating voltages above 1000 Volts. 

IS:2121-1981 (Pt-I) : Conductors & earthwire accessories for overhead power 

lines. 

IS:2165 (Pt-1)-1977 : Insulation co ordination, Part-1 : Phase to earth 

insulation co ordination principle and rules (Second 

revision). 

IS:2165 (Pt-2)-1983 : Insulation co ordination, Part-2 : Phase to phase 

insulation co ordination principle and rules. 

IS:2190-1992 : Code of practice for selection, insulation and maintenance 

of portable first- aid fire extinguishers (Second revision). 

IS:2309-1989 : Code of practice for the protection of building & allied 

structure against lightning. 

Page 8 of 174



NRDA 

IS:2312-1967 : Propeller type AC ventilating fans. 

IS:2486 : Specification for insulator fittings for overhead power 

lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 Volt, 

Part-1 : General requirements and tests. 

IS:2544-1973 : Porcelain post insulators for system with nominal 

Voltages greater than 1000 Volts (First revision). 

IS:2551-1982 : Danger notice plates. 

IS:2667-1988 : Rigid Steel Conduit fittings. 

IS:2675-1983: 

Specifications for enclosed distri-butions for voltages not 

exceeding 1000 V. 

IS:2705 (Pt-1)-1992 : Current transformers, Part 1 : General requirements. 

IS:2705 (Pt-2)-1992 : Current transformers, Part 2 : Measuring current 

transformers. 

IS:2705 (Pt-3)-1992 : Current transformers, Part 3 : Pro-tective current 

transformers. 

IS:2705 (Pt-4)-1992: 

Current transformers, Part 4 : pro-tective current 

transformers for special purpose applications. 

IS:2834-1986 : Shunt capacitors for power system. 

IS:3034-1993 

Code of practice for fire safety of industrial building, 

electrical generating and distributing stations (First 

revision). 

IS:3043-1987 : Code of practice for earthing. 

IS:3070- (Pt-1)-1985: 

Lightning arrestors for alternating current systems, Part-1 

:Non-linear resistor type lightning arrestors (First revision). 

IS:3070- (Pt-2)-1993: Lightning arrestors for alternating current systems, Part-2 : 

Metal oxide lightning arresters without gaps. 

IS:3151-1982 : Earthing transformers. 

IS:3156 (Pt-1)-1992 : Voltage transformers, Part-1 : General requirements. 

IS:3156 (Pt-2)-1992 : Voltage transformers, Part-2 : Measuring voltage 

transformers. 

Page 9 of 174



NRDA 

IS:3156 (Pt-3)-1992: Voltage transformers, Part-3 : Pro-tective voltage 

transformers. 

IS:3156 (Pt-4)-1978 : Voltage transformers, Part-4 : Capacitor voltage 

transformers. 

IS:3231-1965 : Electrical relays for power system protection. 

IS:3427-1969 : Metal enclosed switchgears and Control gear for voltage above 

1000 V but not exceeding 11000 volts. 

IS:3452 : 

Toggle switches. 

IS:3646 : Principles for good lightning and aspects of designs, code of 

practice. 

IS:3716-1978 : Application guide for insulation co ordination. 

IS:3837-1976 : Specifications for accessories for rigid steel conduit for 

electrical wiring. 

IS:3842 : 

IS:3854 : 

Application guide for electrical relays for AC systems. 

Domestic Switches 

IS:4004-1985 : Application guide for surge arrestors with series gap & non 

linear resistor for AC system. 

IS:4146-1983 : Application guide for voltage transformers. 

IS:4201-1983 : Application guide for current transformers. 

IS:4237-1982 : Genral requirements of switchgear and control gear for 

voltages below 1000 V AC or 1200 VDC. 

IS:4648-1968 : Guide for electrical layout in residential buildings. 

IS:5082-1981 : Wrought Aluminium & aluminium alloy bars, rods tubes and 

section for electrical purposes. 

IS:5133 (Pt-1)-1969 

IS:5133 (Pt-2)-1969 

:Boxes for the enclosure of Electrical accessories steel & CI 

boxes. 

:Boxes for the enclosure of Electrical accessories : Boxes made 

of insulating material. 

IS:5216-1982 : Guide for safety procedures & practice in electrical work. 

Page 10 of 174



NRDA 

IS:5517 : Derating of engines. 

IS:5547-1983 : Application guide for capacitor voltage transformers. 

IS:5553 (Pt-2)-1989 

:Shunt reactors. 

IS:5561-1970 : Electrical power connectors. 

IS:5569-1970 : Cork and Collulose base jointing material. 

IS:5571-1979 : Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardus area. 

IS:5578 : Guide for marking of insulated conductors. 

IS:5613-1985 : Code of practice for design installation and maintenance of 

overhead power lines. 

IS:5831-1970 : PVC insulation and sheath of electrical cables. 

IS:6600 : Guide for loading of oil in oil immersed transformers. 

IS:6665 : Code of practice for Industrial lighting. 

IS:6875 : Control switches. 

IS:7098 : Crossed links polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables. 

IS:7752-1975 : Guide for improvement of power factor in consumer 

installation. 

IS:8084-1976 : Interconnecting bus bars for AC voltage. 

IS:8437-1977 : Guide on effects of currents passing through human body. 

IS:8623 : 

IS:9224 : 

IS:9249-1979 (Pt-I) 

IS:9385 : 

Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies. 

Low voltage fuses. 

:Safety requirement for indicating and recording electrical 

measuring instruments and their accessories : 

Part-I common safety requirements. 

High Voltage fuses. 

IS:9921 : 

Alternating current disconnectors (isolators and earthing 

switches for voltages above 1000 volt). 

Part-1 1981 : General & Definitions. 

Page 11 of 174



NRDA 

Part-2 1982 : Rating. 

Part-3 1982 : Design & construction. 

Part-4 1985 : Type tests & routine tests. 

Part-5 1985 : Information to be given with 

tenders, enquiries & orders. 

IS:10000 : Method of tests for I.C.Engines. 

IS:10118 : Switchgear and controgear selection, installation and 

maintenance code app. of practice. 

Part-1 1982 : General 

Part-2 1982 : Selection 

Part-3 1982 : Installation 

Part-4 1982 : Maintenance 

IS:10028 : Code of practice for installation and maintenance of 

transformers (First revision). 

IS:10136-1982: Code of practice for selection of disc insulators fittings for highest system voltages 

of 72.5 KV & above. 

IS:10162-1982 : 

Spacers & spacer dampers for twin horizontal bundle 

conductor. 

IS:10322 : Luminaries. 

IS:10561-1983 

Application guide for power transformers. 

IS:11171-1985 : Dry type transformers power. 

IS:11353-1994 

Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of 

conductors and apparatus terminals. 

IS:13118 : High voltage AC circuit breakers. 

IS:13234 : Guide for short circuit current calculations in 3 phase AC 

system. 

IS:13703 : Low voltage fuses. 

IS:13947 : Low voltage switchgear and control gear. 

ANSI/IEEE-80-1986 : IEEE Guide for safety in AC substation Grounding. 

Page 12 of 174



NRDA 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

• HIGH TENSION CABLES 

• HIGH TENSION CONTROL PANELS 

• HIGH TENSION CIRCUIT BREAKER 

• POWER TRANSFORMERS 

• MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES 

• MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CONTROL CENTRES AND SWITCH BOARD PANELS 

• MEDIUM VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER 

• MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER 

• ISOLATORS, SWITCH FUSE UNITS AND FUSES 

• POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT SYSTEM 

• METERING, INSTRUMENTATION AND PROTECTION 

• MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FOR POWER AND LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION 

• EARTHING FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS 

• LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

• STREET LIGHTING 

• FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM 

• SECURITY SURVELLIANCE (CCTV) 

• PUBLIC ADDRESS & MUSIC SYSTEM 

Page 13 of 174



NRDA 

B. HIGH TENSION CABLES 

1. General 

The high tension cables used in this assignment shall be three core aluminum conductors. The 

conductor of the cable will be made from multistranding of round wires of high purity, high 

conductivity, electrical grade aluminium. The cables shall confirm to IS: 7098 (latest edition) and 

the following details. 

2. Rating 

The cables shall be rated for use an earthed 33 KV system and should stand 17 KV for 5 minutes with 

insulation break. 

3. Core identification 

Cores shall be identified by numbers 1, 2 & 3 printed on the insulating. 

4.a) 

Insulation 

The cable will have high quality cross linked Poly Urethane, unfilled compound insulation extruded 

over the conductor by a continuous vulcanizing process having arrangement for chemical cross linking 

of the compound. 

b) Shielding 

To avoid electrical point stresses the conductor and the outer surface of the insulation layer should 

be shielded by a semi-conducting compound. 

c) Inner Sheathing 

The insulated conductor and the non hydroscopic gap fillers will be enveloped in either an extruded 

layer of compound . 

d) Aumouring 

Over the sheath a layer of hot dipped galvanised steel strips will be laid to provide the armouring to 

the cable. To avoid the armour heating due to induced currents the armouring should be of non 

magnetic metal like aluminium or copper alloys in case of single core cables. 

e) Outer Shielding 

To protect and fix the armouring and to make the handling easy a tough black coloured stabilized 

weather resisting grade of PVC is to be extruded over the cable. 

5. Current Rating: 

The current rating shall be based on the following conditions. 

Page 14 of 174



NRDA 

a) Max. Conductor temperature for continuous operation : 90°C 

b) Ambient Air temperature : 30°C 

c) Ground temperature : 20°C 

d) Depth of laying : 900mm 

e) Thermal resistivity of soil : 150°C cm/W 

6. Short Circuit Ratings 

Short Circuit ratings for the cables shall be as per IS. However, the rating shall be based on the 

following : 

a) Max. Conductor for temp under full load conditions : 90°C 

b) Max. S.C. Conductor temp : 250°C 

7. Selection of Cables 

The cables have been selected considering the following: 

a) Max. Connected load 

b) Ambient temperature 

c) Grouping of cables 

d) Short-circuit level 

The Contractor shall, however, recheck the sizes before the cables are ordered, installed and 

connected to the service. 

8. Storing, Laying and Joining 

The cables will be laid under ground or in trenches away from the L.T. cables, Telephone cable and 

any other control cables to minimise the interference. The H.T cable trenches, cable trays etc. will 

not be shared by other cables. The termination of the H.T cables will be done with only subscribed 

heat shrink cable termination system. The other cable storing, laying and joining procedures are 

same as that for the L.T cables stated elsewhere. 

9. Testing 

Insulation resistance of both sections of the cables to be jointed should be checked by a 2500 V 

meggar. 

Page 15 of 174



NRDA 

H.T. cables shall be pressure tested to withstand a voltage of 17 KV for 5 minutes after the jointing 

is completed. However, the test voltage and duration of test shall be in conformity with local 

standards. Before carrying out the DC high voltage test, the cable shall be laid in its final position 

with all the end termination’s kept unfinished so that substation equipment are not subjected to 

the test pressure. 

C. HIGH TENSION CONTROL PANELS: 

1. General 

These specifications covers the detailed requirements for supply, installation, testing and 

commissioning of high tension panel. High tension panels (generally termed as HT panels) shall be 

in metal clad cubicle pattern, floor mounting, free standing type, totally enclosed dust and vermin 

proof design. The panel shall be of single tier design and shall be provided with extension facility. 

Panel shall generally conform to the requirements of relevant IS standards/BS standards. The HT 

panel board shall be designed such that the switchgear instrument relays bus bars small wiring etc. 

are arranged and mounted with due consideration for the following : 

. Facility for inspection, maintenance and repairs, testing terminals and terminal boards for case of 

external connection. 

. Minimum noise and vibrations. 

. Risk of accidental short circuits and open circuits. 

. Secured and vibration proof connections for power and control circuits. 

. Risk of accidental contact and danger personnel due to live connections. 

2. Construction 

The HT panel confirming to Pub 56 (1987) IS 13118:1991. shall be of robust design with adequate 

bracing’s for structural rigidity. Separate compartments shall preferably be provided for circuit 

breakers, bus bars and cable boxes which will be fully and effectively segregated from one another 

so that fault in any one compartment should not cause damage to equipment in any other 

compartment. 

The housing shall be of welded construction to ensure compact and rigid structure presenting a neat 

and pleasing appearance and to ensure a very rigid structure without unnecessary weight. The 

stationary housing shall be so designed as to ensure accurate location of withdrawal truck on which 

CB is mounted. The panel shall be machined pressed with punched opening for meters and 

instruments etc. The sheet steel and the steel sections shall before fabrications, be given a rigorous 

rust proofing treatment comprising of alkaline decreasing, de-scaling in dilute sulphuric acid 

solution and a recognised phosphating process. The steel work shall then be given two coats or red 

oxide prier before final finishing is given. 

All the live parts of the panel shall be insulated and enclosed in an earthed metal enclosure or 

shrouded to prevent accidental contact when the withdrawable truck is removed. The panels shall 

Page 16 of 174



NRDA 

be completely dust and vermin proof with suitable screens being provide for all ventilating openings 

to prevent insects, rodents etc. from entering the panel. All meters, instruments, relays, control 

push buttons/ switches/ handles etc. shall be mounted on the front side of the panel and shall be 

visible with doors in closed position, the doors shall be hinged with bent edges and square rubber 

gaskets. All cable entries shall be from the bottom of the panel on the rear side. Adequate space 

and clamping arrangement shall be provided for cable termination’s. 

3. Dimensions 

HT panel dimensions shall not exceed the dimensions shown on the drawings. Panels arranged side 

by side shall have same height and depth. Standard width of the panel shall preferably be 750 mm 

and the height shall not exceed 2500 mm inclusive of potential transformers. 

4. Bus Bars 

The bus bars shall be suitable for 3 wire 33000 volts, 50 Hz, system. The bus bars shall be made of 

high conductivity electrolytic copper strips conforming to relevant Indian Standards or BS:159. The 

bus bars shall have uniform cross section throughout. The bus bars shall be capable of carrying the 

rated current continuously, AT 33 KV. The bus bars shall be designed to withstand arise of 45°C 

above the ambient temperature. 

The switch boards shall be single bus bar pattern with air insulated encapsulated bus bars housed in 

a separate compartment, segregated from other compartments. Inspection cover shall be provided 

to facilitate inspection of bus bar assemble and for cleaning. In case of access to the bus bars by 

removing the inspection covers, no dismantling of units wiring etc. shall be necessary. Each unit 

chamber shall be separated from adjacent units by insulating barriers. Each bus bar shall be 

provided with adequate thickness of resin cast insulation throughout the length except at ends for 

facility of joints. 

Bus bars shall be supported by cast epoxy insulators designed to withstand full short circuit current 

for 3 seconds. Access to the bus bar chamber shall be provided from the rear of the instrument 

panel so that cleaning and inspection could be able to withstand thermal and magnetic stresses due 

to system short circuits. 

5. Earthing 

The earthing of the breaker tank and moving portion shall be so arranged that the earthing of the 

non-current carrying structure to the frame earth bar is completed well before the main circuit 

breaker plugs enter the fixed housing sockets. 

HT panels shall be provided with an aluminium earth bus running through out the length of the 

panel. Suitable stationary earthing contacts shall be provided for the earthing the body of the 

circuit breaker when the same is plugged in. Sufficient number of star washers at the joints to 

achieve earth continuity between the sheet metal parts of the panel and the earth bus shall be 

provided. 

6. Mountings 

Page 17 of 174



NRDA 

HT Panel shall have suitable compartments for prescribed circuit breaker and its withdrawable 

truck. Suitable rails shall be provided for inside the housing for the wheels of the truck. The circuit 

breaker shall be mounted such that it is easily accessible from the front of the panel. All 

instruments and meters shall be mounted flush on the front of the panels above the circuit breaker. 

Potential transformer, shall be mounted on the rear of the HT Panel. 

7. Interlocking and safety arrangements 

HT panel shall be provided with the following interlocking and safety arrangement. 

i) The breaker cannot be plugged in unless it is òff'. 

ii) The breaker cannot be drawn out when it is òn'. 

iii) The access to bus bar is prevented by automatic shutters when breaker is removed. 

iv) The circuit breaker cannot be put into service without completing the protective electrical and 

earth circuits. 

v) A safety catch to ensure that the movement of the breaker as it is withdrawn, is checked before it 

is completely out of the panel shall be provided. 

8. Shutter Gear 

Suitable shutter gear shall be provided for shrouding of bus bar and feeder orifices. These shutters 

shall be automatic in operation. Suitable hinged shutters with padlocking arrangement shall also be 

provided in addition to the automatic shutters. 

9. Protection & Instrumentation, metering & indication 

CURRENT TRANSFORMER 

a) General Requirements 

Accommodation shall be provided in the circuit breaker panel to mount 2 sets of CT's one reserved 

for protection and the other for metering/instrumentation purposes. Access to the CT's for cleaning 

testing or changing shall be from the front back or top of the panel. 

b) Rating 

Dual ratio CTs suitable burden (but not less than 15 VA burden) shall be preferred with 5 amps 

secondaries. The ratio shall normally be one of the following specified : 

. 50/25/5 

The CTs shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. The design and construction shall be robust to 

withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be 

brought out suitably to a terminal block which shall be easily accessible for testing and terminal 

connections. The protection CTs shall be of accuracy class 15 P 10 of IS : 2705 - Part III-1992. 

The metering CTs shall conform to the metering ratio and accuracy class 0.5 of IS 2705. 

10. Voltage Transformer 

Page 18 of 174



NRDA 

General Requirements 

A voltage transformer of burden not less than 100 VA and of proper ratio as specified shall be plug 

type and shall be suitable for easy withdrawal. HRC fuses shall be provided on both HV and LV 

sides. Inter-lock shall be provided to prevent access to live HV parts when the transformer is with 

drawn. The transformer shall be plug in type and shall be suitable for easy manual movement on 

guide rails. 

PROTECTION AND TRIPPING ARRANGEMENT- STATIC WITH RS485 

Protection 

The protection and tripping arrangement of circuit breaker shall be the following : 

. 2 O/C and 1 E/F element with IDMT relays 

Relays 

Over current relays shall have adjustable setting for current from 50% to 200% and earth fault from 

10% to 40%. The IDMT relays shall have 15/1 characteristics. They should be of manual reset type. 

All relays shall have a flag indicator which will indicate operation for each function. It shall be 

possible to reset it only by manual operation. The number and types of relays shall be as specified. 

11. Metering Instrument Panel Accessories 

. Metering 

Energy metering shall be done either on the incomers or on the feeders as specified in schedule. 

. Instrument Panel 

The Instrument panel shall from part of the housing. Relays, meters and instruments shall be 

mounted as per general arrangement drawings to be submitted by the tenderer. They shall be 

preferably of flush mounting type. 

. Instrumentation 

. A 96 Sq. mm voltmeter of class 1.5 accuracy as per IS:1248 shall be provided at each 

incomer panel, with selector switch. The instrument shall be calibrated for the ranges specified. 

. Energy meters of class 1.0 conforming to IS:722 (Part IX) and power factor meter (96 Sq. 

mm) of class 1.5 accuracy conforming to IS : 1248 - 1968 shall be provided, if specified. 

. Ammeter 96 Sq. mm of specified range to class 1.5 accuracy as per IS:1248 shall be 

provided at both incomer and outgoing panels alongwith necessary selector switches. 

. Trivector meter suitable for 3 phase 3 wire unbalanced KVA, integrated over a period of 30 

minutes. 

Page 19 of 174



NRDA 

The board assembly shall also take care of the following requirements : 

Lamp indication shall be provided to indicate ON/ OFF (By red/green respectively) of switchgear. 

Healthy trip supply shall be indicated by clear lamp. 

Separate fuses shall be provided for lamps heaters and voltmeters, other instrumentation etc. on 

each panel. 

Anti-condensation space heaters suitable for each panel if specified. Supply and control 

equipment for the above shall be provided by the tenderer. 

12. Control Wiring 

All control, auxiliary and small wiring shall be carried out with stranded copper conductor PVC 

insulated cables. Wiring shall be colour coded and neatly laid out in bunches and firmly fastened to 

the steel members of the panel. All potential circuits shall be protected by HRC fuses near the tapoff 

points from the main connections. The termination’s shall be crimped with proper sockets. All 

the conductors shall be provided with printed PVC ferrules at both ends for easy identification. 

Suitable terminal blocks of reputed make shall be provided for terminating the control, auxiliary and 

small wiring and are same as described in the section "Medium Voltage Power Control Centres and 

Switch board panels" stated elsewhere. 

13. Surface treatment 

All sheet metal accessories and components of HT switchboard enclosure shall be thoroughly 

cleaned, decreased, de-rusted and hot dip phosphatised before a cot of red oxide primer is applied. 

The panel shall then be stove enamelled to the required final finish. The interior surfaces of the 

panel shall be off-white shade an the exterior shall be of battleship grey on any other approved 

shade. 

14. Name plates 

15. Testing 

The name plate shall be as per Èquipment Schedule-A'. 

The high tension panel shall be tested at factory after assembling of all components. The tests shall 

be conducted as BS:116 or ASTA Standards. The original test certificate shall be submitted alongwith 

the panel. The following tests shall be conducted. 

a) Impulse withstand test 

b) One minute power frequency withstand test. 

c) Breaking capacity and making capacity for circuit breakers. 

d) Insulation resistance test for all auxiliary and secondary wiring. 

16. Storing, Erection and Commissioning 

Page 20 of 174



NRDA 

a) Storing 

The high tension panels shall be stored in a well ventilated, dry place. Suitable polythene covers 

shall be provided for necessary protection against ingress of moisture. 

b) Erection 

HT Panel shall be installed on suitable foundation. The foundation shall be as per the dimensions 

supplied by the panel manufacturer. The foundation shall be flat and level. Suitable MS channel 

shall be embedded in foundation on which the panel can be directly installed. The panel shall be 

properly aligned and bolted to the foundation by at least four bolts. The cable shall be terminated 

into the bottom plate. The panel shall be bonded to the earth by riveting earthing leads to the 

panel earth bus. 

The installation work shall cover assembly of panels lining up grouting the units etc. In case of multi 

panel switch boards after connecting up the bus bar all joints shall be insulated with HV, insulation 

tape or with approved insulation compound. Circuit breakers tank will be filled up with tested oil 

upto the mark indicated after cleaning. A common earth bar shall be run at the back of the switch 

board connecting all the sections for connecting the frame earth system. All protection indicating 

and metering connections and wires shall be completed. Where trip supply battery is installed the 

unit shall be commissioned by completing initial charging of the batteries. All relays instruments 

and meter shall be mounted and connected with appropriate wiring. Calibration checks of units as 

necessary and required by the licensee like CT and VT energy meters etc. shall be completed before 

pre- commissioning checks are undertaken. 

c) Pre-commission Tests and commissioning 

The panel shall be commissioned only after the successful completion of the following tests. The 

tests shall be conducted in the presence of Consultants/Owner's representative. 

i) All the main and auxiliary bus bar connections shall be checked and tightened. 

ii) 

iii) 

All wiring termination and bus bar joints shall be checked and tightened. 

Wiring shall be checked to ensure that it is according to the drawings. 

a) All medium and low voltage auxiliary wiring and secondary wiring shall be tested for insulation 

resistance . 

b) Check the operation of circuit breakers by manual switching of ÒN' & ÒFF' positions and check 

the operation of mechanical indicators. 

c) Suitable injection tests shall be applied to all the measuring instruments to establish the 

correctness and accuracy of calibration and working order. 

d) All relays and protective devices shall be tested for correctness of settings and operation by 

introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit. 

Page 21 of 174



NRDA 

D. HIGH TENSION CIRCUIT BREAKER 

1. Circuit Breaker 

The circuit breaker panel shall be complete with the following: 

i. Raising and lowering mechanism. 

ii. 

iii. 

iv. 

Isolation plugs and sockets. 

Mechanical inter-locks and safety shutters with pad locking facility. 

Mechanical ON/OFF indicator. 

v. 6 No. and 6 NC Auxiliary contacts rated at 10 amps and 30 V DC directly operated by the 

circuit breaker. 

vi. First filling filtered and tested oil . 

vii. 

viii. 

Anti-condensation space heaters suitable for operation on 240 V single phase, 50 Hz AC 

for each panel where specified. 

Tripping Arrangement : As specified in schedule. 

. Type 

The circuit breaker shall be oil type with cross jet arc control devices, for the rating specified. The 

circuit breaker shall be of vertical isolation horizontal draw out pattern. 

. Breaker Truck 

The breaker carriage shall be fabricated from steel, providing a sturdy vehicle for the circuit 

breaker and its operating and tripping mechanisms. The carriage shall be mounted on wheels, 

moving on guides, designed to align correctly and allow easy movement of the circuit breaker and 

for removing the carriage for inspection and maintenance purposes. The carriage shall have the 

winding mechanism for isolating the breaker from the bus bars and cable spouts. 

The raising and lowering mechanism shall be provided with facility for pad locking at any 

position namely "Service","Test" and "Fully Isolated". It shall be possible for testing the circuit 

breaker for its operation without energising the power circuit in the "Testing" position. 

. Breaker Tank 

The circuit breaker tank shall be fabricated of steel plate designed to withstand internal 

pressures resulting from fault clearance and shall be suitably vented at the top. The joint between 

the tank and the top plate shall be grooved and tongued to be oil and gas light and shall be 

secured by short high tensile steel bolts. 

Page 22 of 174



NRDA 

. General Features 

The contacts shall be double break design having ample area and contact pressure to carry the 

rated as well as short time current without excessive temperature rise. The contacts shall be 

adjustable for wear and easily replaceable. Main contact shall open before and close after, the 

arching contacts. 

. Rating 

The circuit breakers shall be continuously rated as specified with a minimum of 400 amps. with 

voltage rating and breaking capacity as specified. 

. Operating Mechanism 

The operating mechanism shall "Spring charged manually closed" type. The operating mechanism 

shall be trip free. 

2. Bus Bar Section 

. General Requirements 

Bus bars shall be of hard drawn, high conductivity electrolytic copper, having uniform cross section 

throughout its length and capable of carrying rated current, at 33 KV continuously. Bus bars 

including their supports and connections shall be able to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses 

during the system short circuits. Bus bars should be able to withstand short circuit current up to 25 

KA for 3 seconds. 

The bus bars shall be designed to withstand a temperature rise of 45°C above the ambient 

temperature. Bus bars shall be encased within the cubicle and shall be air insulated and covered 

with PVC tapes. Bus bars shall be supported on suitable insulating material at sufficiently close 

interval to prevent bus bar sag and to effectively withstand electro mechanical stresses in the event 

of short circuit. 

Inter connections from bus bar to circuit breakers and cable boxes shall be of hard drawn copper 

conductor of uniform cross section and shall be provided with clamped joints or bolted joints. As far 

as possible, drilling of holes in bus bar shall be avoided. All the joints and clamps shall be tinned. 

3. Cable Boxes 

Cable boxes shall be situated in a compartment at the rear side of the housing as specified. 

Cable boxes shall be complete with brass suitable for XLPE cables as specified and with initial fill of 

compound. 

4. D.C. Trip Supply 

. General 

Trip supply battery unit shall be suitable for 30 V DC and of suitable ampere hour rating as specified 

complete with necessary boost/trickle charge arrangement. 

Page 23 of 174



NRDA 

The battery shall conform to IS : 1652 specification for stationary cells and batteries lead-acid-type. 

The battery charger unit will be required to provide a reliable DC supply for circuit breaker 

operation and control comprising a number of cells, required for the output voltage(nominal cell 

voltage 2 volts). The battery containers shall be of hard rubber or polystyrene or glass. The 

battery shall be complete with inter-cell connectors, acid level indicating floats, vent plugs, cell and 

stand insulators etc. 

. Construction 

The battery cells and charging equipment may be housed in a common sheet steel enclosure. Sheet 

steel enclosed for battery charger unit shall be free standing, floor mounted, totally enclosed, dustdamp-vermin 

protected, suitable for indoor location. Compartments for batteries and charging 

equipment shall be fully segregated with a sheet steel barrier. Battery compartment shall be fully 

ventilated. All metal parts shall be protected with anti-corrosive paint and also earthed with two 

earth leads equivalent to 4.00mm. dia. G.I wire. 

. Electric Supply for Rectifier 

Electric supply for the rectifier units shall be 240 V Single phase, 50 HZ AC. Voltage and frequency 

shall be + 5% and +3% respectively. Output of the rectifier unit shall be suitable for the battery 

voltage. 

. Change Over Arrangements 

In the event of failure of AC supply to the charger the load shall be transferred automatically to 

the battery and when the supply is restored, the trickle charger shall take over automatically, 

where specifically called for, change over from Trickle Charge to Boost Charge and vice-versa 

may be made automatic with a provision for manual operation also. 

. Rating and Capacity 

The Ampere hour capacity of the battery shall be suitable for the total load and this should not be 

less than 100 AH in any case. 

. Functional Requirements 

The battery will normally be in parallel with a constant voltage trickle charger of adequate 

capacity to meet the continuous loads and to keep the battery in fully charged conditions, under 

all the specified conditions of operations including variations in system voltage and frequency. 

A boost charger shall be provided for initial charging and re-charging the batteries when they are in 

run down condition. A selector switch for Auto/Manual Operation with one switch for changing 

over from Trickle Charge to Boost Charge shall also be provided. 

Page 24 of 174



NRDA 

When the battery is on 'Boost charge' the tapping from an intermediate cell will be brought out to 

the load bus, through a blocking rectifier or suitable means to maintain constant voltage supply 

without any break in continuity of supply. 

. Equipment Details 

The details of equipment on battery charger unit shall be as under and as specified: 

i 

ii. 

iii. 

iv. 

Main isolator, quick make, quick break type with HRC fuses for AC input of suitable rating. 

Pilot lamps with Ballast Resister, indicating lamp `Healthy Mains' - red. 

Boost charge with Ballast Resister indicating lamp - Blue. 

Trickle charge with Ballast Resister indicating lamp-white. 

v. Moving coil voltmeter with selector switch to measure voltage across boost charger and Trickle 

charger. 

vi. 

vii. 

viii. 

ix. 

Moving coil Ammeter with shunt for output current. 

Moving coil off-set zero ammeter for charge/ discharge current of the battery. 

Boost charger unit complete with main isolator HRC fuses, double wound transformer, full 

wave bridge rectifier stepless charging current control and other associated equipment. 

Trickle charger unit, generally as above with a stepless control for output voltage. 

x. Automatic control for boost/trickle charging. 

xi. 

xii. 

xiii. 

xiv. 

xv. 

xvi. 

xvii. 

xviii. 

Selector switch for auto/manual operation, for boost charger and trickle charge. 

Isolator quick make, quick break, load break type with two HRC fuses for DC output. 

Necessary fine wiring, inter-connections HRC fuses for potential and power circuits, labels etc. 

Terminal blocks for connection of all external wiring to the unit. Terminals of AC and DC systems 

and those operating at different voltage shall be segregated for supply. 

Charger failure alarm relay with 1 No and 1 NC contacts wired upto terminal blocks on DC output 

side, with blocking diodes. 

Removable gland plate at bottom for termination of all external cables connected to the unit. 

Set of lead acid stationaly battery cells rated to suit the load requirements complete with inter 

row, inter tier connections, supports, and ancillaries. The following accessories shall be 

supplied along with the battery: 

Required quantity of electrolyte required for first filling of the battery set with 10% extra. 

Page 25 of 174



NRDA 

xix. 

xx. 

xxi. 

xxii. 

xxiii. 

Hydrometer syringe type, suitable for specific gravity reading of the electrolyte. 

Thermometer with specific gravity corrections scale. 

Centre zero cell testing voltmeter,range 3-0-3V. 

Special tools required for installation and maintenance. 

Any other accessories considered necessary. 

1.1.1.1 E POWER TRANSFORMERS 

1. Scope 

This section covers the detailed requirements regarding supply, installation, testing, commissioning 

and handling overs of 33 KV/433 V transformer required for the substation. 

2. General 

The transformers shall comply with the following Indian Standards as amended upto date ; 

1. IS 2026 - Part I to V power transformers. 

2. IS 335 - Transformer oil. 

3. IS 10028 - Installation and Maintenance of Transformer. 

4. IS 2099 - Bushings. 

5. IS 2705 - Current Transformer. 

6. IS 6600 - Guide for loading of oil immersed transformer. 

3. System Parameters 

The transformers shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated KVA under the following system 

conditions 

a) Nominal Voltage (Primary) : 11000 Volts 

b) Max. Voltage (Primary) : 12000 Volts 

c) Frequency : 50 HZ 

d) Frequency variation : ± 5% of the nominal value 

e) The voltage variation : ± 10% of the rated value 

f) Secondary voltage : 433 Volts 

Page 26 of 174



NRDA 

g) Transformers shall be able to withstand a short circuit as per relevant standard between 

phases or between phase to ground with full voltage maintained at the other side of the 

transformer without any injury to the transformer. The duration of the short circuit shall 

be as called for in the relevant standard IS:2026 and IS:11171. 


. Enclosure 

Enclosure shall be made from good commercial grade carbon steel of adequate thickness, 

electrically welded and properly cleaned inside and outside. All seams shall be properly welded to 

withstand the required impact without damage or distortion. The welding joints shall be stress 

relieved. The enclosure shall be rigid so as to resist any damage/deformation due to mechanical 

shock during transportation. 

The enclosure cover shall be fixed to the enclosure with weatherproof non deteriorating, resilient 

gasket in between for complete tightness. All access holes, manholes/ inspection holes shall be 

designed to prevent any ingress of moisture into the enclosure. Suitable lifting lugs, jacking pads, 

pulling lugs shall be provided to facilitate movement of the transformer. At least two numbers 

earthing bolts shall be provided for connection to the earth. 

b. Tanks and Radiators 

Tanks shall be of M.S plates and structurals, electrically welded. The construction shall be robust 

and substantial, suitable for road/rail transport and to withstand vibration. Radiator tubes 

shall be electrical resistance welded type, round or elliptical or rectangular. They may be welded 

to the transformer tank or in case of very large sizes to separate detachable radiator banks 

connected through intermediate leak proof valves. Detachable radiator banks shall have top and 

bottom headers with flanged connections with drain and vent fittings. Tanks shall be provided 

with lifting lugs and jacking lugs. Inspection hole with cover should also be provided for large 

transformers. Oil conservators shall be mounted on brackets attached to the top cover on tank. 

Dimensions of the conservator shall be such as to allow change in volume of oil due to change in 

temperature from 10°C to 95°C. 

Tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned, decreased and sand blasted inside and outside. A coat of rust 

resisting primer shall immediately be given on outside surface.Inside surface shall be painted with 

oil resistance enamel paint. Tank and radiators shall be hydraulically pressure tested. In case of 

transformer of 500 KVA and above tanks shall also be tested for full vacuum. The procedure for 

testing shall be as follows: 

I. Vacuum Test 

The tanks designed for all vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/Sqm (25 mm 

of HG) for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been 

released shall not exceed the value specified in Table A without affecting the performance of 

the transformer. 

II Pressure Test 

Page 27 of 174



NRDA 

When specified one transformer tank of each size together with its radiators, conservator vessel 

and other fittings shall be subjected to a pressure corresponding to twice the normal head of oil 

or to the normal pressure plus 35 KN/Sqm (0.35 kg/sq.cm) whichever is lower measured at the 

base of the tank and will be maintained for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates 

after the excess pressure has been released shall not exceed the figure specified in table A. 

TABLE À' 

Horizontal length of Permanent deflection 

flat plate(In mm) 

(In mm) 

Upto and including 750 5.0 

750 to 1250 6.5 

1251 to 1750 8.0 

1751 to 2000 9.5 

2001 to 2250 11.0 

2251 to 2500 12.5 

2501 to 3000 16.0 

Above 3000 19.0 

. Cores 

Cores shall be built from cold rolled grain oriented silicone steel laminations. The core laminations shall 

be insulated from each other by suitable high temperature resistant oil proof adherent coating materials. 

Core clamps and clamping bolts shall be heavily insulated from the core laminations. 

The bottom and top frames shall be connected with the tie rods to make a complete structure 

rigid for carrying the weight of core-coil assembly without unduly stressing the laminations or 

winding. Lifting eyes shall be provided on the frame for removal of core assembly from the tank. 

Completed core shall be flash tested for insulation with 2500 Volts between the core and each of 

the clamps or core bolts (core being connected to earth). 

All the core frames shall be bonded together with two metallic strips and connected to the tank 

for earthing to ensure earth return and operation of protective gear in the event of a fault. Lifting 

eyes (or any other provision) for lifting the core from the tank shall be provided. 

. Winding and Insulation 

High conductivity electrolytic quality copper shall be used for winding. Winding shall be suitably 

braced to withstand the dynamic forces due to short circuit. Winding insulation be uniform and 

winding shall have full insulation. 

All windings (low voltage or high voltage) shall be three phase windings with minimum class À' 

insulation, spiral type coils consisting of layers wound in a continuous length from top to bottom, 

with composite copper conductor consisting of a number of square or rectangular strip in parallel 

shall be used from all low voltage winding. The normal insulation between turns may consist of strip 

insolation in addition to the paper covering on the conductors or in some cases the latter may be 

augmented by tapping of conductors with cross area type coils for high voltage windings. In this 

type each coil consists of a number of layers having a number of turns per layer and the conductor 

being a round copper wire or a copper strips insulated with a paper covering. Insulation between 

Page 28 of 174



NRDA 

layers in high voltage windings shall be provided by wrapping the same around the end turn of the 

layers, thereby assisting to keep the whole coil compact. The complete high voltage winding shall 

consist of a number of above referred coils, arranged in series and spaced apart by means of 

insulating key sectors. In order to avoid internal joints, the inside leads are heavily insulated and 

brought out through the spaces between the sectors. Windings of transformer shall be 

transformer oil impregment. Initial insulation shall be provided while assembling the coils in the 

shape of insulating cylinders between low voltage winding and the core and between the high 

voltage and low voltage windings; and also the insulating barrier inserted between adjacent limbs 

and between the coils and core yoke. The insulating cylinders shall consists of number of layers of 

specially selected press boards or synthetic resin bonded insulating material leads from the top and 

the bottom of the windings, and from such other tapings as may required. The electrical 

connections from these leads to the terminal boards or bushings shall consist either of copper 

rods, copper strand or rectangular sections of copper strips. Neutral points on low voltage side 

shall be extended out of the transformer body through an insulator for connecting to earth 

station. 

. Insulation oil 

Insulation oil shall confirm to IS : 335. Transformer shall be supplied with initial fill of filtered 

oil . 

5. General Requirements 

The transformer shall be indoor type as specified. Unless otherwise specified the transformer in 

addition shall have thermal and dynamic ability to withstand external short circuit as per Clause 9 of 

IS : 2026(Part 1 ) 1977 

6. Temperature Rise 

The reference ambient temperatures assumed for the purpose of this specification are as 

follows:- 

a) Maximum ambient air temperature 50°C 

b) Maximum daily average ambient air temperature 40°C 

c) Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature 32°C. 

d) Minimum ambient air temperature (-) 5°C. 

e) Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 meters. 

f) The temperature rise at the above conditions and at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m shall be as 

follows: 

By resistance method 55° C 

By thermometer 50° C 

If the site conditions indicated for a particular job are more severe than the reference ambient 

temperature mentioned above, the temperature rise shall be suitably scaled such that hot spot 

temperature shall not exceed the values for the reference conditions. 

Page 29 of 174



NRDA 

7. Tap Changing Device 

Tap changing device shall be provided on H.V side, on circuit type with remote panel necessary 

indication for tap position and locking arrangement at any of the tapping positions. It shall be 

designed for bi-directional operation and shall be of self positioning type and shall have the 

following steps: 

+ 2.5% 

+ 5% 

+ 7.5% 

8. Voltage Ratio 

Volts 

Unless otherwise specified the transformer shall be suitable for a voltage ratio of 11 KV/433 

9. Vector Group 

In case of step down transformer the winding connection shall confirm to vector group Dy 11 unless 

otherwise specified. 

10. Cooling 

Unless otherwise specified the transformer shall be oil immersed natural air cooled type (ONAN) 

11. Accessories 

The transformer shall be single tank type with termination on cable end box as specified on HV 

side. The MV side shall be suitable to receive bus bar trucking interconnection suitable for 

full load current of the transformer. Transformer shall consists of cable end box on HV side for 

three core XLPE cable with Compound/Raychem joints. 

12. Fittings 

The transformer shall be complete with the following fittings: 

a) Oil conservator with oil level indicator minimum level marking and drain plug for all transformer 

of capacity 50 KVA and above. 

b) Off circuit type tap change arrangement with position indicator and locking arrangement 

for all transformers. 

c) Thermometer pocket with plug for all transformer of capacity 100 KVA and above. 

d) 100 mm dial type/stem type thermometer with metal guard Dial type thermometer may have 

max,temperature indicator and contact device for Alarm of all transformer of capacity 250 KVA 

and above. 

Page 30 of 174



NRDA 

e) Lifting lugs for all transformers. 

f) Four numbers Bi-directional rollers. 

g) Rating diagram and terminal marking plate for all transformers. 

h) Explosion vent for transformer. 

i) Additional Neutral separately brought out on a bushing for earthing for all transformer. 

j) Earth terminals (2 Nos) for body earthing for all transformer. 

k) Valves for filtration drainage and filling etc. with necessary plugs for all transformer 

l) Radiator assembly for all transformer 

m) Silica gel Breather for all transformer. 

n) Air release plug for all transformer. 

o) First filling of oil to IS 335/72 including make up fill during installation for all transformers. 

p) Facility to connect Buchholtz relay. 

q) Inspection cover on tank cover for access to terminal connections for all transformer. 

r) Cable box termination’s as specified. 

s) Necessary hardware clamps lugs etc. for termination’s on HV/MV etc. for all transformer. 

13. Explosion Vent 

Explosion vent or pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient size for rapid release of any 

pressure that may be generated within the tank and which might result in damage to the equipment. 

The device shall operate at a static pressure less than the hydraulic test pressure for transformer tank. 

Means shall be provided to prevent the ingress of moisture and of such a design to prevent gas 

accumulation. 

14. Accommodation for Auxiliary Apparatus 

Provision such as for restricted earth fault protection, facilities shall be provided for the mounting of a 

neutral current transformer. 

15. Rating and Diagram Plates 

The following plates shall be fixed to transformer tank in a visible position 

. A rating plate of weather proof material bearing the data specified in the appropriate clauses IS 

2026-1977. 

Page 31 of 174



NRDA 

. A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector relationship of 

the several winding in accordance with IS : 2026-1977 and a plan view of the transformer giving 

the correct physical relationship of the terminals. 

16. Joints and Gaskets 

All gaskets used for making tight joints shall be of proven material such as granulated cork bonded with 

synthetic rubber gaskets or synthetic rubber. 

17. Gas and Oil Actuated (Buchholtz) Relays 

Buchholtz relay shall be provided for the transformer. Oil actuated relay equipment shall confirm to IS: 

3637-1966 and shall be double float type having contacts which close following oil surge or under 

incipient fault conditions. 

Each gas and oil actuated relay shall be provided with a test cork to take a flexible pipe connection for 

checking the operation of the relay. 

Where specified to allow gas to be collected at ground level, a pipe approximately 5 mm inside diameter 

shall be connected to the release cork of the gas and oil actuated relay and brought down to a point 

approximately 1.25 m above ground level, where it shall be terminated by a cork. A machined surface 

shall be provided on the top of each relay to facilitate the testing of the relays and to check the 

mounting angle in the pipe and the cross level of the relay. 

The design of the relay mounting arrangement, the associated pipe work shall be such that mal-operation 

of the relays shall not take place under normal service. The pipe work shall be so arranged that all gas 

arising from the transformer shall pass through the gas and oil actuated relay. The oil circuit through 

the relay shall not form a delivery path in parallel with any circulating oil pipe nor shall it be tied into, or 

connected through the pressure relief vent. Sharp bends in the pipe work shall be avoided. All wiring 

connections, terminal boards, fuses and links etc. connected with gas actuated relays shall be suitable 

for tropical atmosphere. Any wiring liable to be in contact with shall have oil resisting insulation and the 

bared ends of stranded wire shall be sealed together to prevent creepage of oil along the wire. There 

shall be no possibility of oil entering connection boxes used for cables or wiring. 

18. Cable Box 

Cable box shall not be mounted on the tank covers. It shall be feasible to remove the tank covers for 

inspection during maintenance etc. without recourse to breaking the joints or disturbing the cables 

already terminated. Necessary removable links in oil approachable through inspection cover in 

tank cover etc. after lowering coil shall be provided for test purpose. 

19. Tests 

. Tests at works 

All routine and other tests prescribed by IS 2026 shall be carried out at the manufacturers works before 

the despatch of the transformer in the presence of inspecting officer. Copies of the test certificate shall 

be furnished to the department. In addition to the prescribed routine tests,temperature rise test shall 

be invariably done on one transformer of each design. A copy of the impulse test certificate done on 

Page 32 of 174



NRDA 

the same type/design of the transformer shall be furnished in accordance with IS for purpose of record. 

If no impulse test was done on an earlier unit of the same design and capacity, one transformer will be 

subjected to impulse test in consultation with the inspector at the firm's cost. 

Copies of the certificate for pressure test, test for bushings and type test for short circuit shall be 

supplied to the department. 

b. Test at site 

In addition to tests at manufacture's premises all relevant pre-commissioning checks and tests 

conforming to IS : 10028 shall be done before energization. The following tests are to be particularly 

done before cable jointing or connecting up the bus bar trunking. 

. Insulation test between HV to earth and HV to MV with a 5000 volts meggar. 

ii. Insulation test between MV to earth with 500 Volts meggar. 

iii. Insulation test on oil 

iv. Buchholtz relay operation by simulation test where fitted. 

All test results are to be recorded and reports should be submitted to the department. 

20. Handling, Storing, Installation and Commissioning 

Transformer 

Transformers shall be installed and commissioned as per the requirements of IS: 10028 (Latest 

Edition) and regulations of local authorities. 

. Handling 

Transformer and all its accessories shall be handled carefully in its upright position as indicated on the 

packing case. Lifting lugs and jacking pads shall be used for lifting of the transformer. While using jacking 

pads utmost care shall be taken in proper application of jacks. Where transformer is dragged or pulled on 

sleeper or rollers the traction eyes provided at the bottom frame shall be used with suitable wire ropes 

and shackles. 

. Storage 

Transformer shall be stored under shelter in a place free from the fire and explosion hazards. Care should 

be taken to see that moisture will not contaminate by checking all gaskets, bolts, nuts and accessories. 

. Cabling and Earthing 

Cable shall be terminated at H.T. cable boxes only alter IR value are measured and found to be in order. 

Cable termination shall be carried out with utmost care as per recommendation of cable manufacturer. 

Neutral of the transformer shall be connected to two separate and distinct earth stations through double 

run of copper tapes of suitable size. The body of the transformer shall also be provided with effective 

earthing as per the drawings and specifications. 

21. Installation and Commissioning Transformers 

Page 33 of 174



NRDA 

. The transformer shall be installed in accordance with IS : 1886-Code of Practice for Installation 

and maintenance of transformer. Necessary support channels shall be grouted in the flooring. 

. The transformer shall be moved to its location and shall be correctly positioned. All parts of 

the transformers which are supplied loose, such as conservator, radiator banks, Buchholtz relay, dial 

thermometer, bushing etc. shall be fitted on the banks, Buchholtz relay, dial thermometer, bushing etc. 

shall be fitted on the transformer. Transformer oil supplied in drums shall be topped up into the 

transformer after the testing/filtering upto the correct level required. 

. Wiring of devices such as Buchholtz relay, dial thermometer etc. shall be carried out as per 

drawings. Earthing of neutral and body of the transformer shall be done as per CPWD specification. 

. Drying out of transformer winding will be necessary when the insulation value of the oil is 

lower than the minimum value as per IS - 1886 or the transformer has not been energised within 6 

months of leaving the works or when the radiator assembly is done at site. The transformer shall be 

dried out by one of the methods specified in IS - 1886. Drying out with centrifugal or vacum type filters 

will, however, be prefrred. The contractor shall carry out the process of drying without interruption 

and shall maintain a log sheet indicating time, oil temperature and insulation resistance. 

. After complete drying out of the transformer oil sample shall be collected by the contractor and 

shall be tested for dielectric strength as specified in IS : 335 - 1972 with approved test kit. 

. All devices such as dial type thermometers, buchholtz relay and main alarm and trip contacts 

shall be checked for satisfactory operation. 

. Termination of H.V. cable and M.V. Bus trunking shall be done, as may be specified in the 

schedule. 

. The rollers of the transformer shall be provided with rigid stoppers, in front of them so as to 

avoid any risk of displacement. However it should be possible to remove the stoppers manually, when 

required. 

. All tests specified in specification shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the 

inspecting officer/consignee free of cost. 

GUARANTED TECHNICAL DATA 

Guaranteed technical particulars shall be supplied in vide Schedule. 

22. Installation & Commissioning of M.V. Switchgear Main Board 

The installation work shall cover assembly of various sections of the panels lining up, grouting the units 

etc. In the case of multiple panel switch boards after connecting up the bus bars etc. all joints shall 

be insulation compound. The circuit breaker tanks shall be filled with tested oil up to the mark 

indicated after cleaning. A common earth bar as per IS specification shall be run at the back of switch 

board connecting all the sections for connection to frame earth system. All protections and other 

small wirings for indication etc. shall be completed before calibration and commissioning checks are 

commenced. All relay meters etc. shall be mounted and connected with appropriate wiring. 

23. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 

Page 34 of 174



NRDA 

Commissioning checks and tests shall include all wiring checks and checking up of connections. 

Primary/Secondary injection tests for the relay adjustment/setting shall be done before commissioning in 

addition to routine meggar test. Checks and tests shall include the following : 

. Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts. 

. Interlock function checks. 

. Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required. 

. Insulation test : When measured with 500 V meggar the insulation resistance shall not be less 

than 100 mega ohms. 

. Insulation test of Oil : When tested as per IS : 6792-1972, the oil shall withstand a voltage of 40 

KV for a minute without break down. 

. Trip test and protection gear test. 

PACKAGE SUBSTATION:- 

1.0.0 CODE & STANDARDS: 

1.1.0 All equipment and material shall be designed manufactured and tested in accordance with the 

latest applicable IEC standard. IS Standards will be referred where applicable; 

1.2.0 The electrical installation shall met the requirement of Indian Electricity Rules as amended upto 

date relevant IS code of practice and Indian electricity act. 

1.3.0 The Compact Sub-station offered shall in general comply with the latest issues including 

amendments of the following standards but not restricted to it. 

Title 

High Voltage Switchgear & Control Gear: High Voltage Low Voltage Pre- 

Fabricated Substation 

Indian Standards 

IEC:62271-202 

11 kV Switchgear cubicles IS:13118, IS:3427, 

IEC:60694. 

IEC:60298 

Ring main unit 11 kv grade 

Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of Switchgear 

Distribution Transformer 

IS:9920, IEC:60265 

IS:10118 

IS:2026, IS:11171 

Indian Electricity Rules 1956 

Indian Electricity Act 1910 

2.0.0 DESIGN CRITERIA 

2.1.0 Compact Sub-station shall consist of 11KV SF6 Insulated compact switchgear with VCB Circuit 

Breaker as protection to transformer + Transformer + L.T. Switchgear with all connection 

accessories, fitting & auxiliary equipment in an pre-fabricated Enclosure to supply Low-voltage 

energy from high-voltage system as detailed in this specification. The complete unit shall be 

installed on a substation plinth (base) as Outdoor substation. 11KV Load Break Cable Switch 

controls incoming feeder cable of the 11KV radial distribution system. The VCB Circuit Breaker 

Page 35 of 174



NRDA 

shall be used to control and isolate the 11kV/433V Distribution transformer. The transformer’s 

L.T. side shall be connected to L.T. switchgear. The connection cables to consumer shall be taken 

out from the L.T. switchgear. 

2.2.0 The pre-fabricated Compact substation shall be designed for 

a) Compactness, 

b) Fast installation, 

c) Maintenance free operation, 

d) Safety for worker/operator & public. 

2.3.0 The Switchgear and component thereof shall be capable of withstanding the mechanical and 

thermal stresses of short circuit listed in ratings and requirements clause without any damage or 

deterioration of the materials. 

2.4.0 For continues operation at specified ratings temperature rise of the various switchgear 

components shall be limited to permissible values stipulated in the relevant standard and / or this 

specification. 

2.5.0 Service Conditions: 

2.5.1 The equipment offered shall be suitable for continuous satisfactory operation in tropical area of 

Installation. 

The Enclosure consisting of High Voltage switchgear-control gear, Low Voltage switchgear-control 

gear & Transformer of the Compact substation shall be designed to be used under normal 

outdoor service condition. The enclosure should take minimum space for the installation 

including the space required for approaching various doors & equipment inside. The enclosure 

construction shall be such that it fully protects ingress of rain water & rusting. 

3.0.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT 

3.1.0 The main components of a prefabricated-Compact substation are Transformer, High-voltage 

switchgear-control gear, Low-voltage switchgear-control gear, corresponding interconnections 

(cable, bus bars) & auxiliary equipment. The components shall be enclosed, by either common 

enclosure or by an assembly of enclosure. All the components shall comply with their relevant 

IS/IEC standards. 

3.1.1 Ratings: 

Description Unit Value 

Rated Voltage / Operating Voltage kV rms 11 

Page 36 of 174



NRDA 

Rated frequency & 

Number of phases 

Rated maximum power of 

substation 

Hz & nos. 50 & 3 

kVA 

800 KVA (Oil Type 

Transformer) 

Rated Ingress protection 

class of Enclosure 

IP: 

IP: 54 for LT Switchgear & HT 

Switchgear 

compartments and IP-23 

for Transformer 

compartment. 

HV Insulation Level 

Rated withstand voltage at 

power frequency of 50 Hz 

Rated Impulse withstand 

Voltage 

kV rms 28 

kV peak 75 

HV Network & Busbar 

Rated current Amp 630A 

Rated short time 

kA rms / 3sec 20 

withstand current 

Making capacity for kA peak 50.0kA 

switch-dis connector & 

earthing switches 

Breaking capacity of 

Isolator rated full load) 

A 

250A 

3.2.0 OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE: 

3.2.1 The enclosure shall be made of CRCA skin passed sheet, thickness-2mm, grade-0, IS513 

tropicalised to meet Indian weather conditions. 

3.2.2 The base of the enclosure shall be Hot deeped galvanized ISMC size:4 mm to ensure rigidity for 

ease of lifting, transport & installation with all components pre-assemble & testing including the 

Transformer in mounted condition. 

3.2.3 The structure of the substation shall be capable of supporting the gross weight of all the 

equipment (LV, MV & Transformer) & the lifting arrangement of substation shall be designed to 

support the composite unit. Installation & assembly at site is not permitted. 

3.2.4 There shall be proper / adequate ventilation inside the enclosure so that hot air inside enclosure 

are directed out by help of duct. Louvers apertures shall be provided so that there is circulation of 

natural air inside the enclosure. Transformer compartment with more than two sides access 

needed to have proper ventilation & easy of maintenances in due course. The complete 

Substation design shall be Compartmentalized design. 

Page 37 of 174



NRDA 

3.2.5 Public Nuisance Protection: There shall be a padlocking arrangement on the doors and sides 

(periphery) so that it is ensured that the unit is well protected from outside from public 

tampering owing to its being located in a crowded and compact places. 

3.2.6 Interconnection: The connection of HT switchgear to Transformer shall be with the help of 

suitable size of cables from Transformer to LT switchgear with the help of suitable size of 

electrolytic grade Aluminum bus bars. 

3.2.7 Internal Fault: Failure within the Compact substation due either to a defect, an exceptional 

service condition or mal-operation may initiate an internal arc. Such an event may lead to the risk 

of injury, if persons are present. It is needed that the unit shall be tested for Internal Arc fault test 

as per IEC 62271-202. This Internal Arc test has direct impact on safety of personnel & 

environment around the Substation installation. Test certificate will be review for IEC certification 

during placement of order. 

3.2.8 Covers & Doors: Covers & doors are part of the enclosure. When they are closed, they shall 

provide the degree of protection specified for the enclosure. All covers, doors or roof shall be 

provided with padlocking facility or it shall not be possible to open or remove them before doors 

used for normal operation have been opened. The doors shall open outward at an angle of at 

least 90 degrees. The top cover shall be slightly inclined so that there is no accumulation of water 

during rainy season or otherwise. 

3.2.9 Earthing: All metallic components shall be earthed to a common earthing point. It shall be 

terminated by an adequate terminal intended for connection to the earth system of the 

installation, by way of cable & solid aluminum earth grid at base of sub-station. The continuity of 

the earth system shall be ensured taking into account the thermal & mechanical stresses caused 

by the current it may have to carry. It is needed that the Earth circuit of substation be tested for 

20kA for 1sec. per IEC 62271-202. The components to be connected to the earth system shall 

include : 

a) The enclosure of Compact / prefabricated substation, 

b) The enclosure of High voltage switchgear & control gear from the terminal provided for the 

purpose, 

c) The metal screen & the high voltage cable earth conductor, 

d) The transformer tank or metal frame of transformer, 

e) The frame &/or enclosure of low voltage switchgear 

3.2.10 Internal Illumination: There shall be arrangement for internal lighting for HV, Transformer & LV 

compartments separately. 

3.2.11 Fire extinguisher: There shall be arrangement for a fire extinguisher of a suitable capacity to 

ensure personnel safety while maintenance. This shall be placed in LV Chamber with proper 

mounting arrangement. 

3.2.12 Labels: Labels for warning, manufacturer’s operating instructions etc. & those according to local 

standards & regulations shall be pasted / provided inside and outside. They must be durable 

(metallic) & clearly legible. 

3.2.13 Painting and Fabrication process : 

a) The paints shall be selected to withstand tropical heat & rain. The paint shall not scale off or crinkle or be 

removed by abrasion due to normal handling. For this purpose powder coating shall be used. 

Page 38 of 174



NRDA 

b) Special care shall be taken by the manufacturer to ensure against rusting of nuts, bolts and fittings during 

operation. All bushings and current carrying parts shall be cleaned properly after final painting. 

c) The fabrication process shall ensure that there are no sharp edges on the GI sheets used. 

3.3.0 11KV Switchgear 

3.3.1 Non-extensible SF6 Insulated Compact Switchgear as required shall consist of following items: 

3.3.2 Load Break Cable Switch with integral earth switch having full making capacity shall be used for 

Incoming cables. 

3.3.3 VCB Circuit Breaker shall be used for distribution network of HT switchgear. Circuit Breaker 

complete with operating mechanism, self powered, Static type O/C, E/F protection relay with 

associated Current Transformers shall be used for control and protection of Transformer. An 

integral cable earthing switch with full making capacity shall be provided. 

3.3.4 The above Load Break Cable Switch, VCB circuit breaker, Bus bars should be mounted inside a 

robotically welded sealed for life, stainless steel tank of 2 mm thick sheet metal. The operating 

mechanism of the switches and breakers shall be outside the SF6 tank and accessible from front. 

The tank should be filled with SF6 gas at adequate pressure. The degree of protection for gas tank 

should be IP67. There shall be provision for filling the SF6 gas at site. Moreover the Stainless Steel 

Gas Tank shall confirm to the sealed pressure system as per IEC and ensure the gas leakage to 0.1 

% per year as per IEC. 

3.3.5 The Vacuum circuit Breaker is required to control 11kV/433 volts distribution Transformer of 

rating 1600 KVA and relay settings and Current Transformers shall be selected accordingly. 

3.3.6 General Finish: Totally enclosed, metal enclosed, vermin and dust proof suitable for tropical 

climate use as detailed in the specification. 

3.3.7 Ratings: The bus bars shall have continuous rating of 630 Amps. The isolator shall have a 

continuous rating of 250 Amps. Vacuum CIRCUIT BREAKER shall have a continuous rating of 250 

Amps. in accordance with relevant IS / IEC standard 

3.3.8 Breaking & Making Capacity: The Load Break Cable Switches shall be capable for breaking rated 

full load current. The same along with its earthing switch shall also be suitable for full making 

capacity of the system as specified. The complete switchgear shall be suitable for breaking 

capacity of 16kA symmetrical at 11000 volts three phase. 

3.3.9 Busbar: Switchgear shall be complete with all connection, bus-bars etc. Copper busbars 

continuous rating shall be 630 Amps. The busbars should be fully encapsulated by SF6 gas inside 

the steel tank. 

3.3.10 Remote Operation: Provision shall be there for remote operation of the switchgear’s Isolator & 

Breaker shall be possible using Motors fitted to the operating mechanism at a latter date. It shall 

be possible to fit the motors either directly in manufacturing plant or on site as & when required. 

Installation on site shall be possible 

3.4.1 Protection: The SF6 circuit breaker shall be fitted with Static type self powered relay IDMT 

Protection relays 2 Nos. over current 1 No. earth fault element shall be of IDMT relay with Display 

for operator ease inside the front cover to avoid any tampering. The same shall be used in 

Page 39 of 174



NRDA 

conjunction with suitable CT’s and Tripping Coil for fault tripping of the Circuit Breakers. CT’s 

shall be mounted on cable inside cable compartment. 

3.4 Cable Termination: Each Cable compartment shall be provided with three bushings of adequate 

sizes to terminate the incoming outgoing 11kV 3nos. single Core XLPE cables. There shall be 

enough height from the base of the mounted switchgear so that the cables can be bent and taken 

vertically up to the bushings. The Cable termination shall be done by Heat shrinkable Termination 

method so that adequate clearances shall be maintained between phases for Termination. Access 

to all the cables should be possible form the front of RMU. Side & rear Cable entry is not 

acceptable. Cable Termination boots shall be supplied by the switchgear manufacturer. 

3.5 Earthing of the main circuit: 

Locking Arrangement: Suitable padlocking arrangements shall be provided as stated below… 

a) CB manual operating handle in the “OFF” position. 

b) Each feeder Panel operating handle in ‘Closed’ ‘Open” or ‘Earth’ position. 

c) Each isolator operating handle in ‘Closed’, ‘ Open’, or ‘Earth’ position. 

3.5 Ratings : 

1.1.1.2 Non-Extensible radial compact switchgear with 

VCB Circuit Breaker 

3.5.1 

1.1.1.3 Switchgear Data 

a) Service Indoor 

b) Type Metal clad 

c) Number of phases 3 

d) Voltage 11000V 

e) Rated Frequency 50 Hz 

f) Rated Current 630 Amp (isolator) 

g) Short Circuit rating 

i) Breaking 20kA rms for Breaker 

ii) Short time withstand for 3 20 kA rms 

Sec. 

iii) Rated S/c making 

50.0kA peak for Breaker 

h) Short duration power freq. 50 Kv 

i) Insulation Level 75Kvpeak 

j) System earthing Solidly earthed at substation 

3.5.2 

1.1.1.3.1 Breaker 

a) Type VCB Circuit Breaker in SF6 tank 

b) Rated voltage 33kV 

c) Breaking current 

i) Load breaking 20 KArms. 

d) Making current 50.0 KA peak 

Page 40 of 174



NRDA 

e) Rated current 630 Amps. 

f) No. of poles 3 

g) Operating mechanism. Trip free & free handle type with mechanically operated 

indication & pad locking. 

3.5.3 

1.1.1.4 Isolators 

a) Type 

b) 

1.1.1.6 Rated current 

1.1.1.5 Load breaking and fault making in SF6 tank 

630 Amps. 

d) Rated breaking capacity 630 Amps. 

e) 

50.0 KA peak 

1.1.1.7 Fault making 

capacity 

f) 

g) 

1.1.1.8 No. of poles 

1.1.1.9 Operating 

mechanism 

3.5.4 Busbars: 

a) Material Copper 

b) Type SF6 insulated 

c) Rated Current 630 Amps 

3.6.0 Isolator: 

3 

Operating handle with ON, OFF, Earth positions with 

arrangement for padlocking in each position. 

3.6.1 The Isolators offered shall conform to IS: 4710/9920 as amended to date. The isolator shall be 

triple pole, spring assisted, hand operated, non-automatic type with quick break contacts. The 

operating handle shall have three positions ‘ON’, ‘OFF’ and ‘EARTH’ which shall be clearly marked 

with suitable arrangement to padlock in any position. A safety arrangement for locking shall be 

provided by which the isolator operation shall be prevented from ‘ON’ position to ‘EARTH’ 

position or vice versa. 

3.7.0 Switchgear: 

3.7.1 Sealed for life, the enclosure shall meet the “sealed pressure system” criteria in accordance with 

IEC: 298. There shall be no requirement to ‘top up’ the SF6 gas. In addition, manufacturer shall 

confirm that maximum leakage rate is lower than 0.1% per year. It shall provide full insulation, 

making the switchgear insensitive to the environment. Thus assembled, the active parts of the 

switchgear unit shall be maintenance free. 

3.7.1.1 The switchgear & switchboard shall be designed so that the position of different devices is visible 

to the operator on the front of the switchboard & operations are visible as well. The switchboard 

shall be designed so as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of 

tools. 

3.7.1.2 RMU should be tested for internal arc fault test. 

Page 41 of 174



NRDA 

3.7.2 Circuit Breaker: 

3.7.2.1 The Unit shall consist 250A Tee-off spring assisted, three pole Vacuum circuit breaker, with 

integral fault making / dead breaking earth switch. The function shall be naturally interlocked to 

prevent the main & earth switch from being switched ‘ON’ at the same time & the CB not allowed 

to trip in ‘Earth On’ position. The selection of the main/earth switch lever on the panel, which is 

allowed to move only if the main or earth switches in the off position. The lever shall be able to 

pad locked in either the main or earth position. 

3.7.2.2 The manual operation of the circuit breaker shall not have an effect on the trip spring. This should 

only be discharged under a fault (electrical) trip condition. The following manual reset operation 

should recharge the trip spring & reset the CB mechanism in ‘main off’ position. 

3.7.3 Protection : 

Protection Relays: The CB shall be fitted with Micro-processor type self powered relay inside the 

front cover to avoid any tampering. 

3.4.0 Transformer 

3.4.1 33KV/ 433 volt distribution transformer shall be a part of Compact substation which will be 

housed in the enclosure. The transformers shall be installed in hot, humid tropical atmosphere. 

All equipment accessories and wiring shall be provided with tropical finish to prevent fungus 

growth. 

The transformers shall be capable of continuous operation of rated output under the operating 

conditions of voltage and frequency variations as per statutory limits governed by relevant Indian 

Standard and Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 / IEC with latest amendments in force. 

Requirement: 11000/433 Volt Dry type Cast Resin Transformer of 1600KVA , core type suitable for Compact 

substation housed in a enclosure. 

3.4.2 Voltage Ratio: No load voltage 33000/433 Volts within tolerance as stipulated in IS: 2026. 

3.4.3 Insulating material shall be of proven design. The insulating materials shall be class “F” 

3.4.4 Rating: The transformer shall have a continuous rating as specified at any of the specified tapping position 

and with the maximum temperature rise specified. The rated KVA shall be the product of the rated voltage 

in kV, the corresponding rated current and the phase factor 1.73. When the transformer is operated with 

the rated primary voltage applied to the terminals of the primary winding, the apparent power (kVA) at the 

terminals of the secondary winding, when carrying the rated secondary current differs from rated kVA by 

an amount corresponding to the regulation of the transformer and is the product of the actual secondary 

voltage, the rated secondary current and phase factor 1.73. 

3.4.5 Temperature Rise: The maximum temperature rise at the specified maximum continuous output shall not 

exceed 35°C by thermometer in the hottest portion of the oil or 45°C measured by resistance of winding 

above ambient temperature of 50°C. 

3.4.6 Type of Load: The transformer shall be suitable for carrying load within temperature rise indicated in the 

Indian Standard specification IS: 6600 ‘Guide for loading of Dry type 

Page 42 of 174



NRDA 

Transformer 

3.4.7 Overloads: The transformers shall be suitable for carrying overload within temperature rise indicated in IS: 

6600 ‘Guide for loading of Oil type Transformer’. 

3.4.8 Connections: H.V. Delta and L.V Star connected with neutral brought out on the 

Secondary side for connection to earth; Vector group DYn11 of IS: 2026. 

3.4.9 Tapping: 

List of Fittings:- 

1) WTI with alarm & trip contact. 

3.5. LT SYSTEM 

LT compartment shall be suitable to house following equipment, 

- Bus bar connection from transformer to 

LT ACB 

- Air circuit breaker 1600A – 1No. 

The design should comply for the following standards. 

1. IEC-439-1, 1992 Low voltage Switch gear and Control gear assemblies 

Part-I, type tested and partially type tested assemblies. 

2. IEC-947-1, 1998 Low voltage Switch gear and Control gear Part-I 

general rules. 

3. IEC-1180-1, 1992 High voltage test techniques for low voltage 

equipment Part–I definition test and Procedure requirement 

4. IEC-529, 1989 Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) 

EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION 

3.5.1. Air circuit breaker (ACB) 

These shall be Drawout type with manually operated mechanism. The short circuit mechanism 

and breaking capacity as shall be supported by test certificate. The test certificates should be 

from CPRI / any Govt. approved recognized test house / laboratory. 

The circuit breaker shall be fitted with self powered CT operated Microprocessor based overload 

and short circuit and earth fault releases for current rating 1600Amps. 

a) Overload releases should be settable from 40% to 100% of the rated current In. 

Page 43 of 174



NRDA 

b) Ambient temperature compensated type and there should not be de-rating of ACB current 

carrying capacity at 50°C. The testing of ACB for the temperature rise shall be carried out by the 

manufacturer as per the prevailing, IS / IEC or any other international standards. A Test certificate 

for the same to be submitted by the ACB Vendor. 

c) ACB shall be provided with Overload, Short circuit & Earthfault release. 

1) 3 phase, 4 wire, neutral earthed having link arrangement. 

2) Rated current thermal current - 1600Amps 

3) Service voltage - 415 volts 

4) No. of break / pole - one 

5) Frequency - 50 c / s 

6) Rated insulation voltage - 1000 volts 

7) Rated short circuit breaking capacity 

Rated services S/C breaking capacity Ics (rms) – 65kA 

Rated ultimate S/C breaking capacity Icu (rms) – 65kA 

8) Break Time - less than 40ms 

9) S/C making capacity Icm (peak) - 140kA at 440V 

10) Rated short time withstand current : Icw 60kA for 1 sec. 

11) It shall conform to IS 13947 / pt.2 / 1993 with latest amendment, if any. 

12) Performance category: Utilization category – B. 

13) The status of Open and Close shall be clearly visible. 

14) The bus bar size shall be confirming to relevant IS and the neutral bus bar shall be of same wire of 

size as phase bus bar and should be suitable for connecting neutral. 

15) The ACB shall be tested in accordance with the provision of IS 13947 – Part I or relevant IEC 

3.5.3. Interconnecting bus bar 

Bus bar shall be of high conductivity aluminum (E91E) supported on insulators made of non-hygroscopic, 

non-inflammable material with tracking index equal to or more than that defined in BIS. The main 

bus bars shall have uniform current ratings throughout their length as specified in data sheet / job 

specification. The current rating of the neutral shall be half that of the phase busbars. Removable 

neutral links shall be provided on feeders to permit isolation of the neutral bus bar. 

Only zinc passivated or cadmium plated high tensile strength steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be used 

for all bus bar, joints and supports. 

The hot spot temperature of bus bars including joints at design ambient temperature shall not exceed 

95°C for normal operating conditions. 

The current rating of the bus bars shall be 2500A for design ambient temperature at site conditions and 

for being inside the cubicle at fully loaded condition. The vendor shall suitably de-rate the 

nominal rating to suit the above condition. 

Minimum clearance between live parts, between live parts / neutral to earth shall be adequate for safe 

operation. 

Interconnections between the main bus bars and individual units shall be made using vertical / horizontal 

aluminium bus bars of adequate rating. 

1.1.1.9.1.1 F DIESEL GENERATING SET 

1. Scope of Work 

Page 44 of 174



NRDA 

Design, manufacture, supply installation, testing and commissioning of Diesel Engine Generating sets, 

including all ancillary equipment such as base frame, coupling, coupling guard, cushy foot mounting, 

foundation, cable box, control panel, exhaust piping system etc. The supply and installation of electric 

wiring between engine control panel, control panel and starting batteries is also included in the scope of 

work. The Contractor shall carry out the installation of Diesel Engine Generators in every respect in 

conformity with the current rules and regulations of the Local Electricity Authority/Factory Act and with 

the directions of and to the satisfaction of the architect. Contractor shall provide all materials, labour, 

equipment and transportation necessary for the complete installation and commissioning of diesel 

generating sets and accessories described above or specified herein. This also includes materials, 

appliances, equipment not customary to make the installation of diesel generating sets complete and 

connected with the installation, testing and commissioning of diesel generating sets. In general, the work 

to be performed under this contract shall comprise of the following:- 

. Design, manufacture, supply installation, testing and commissioning of the following for each 

Diesel Engine Generator Set:- 

. Water Cooled radiator Diesel Engine (alternator set suitable for 415V ± 2.5%, 50 Hz AC supply). 

. Residential type of Exhaust silencer - 1 No. 

. Bank of starting batteries with battery charger for trickle & boost charging 1 Set. 

. Automatic mains failure panel with complete supply change over arrangement) - 1 No. 

. Piping system for fuel line from engine to fuel tank. The pipes shall be MS pipes of suitable dia. 

. Calibrated Diesel Tank may be supplied for 24 hour consumption and each tank shall not be more 

than 990 liters capacity. The tank shall be made out 3 mm thick MS sheets with all accessories 

such as oil level indicator with calibration drain plugs, manhole; breather drain cock, low level 

alarm and painting, etc. complete as required by Indian Explosive Rules and Regulations. 

. Manual operated rotary pump with suitable rubber tube for diesel transfer. 

. Exhaust Piping system including `B' Class MS pipes, specials, bends, flanges, flexible pipes, clamps 

hangers, canopy etc. connections to silencers, thermal insulation of pipe with glass wool and 2” 

thick cover by Al. cladding. 

. All cabling/wiring and connections between Engine Alternator to Generator Panel (AMF Panel), 

Starting battery bank and engine starting set, Battery charger to batteries and Fault annunciation 

& interlocking control wiring. 

. All cable work between alternator and AMF Panels and all other cable work for the entire 

installation. Cable end box suitable for termination of these cables. 

. Earthing of entire installation. 

. Foundation arrangement with suitable cushy foot mounting. 

. Testing and commissioning 

. First filling up of crank case with new lubricating oil after cleaning the crank case and flushing 

with oil. 

. Commissioning of the entire system after necessary trial runs. 

. On-load testing of entire electrical and mechanical installation. 

. Replacement with new lubricating oil after the first trial runs. 

. Supply of Diesel for 8 Hours testing and trial runs. 

2. Design 

. The engine alternation set shall be capable of working at ambient temperature between 0°C to 

50°C. 

Page 45 of 174



NRDA 

The operating capacity of each set shall be arrived at after considering a load with power factor of 

0.8 lagging, and after taking into consideration suitable derating on account of above parameters 

of the station. 

. The engine/alternator set shall be capable of taking 10% over-load for a period of one hour 

during any 12 hours period, while operating continuously at full rated load. 

. Nominal output voltage of engine/alternator set shall be 415 volts 50 Hz AC Supply with manual 

adjustment at all conditions of load with fine controls with a range of ± 10%. 

The frequency shall be maintained at 50 Hz ± 4% for the set. 

. The output wave-form shall be sinusoidal at all load conditions. 

. The engine/alternator set shall be selected for a high degree of performance with over all low full 

consumption for the normal life of the alternator set. 

. The engine/alternator set shall meet the requirements of all linear & non-linear loads, but oversizing 

of the alternator in order to meet the non-liner characteristics of loads can be considered if 

required. 

3. System Operation 

The set may be idle for a long time except for periodical test whenever there is a electrical supply failure, 

the set may required to run continuously for period even exceeding 24 hours. 

4. System Feature 

The entire work shall confirm to Bureau of Indian Standards safety standards; British Standards, and 

C.P.W.D. specifications. 

SPECIFICATION OF ENGINE/ALTERNATOR 

1. Scope 

The scope of this section covers general requirement for reciprocating diesel engine and alternator 

complete with drive, safety controls, lubricating system, cooling system, instruments etc., including 

erection, testing and successful commissioning on load. 

2. Diesel Engine 

Diesel engine shall be multi-cylinder, 1500 RPM reciprocating, 4-stroke internal combustion conforming 

to BS 649 and shall be of welded construction or of fine grain cast iron. The crank case shall be of iron 

alloy, casting, crank shaft shall be of high tensile forging corresponding to medium carbon steel of 1045 

(AISI) grade, Main B.E bearing shall be of high grade beraing material, connecting rod shall be of 1 beam 

high grade of drop forged steel corresponding to carbon steel of 1139 grade, cylinder liner shall be wet 

type cast is alloy iron with specially machined groomed in the bores to serve as oil retaining surfaces, 

piston shall be of low expansion aluminium alloy with machined surfaces. 

The engine shall be equipped with all required standard accessories. 

Fly wheel & housing 

Oil bath air cleaner 

Exhaust turbo charger & after coolers 

Flexible coupling and coupling guard 

Lubricating pump and fuel injection pump 

Nozzles 

Page 46 of 174



NRDA 

Governor Mechanical/Hydraulic 

Oil pressure guage and water temp guage 

Fuel filter, fuel tank and fuel lines 

Turbo charged aspiration 

Water cooled radiator 

Other fittings recommended by the manufacturer. 

The lubricating system shall be positive pressure type for all moving parts. No moving parts shall require 

lubricating by hand, either prior to starting or while in operation. 

The lubricating system shall consist of following major components. 

Oil pan 

Oil pump 

Oil pipe/hose 

Oil cooler 

Oil temperature & gauge 

Oil pressure gauge 

Lubricating oil filter shall be provided for operation of 500 hour without any necessity of replacement or cleaning. 

The engine shall be water cooled with radiator. All standard accessories in respect of radiator like inlet, 

outlet connection, fuel connection, drain plug etc. shall be provided. 

Engines shall be suitable for running at 1500 RPM the speed of the engine shall be controlled by means of 

a governor which may sense the actual speed and make adjustment to the fuel system when required. 

The speed governing system shall be Class A2 hydraulic/mechanical type as per BS 649. The engine shall 

have a governing as per Indian Standards. 

Engine Starting:The engine shall be self starting type. The stature motor shall confirm to BS-2613-1970. 

Time required for starting of engine from cold conditions shall be 30 seconds maximum. 

Fuel Tanks :Fuel tank(s) shall be fabricated from 3 mm thick MS sheet and of 990 liters capacity. Fuel lines 

shall be of MS "C" class welded pipe & standard hose pipes. The fuel tank shall have all standard fittings 

like outlet, fuel return, drain & vent connection. The fuel tank shall also level indicator so as to indicate 

the quantity of fuel present in liters. 

Air Intake and Exhaust System:Industrial type Air intake filter shall be provided in the turbo charger 

assembly of the engine unit. The exhaust system shall consist of turbo charger with cladded pipe inter 

connecting it with the cylinder head inlet. The exhaust manifold shall be suitably lagged and covered as 

well. The exhaust pipe shall discharge the exhaustible smoke at the specified height as per CPCB’s rules. 

The exhaust system which carries away the products of combustion from the engine to the atmosphere 

shall be such as to restrict the back pressure within prescribed limit (below 75 mm of Hg) to ensure 

proper engine operation. 

The silencer shall be of residential type which can provide about 20-30 db suppression in noise. A test 

certificate to this effect shall be furnished. 

DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF D.G.SET 

1. Engine 

. Instrumentation on Engine 

) Speedometer with time totalizer. 

) Lub oil pressure gauge. 

) Lub oil temperature gauge. 

) Cooling water temperature gauge. 

Page 47 of 174



NRDA 

) Battery Charger. 

) Starting switch with key. 

) Over speed relays. 

. Alarms/Trip (Audio and Visual) 

) Over speed. 

) High Cooling water temperature. 

) Low lub oil pressure. 

2. Alternator 

Screen protected, drip proof, 3 phase 415 Volts, 4 wire, 50 Hz, 0.8 p.f., 1500 RPM, self regulated, class B 

insulation, brushless alternator; continuous rating as per relevant Indian Standards, A removable gland 

plate shall be provided for the cables. Also an automatic voltage regulator at 415 Volts ± 2.5% shall be 

provided. Enclosure shall be as per IP-23. Rated voltage shall be 415 V suitable for 50° ambient 

temperature and overload capacity shall be 10% for one hour during 12 hours continuous running. 

Exciter 

Self excited, self regulated, providing alternator output regulation at plus or minus 2.5%, from no load to 

full load along P.F. between unity to 0.8 lagging, with 4% speed variable, of the engine. Solid state 

excitation system is preferred. 

BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENT 

Battery charging equipment should be incorporated in the generator panel and shall comprise of: 

) AC and DC "ON" and "OFF" switches with HRC fuses. 

) Indicating lamps for indicating mains "ON" and battery charging. 

) Ballast to give charging. 

) Single phase double wound (copper conductor) impregnated natural air cooled mains 

transformer for rectifier stock. 

) Rotary switch to give step control. 

) Single phase full wave bridge connected silicon rectifier stack. 

) Moving coil ammeter to indicate charging current. 

) viii.Moving coil Voltmeter with a selector switch to measure the battery/charger voltage. 

) Silicon blocking diodes connected to a suitable tap to maintain continuity of DC supply. 

) AC and DC contactors of suitable rating as required. 

Page 48 of 174



NRDA 

3 Generator Control Panel 

Floor mounting type totally enclosed, dead front, sheet metal cubical type switch board for the alternator 

incorporating all the instruments, protective devices, alarms as required. Sub assemblies shall be fully 

draw out type for easy maintenance. 

4. Automatic Mains Failure Panel (AMF) 

The AMF panel shall be floor mounted totally enclosed steel cubical type suitable for the generator. The 

AMF panel shall be provided with one number 3 pole contactor/air circuit breaker, trip mechanism of 

suitable capacity, 500 volts, 50 cycles supply system for emergency power supply side, along with a 

neutral contactor of suitable capacity. Suitable provision shall be made for cable termination/bus 

trunking as required on the mains supply side. AMF Panel shall automatically transfer the load from 

mains to emergency supply if the main supply fails or low voltage persists for more than 5 seconds. It 

shall also return the power from emergency to mains supply when the mains persists for more than 2 

minutes. A set of relays shall be provided for this purpose. AMF Panel shall be provided with such delay 

features that transfer of load takes place when the generator output reaches 90% of its rates voltage and 

frequency. AMF panel shall be interlocked with the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breakers/contractor 

of the MV panel AMF panel shall be provided with a manual operation of the load transfer. AMF Panel 

shall be provided with the following meters and indicating lamps : 0-500 Volts square voltmeter with 3 

way and off selector switch, on laid side. Neon indicating lamps to indicate the source of supply either 

from mains or the generator. These instruments are in addition to those mentioned in clause `2' above. 

The following are the automatic operations to be incorporated in the AMF panel. 

) The generator power and the mains power at the AMF panel are to be electrically interlocked 

through a set of sensors and relays for changing power supply to emergency load. 

) Generator shall start automatically and be on line with 10-40 seconds when the selector switch is 

in automatic position. 

) AMF Panel starts the diesel generator set automatically upon sensing unhealthy mains supply on 

the incomer to the AMF Panel persistently for a period, which may be adjustable and variable 

from 10 to 100 seconds, when the generator has built up its normal voltage and frequency. The 

emergency conditions on mains supply may be defined as follows: 

Failure of 1, 2 or 3 phase. 

. Under voltage condition (20% below normal voltage of 415 Volts AC). 

. Faulty generator supply would be disconnected from load automatically. 

. AMF Panel shall transfer the load to mains supply after 2 minutes on resumption of stablised 

healthy mains supply. 

. The diesel generator set stops after a time for engine cooling (180 seconds) and is ready for 

automatic start when required. 

. If the AMF Panel trips because of a fault in load circuit, the diesel generator should not start 

automatically. 

Page 49 of 174



NRDA 

. In the case of any engine fault, the contactor/M.C.C.B of the (AMF Panel) will trip, and engine will 

stop. The respective fault light will be indicated on the panel. The engine can be restarted only 

after rectifying the engine fault after restoring the fault relay, through reset push button. 

. When the selector switch is in manual position, the operator shall have complete control of the 

system except that no safety or protective devices and/or interlocks are to be by passed. 

. Transferring the selector switch (automatic/manual or vice versa) position should not cause any 

change in the operation condition of the system. 

5. Accessories on A.M.F. Panel 

) A.C.B/M.C.C.B/Contactor suitable for 415 volts 50 Hz AC supply. 

) Engine start push button. 

) Engine stop push button. 

) Alarm acknowledgement push button. 

) Test push button. 

) Alarm Reset push button. 

6. A.M.F. Logic Device 

) Main supply failure and voltage monitor relay. 

) Main supply failure time. 

) Restoration timers. 

) Control unit consisting of start/stop 3 impulse starting relay, and failure to start lockout. 

) Selector switch for MANUAL, AUTO, TEST and OFF position. 

) Counter for counting number of operations. 

7. Instrumentation 

) 1. No. of 96x96 square type voltmeter with selector switch, (0-500 Volt). The voltage shall be 

read on mains supply, generator supply, and bus supply, through selector switches. 

) 1 No. of 96x96 square type ammeter with suitable CT's to measure current suitable selector 

switch for measurement of load current. 

) 1 No. frequency meter solid state type, 24 V. DC operated with 12mm LED display on reed type 

(Hz). 

) 1 No. Kilowatt meter of size/144 mm x/144 mm. 

) 1 No. of Kilowatt hour meter suitable for 4 wire power supply system. 

) Set of current transformers of adequate ratio for metering and protection. 

) Power factor meter 144mm x 144mm with range 0.8 lagging to 0.8 leading p.f. 

) Battery charging voltmeter and ammeter, for trickle & boost charging (96mm x 96mm). 

Page 50 of 174



NRDA 

) Mechanical counter for counting the operation of A.M.F panel. 

) Hooter for audio alarm. 

Protection 

) Under voltage relay. 

Alarms Annunciation devices 

Visual & Audio 

) One each of operation of protection circuit. 

) High water temperature, low lube oil pressure, engine over speed, under voltage, set overload 

(more than 10%), earth leakage fault, set fails to starts. 

Indication 

) Set Running, red pilot lamp. 

) Main supply ON/OFF, red pilot lamp. 

) Load ON .. green pilot lamp. 

) Main supply fail .... yellow pilot lamp. 

) Load on main and load on set .... pilot lamp. 

) Battery on charge.... pilot lamp. 

8. Fuses 

All the control components and sub circuits should be protected with low voltage HRC fuse links. HRC 

fuses wherever used shall be in accordance with IS 9224 (Part-II), 1979. HRC fuses shall be of English 

Electric make or equivalent. If contacts are used for power isolation it shall be backed up with fuses of 

adequate capacity. 

9. Indicating Instruments and Lamps 

All the indicating instruments mounted on the panel shall be flush mounted and draw out type. All the 

indicating lamps shall be preferably neon type and backed up with protective fuses and toggle switches. 

10. Earthing 

All the non current carrying parts of the panel shall be connected with the frame work of the panel. 

Provision shall be made for connection of Main earth on both the sides of the panel. 

11. Labels 

Page 51 of 174



NRDA 

Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all circuit elements. Circuit diagram showing the arrangements 

shall be pasted on inside of the panel door and covered with transparent laminated plastic sheet. 

12. Specification for Acoustic Enclosure:- 

The acoustic enclosure suitable for DG set shall be made of cold rolled sheet steel, completely 

weather proof and suitable for outdoor installation. 

The outer wall and roof panels made of 14 SWG/16 SWG CRC plain press bent sheet comprises at 

least 100 mm thick steel fabricated double wall. The inner sheet made of 1.2 mm thick perforated 

CRC/MS sheet. Two slabs each of 50 mm thick having a density of 96kg/m³ mineral wool 

mattresses are sandwiched through suitable framing and channels. The panels are mounted on 

the structure through suitable clamps and fasteners. Proper care ensured for heat rejection by 

providing suitable nos. and capacity axial/exhausts fans to ensure its efficient functioning. Visual 

display of engine parameters provided on the enclosure. Proper acoustic louvers are provided to 

take care of fresh air requirement and to control noise level up to 75db at a distance of three 

meter outside the enclosure. 

The enclosure must be finished with the paint of an architect’s choice with a facility of 

emergency light. 

13. Technical Data Required with Quotation 

. Ventilation Requirements 

Air flow required for combustion. 

Recommendation (air changes/hour) for generator room ventilation. 

. Foundation details and special vibration isolator details for maximum vibration isolation. 

. Physical dimensions and service clearances. 

. Complete technical literature. 

. Fuel oil specifications and oil consumption per hour at full load. 

. Lubricating oil specification and oil consumption. 

14. Specification of Materials 

I. Exhaust Silencer Piping 

The exhaust silencer piping system shall be of heavy duty MS pipes confirming to Class B. Suitable length 

of flexible piping shall be used for connecting the exhaust piping to the engine as per the 

recommendations of the manufacturer. In any case, it should not be less than 12 inches. MS screwed 

flanges and bends shall be used as per site requirements. 

Exhaust pipe inside the building shall be lagged with 12mm dia asbestos rope and suitably bonded with 

asbestos cloth. 

II. 

Water Piping and Oil Piping 

Water Piping shall be of C class GI pipe. Oil piping shall be of GI or braided flexible type only. Cooling 

water and oil piping shall be tested in accordance with ASA-B 31.1 pressure piping code. 

Page 52 of 174



NRDA 

III. Wiring 

) All the wiring outside the panel shall be draw into 16 gauge MS conduits. 

) The minimum size of wires outside the panel shall be 2.5 mm² stranded copper conductor. 

) The minimum size of control cables inside the panel shall be 1.5 mm² stranded copper conduct. 

) All the wires and cables suitable for 650/1100 Volts. As per IS-694-1990 latest amendment. 

15. Earthing 

General 

All the non current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed properly. All metal 

conducts, cable sheaths, switchgear and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded together and 

connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an efficient earthing system. Generator neutral 

shall be earthed separately. All earthing shall be in conformity with the relevant provision of Rules 33 and 

61 of the Indian Electricity Rules 1956 and Indian Standard Specifications IS : 3043 : 1966 and all staring 

laying, jointing procedures as same as stated elsewhere. 

16. Installation of Generating Set 

) The engine and alternator shall be mounted on specially designed common MS base plate and 

frame of extremely rigid welded construction, so as to provide no deflection. 

) A cement concrete foundation base with 1:2:4 Mix or as per recommendations of manufacturer, 

and up to 200mm (approx) above the floor level shall be provided for installation of DG Set. A 

35mm x 35mm x 3mm MS angle iron section shall be welded along all the edges. 

) The engine/alternator set shall be installed over the B-type anti-vibration cushy base in order to 

isolate the transmission of vibrations to the floor or building structures. 

) The exhaust system shall be designed and installed in such a manner that it avoids excessive 

stresses on the exhaust manifold of turbocharger, washing spray or any other source. 

) The exhaust pipe shall pass through an oversized collar, filled with glass wool when crossing 

floor/wall. 

) All exposed metal parts shall be suitably painted to prohibit corrosion under the climatic 

conditions at site. 

) The installation of fuel piping, power distribution and control panels shall be carried out in 

accordance with the specification of respective items. 

17. Trials 

Preliminary Trials 

After completion of erection of generating sets and before carrying out main trials, preliminary trials shall 

be conducted in the presence of the ENGINEER-IN- CHARGE and the results shall be recorded in the test 

sheet at 30 minutes intervals. Alternator efficiencies as determined in works test shall be used as the 

basis of calculation for fuel consumption rate. A tolerance of 15% shall be allowed on the fuel oil 

consumption to cover possible errors of measurement. Tests providing the satisfactory performance of 

all safety and operating controls shall be carried out. Alternator insulation resistance and commutation 

check shall be as per BS 2613/BS 5000. Starting time of sets shall be tested at least five times the 

Page 53 of 174



NRDA 

sufficient time integral to allow for cold start. All instruments, materials and labour required for carrying 

out the trials shall be provided by the Contractor. Test sheets of trials shall be forwarded in quadruplicate 

to architect. The successful bidder has to submit a list of recommended spares to client for purchasing 

the same. A set of tools and tackles has to be supplied along with each set. List of recommended spares 

shall be indicated to client. 

18. Fuel Oil Transfer Pump 

Separate hand driven semi-rotary type oil transfer pump shall be so provided. The pump should be 

suitable for transfer of fuel oil from barrel to day service tank. 

19. Painting 

The Contractor shall paint all exposed metal parts and equipment supplied by him. All sheet metal work 

shall undergo a process of phosphating, passivating and then sprayed with high corrosion treatment of 

two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved colour. All piping shall be colour coded. 

20. 24 Volts DC Batteries 

Sufficient nos. lead acid type batteries, each 12 volt - 25 plates: 180 AH conforming to IS shall be provided 

for each set for starting purposes. These batteries shall be fitted with electrolyte (specific gravity 1.220) 

and initially charged, discharged and recharged and placed in suitable enclosure, in ready to use shape. 

21. Shock Treatment Chart 

Shock treatment chart explaining the method of shock treatment in English, Hindi and local language shall 

be provided dully framed in glass in the diesel generating station. 

22. Wiring 

) Providing conduits and drawing wires from the following : - 

) Control wiring between diesel generating set and the automatic mains failure panel. 

) All wiring associated with the fuel oil transfer pump and including level controllers and circulating 

water pumps. 

) All wiring associated with DC supply. 

) All earthing conductors associated with this installation. 

All wiring and cables shall be PVC insulated stranded copper conductor wires and cables suitable for 

660/1100 volts minimum size of wires for control wiring shall be 2.5 sq.mm and minimum size of wire for 

pumps shall be 4 sq.mm. The wires would be as per IS. 

23. Cables 

MV cables shall be PVC insulated aluminium conductor armoured cables, laid in trenches between diesel 

generating set and automatic mains failure panel. All power & control cables will be rated for 1.1 KV 

grade. Storing, laying, jointing procedures as same as that for the LT cables stated elsewhere. 

24. Test Perform 

Scope 

This section lay down the procedure for conducting test on the installation. In general the procedure laid 

down here shall be followed. However, if manufacturer of the equipment has prescribed different 

procedure which is at variance, the same may be adopted. All required artificial load, testing equipment 

other required material required for testing purpose shall be supplied by agency. 

Page 54 of 174



NRDA 

Physical Test 

. Particulars such as name plate details of all major component equipment shall be recorded and 

compared with what has been offered by the contractor as per agreement. 

. Level of foundation. 

. Firmness of mounting. 

. Verticality of installed set. 

. Tightness of nuts & bolts. 

. Proper installation of exhaust pipe. 

. Insulation of exhaust pipe with asbestos rope. 

. Provision of guard on engine/alternator set coupling joints. 

. Termination of various cables. 

. Rating of various fuses. 

. Termination of earth leads on neutral & body. 

Earth Resistance 

The resistance shall be measured by isolating the connecting earth lead in respect of all earth 

stations. 

Run Test 

The engine shall be given a test run continuously for at least six hours with alternating supplying full rated 

load. During this run following observation shall be recorded. 

S.No. ITEMS TIME AFTER START OF RUN/TEST 

1 Hr 2 Hr 3 Hr 4 Hr 5 Hr 6 Hr 7 Hr 

1. Lubricating oil pressure 

2. Exhaust gas colour 

3. Speed engine 

4. Output voltage 

5. Load current 

6. Load (KW) 

Fuel Consumption Test 

Page 55 of 174



NRDA 

. Fuel consumption for half an hour shall be measured after the full load operation condition have 

stablised. 

. During this measurement the load shall be maintained unchanged. 

. The fuel consumption shall be compared with values given in the technical particulars. 

Over Load 

. Over load test to the extent of 10% over the rated load shall be conducted immediately after the 

full load run test. 

. The various parameters as in the case of run test shall regularly be monitored and recorded. 

. After the over load test, the load shall be normalised to rated value and all parameters recorded. 

Insulation Test 

. Insulation test shall be conducted after testing the engine/alternator set at overload. 

. SAFETY & MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS 

Scope 

This section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the substation for compliance with 

statutory regulations safety and operational needs. 

Requirements 

Safety provision shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A) and (C) of CPWD General 

Specifications for Electrical Works (part 1 Internal) 1972. In particular the following items shall be 

provided. 

) Insulation Mats 

Insulation mats confirming to IS : 5424-1969 shall be provided in front of main switch boards and other 

control equipment as specified 

) First Aid charts and First Aid Box 

Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional language), displaying methods of giving artificial 

respiration to a recipient of electrical shock shall be prominently provided at appropriate places. 

Standard First Aid Boxes containing materials as prescribed by St. John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red 

Cross should be provided in each sub-station. 

) Danger Plate 

Danger plates shall be provided on HV and MV equipment. MV danger notice plate shall be 200 mm x 

150 mm made of mild steel at least 2 mm thick vitreous enamelled white on both sides and with 

inscriptions in signal red colour on front side as required. 

Size of the HV Danger Notice plate shall be 250 mm x 200 mm and 2 mm thick. 

) Fire Extinguishers 

Page 56 of 174



NRDA 

Portable CO2 conforming to IS :2878-1976 dry chemical (conforming to IS : 2171-1976) extinguishers 

shall be installed in the sub-station at suitable places as specified. 

) Fire Buckets 

Fire buckets conforming to IS : 2546-1974 shall be installed with the suitable stand for storage of water 

and sand. 

) Tool Box 

A standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and maintenance shall be provided 

in sub-station. 

) Caution Board 

Four number of 16 gauge M.S sheet caution boards (of size 300 mm x 150 mm) with the language such as 

"Man on Line", "Don't switch on" etc. shall be available in the sub-station. 

The boards shall be printed in RED on white back ground on both sides and provided with wire hook at 

the top for hanging. 

) Key Board 

A key board of required size shall be provided at a proper place containing castle keys, and all other keys 

of sub-station and allied areas. 

Standard first aid box containing following material as prescribed by St.John Ambulance brigade 

or India Red Cross shall be provided (First aid box should be of 18 gauge M.S sheet of size 14" x 

17" x 5"):- 

6 wound dressings small (for injured fingers) 

3 wound dressings medium (for injured hands & feets) 

3 wound dressings (for other injuries) 

3 burn dressings(large) 

Absorbent cotton wool -13 grams 

One dressing scissor 

1 bottle liquid iodine (I.P 25 m/s) 

1 bottle spirt of sal volatile (I.P 25 m/s) 

1 packet potassium permanganate (I.P 25 gms) 

1 snake bite lace 

1 packet of soda; bi-carbonate (I.P 25 gms) 

1 bottle of 100 tablets, of 5 gms aspirin 

1 bottle of antiseptic solution 

1 tube of burn ointment (Burnol/Purocin ) 

) A SHOCK TREATMENT CHART of size 900mm x 600mm high, printed preferably in three 

languages i.e. Hindi, English & local language; duly framed on 3mm thick hard board and 

covered with transparent polythene sheet shall be provided. An artificial respirator of M/s 

Industrial Medical Engineers, New Delhi or equivalent. 

Page 57 of 174



NRDA 

G 

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES 

1. Type 

All Medium voltage or Low voltage supply cables shall be PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire 

armoured or steel tape armoured construction. The conductors of cable from 16 mm 2 to 35 mm 2 size 

shall be stranded. Sector shaped stranded conductors shall be used for cables of 50 mm 2 size and above. 

The cables shall conform to IS: 1554 part-I (1988) in all respects. 

2. Rating 

The cable shall be rated for a voltage of 1100 volts. 


The conductors shall be made of solid stranded electrical parity Alluminium in case of aluminium 

conductor and high conductvity copper conductor for the copper conductor cables. The conductor shall 

be insulated with high quality PVC base compound comparing to IS 5831-1970. A common covering 

(bedding) shall be applied over the laid up cores by extruded sheath of unvulcanised compound. 

Armouring shall be applied over the inner sheath of bedding. Over the armouring a tough outer sheath of 

PVC sheating shall be extruded. The outer sheath shall bear the manufactures name and trade mark at 

every meter length. 

4. Core identification 

Core shall be provided with the following colour scheme of PVC insulation. 

1.0 Core : Red/Black/Yellow/Blue 

2.0 Core : Red and Black 

3.0 Core : Red, Yellow & Blue 

3.5 Core : Red, Yellow, Blue & Black Neutral 

4.0 Core : Red, Yellow, Blue & Black Neutral 

5. Current Rating 

The current ratings shall be based on the following condition: 

) Maximum conductor temperature : 75 0 

C 

) Ambient Air temperature : 

0 0 

40 C/45 C 

) Ground temperature : 30 C 

) Depth of laying : 75 cm. 

6. Short circuit rating 

Short circuit ratings for the cables shall be as specified in IS : 1554 Part-I. 

7. Selection of Cables 

Cables have been selected considering the conditions of the maximum connected load, ambient 

temperature, grouping of cables and the allowable voltage drop. However, the contractors shall re-check 

the size before the cables are fixed and connected to the service. 

8. Storing, handling, laying, jointing and termination 

Storing 

0 

Page 58 of 174



NRDA 

All the cables shall be supplied in drums. On receipt of cables at site. It should be ensured that both ends 

of the cables are properly sealed to prevent ingress/absorption of moisture lay the insulation. The cables 

shall be inspected and stored in drums with flanges of the cable drum in vertical position. Whenever 

cable drums have to be moved over short distances, they should be rolled in the direction of the arrow, 

marked on the drum and while removing cables from the drums the drum shall be properly mounted on 

jacks or on a cable wheel or any other suitable means making sure the spindle, jack etc. are strong 

enough to take the weight of the drum. 

Handling 

The cables shall not be bent sharp to a small radius. The minimum safe bending radius for all types of 

PVC cables shall be taken 12 times of the overall diameter of the cable, wherever practicale, larger radius 

should be adopted. At joints and termination’s, the bending radius of individual cores of a multi-core 

cable shall not be less that 15 times. 

Cables with kinks and straghtened kinks or with similar apparent defects like defective armouring etc. 

shall not be installed. 

Cables of different voltages and also power and control cables should be kept in different trenches with 

adequate separation. Where available space is restricted low voltages or medium voltages cables shall be 

laid above HV cables or where cables cross one another the cable of higher voltage shall be laid at a lower 

level than the cable of lower voltage. Power and communication cables shall be as far as possible cross at 

right angles to each other. Where power cables are laid in parallel to communication cables the 

horizontal and vertical clearances shall not normally be less than 600mm. 

During the preliminary stages of laying the cable consideration should be given to proper location of the 

joint position so that when the cable is actually laid the joints are made in the most suitable places. As 

well as possible water logged locations, carriage ways, pavements, proximity to telephone cable, gas or 

water mains, in accessible places, ducts, pipes, racks etc. shall be avoided for joint positions. 

The PVC cables shall not in any circumstances be bent so as to form an abrupt right angle but must be 

rounded off at the corners to a radius not less than six times of the overall diameter of the cable. 

In case where there are chances of any damage to the cables it shallbe covered with a steel metal 

protective covering (not less than 16SWG) or drawn through a heavy guage metal conduit pipe. While 

cutting and stripping of the outer covering of the cable, care shall be taken that the sharp edge of the 

cutting instrument does not touch the inner insulation of the conductors. The protective outer covering 

of the cables shall be striped off near the connecting terminal and this protective covering shall be 

maintained upto the close proximity of connecting terminals as far as practicable. 

Care shall be taken to avoid hammering on link clips with any metal instruments after the cables are laid. 

Where junction boxes are provided, they shall be made moisture proof with a plastic compound. 

Laying 

Cables shall be laid as per the specifications given below : 

) Duct system 

Wherever specified such as road crossing, entry to building or in paved area etc. cables shall be laid in 

under ground ducts. The duct system shall consists of a required number of stone ware pipes, GI, CI or 

Page 59 of 174



NRDA 

spun reinforced concrete pipe with simplex joints and all the jointing work shall be done according to the 

CPWD building specifications or as per the instructions of the Engineer-In-Charge as the case may be. The 

size of the pipe shall not be less than 100mm in diameter for a single cable and shall not be less than 

150mm for more than one cable and so on. The pipe shall be laid directly in ground without making any 

special bed but wherever asbestos cement pipes are used, the pipes shall be encased in concrete of 

75mm thick. The ducts shall be properly anchored to prevent any movement. The top surface of the 

cable ducts shall not be less than 60 cm. below the ground level. The ducts shall be laid a gradient of at 

least 1:300. The duct shall be provided manholes of adequate size at regular intervals for drawing the 

cables. The manhole cover and frame shall be of cast iron and machine finished to ensure a perfect joint. 

The manhole covers shall be installed flush with the ground or paved surfaces. The duct entry to the 

manholes shall be made leakproof with lead-wool joints. The ducts shall be properly plugged at the ends 

to prevent entry of water, rodents, etc. Suitable duct markers shall be placed along the run of the cable 

ducts. The duct markers shall at least be 15 cm. square embedded in concrete, indicating duct. Suitable 

cable supports made of angle iron shall be provided in the manholes for supporting the cables. Proper 

identification tags shall be provided for each cable in the manholes. 

) Cables in outdoor trenches 

Cable shall be laid in outdoor trenches wherever called for. The depth of the trenches shall not be less 

than 75cm from the final ground level. The width of the trenches shall not be less than 45 cm. However, 

where more than one cable is laid, an axial distance of not less than 15 cm. shall be allowed between the 

cables. The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight line with vertical side walls and with 

uniform depth. Wherever there is a change in direction suitable curvature shall be provided complying 

with the requirements. Suitable shoring and propping may be done to avoid caving in of trench walls. 

The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone brick bats etc. The trench shall then be 

provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 8 cm. in depth. 

The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks and strains. The 

entire cable length shall as far as possible be paved of in one stretch. However where this is not possible 

the remainder of the cable may be removed by "Flaking" i.e. by making one long loop in the reverse 

direction. After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the rollers, the cable shall be 

lifted slightly over the rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing about 10 mtrs. apart and drawn 

straight. The cable should then be taken off the rollers by additional helpers lifting the cable and then 

laid in a reasonably straight line. 

For short cut runs and sizes upto 50 sq.mm of cables upto 1.1 KV grade any other suitable method of 

direct handling and laying can be adopted with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge. 

When the cable has been properly straightened, the cores are tested for continuity and insulation 

resistance and the cable length then measured. The ends of all cables shall be sealed immediately. In 

case of PVC cables suitable moisture seal tape shall be used for this purpose. 

Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a covering of clean, dry sand of not less 17 cms 

above the base cushion of sand before the protective cover is laid. In the case of vertical multi tier 

formation after the first cable has been laid, a sand cushion of 30 cms shall be provided over the initial 

bed before the second tier is laid. If additional tiers are formed, each of the subsequent tiers also shall 

have a sand cushion of 30 cms. as stated above. The top most cable shall have a final sand covering not 

less than 17 cms. before the protective cover is laid. 

Page 60 of 174



NRDA 

Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by the second class bricks of not less 20 cms x 10 

cms x 10 cms. (nominal size) protection covers placed on top of the sand (bricks to be laid breadth wise) 

for the full length of the cable. Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench, this 

protective covering shall cover all the cables and project at 5 cm. over the sides of the end cables. The 

trenches shall be taken back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp edge debris and 

shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding 30 cm, unless otherwise 

specified. 

Route Marker 

Cable route marker marked "Cable" shall be provided alongwith the route of the cable and location of 

loops. The route markers shall be of tapered concrete slab of 60 x 60cm. at bottom and 50 x 50cm. at top 

having a thickness of 10cm. Cable marker shall be mounted parallel to and 50cm. away from the edge of 

the trench. 

) Cables in indoor trenches 

Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches wherever specified. The trench shall be made of brick masonry 

with smooth cement mortar finish with suitable removable covers (i.e. precasted slabsor chequered 

plates). The dimensions of the trenches shall be determined depending upon the maximum number of 

cables that is expected to be accommodated and can be conveniently laid. Cables shall be arranged in 

tier formation in trenches and if necessary, cables may be fixed with clamps. Suitable clamps, hooks and 

saddles shall be used for securing the cables in position. Spacing between the cables shall not be less 

than 15 cm centre to centre. Wherever specified, trenches shall be filled with fine sand and covered with 

RCC or steel chequered trench covers. 

) Cable on Trays/Racks 

Cable shall be laid on cable trays/racks wherever specified. Cable racks/trays shall be of ladder, trough or 

channel design suitable for the purpose. The nominal depth of the trays/racks shall be 150 mm. The 

width of the trays shall be made of steel or aluminium. The trays/racks shall be completed with end 

plates, tees, elbows, risers, and all necessary hardware, steel trays shall be hot dip galvanised. Cable trays 

shall be erected properly to present a neat and clean appearance. Suitable cleats or saddles made of 

aluminium strips with PVC covering shall be used for securing the cables to the cable trays. The cable 

trays shall comply with the following requirements : 

The tray shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate support for all contained cables. 

It shall not present sharp edges, burrs or projections injurious to the insulation of wiring/cables. 

If made of metal, it shall be adequately protected against corrosion or shall be made of corrosionresistant 

material. 

It shall have side rails or equivalent structural members. 

It shall include fittings or other suitable means for changes in direction and elevation of runs. 

Installation 

Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Trays shall be supported properly from the building 

structure. The entire cable tray system shall be rigid. 

Each run of the cable tray shall be completed before the installation of cables. 

Page 61 of 174



NRDA 

In portions where additional protection is required, non combustible covers/enclosures shall be used. 

Cable trays shall be exposed and accessible. 

Where cables of different system are installed on the same cable tray, non combustible, solid barriers 

shall be used for segregating the cables. 

Cable trays shall be grounded by two nos, earth continuity wires. Cable trays shall not be used as 

equipment grounding conductors. 

Jointing and termination’s 

Cable jointing shall be done as per the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. All jointing work 

shall be done only by qualified/lincensed cable jointer. 

All jointing pits shall be of sufficient dimensions as to allow easy and comfortable working. 

Jointing materials and accessories like conductor, ferrules, solder, flex, insulating and protective tapes, 

filling compound, jointing box etc. of right quality and correct sizes, confirming to relevant Indian 

Standards. 

Each termination’s shall be carried out using brass compression glands and cable sockets. Hydraulic 

crimping tool hall be used for making the end termination’s. Cable gland shall be bonded to the earth by 

using suitable size copper wire/tape. 

9. Testing 

Cable jointing shall be tested at factory as per the requirements of IS:s 1554 Part-I. The tests shall 

incorporate routine tests, type tests and acceptance tests. 

Cable shall be tested at site after installation and the results shall be submitted to the 

Architects/Engineer. 

Insulation resistance between conductors and neutral and conductors and earth. 

Pressure test for 15 minutes. 

Page 62 of 174



NRDA 

H 

MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CONTROL CENTRES AND SWITCHBOARD PANELS 

1. General 

Medium voltage power control centres (generally termed as switchboard panels) shall be in sheet steel 

clad cubicle pattern, free floor standing wall mounting type, totally enclosed, compartmentalized design 

having multitier arrangement of the incomers and feeders as per details given in the schedule of 

quantities. The panels shall be of extensible type with provision of bus bar extensions. All panels shall 

conform to the requirements of the latest addition of IS and shall be suitable for 415 V, 3 phase AC supply 

or 230 V single phase AC supply as required. 


All switch board panels or power control centres of free standing type shall have a bus bar chamber at the 

top and the cable compartment at the bottom or as approved by the Architects/Consultants depending 

upon the specific requirements of the job. The space between the bus chamber and cable compartment 

shall be suitably compartmentalized to accommodate either air circuit breakers or switch fuse feeders of 

various ratings. The cable termination’s shall be carried out on the rear side of the panels for which 

adequate space and clamping arrangements shall be provided. Where panels have to be installed with 

very little access space at the rear, the cable termination’s shall be carried out in suitable cable alleys 

provided on the front of the panel. All the live parts shall be properly shrouded with Bakelite barriers. All 

the equipment shall be accessible from the front. However, protection relays, KWH meters, etc. may be 

mounted on the rear side/front side if required.Arrangements and marking of bus bars, main connections 

and wiring shall be in accordance with IS: 5578 -1985 and 11353-1985. 

The structure of the panel shall be robust and provided with adequate bracing’s to withstand the 

operation of the equipment and stresses due to system short circuit. The panels shall be fabricated out of 

best quality heavy gauge sheet steel. The panel shall be machine pressed with punched openings for 

meters, indicating lamps etc. 

3. Dimensions 

All power control centres shall have dimensions of not more than that given on the layout drawings. 

Panels arranged side by side shall have the same height and depth. The height of the panel should be 

limited to 2400 mm. All the operating levers, handles etc. of the heighest unit shall not be at a height 

more than 1700mm from F.F.L. For all incoming cables a removable gland plate will be provided in the 

panel and a minimum distance of 300 mm will be provided between the gland plate and the nearest 

terminal for proper dressing and termination of the cable. All the components of a module will be 

mounted on a component plate using the machine screws and taped holes (excepting the components 

mounted on the door). These component plates should be fixed with bolts for easy replacement. 

Standardisation will be adopted while making these plates so that the component plates of the same size 

modules can be changed from one module to another. In case of panel of lengths more than 4 meters 

the fabrication of any single section will be limited to a maximum length of 4 mtr. for the purpose of 

shipping and shifting at the site. These sections will be assembled at the location of installation with the 

help of nuts and bolts. While making these sections consideration will be given to the place of 

sectionalization and select the location where the minimum electrical connections are transferred from 

one section to another. All the hardwares used in the assembly will be electroplated for protection and 

neat appearance. 

4. Bus Bars 

Page 63 of 174



NRDA 

The bus bars shall be suitable for 4 wire, 415 volts, 50 Hz, system. The main bus bar shall be made of high 

conductivity electricity conductor grade electrolytic AL 91E Aluminium and shall be liberally sized. In case 

of copper bus bar it shall be electrically conductor grade electrolytic copper and at the time of joining of 

two copper buses tinning will be done on the copper strips ends to a length equal to the lap length of the 

joint plus one each. The bus bars shall have uniform cross section throughout. The bus bars shall be 

capable of carrying the rated current at 415 volts continuously. The bus bar will run in a separate busbar 

chamber using bus insulators made of nondeteriorating, vermin proof, non hygroscopic materials such as 

epoxy fiber, reinforced polyester or moulding compound. The interval between the two insulators will be 

designed after considering: 

) Strength and safe load rating of the insulator, 

) The vibrating force generated during a fault, 

) A Factor of safety of 1.8 

) A set of insulators at both ends of the bus. 

The size of the bus bar calculations must be approved by the consultants. The bus bars shall be designed 

to withstand a temperature rise of 45 o above the ambient. To limit the temperature rise in the bus bar 

chamber a set of louvers can be provided at strategical places considering the air circulation. The louvers 

provided will have a brass wire mesh covering from inside with more than 100 openings per sq. inch. The 

overall temperature of bus bar shall not exceed 85°C in any case. A current density of 1.3 Amps/Sq.mm 

shall not be exceeded for aluminium bus bars. 

All the bus bars shall be insulated with PVC heat shrinking sleeves suitably throughout (except at joints) 

the length. The electro galvanised high tensile steel nuts, bolts, plain or spring washers of suitable size 

will be used in connecting the various section of the bus bar. A minimum of 1.6 times the width of bus 

bar will be the lapping length of each joint. 

5. Earthing 

The panels shall be provided with an aluminium or copper earth bus of suitable size running through out 

the length of the switchboard. Suitable earthling eyes/bolts shall be provided on the main earthing bus to 

connect the same to the earth grid at the site. Sufficient number of star washers shall be provided at the 

joints to achieve earth continuity between the panels and the sheet metal parts. 

6. Interlocking 

The panels shall be provided with the following interlocking arrangement. 

The door of the switch-fuse compartments is so interlocked with the switch drive or handle that the door 

can be opened only if the switch is in ÒFF' position. De-interlocking arrangement shall also be provided 

for occasional inspection. 

It shall not be possible for the breaker to be withdrawn when in ÒN' position. 

It shall not be possible for the breakers to be switched on unless it is either in fully inserted positions or 

for testing purposes in fully isolated position. 

The breaker shall be capable of being raked in to `testing' ìsolated' and `maintenance' positions and kept 

locked in any of these position. 

Page 64 of 174



NRDA 

A safety latch to ensure that the movement of the breaker as it is withdrawn, is checked before it is 

completely out of the cubicle shall be provided. 

7. Protection & Instrumentation 

Protection and instrumentation shall be as per standard specifications. 

8. Control Wiring 

The control wiring of all the panels will be done with PVC single core flexible copper wires of cross section 

1.5 sq.mm and 2.5 sq.mm. All the wiring involving current transformers or circuits with currents of more 

than 5 Amps will be wired with 2.5 sq.mm cross section wire and the others with1.5 sq.mm. Similarly all 

the interconnecting between the incoming bus and the outgoing of 100 Amps and above rating shall be 

done by insulated copper strips of suitable sizes and equipment below 10 Amps rating shall be wired with 

insulated copper conductors. All of the control wiring will be done by properly dressing all the wires in a 

laminar manner either in PVC duct of liberal size or bunched together by PVC strapping tapes at a 

distance not exceeding 150 mm. Each wire will terminate with a copper ferule crimped to the wire. The 

PVC ferules will be used to identify each wire of the circuit and the same number will be marked on the 

drawing for the corresponding wire. Only one outgoing wire will be connected to one connector. When 

the control wiring is crossing from fixed parts to moving parts such as door etc. the wire will be run in PVC 

sleeve of suitable size and the same will be mechanically clamped at both the ends i.e. one end of the 

fixed part and the other on the moving part. Under no circumstances the wiring should be under any kind 

of stress for which sufficient length of control wiring in the PVC sleeve should be provided. All the 

potential circuits shall be protected by fuses mounted near the tap off point from the main connections. 

9. Surface treatment 

The each part of the fabricated panel will be subjected to seven tank treatment and all sheet metal 

accessories and components of power control centres and switchboard panels shall be thoroughly 

cleaned, degreased, de-rusted and hot dip phosphatised before red oxide primer is applied. The panel 

shall be stove enamelled grey shade finish and the Interior surfaces of the panel shall be painted to an 

off-white shade. 

10. Enclosure 

The panel enclosure shall be totally dust and vermin proof and shall be suitable for indoor installation. All 

the cubical will be adopted with front located, outward openings, lockable doors having hidden hinges 

and a bolted back cover both using nodetoriorating neoprene rubber gasket. Enclosure design shall be in 

accordance with degree of protection IP 54 as per IS 13947-1962. All the nut bolts handles, meters, 

knobs etc. appearing from out side of the panel should be located in symmetry so as to give a neat 

appearance. 

11. Name plate 

The panel as well as the feeder compartment doors shall be provided with name plate giving the 

switchboard/feeder descriptions as indicated on the drawings. The above shall be mounted in metal 

holder with a clear plastic sheet on inside surface of the front door. 

12. Testing 

The power control centres shall be tested at factory after assembling of all components and completion 

of all interconnections and wiring. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of 

BS:3659. 

Insulation Test 

Page 65 of 174



NRDA 

Insulation of the main circuit, i.e. the insulation resistance of each pole to the earth and that between the 

poles shall be measured. 

Insulation resistance to earth of all secondary wiring should be tested with 1000 volt meggar. 

Insulation test shall be carried out both before and after high voltage test. 

High Voltage Test 

A high voltage test with 2.5 KV for one minute shall be applied between the poles and earth. Test shall be 

carried out on each pole in turn with the remaining poles earthed, all units raked in position and the 

breakers closed. Original test certificate shall be submitted along with panel. 

13. Storing, Erection and Commissioning 

The panels shall be stored in a well ventilated, dry place, with a suitable polythene covers shall be 

provided for necessary protection against moisture. 

Erection 

Switch boards shall be installed on suitable foundation. Foundation shall be as per the dimensions 

supplied by the panel manufacturer. The foundation shall be flat and leveled. Suitable grouting holes 

shall be provided in the foundation. Suitable MS base channel shall be embedded in foundation on which 

the panel can be directly installed. The switch boards shall be properly aligned and bolted to the 

foundation by at least four bolts. Cables shall be terminated on the bottom plate or top plate as the case 

may be, by using high quality brass compression glands. The individual cables shall then be led through 

the panel to the required feeder compartments for necessary termination’s. The cables shall be clamped 

to the supporting arrangement. The switchboard earth bus shall be connected to the local earth grid. 

Pre-commission Tests 

Panels shall be commissioned only after the successful comletion of the following tests. The tests shall be 

carried in the presence of Architect's/Consultant's or their representatives. 

All main and auxiliary bus bar connections shall be checked and tightened. 

All wiring termination and bus bar joints shall be checked and tightened. 

Wiring shall be checked to ensure that it is according to the drawing. 

All wiring shall be tested for insualtion resistance by a 1000 volts meggar. 

Phase rotation tests shall be conducted 

Suitable injection tests shall be applied to all the measuring instruments to establish the 

correctness and accuracy of calibration and working order. 

All relays and protective devices shall be tested for correctness of settings and operation by 

introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit. 

Page 66 of 174



NRDA 

I. MEDIUM VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER 

1. General 

Air circuit breakers shall be incorporated in the panels wherever specified. ACB shall conform to BS:3659 

or IS: 13947 in all respects. ACBS shall be suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3 phases, 50 Hz, AC supply. 

All air circuit breakers using in the panel will be mounted in separate cubicles and will be of the same 

make to maintain the uniformity 

2. Type and construction 

Air circuit breakers shall be of enclosed pattern, dead front air break type with trip free operating 

mechanism. Air Circuit breakers shall be of with drawable type and will be mounted on a rigid steel frame 

moving on horizontal balls. The ACBs shall be strong and robust in construction with suitable 

arrangement for anchoring when in fully engaged or fully drawn out positions. There shall be no 

dependence upon the panel board frame for any critical alignment. The withdrawal arrangement shall be 

such as to allow smooth and easy movement. 

All the current carrying parts of the circuit breakers shall be silver plated. Suitable arcing contacts shall be 

provided to protect the main contacts. The contacts shall be of spring loaded design. The sequence of 

operation of the contacts shall be such that arcing contacts `make before' and break after the main 

contacts. Arcing contacts shall be provided with efficient are chutes on each pole. The contact tips and 

arc chutes shall be suitable for ready replacement. Self aligning isolating contacts with automatic 

shutters to screen the live parts shall be provided. The design of the breaker shall be such that all the 

components are easily accessible for inspection, maintenance and replacement. 

Operating Mechanism 

Air circuit breaker shall be provided with a quick-make, trip free operating mechanism. The operating 

mechanism shall be strain-free spring operated. The system will have horizontal, self aligning, isolating 

pairs of moving and stationary power and control contracts. The unit will have three horizontal positions 

corresponding to ; 

) Plugged in Position 

Here both the power and control contacts are in made position and the breakers gets mechanically 

locked in this position. The breaker can go in ON position only after being locked in this position. 

) Test Position 

Here the power contacts gets isolated where as the control contacts can be kept in made status. The 

breakers can be mechanically locked in this position and made ON and off for testing purposes. 

) With drawn Position 

Page 67 of 174



NRDA 

In this position the power and control connections are in isolated status and the moving portion of the 

breaker can be dismantled from the panel. 

An isolating shutter or set of shutters are to be provided for the automatic coverage of live power and 

control fixed isolating contacts in the withdrawn position. 

All the breakers with remote closing arrangement will have a spring charging motor of single phase 230 V 

and a closing coil. In case of power failure the spring charging can be done manually with the help of 

button or lever. The circuit breaker should switch on only when the spring is charged fully which should 

be able to store energy for one closing and one tripping operation. The spring wil also get fully charged 

when the breaker is in closed position. In this case the spring should store enough energy to make first 

tripping, one re-closing and the second tripping. 

The breaker will have quick making trip free closing mechanism. The operation of the mechanism will be 

independent of the speed of the closing lever or the duration of the closing signal. 

The breaker will have following indications distinctly not able from out side :- 

- Mechanical indicator for spring fully charged. 

- Mechanical indicator for spring discharged. 

- Electrical indication of breaker ON status. 

- Electrical indication of breaker OFF status. 

- Electrical indication of trip circuit healthy. 

All breakers will have switching ON and OFF time of less than 4 cycles and will have the following 

interlocks for the safe operation of the equipment. 

Breakers to ON only when mechanically locked many of the three horizontal isolation position. 

When the breaker is in plugged in position it will ON only with the front door closed. 

The breakers will be provided with 6 Nos each of type NO and NC auxiliary contacts rated for 10 Amps AC 

at 415 V and 6 Amps DC at 48 V. These contacts are in addition to the ones already in use for the 

operation of the breaker and will be required for subsequent interlockes incorporated in near future. 

When ever requested mechanical postive inter locks will be provided between the operation of different 

breakers with the help of individually unique and matched castle key locks. 

Rating 

The rating of the circuit breaker shall be as per the drawings and schedule of quantities. The 

rated/breaking capacity of the breakers shall be 35 MVA or as specified at 415 volts. The rated making 

capacity shall be as per relevant standard. 

Accessories 

Circuit breakers shall be provided with the following Accessories. 

) Under-voltage relay for the incoming ACB. 

) Overload release with IDMT characterisatics. 

) Instantaneous over current relays. 

) Alarm switches (if specifically asked for) 

) Auxiliary switches 

Page 68 of 174



NRDA 

) Circuit breaker position indicators ON/OFF/TEST/ ISOLATED. 

Testing 

Testing of each circuit breaker shall be carried out at the works as per IS:2516 or BS:89 and the original 

test certificate shall be furnished in triplicate. the tests shall incorporate at least the following: 

) Impulse withstand test 

) Power frequency withstand test 

) Short circuit test 

) Temperature-rise test under rated conditions. 

J. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

1. General 

Only fixed type with trip free manual closing mechanisms. Moulded case circuit breakers shall be 

incorporated in the switch board wherever specified. MCCB shall conform to BS:3871 Part-II IS : 13947 in 

all respects. MCCB shall be suitable either for single phase AC 230 Volts or three phase 415 volts. 

Suitable discrimination shall be provided between upstream and down stream breakers in the range of 

10-20 milli seconds. All MCCBs will have earth fault module (if specifically asked) and front operated. 


The MCCB cover and case shall be made of high strength heat-resistant and flam retardant thermosetting 

insulating material, operating handle shall be quick make/quick break. The operating handle shall have 

suitable ÒN' ÒFF' and `TRIPPED' mechanical indicators notable from outside. Three phase MCCBS shall 

have a common operating handle for simultaneous operation and tripping of all the three phases. 

Suitable arc extinguishing device shall be provided for each contact. Tripping unit shall be thermalmagnetic 

type provided on each pole and connected by a common trip bar such that tripping of any one 

pole operates all three poles to open simultaneously. Thermal magnetic tripping device shall have IDMT 

characteristics for sustained over load and short circuits. 

3. Contact tips shall be made of suitable arc resistant, sintered alloy for long electrical life. 

Terminals shall be of liberal design with adequate clearances. 


Moulded, case circuit breakers shall be provided with the following interlocking devices for interlocking 

the door of a switch board. 

) Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker. 

) Door interlock to prevent the door being opened when the breaker is in ON or OFF position. 

) Defeat-interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position. 

Page 69 of 174



NRDA 

5. Rupturing capacity 

The moulded case circuit breaker shall have a rupturing capacity of not less than 25 KA rms at 415 volts. 

Wherever required, higher rupturing capacity breakers to meet the system short circuit fault shall be 

used. 

6. Testing 

) Original test certificate of the MCCB shall be furnished. 

) Pre-commissioning tests on the switch board panel incorporating the MCCB shall be done as per 

standard specifications. 

K. ISOLATORS, SWITCH FUSE UNITS AND FUSES 

1. General 

Isolators, Switch-fuse units shall be incorporated in the switchboard panels wherever specified. Switch 

fuses shall conform in all respects to IS : 13947 or BS : 3185. Switch-fuse unit shall be suitable for 415 

Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 HZ, AC supply and capable of making and breaking the current without any 

abnormal deterioration in the life of equipment and without endangering the safety of the operators. 

In case of the DB's or SFU panel etc. the isolator/SFU will be mounted on the component plate of the 

module and the operating handle will be brought out for front access to enable the operation. A clear 

indication of ON and OFF positions of the handle will be shown on the front door. 


The unit housing shall be of robust construction designed to withstand arduous conditions encountered 

in the electrical system. Sheet materials used for switch-fuse enclosure shall be given a rigorous rust 

proofing treatment before it is fabricated and painted. 

3. Fuses 

The units shall contain fuse base and carriers for accommodating HRC fuse units. HRC fuse units of 

specified rating and conforming to IS 9224 or BS 88 shall be provided. 

No wire fuse or any other kind of fuses shall be used in the supply of electrical equipment. all the control 

fuses and the power fuses will be current rapturing capacity of more than 41 KA at 440 V AC supply unless 

otherwise specified. 

4. Operating mechanism 

The operating mechanism of the unit shall be crisp and positive in action with quick-make, quick-break 

silver plated contacts. The operating handle shall be suitable for rotary operation unless otherwise 

specified. Position of the handle such as ÒN', ÒFF' shall be clearly indicated. Operating handle shall be 

of retractable type. 

Page 70 of 174



NRDA 

5. Shrouding 

All the live parts inside the switch-fuse units shall be shrouded to prevent any accidental contact. 


All switch-fuse units shall be provided with suitable interlock such that the door of the switch board 

panels shall not open unless the switch is in 'OFF' position. Provision for padlocking the switch in 'OFF' 

position shall be also provided. 

7. Testing 

) Routine and type test shall be conducted as per BS : 3185 & IS: 13947. The original test certificate 

shall be furnished. 

) Pre-commissioning tests at the site as per standard specification shall be conducted before 

commissioning. 

1.1.1.9.1.2 L. POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT SYSTEM 

1. General 

The power factor improvement system shall comprise of capacitors and associated switchgear and 

control gear as per the requirements. 

2. Capacitors 

The power capacitors to improve the working power factor. All power factor correction capacitors shall 

conform in all respects to IS:2834-1986 or BS:1650-196. Approval of Insurance Association of India should 

be obtained, if called for. The capacitors shall be suitable for 3 phase, 415 V. at 50 Hz. frequency and 

shall be available in single phase and three phase units of 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25, 50 KVAR sizes. The 

capacitors shall be suitable for indoor use up to ambient temperature of 50°C. The permissible overloads 

shall be as given below: 

) Voltage overload shall be 10% for continuous operation and 15% for 6 hours in a 24 hour cycle. 

) Current overload shall be 15% for continuous operation and 50% for 6 hours in a 24 hour cycle. 

) Overload of 30% continuously and 45% for 6 hours in a 24 hour cycle. 

Silver Zinc/Aluminium alloy metalised film - Capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in sturdy corrosion 

proof, sheet steel containers and impregnated with nonflammable synthetic liquid. Every element of 

each capacitor unit shall be provided with its own built in silvered fuse. The capacitors shall have suitable 

discharge device to reduce the residual voltage from crest value of the rated voltage to 50V. or less within 

one minute after capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. The loss factor of capacitor shall 

not exceed .5 W per KVAR. Use of heavy edged metalised film to give better bounding between the 

electrode and the spray film thus increasing the inrush current capacity of the capacitor. 

The capacitors shall withstand voltage of 2500 V. AC (Power frequency test voltage) for one minute. The 

insulation resistance between capacitors, terminals and containers when test voltage of 500 V. DC is 

applied shall not be less than 50 megohms. 

3. Capacitor Control Panel 

The capacitor control panel shall be fabricated out of 14 SWG sheet steel suitably rust inhibited and stove 

enamelled. The panel shall have adequate space formounting the required total KVAR capacity (divided 

Page 71 of 174



NRDA 

into parts as required and mentioned in BOQ) and will be placed in a dead front MS sheet steel fabricated 

free standing panel. Each section so formed will be connected to the power bus through a power 

contactor which has been suitably derated to handle the capacitive currents. A set of TP fuses and 

bimetallic over load relays will form the protections of the section. The power contactor of each section 

will switch on and switch off on the command. 

) Switching ON and OFF command with a time delay of 60 seconds to allow the discharge of 

capacitors. Power capacitor shall have built in discharge resistance. 

) The provision of stepless variable dead band to avoid hunting. 

) Arrangement to manually operate the power capacitor. 

The power factor correcting panel will have terminals for receiving the CT connections for driving the 

power correcting relay and the power factor meter. There will be required pairs of push buttons to 

switch on and off the capacitor in mannual mode. Cabling arrangement, bus bars and earthing etc. shall 

be as per standard specification as mentioned in the section Medium Voltage power central centres. 

The capacitor control panel shall generally comprise of the following : 

) Power factor correction relay 

) Step controller with reversing motor 

) Time delay and no volt relays 

) Protection fuses 

) Contactor and switch fuses for individual capacitor banks. 

) Change over switch for either manual or automatic operation. 

) Current transformers 

) Power factor meter with protection fuses. 

) Indicator lamp for each bank. 

M. METERING, INSTRUMENTATION AND PROTECTION 

1. The specifications hereinafter laid down shall cover all the meters, instrumentation and 

protective devises required for the electrical work. The ratings, type and quantity of meters, instruments 

and protective devices shall be as per the schedule of quantities and drawings. 

Measuring Instruments 

General 

Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conformity with IEC-51, BS: 89 or IS: 1248. The accuracy 

of direct reading shall be 1.0 for voltmeters and 1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments shall have 

accuracy of 1.5. The errors due to variations in temperature shall be limited to a minimum. The meters 

shall be suitable for continuous operation between 10°C ± circular pattern. The meter shall be enclosed 

in a dust tight housing. The housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. The design and manufacture of 

the meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of instrument glass. Instrument meters shall be sealed 

in such a way that access to the measuring element and to the accessories within the case shall not be 

possible without removal of the seal. The meters shall be provided with white dials and black scale 

marking. The pointer shall be black in colour and shall have zero position adjustment device which could 

Page 72 of 174



NRDA 

be operated from outside. The direction of deflection shall be from left to right. Suitable selector 

swtiches shall be provided for all ammeters and voltmeters intended to be used on three phase supply. 

a) Ammeters 

Ammeters shall be moving iron type. The moving part assembly shall be with jewel bearings. The jewel 

bearing shall be mounted on a spring to prevent damage to pivot due to vibrations and shocks. The 

ammeters shall be manufactured and calibrated as per the latest edition of IS 1248 or BS 89. Ammeters 

shall be instrument transformer operated, and shallbe suitable for 5 A. Secondary of instrument 

transformer. The scales shall be calibrated to indicate primary current, unless otherwise specified. The 

ammeters shall be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss 

of accuracy. 

b) Voltmeters 

Voltmeter shall be of moving iron type. The range for 400 volts, 3 phase voltmeters shall be to 0 to 500 

volts. Suitable selector switch shall be provided for each voltmeter to read voltage between any two lines 

of the system. The voltmeter shall be provided with protection fuse of suitable capacity. 

2. Instrument Transformers 

a) Current Transformers 

Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS:2705 (Part-I, II, & III) in all respects. All current 

transformers to be used in the L.T. Electrical panels shall be low tension, ring type resin cast current 

transformer with the requisite currents ratio having secondary of the current transformers selected will 

be based on the following; 

. For energy measuring : 1.0 class of accuracy. 

. For other metering : 1.5 class of accuracy. 

. For protects on : 3.0 class of accuracy. Where a common CT is used for different functions the CT 

accuracy class will be equal to the best class required by any of those function. 

Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic and thermal stresses 

due to short circuit fault of 35 MVA on medium voltage system. Terminals of the current transformers 

shall be marked permanently for easy identification of poles. Current transformers shall be provided with 

earthing terminals for earthing chassis frame work and fixed part of the metal casing (if any). Each CT 

shall be provided with rating plate indicating the following 

. Name and make 

. Serial Number 

. Transformation ratio 

. Rated burden 

. Rated voltage 

. Accuracy class 

The current transformers to be selected for this panel will have at least 20% extra VA capacity available 

over the normal capacity based on the following details ; 

. For ammeters : 3 VA 

Page 73 of 174



NRDA 

. For current coils of KW & KWHR, PF, KVAR meters or for all recorders : 5 VA. 

. For normal wiring : 2 VA. 

. For current coil of protection relays : 10 VA under no circumstances the VA rating of the CT's will 

be less than 15 VA. 

Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for inspection, maintenance 

and replacement. The wiring for CTs shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated wires with proper 

termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and fixed to the panel structure in a neat 

manner. 

b) Potential transformers 

Potential transformers shall be provided if specifically called for. Potential transformers shall comply with 

the requirements of IS: 3156 (Part-I, II & III) in all respects. 

The control transformer will be copper wire wound, natural air coated, Vacuum impregnated, air dried 

transformer with electrically isolated primary and secondary/secondaries. The transformer will be open 

execution type with primary rated for 415 volts ± 5% (Three taps) at 50 Hz. The secondary voltage will be 

specified alongwith the requirement. The transformer will be of indoor duty and its design will be 

suitable for operation in an electrical panel. The VA rating of the transformer will be the total of : 

250% of study state coil load of all the contactors, relays, timers etc. being operated from this 

transformer. 

 

 

130% of requirement for the maximum numbers of indicating lights operating from the 

tranformer simultaneously in ON state at any time. 

100% of any other load connected to it's secondary. The transformer will have class A insulation 

and it's temperature rise will not be more than 85°C at an ambient 45°C. All the connections 

from the winding will be brought to a bakelite plate mounted on the transformer. All the 

connections will be clearly engraved on this baklite plate. 

3. Watt Meters, Frequency meters, power factor meters 

) Watt Meters : Watt meters shall be of three phase, electro-dynamic type, suitable for use with 

current and potential transformers associated with the particular panel. Watt meters shall be 

provided with a maximum demand indicator. 

) Power factor meters : Polyphase power factor meters shall be of electro-dynamic type with 

current and potential coils suitable for operation with current transformers and potential 

transformers associated with the particular panel. The scale shall be calibrated for 50% lag - 

100% - 50% lead readings. Phase angle accuracy shall be + 4 0 . 

) Energy meters and reactive power meters : Trivector meters shall be two element, integrating 

type kilowatt-hour, KVA, Kilovolt - ampere - hour reactive meters. The meters shall conform to 

IEC - 170 in all respects. Energy meters, KVA and KVARH meters shall be provided with 

Page 74 of 174



NRDA 

4. Relays 

integrating registers. The registers shall be able to record energy consumption of 500 Hours 

corresponding to maximum current at the rated voltage and unity power factor. These meters 

shall be suitable for operation with current and potential transformers associated with the 

particular panel. 

a) General 

Protection relays shall be provided wherever required to trip and isolate the particular section under 

fault. All the relays shall be adjusted and co-ordinated for proper range of the particular circuit or 

equipment. Relays shall be provided with flag type indicators to indicate the cause of tripping. The flag 

indicators shall remain in position until they are reset by hand reset. 

Relays shall be designed to make or break the normal circuit current with which they are associated. The 

relay contacts shall be of silver or platinum alloy. The contacts shall be designed to withstand repeated 

operation without damage. The relays shall be of draw-out type to facilitate testing and maintenance. 

The draw-out case shall be dust tight with a finish suitable for tropical country. The relays shall be 

capable of disconnecting faulty section of network or faulty equipment without causing interruption or 

disturbance to the remaining sections. The analysis of setting shall be made considering relay errors, 

pick-up and overshoot errors and shall be submitted to the Engineer/Engineer in Charge.for approval. 

b) Over current relays 

Over current relays shall be induction type with inverse definite minimum time lag characteristics. The 

over current relays shall be provided with adjustable current and time settings. The setting for current 

shall be 50-200% in step of 25%. The IDMT over current relays shall have time lag (delay) of 0 to 3 

seconds. The time setting multiplier shall be adjustable from 0.1 to unity. Over current relays shall be 

fitted with suitable tripping device with trip coil being suitable for operation on 5 amperes. 

c) Earth fault relays 

Earth fault relay shall have current setting of 10% to 40% in steps of 10%, otherwise, the earth fault relays 

shall conform to specification laid down for over current relays. 

d) Under Voltage Relays 

Under voltage relays shall be induction type and shall have inverse limit operation characteristic, with 

pick up voltage range of 50 - 90% of the rated voltage. 

5. Control Devices 

a) Push Buttons 

The push buttons used in the panels will be rated for more than 415 volts and 2 amps. All the push 

buttons will be mounted on the front door and the assembly will be in two parts. All the push buttons will 

be mounted on the front door of the cubicle in regular symmetrical fashion as per the general norms 

being practiced. Only one make of push buttons will be used in the assembly of all the panels. The 

selection of the colour of the push buttons will be as follows 

Page 75 of 174



NRDA 

Function 

Starting/Switching ON 

Stopping/Switching OFF 

Resetting 

Forward ON 

Reverse ON 

Emergency OFF 

Colour 

Green 

Red 

Black 

Yellow 

Blue 

Red/Mushroom 

b) Indicating Lights 

The indicating lights used in the panel will be pleasent looking and round shape having the 

following features; 

. A separate front lens for it's easy replacement. 

. Facility to replace the bulb from the front. 

. Baynet pin cap bulbs of standard size to be used. 

. The shape of the lens to allow viewing from sides. 

. Series resistance with use of low voltage bulb for longer life. 

. Clear and distinct indication for light ON and OFF with differences of brightness of the lens. 

The selection of the colours of the indicating lamps will be as follows; 

 

 

 

 

Red for system in operation 

Amber for system ready for operation. 

Green for system being put off. 

Red, yellow and blue for incoming supply. 

6. Testing 

6.1 Instrument transformers shall be tested at factory as per IS:2705 & IS:3156. The test shall 

incorporate the following : 

) Type tests 

) Routine tests 

Original test certificates in triplicate shall be provided. 

6.2 Meters shall be tested as per IS: 1248. The tests shall include both type tests and routine tests. 

Original test certificate in triplicate shall be furnished. 

6.3a) 

Suitable injection tests shall be applied to the secondary circuit of every instrument to establish 

the correctness of calibration and working order. 

b) All relays and protective devices shall be tested to establish correctness of setting and operation 

by introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit. 

Page 76 of 174



NRDA 

N. MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FOR POWER AND LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION 

1. General 

Distribution board shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase AC supply or 230 volts single phase AC supply as 

required. Distribution boards shall generally conform to IS 2675 or BS 214. However, the specifications 

hereinafter described shall take precedence over the above wherever this specifications call for a higher 

standard or material or workmanship. 

2. Type and construction 

Distribution boards shall be of totally enclosed dead front safety type. The enclosure shall be made of 

best quality sheet steel of not less than 14 gauge. The sheet steel shall be treated with a rigorous rust 

inhibited process before fabrication. The distribution boards shall comprise of switch-fuse unit or 

moulded case circuit breaker or miniature circuit breaker as incoming and required number of miniature 

circuit breakers backed up with HRC fuses (fuses if specifically called for) as outgoings. The main and 

outgoings shall have rating as specified on the drawings and schedule. 

3. Bus bars 

Suitable bus bars made of high conductivity copper strips and mounted on non-hygroscopic insulating 

supports shall be provided. 

4. Circuit Breakers 

Moulded case circuit breakers and miniature circuit breakers shall be of approved design and make. 

Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, traced and protected connectors. The front 

face of all the breakers shall be flush with each other. Each breaker shall be provided with card holder 

and neatly printed card identifying the circuit. The position of handle of the breaker shall clearly indicate 

the condition of breakers such as 'ON/OFF/TRIPPED'. 

5. Safety & interlocks 

Page 77 of 174



NRDA 

All the live parts shall be shrouded such that accidental contacts with live parts are totally avoided. 

Distribution board shall be provided with a front hinged door. Distribution board interior assembly shall 

be dead front with the front cover removed. Main lugs shall be shrouded on five sides. Suitable 

insulating barrier made of arc resistant material shall be provided for phase separation. Ends of the bus 

structures shall also be shrouded. 

6. Cabinet design 

The distribution board cabinet shall be totally enclosed type with dust and vermin proof construction. 

The cabinet shall be stove enamelled to grey shade finish. The interior surface shall be finished to an offwhite 

shade. The interior components shall be mounted on a separate sheet steel which is mounted and 

locked on to the studs provided inside the cabinet. Over this, a cover made of hylam sheet or stove 

enamelled sheet steel shall be provided with slots for operating handles of breakers. The cabinet shall be 

equipped with a front door having a spring latch and a vault lock. Cabinets shall have detachable gland 

plates at both top and bottom. 

7. Terminals 

Distribution boards shall be provided with a terminal block of adequate size to receive mains and 

outgoing circuits. The location of the terminal block shall be so located that crowding of wires in the 

proximity of live parts is avoided. A neutral link having rating equal to that of phase bus shall be 

provided. 

8. Directory 

Distribution boards shall be provided with a directory indicating the area or loads served by each circuit 

breaker, the rating of breakers, size of conductors, etc. The directory shall be mounted in metal holder 

with a clear plastic sheet on inside surface of the front door. 

9. Installation 

Distribution boards shall be surface mounted or recessed mounted as required by the Architects and at 

the locations shown on the drawings. The boards shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clamps and bolts. 

All the cables/conduits shall be properly terminated using glands/grips/checknuts etc. Wiring shall be 

terminated properly using crimping lugs/sockets and PVC identification ferrules. No bare conductor hall 

be allowed inside the board. Distribution boards shall be bonded to the earth at least at two points using 

brass bolts and lugs. Suitable name plate, danger plate, indicating the voltage shall be fixed to the front 

cover. 

10. Testing 

Distribution boards shall be tested at factory as per IS 2675 or BS 214. The tests shall include insulation 

test, high voltage tests etc. 

Distribution boards shall be tested for insulation resistance after the erection. 

Page 78 of 174



NRDA 

O. MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 

1. General 

Medium voltage distribution system shall be applicable for wiring of 3 phase, 4 wire 415 volts, 50 Hz, AC 

supply and single phase, 2 wire 230 Volts, 50 Hz, AC supply. The system of wiring shall consist of single 

core PVC insulated copper conductor multistrended wires in MS/PVC conduits either concealed or 

exposed as called for on the drawings, Prior to laying and fixing of conduits, the contractor shall be 

careful excimine the drawings and satisfy himself about the sufficiency of number and size of conduits, 

location of junction boxes, sizes and location of switch boxes and other relevant details. 

2. Regulations and Standards 

The system shall be governed by the requirements of IS : 732, IE Rules, and IEE regulations. IS standards 

and codes applicable for medium voltage distribution is also listed in standard specifications. 

3. Rigid steel conduits and accessories 

3.1 General conduits shall be of welded and screwed sheet steel construction and shall be ERW 

painted inside and outside with stove enaml paint with ISI mark on all pipes at regular intervals. The 

minimum wall thickness shall be 1.6mm for conduits upto 25mm diameter and 2.0mm wall thickness for 

conduits above 25mm diameter. 

3.2 The sheet steel conduits shall conform to the requirements of IS:1653 (Latest Edition) in all 

respect. The conduits shall have uniform wall thickness and uniform cross section throughout. The 

welding shall be uniform and good such that welded joints do not yield when subjected to a flattening 

test. The conduit shall be free from welding burrs. Welded joints shall not break when threaded or bent 

at an angle. Conduits shall bear the name or trade mark of the manufacturer on each length. The 

conduits shall be delivered to the site in original bundles. 

Page 79 of 174



NRDA 

Conduit accessories such as bends, inspection bends, inspection tees, elbows, draw boxes, junction boxes 

etc. shall conform in all respects to IS : 3837. Boxes shall have internally tapped spouts. Junction 

boxes/inspection boxes shall be provided with suitable covers. 

All the joints shall be fully water tight and sealed by applying sealing compound as per manufacturer's 

recommendation. Junction boxes and running joints shall be provided at suitable places to allow for 

subsequent extension, if any, without undue dismantling of conduit system. As far as possible diagonal 

run of conduits shall be avoided. Conduit system shall be erect and straight as far as possible. Separate 

conduit shall be run for 15 Amps power outlets wiring. The joints in conduit shall be free of burrs to avoid 

damage to insulation of conduitors while pulling them through the conduit. All conduits shall be installed 

so as to avoid steam and hot water pipes. 

3.3 Open/Surface conduit system 

Wherever specifically called for, surface conduit system shall be adopted. Conduits shall be run in square 

and symmetrical lines. Before the conduits are installed, the exact route shall be marked at site and 

approval of the Engineer in Charge.shall be obtained. Conduits shall be fixed by heavy gauge GI saddles, 

secured to suitable rawl plugs, at an interval of not more than 1 metre. Wherever couplers, bends or 

similar fittings are used, the saddles shall be provided on either side at distance of 30 cm. from the centre 

of such fittings. Conduits shall be jointed by means of screwed couplers and screwed accessories only. In 

long distance straight runs of conduit inspection type couplers or running type couplers with Jamnut shall 

be provided. Threading shall be long enough to accommodate pipes to the full threaded portion of the 

couplers and accessories. Cut end of the conduits shall have no sharp edges or any burrs left to avoid 

damage to the insulation of the conductors. 

Bends in conduit shall be done by pipe bending machine or any other suitable device. No bend shall have 

radius less than 2.5 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Bends which cannot be negotiated by pipe 

bends, shall be accompanied by introducing solid bends, inspection bends or cast iron inspection box. 

The radius of solid bends shall not be less than 7.5 cms. Not more than three equivalent 90 0 bends shall 

be used in conduit run from outlet to outlet. 

Conduit shall be properly drained and ventilated to prevent sweating or condensation inside the pipes. 

All the conduit openings shall be properly plugged with PVC stopper/bushes. A breather, drainer shall be 

provided in the lowest position of the conduit system. The conduits shall be adequately protected 

against rust by applying two coats of approved synthetic enamel paint after the installation is completed. 

) Wherever conduits terminate in to point control box, outlet box, distribution board etc. conduits 

shall be rigidly connected to the box/board with checknuts on either side of the entry to ensure proper 

electrical and mechanical continuity. 

The entire conduit system after installation shall be bonded to the earth. 

) Recessed conduit system 

All the conduits including bends, unions, junction boxes, etc. shall be cleaned and painted with two coats 

of bitumen paint before they are fixed in position. 

Page 80 of 174



NRDA 

Conduits which are to be taken in the ceiling slab shall be laid on the prepared shuttering work of the 

ceiling slab before concrete is poured. The conduits shall be properly threaded and screwed in to sockets, 

bends, junction boxes, outlet boxes and shall be made watertight by using bituminous hemp yarn at the 

screwed ends. The conduits in ceiling slab shall be straight as far as possible to facilitate easy drawing of 

wires through them. Before conduits are laid in the ceiling the positions of outlet points, point controls, 

junction boxes shall be set out clearly so as to minimise off-sets and bends. 

Conduits recessed in walls shall be secured rigidly by means of steel hooks/staples at 0.8 metre intervals. 

Before conduit is concealed in the walls, all chases shall be neatly made to proper dimensions to 

accommodate the required number of conduits. The outlet boxes, point control boxes, inspection and 

drawn boxes shall be fixed as and when conduit is being laid. The recessing of conduits in walls shall be 

so arranged as to allow at least 12 mm plaster cover on the same. All grooves, chases, etc. shall be 

refilled with cement mortar of 1:4 and finishing up to the wall surface before plastering of walls is taken 

up by the general contractor. Where conduits pass through expansion joints in the building, adequate 

expansion fittings or other approved devices shall be used to take care of any relative movement, 

wherever conduits terminate in to point control boxes, distributing boards etc. conduits shall be rigidly 

connected to the boxes, boards etc. with checknuts on either side of the entry to ensure electrical 

continuity. 

Running joints in conduits wherever necessary shall be rigidly held in aligned position by a checknut 

tightened on running side. After conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes etc. are fixed in position their 

outlets shall be properly plugged with PVC stoppers or with any other suitable material so that water, 

mortar, vermin or any other foreign material do not enter in to the conduit system. 

A breather-drainer shall be provided in lowest position of the conduit for draining and ventilating. All 

conduit ends terminating in to an outlet, draw boxes, junction box, point control boxes, etc. shall be 

provided with bushes of PVC or rubber, after the conduit ends are properly filed to remove burrs and 

sharp edges. 

Concealed conduit laying, above false ceilings shall be executed in similar manner described above. 

Suitable size GI pull wires for drawing wires at later stage shall be inserted in to the conduit where only 

conduits are provided, without charging any extra cost and proper size earth continuity wire shall be run 

throughout the length of the conduit with the earth wire being efficiently fastened to the conduit by 

means of special clamps. 

4. Cable trunking/raceways 

4.1 Cable trunking or raceways shall be of sheet steel construction. The thickness of sheet steel shall 

not be less than 14 gauge. The sheet steel before fabrication shall be given a rigours anti-corrosive 

treatment. The trunking shall be provided with removable, covers of 1 metre length. The trunkings shall 

be supplied in suitable lengths. however, the maximum length of a single trunking shall not exceed than 

6 metre. The trunking shall be complete with right angle bends, 145 0 bends, adapters, tee pieces, 

couplers etc. Removable cable retainers shall be provided wherever required. 

4.2 Installation 

Trunking/race-ways shall be installed in readily accessible places. Trunking shall be supported at a regular 

intervals of two metres. Trunking shall be aligned properly during the erection to present a neat 

Page 81 of 174



NRDA 

appearance. Standard lengths of trunkings shall be jointed together by suitable couplers. Wherever 

required right angled bends, 145 0 bends, tees etc. shall be provided in the run of cable trunk/raceways. 

trunking shall be so arranged that no more than 30 cables are run in any section. However, not more 

than 60% of cross sectional area of the raceway shall be occupied by the conductor. Trunking shall be 

painted with two coats of approved synthetic enamel paint. 

5. Enclosure for electrical accessories 

5.1 Enclosure for electrical accessories such as switches, sockets, fan regulators, etc. shall be of cast 

iron, sheet steel or mild steel conforming to IS: 5133 - Part-I. The wall thickness of CI enclosures shall not 

be less than 3mm and that of MS enclosure shall not be less than 2 mm. Wherever specifically called for, 

galvanised sheet steel boxes shall be provided. The enclosure boxes shall be provided with suitable Nos. 

fixing lugs located at the corners for fixing the covers. All fixing lugs shall have tapped holes to take 

machined brass screws. 

5.2 Sufficient number of knock-outs shall be provided for conduit entries. Enclosures shall be 

sufficiently strong to resist mechanical damage under normal service conditions. Provision shall be made 

for bonding the enclosures to the earth. The enclosure shall be adequately protected against rust and 

corrosion with suitable air drying paint. Wherever different phase conductors are brought in to the same 

enclosure, phase barriers shall be provided. 

All enclousers exposed to the weather shall be fully water tight and complete with rubber gasketed 

covers and shall be painted with two coats of bituminous paint before they are fixed in position. All 

enclousers fixed in concrete shall have a minimum depth of 75mm and the wall thickness of the boxes 

and spouts shall not be less than 2 mm. 

6. Wiring Conductors 

6.1 All wiring conductors shall be PVC insulated, single/multi stranded copper or aluminium 

conductors of 660/1100 V grade. as required Wiring conductors shall conform in all respects to IS 694 

(Latest Edition). 

The current rating for wiring conductors shall be based on the following parameters : 

i) Ambient temperature - 40°C. 

ii) Conductor temperature - 70°C. 

Wiring conductors shall be supplied in RED, BLACK, YELLOW, BLUE colours for easy identification of wires. 

The wiring conductors shall be supplied in sealed coils of 100 metre length. The wiring conductors shall 

bear manufacturer's trade mark, name, ISI mark, voltage grade etc. 

6.2 Installation of wiring conductors/cables 

The wiring conductors shall not be drawn in to the conduits until all the works of any nature that may 

cause damage to the wires are completed. Before drawing the wires, the conduits shall be thoroughly 

cleaned, drained and ventilated. Proper care shall be taken in pulling the wires to see that no damage 

Page 82 of 174



NRDA 

occurs to the insulation of the wires. The installation and termination of wires shall be carried out with 

due regard to the following : 

a) While drawing the wiring conductors, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks which 

cause breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends in the conduit system. 

b) Insulation shall be shaved off like sharpening a pencil. 

c) Strands of the wires shall not be cut for connecting to the terminals or lugs. The terminals shall 

have adequate cross section to take all the strands. 

d) Ends of the wiring conductors shall be terminated by using crimping sockets. Soldering of sockets 

shall not be done. 

e) Oxide inhibition grease shall be applied at all terminals and connections. 

f) Brass flat washers of large area shall be used for bolted terminals. 

g) Bimetallic connectors should be used wherever aluminium conductors are tapped from copper 

mains or vice-versa. 

6.3 Wiring for power and lighting circuits shall be carried out in separate conduit. Balancing of 

circuits in a three phase system shall be arranged before the installation is taken up. Cables 

originating from two different phases shall not be run in the same conduit. 

6.4 The wiring system envisaged is generally shown on the layout drawings and line diagrams. 

However, a brief account of the general wiring system is given below : 

) Submains wiring - Wiring from switchboards to the individual distribution boards. 

) Circuit wiring - Wiring from DBs to the point control boxes for lighting, fans 5 A. sockets, call bells 

etc. 

6.5 The sub main wiring shall be either in 3 phase, 4 wire or single phase, 2 wire system. Each sub 

main wiring circuit shall also have its own earth continuity wire. The number and size of earth 

continuity wire shall be as per the detailed drawings and standard specifications. 

Bunching of Cables: 

Cable of AC supply of different phase shall be bunched in separate conduits. The number of insulated 

wires/cables that may be drawn into the conduits shall be as per the following table. In this table, the 

space factor does not exceed 40%. However, in any case conduits having lesser than 20mm diameter shall 

not be used. 

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE NUMBER OF 650 VOLTS GRADE SINGLE CORE CABLES THAT MAY BE DRAWN IN 

TO RIGID PVC CONDUITS. 

CABLE SIZE 

IN MM 2 

SIZE OF CONDUITS (MM) 

(MAX. NO. OF CABLES) 

Page 83 of 174



NRDA 

20 25 32 40 50 

1.5 4 8 12 -- -- 

2.5 4 6 10 -- -- 

4.0 2 4 8 12 -- 

6.0 1 4 6 8 -- 

10.0 1 3 5 10 -- 

16.0 -- 2 4 5 12 

Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in the conduit that the outgoing and return wires are drawn 

into the same conduit. Wires originating from two different phases shall not be run in the same conduit. 

6.6 Circuit wiring shall generally be in single phase system. However a maximum of 3 to 4 single 

phase circuit belonging to the same pole/phase could be installed in the same conduit or 

raceway. Each circuit wiring shall be provided with suitable earth continuity conductor as per 

standard specifications. Not more than 8 light points/fan points shall be grouped on one lighting 

circuit. The load per circuit shall not exceed 800 watts. The minimum size of conductor for wiring 

of lighting circuit shall not be less than 2.5 sq. mm unless otherwise specified. Power circuit 

wiring shall not have more than two sockets connected to one circuit. All the wiring shall be 

carried out in looping in loop system. Circuit wiring shall not be separately measured and paid. 

The point wiring rates shall include the cost of circuit wiring also. 

Wiring for lights, exhaust fans and ceiling fan points shall be done by 1.5 sq.mm the wiring for the 

first power socket outlet shall be carried out with 6 sq.mm copper conductor and the wiring for 

the second power socket outlet shall be done with 4 sq.mm PVC insulated copper conductor. 

The maximum number of various size conductors that could be drawn in to various sizes of 

conduits shall be as per table II of IS 732 (Latest Edition). The wiring shall be colour coded for 

easy identification of phases and neutral. The following colour code shall be adopted. 

Phases : 

R - Red 

Y - Yellow/White 

B - Blue 

Neutral 

Black 

Earth 

Green 

6.7 All circuit wiring shall be provided with printed PVC identification ferrules at either end bearing 

the circuit number and designation. 

7.0 Switches, Sockets and Accessories 

7.1 General requirements 

Light control switches shall be of 5 A, rating. Light control switches shall be of piano-key/moulded plate 

type design suitable for flush mounting for general lighting. Wherever specifically called for piano 

tumbler type switches shall be used. Light control switch shall have either integral mounting plates. 5 

Page 84 of 174



NRDA 

mm thick white colour laminate plate with rounded corner in case of piano type switches. All switches 

shall be located at 1200 mm above from F.F.L unless otherwise specified. 

7.2 All sockets 5 A. and 15 A. ratings shall be provided with control switches of the same rating as 

that of the sockets. All the sockets shall be provided with plug tops of approved quality and design and 

shall be located 150 mm above from F.F.L. unless otherwise specified. 

7.3 Industrial type sockets 

Industrial type sockets shall be provided wherever specifically called for industrial sockets. Sockets shall 

have 3 pins for single phase appliations and 4 pins and scrapping earth for 3 phase applications. The 

sockets shall be provided with suitable plug top with suitable cable entry. Sockets shall have metal covers 

with chain. Industrial type sockets shall be provided with a suitable sheet steel housing made of 14 gauge 

with the socket mounted in flush with cover of the housing. 

7.4 Lamp Holders, Ceiling Roses etc. 

Accessories for light outlets such as lamp holders, ceiling roses, etc. shall be in conformity with 

requirements of relevant IS specifications. Only approved make of accessories shall be supplied. 

7.5 Installation of switches, sockets and accessories 

All the swithces shall be wired on phase. Connections shall be made only after testing the wires for 

continuity, cross phase, etc. with the help of a meggar. Switches, sockets, fan regulators etc. shall be 

housed in proper sheet steel enclosure. The arrangement of swithches and sockets shall be neat and 

systematic. Covers for enclosures accommodating switches, sockets etc. (point control boxes) shall be of 

5 mm thick, fine finished PVC/Perspex material and fixed to the enclosure in plumb with counter suck 

head, chromium plated brass screws in case of piano type switches. The outlets, point control boxes, etc. 

shall be set out as shown on the drawings, before fixing these, the contractor shall obtain clearance from 

the Engineer/Engineer in Charge.with regard to their proper locations. 

Luminaries 

General 

All the materials used in the construction of luminaries shall be of high quality, design and construction 

that will provide adequate protection in normal use, against mechanical, electrical failures/faults and 

exposure to the risk of injury or electric shock and shall withstand the effects of exposure to atmosphere. 

Fluorescent lamp luminaires 

Luminaire shall be supplied as per the design specified in the schedule of quantities. Luminaries shall be 

complete in all respects with basic mounting channel, shock-proof insert contact rotor lamp holder, 

ballast, connector block, internal wiring and decorative attachments, if any. The mounting channel shall 

be made of mild steel sheets suitably rust inhibited and stove enamelled. A dust proof cover stove 

enamelled to white shade shall be provided for the channel to protect the accessories and wiring from 

dust and vermin and to act a reflector. 

Page 85 of 174



NRDA 

Ballast shall be silent in operation. Ballast shall have a long life and shall be highly reliable a suitable 

capacitor shall be hermetically sealed. Difusers, louvres etc. shall be of opal acrylic/polystrene diffusers, 

louvres, and similar decorative attachments. The attachments shall be guaranted against 

discolourisation, warping and deformation under continuous operation. Fluorescent lamps shall conform 

to BS: 1853 in all respects. Flluorescent lamps shall be of bipin pattern. The colour of the light shall be 

white or cool day light, as required. Unless otherwise specified, the lamps shall be of 40 W. and 1200 mm 

long. Luminaires shall be provided with an earthing terminal for bonding the body of the luminaire to 

earth. Luminaires shall be installed as specified in the drawings. 

Erection of fixtures shall include assembling of all components of the fixture such as chokes, condesers, 

starters, decorative attachments etc. 

Incandescent lamp luminaires 

Incandescent lamp luminaires shall be supplied as per the design and type mentioned in the schedule of 

quantities. Incandescent lamp luminaire shall be provided with lamp holders suitable for lamps with 

standard bayonet cap up to 200 watts. For luminaires suitable for lamps above 200 watts, holders to suit 

Edison screw of Goliath screw caps shall be provided. Pendent luminaires shall be provided with lamp 

holders with cord grips. Incandescent lamp luminaires shall be complete with reflector, shade decorative 

attachment (if any) and cover as specified and required. Incandescent lamps shall conform in all respects 

to BS : 161. 

Light tracks 

Light tracks, wherever required, shall be suitable for flush mounting with all mounting accessories. The 

light track shall consist of an extruded aluminium section with two insulated copper conductors on either 

side, track adapter/current collector for fixing the luminaires, and the accessories. Live ends and couplers 

shall be diecast aluminium with injection moulded ends, covers and connectors. 

1.1.1.10 Fans 

Ceiling fans 

Ceiling fans shall conform to IS: 374 (Latest edition) in all respects. Fan shall be smooth and silent in 

operation. The fan motor shall be a capacitor type motor with body and high conductivity aluminium 

diecast. The blades shall be made of aluminium sheets painted in off white shade. The design and 

construction of blades shall be such that maximum quantity of air is displaced in smooth manner. The 

motor and blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fans shall be provided with ball 

bearing, and bush bearings which are accessible for lubrication rubber hackle and a down rod. The 

suspension arrangement shall be jointed to the shaft by means of a thread joint and a safety locking 

arrangement. Fans shall be provided with bottom cover and a top canopy. A regulatgor for 5 speed 

operation and stop shall be provided with every fan. Electronic stepless regulators shall be provided, if 

specified. Ceiling fans shall be suspended from the special hooks or special fan hook boxes. Where hooks 

are used the wiring to the fan shall be from a ceiling rose. Wherever special fan hook boxes are used, the 

fan wiring shall be terminated in porcelain/PVC autoway connector. Lead in wires shall have cross section 

area of 1.5 mm 2 . 

Page 86 of 174



NRDA 

Exhaust fans 

Propeller type exhaust fans shall conform to IS : 2312 (Latest Edition) in all respects. The motor shall be 

of diecast aluminium case. The fan motor shall be of squirrel cage induction design. Single phase motors 

shall be of capacitor start and run type. 

Exhaust fans be provided with a special anti-corrosive treatment to withstand normal concentrations of 

chemical fumes in the environment. The fan shall be designed to withstand the effect of moisture under 

normal conditions of use. The design of motor and its windings shall be such that moisture in 

surroundings is not absorbed by the windings. Exhaust fans shall be complete with mounting rings, ring 

arms and a reslient suspension. The motor and blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The 

blades shall be made of mild steel sheets and so designed that they operate smoothly with minimum 

noise. The fans shall be finished to a glossy gray shade with an approved enamel paint. The fans shall 

also be provided with louvres for exhaust arrangement or bird screen for enlet arrangement. Exhaust 

fans shall be fixed at the locations shown on the drawings. The fans shall be fixed by means of tag bolts 

grouted in wall. Exhaust fan be connected to the exhaust fan point by means of a flexible cord. 

Point Wiring 

Point wiring shall commence from the first point control box/local control box for the points connected to 

the same circuit. Point wiring for lights, fans, 5 A. sockets, call bells, etc. shall be carried out with copper 

conductor PVC insulated wires of 1.5 sq.mm cross section. The point wiring shall be inclusive of 20 

mm/32 mm sheet steel conduits of standard and of approved make (as specified hereinbefore) along with 

approved quality conduit accessories such as bends, inspection bends, reducers, junction boxes etc. 

together with wiring accessories such as ceiling roses, lamp holders, connectors, point control boxes 

(enclosure for electrical accessories), etc. Point wiring shall be provided with 18 SWG bare copper earth 

continuity wire for earthing 3rd pin of sockets, luminaires and fan fixtures. Light control shall be either 

single, twin or multiple points controlled by a switch as specified. 

Testing of electrical installation 

Testing of installation shall be as per IS 732 - 1963. 

The insulations resistance shall be measured by applying between earth and the whole system of 

conductors or any section thereof with all fuses in places and all switches closed and except in earthed 

concentric wiring shall be all lamps in position or both poles of tghe installation otherwise electrically 

connected together, where a direct current pressure of not less than twice the working pressure provided 

with it need not exceed 500 volts for medium voltage circuits. Where the supply is derived from the 

three wire (AC or DC) or a poly phase system, the neutral pole of which is connected to earth either direct 

or through added resistance, the working pressure shall be deemed to be that which is maintained 

between the outer or phase conductor and the neutral. 

The insulation resistance measured as above shall not be less than 50 divided by the number of points on 

the circuits provided that the whole installation shall be required to have an insulation resistance greater 

than one megohm. 

Control rheostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may, if required, be disconnected from 

the circuit during the test, but in the event, tghe insulation resistance between the case or frame work 

Page 87 of 174



NRDA 

and all live parts of each rheostat appliance and sign shall not be less than that specified in the relevant 

Indian Standard specification or where there is no such specification shall not be less than half a mega 

ohm. 

The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all conductors connected to one pole or phase 

conductors of the supply and all the conductors connected to the middle wire or the neutral or to the 

other pole or phase conductors of the supply and its value shall not be less than specified. 

On completion of an electric installation ( or an extension to an installation) a certificate shall be 

furnished by the contractor countersigned by the qualified supervisor under whose direct supervision the 

installation was carried out. The certificate shall be in the prescribed form as required by the Local 

Electric Supply authorities. One such recommended form is given in Àppendix'. 

Testing of earth continuity path 

The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and metallic envelopes in all cases shall be 

tested for electric continuity and the electrical resistance of the same along with the earthing lead but 

excluding any added resistance or leakage circuit breaker measured from the connection with the earth 

electrodes to any point in the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed 

one megohm. 

Testing of polarity of non-linked single pole switches 

In a two wire installation a test shall be made to verify that all non linked single pole switches have been 

fitted in the same conductor tghroughout and such conductor shall be labelled of marked for connection 

to an outer or phase conductor or to the non-earthed conductor of the supply. 

In a three wire or a four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify that every non-linked single switch 

is fitted in a conductor which is labelled marked for connection to one of the outer phase conductor of 

the supply. 

P. EARTHING 

1. General 

This section covers the general arrangement of the earthing, i.e. all non-current carrying metal parts of 

the electrical installation shall be earthed as per IS 3043 and general specifications for electrical works 

(part-1, internal) of CPWD specifications. All metal conduits, trunkings, cable sheaths, switchgear, 

distribution boards, meters, light fixtures, fans and all other metal parts forming part of the work shall be 

bonded together and connected by two separate and distinct conductors to earth electrodes. Earthing 

shall also be in conformity with the provisions of Rule 32, 61, 62, 67 and 88 of IER 1956. The earth 

electrode shall not be situated less than 1.5 mtr. 

Page 88 of 174



NRDA 

2. Earthing Systems 

It shall comprise of earth electrodes, earth strips, earth continuity conductor and all earthing conductors 

shall be of high conductivity copper, GI or aluminium and shall be protected against mechanical damage 

and corrosion. The size of earth conductors shall not be less than half that of the largest current carrying 

conductor. The connection of earth continuity conductors of earth bus and earth electrodes shall be 

strong and sound and shall be rigidly fixed to the walls, cable trenches, cable trays or conduits and cable 

by using suitable clamps made of non ferrous metals. 

3. Sized Earth Load 

3.1 The following earthing conductors are required to be used for various sections of the installation. 

) All fixtures - Lighting, fan and switch enclosures, lighting conduits shall be earthed with 16 SWG 

bare copper wires or 2.5 sq.mm aluminium conductor PVC insulated wires. 

) 3 rd pin of power socket outlet up to 20 Amps shall be earthed with 14 SWG bare copper wire. 

) All single phase switches and DB upto 30 Amps rating shall be earthed with one run of 12 SWG 

bare copper wire. 

) All single phase switches and DBs above 30 Amps and upto 63 A. rating shall be earthed with one 

run of 10 SWG bare copper wire. 

) All three phase switches/DBs upto 30 Amps rating shall be earthed with 2 runs of 12 SWG copper 

wire. 

) All three phase switches/DBs above 30 Amps and up to 63 Amps shall be earthed with 2 runs of 

10 SWG copper wire. 

) All three phase switches/DBs above 63 Amps and up to 100 Amps shall be earthed with 2 runs of 

8 SWG copper wire. 

) All three phase switches/DBs of 200 Amps rating and above shall be earthed with 2 runs of 25 x 

1.6 mm copper tapes or suitable equivalent GI strips. 

) All motor frames shall be earthed by two earthing conductors of specified cross section. 

3.2 Main earth bus shall be taken from the main medium voltage panel to the earth electrodes. The 

number of electrodes required shall be arrived at taking in to consideration the anticipated fault 

on the medium voltage network. 

3.3 All the sub mains and sub circuits shall be provided with earth continuity conductors as specified 

and connected to the main earth bus. Earth conductors for equipment shall be run from the 

exposed metal surface of the equipment and connected to a suitable point on the sub main or 

main earthing bus. All switch boards, distribution boards and isolators, disconnect switches shall 

Page 89 of 174



NRDA 

be connected to the earth bus. Earthing conductors shall be terminated at the equipment using 

suitable lugs, bolts, washers, and nuts. 

3.4 All conduits, cable armouring, raceways, rising mains, etc. shall be connected to the earth all 

along their run by earthing conductors of suitable cross sectional area. Sprinkler pipes, LPG pipes, 

water pipes, steel structural elements, lightning conductors shall not be used as a means of 

earthing an installation. The electrical resistance of earthing conductors shall be low enough to 

permit the passage of fault current necessary to operate a fuse/protective device/a circuit 

breaker and shall not exceed 2 ohms. As rough guide the following size of earth continuity 

conductors shall be used for circuit wiring. 

Size of Circuit wires/cables 

Size of copper earth wire 

) 2.5 sq. mm conductors : 16 SWG 



) 10.0sq. mm conductors : 14 SWG 

) 16 sq. mm conductors : 12 SWG 

) 25sq. mm conductors & 

} 35 sq.mm conductors : 12 SWG 

) 50 mm 2 and 70 mm 2 conductors : 10 SWG 

All single phase wiring shall have one run of copper earth wire and three phase wiring shall be 

provided with two runs of copper earth wires. 

4. Earthing Electrodes 

Earthing electrodes shall be designed as per the requirement of clause 17.2 of IS 3043. The 

number and size of earth electrodes shall be calculated so that under fault conditions no 

electrode is loaded above its maximum permissible current density. The resistance of earth 

electrode shall be as low as possible, the maximum allowable value being one ohm. 

Earthing electrodes of either plate type or pipe type may be adopted. The choice of plate or pipe 

electrode shall be decided according to the anticipated fault level of the network and local soil 

conditions. Generally, plate electrodes shall be used for substations and large medium voltage 

network and pipe electrodes for small medium voltage network and installations. 

4.1 Location of Earth Electrodes 

Page 90 of 174



NRDA 

Normally on earth electrode shall not be situated less than 1.5 m from any building. Care shall be 

taken that the excavation for earth electrode may not effect the column footings or foundation of 

the buildings. In such cases electrodes may be further away from the building. 

The location of the earth electrode will be such where the soil has reasonable chance of 

remaining moist. As far as possible, entrances, pavements and road ways, are to be definitely 

avoided for locating earth electrode. 

4.2 Water Arrangement 

Method of watering arrangement shall comply with CPWD General Specifications. 

4.3 Plate Electrode 

Plate electrodes shall be made of GI plate of 6 mm thick and 60x60 cm. size. The plate shall be 

buried vertically in ground at depth of not less than 2 metres to the top of the plate, the plate 

being encased in charcoal to a thickness of 15 cm. all round. It is preferable to bury the electrode 

to a depth where sub-soil water is present. Earth leads to the electrode shall be laid in a GI pipe 

and connected to the plate electrode with GI bolts, nuts and washers. A GI pipe of not less than 

19 mm dia shall be placed vertically over the plate and terminated in a funnel at 5 cm. above 

ground. The funnel shall be provided with a wire mesh. The funnel shall be enclosed in masonry 

chamber of 30 x 30 x 30 cm. dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with CI frame and CI 

cover. The earth station shall also be provided with a suitable permanent identification label/tag. 

Note : If copper plate is used it shall be of 3mm thickness. 

4.4 Pipe electrode shall comprise of a 2.5 Mtr. long 40 mm dia GI pipe buried vertically in a pit of 35 x 

35 cm size and filled with alternate layers of charcoal, salt and river sand and connected at the 

top to a GI pipe of 19 mm, 1 Mtr. long with a funnel at the other end, 5 cm above the ground. 

The earth lead shall be properly fixed to the pipe electrode with brass bolts, nuts and washers. 

The funnel and earth lead connections shall be enclosed in a masonry chamber of 30 x 30 x 30 

Cm. dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with a CI frame and CI cover. Proper permanent 

identification tag/label shall be provided for each electrode. 

5.0 Installation 

5.1 All joints shall be revetted and sweated. Joints in the earth bar shall be bolted and the joints 

faces tinned. Where the diameter of the bolt for connecting earth bar to aparatus exceeds one 

quarter of the width of the earth bar, the connection to the bolt shall be made with a wider piece 

of flange of copper jointed to earth bar. These shall be tinned at the point of connection and 

special care taken to ensure a permanent low resistance contact to iron or steel. All steel bolts, 

nuts, washers, etc shall be cadmium plated. Main earth bars shall be spaced sufficiently away 

from the surface to which they are fixed, such as walls or the side of trenches to allow for easy 

connections. Copper earth bars shall not be fixed by ferrous fittings. The earthing shall be 

suitably protected from mechanical injury by galavanised iron within ground shall be buried at 

least 60 cm deep. The earthing lead shall be securely bolted and soldered to the plate or pipe as 

the case may be. In the case of the plate, the lead shall be connected by means of cable socket 

Page 91 of 174



NRDA 

with two bolts and nuts. All washers shall be of the same materials as the plate or pipe. All iron 

bolts, nuts and washers shall be galavanised. 

5.2 Method of Installation of watering arrangement 

In the case of plate earth electrode a watering pipe of 20 mm dia of medium class GI pipe shall be 

provided and attached to the electrode. A funnel with mesh shall be provided on the top for 

watering the pit. In case of pipe earth electrode a 40 mm x 20 mm reducer shall be used for 

accessing the funnel. The watering funnel attachement shall be housed in masonary enclosure of 

not less than 30 cm x 30 cm x 30 cm. A cast iron cover having locking arrangement shall be 

suitably embedded in the masonary enclosure. 

6.0 Precautions 

6.1 Earthing system shall be mechanically robust and the joints shall be capable of retaining low 

resistance even after passages of fault currents. 

6.2 Joints shall be soldered, tinned and double riveted. All the joints shall be mechanically and 

electrically continuous and effective. Joints shall be provided against corrosion. 

6.3 The earthing lead from electrode onwards shall be suitably protected from mechanical injury by a 

15 mm dia GI pipe in case of wire and by 40 mm dia medium class GI pipe in case of strips. 

Portion of this protection pipe within the ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep (to be 

increased to 60 cm in case of road crossing and pavements). The portion within the building shall 

be recessed in walls and floor to adequate depth. 

7.0 Testing 

7.1 On the completion of the entire installation, the following tests shall be conducted and no earth 

electrode shall have ohmic resistance of more than 5 ohm and in rocky soil not more than 8 

ohms. 

a) Earth resistance of electrodes 

b) Impedance of earth continuity conductors as per E-3 of IEE regulations. 

c) Effectiveness of earthing as per E-4 & E-5 of IEE regulations. 

7.2 All meters, instruments and labour required for the tests shall be provided by the contractor. The 

test results shall be submitted in triplicate to the Architects for approval. 

Page 92 of 174



NRDA 

Q. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

1. General 

Lightning protection network shall be provided for high rise building to protect against lightning 

strokes. The entire scheme of lightning protection system shall be in conformity with the 

requirements of BS code of practice CP 326/IS 2309. Generally, the lightning protection scheme 

shall consist of vertical air termination’s at required points at the top of the structure and 

horizontal air termination’s laid as network on the terrace of the structure. The air termination’s 

shall be connected to earth electrodes through down conductors. 

2. Air Termination’s 

An air termination shall consist of a vertical conductor framed into a spike with a three prong 

made of copper/phosphor or bronze and fixed onto 25 mm dia copper tube of at least 2 metre 

above the network. The horizontal air termination’s shall consist of a grid network of suitable size 

of copper/GI tapes fixed on the surface of the roof and no part of the roof should be more than 9 

metres from the nearest horizontal air termination’s. 

3. Down conductors 

Air termination’s shall be connected to the earth termination’s by suitable size of copper/GI 

Tapes fixed on to walls of the structures. The tapes shall be securely fixed in position by means of 

brass saddles and metallic fasteners. The number of down conductors shall be decided as per the 

stipulations of the code of practice CP:326/IS:2309. Where the down conductors are laid 

underground, they shall be laid at a depth of 750 mm below the ground level, buried in trench, 

covered with 100 mm thick layer of sand and protected by cable protection tiles. All metallic 

parts of the building above the main roof level including ducts, towers, pipes, gutters and other 

mechanical equipment shall be bonded to the down conductors by suitable size copper tapes or 

wires. The method and nature of fixing should be simple, solid and permanent, due attention 

being given to climatic conditions and possible corrosion. 

4. Joints and bonds 

The lightning protection system shall have as few joints in it as possible. In down conductors 

below ground level there shall be no joints. Where joints are necessary, they shall be 

machanically and electrically effective and shall be made as to exclude moisture completely. The 

joints may be clamped, revetted or welded. With overlaping joints the length of the over-lap 

should not be less than 20 mm for all type of conductors. Contact surfaces should first be 

cleaned and then inhibited from oxidation with suitable non-corrosive compound. Joints of dissimilar 

metals should be suitably protected against bimetallic action and corrosion. In general, 

joints for strips shall be tinned, welded of brazed and at least double rivetted. Clamped or bolted 

joints shall only be used on test points or on bonds to existing metal. 

5. Bonds 

Page 93 of 174



NRDA 

External metal on or forming part of a structure have to discharge full lighting current. Therefore, 

the bond to the lightining protective system shall have a cross-sectional area not less than that 

bonds shall be suitably protected against corrosing. Bonds shall be short as possible. 

6. Testing points 

Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing point at 1200 mm above the ground level 

convenient for testing but in accessible for interferance. No connection, other than direct to an 

earth electrode, shall be made below a testing point. Testing points shall be phospher bronze, 

gun metal, copper or any other suitable material. 

7. Earth termination’s 

Each down conductor shall have an independent earth termination. It should be capable of 

isolation for testing purposes. Water pipe system should not be bonded to the earth termination 

system. However, if adequate clearance between the two cannot be obtained they may be 

efectively bonded and bonds should be capable of isolation and test. 

8. Earth termination’s 

Suitable number of earth termination’s shall be provided. The earth termination shall consist of 

pipe/plate earth electrode as per the specifications of IS:3043. The earth termination’s shall be 

complete in all respects with chamber and cover etc. as per the detailed specifications. The 

resistance of earth electrode shall not exceed 5 Ohms. Wherever required to limit the resistance 

of earthing, several earth electrodes may be interconnected. 

9. Fasteners 

Conductors shall be securely attached to the building or other object to the protected by 

fasteners which shall be substantial in construction, not subject to breakage and shall be made of 

galvanised steel or other suitable material. If the fasteners are made of steel, they should be 

galvanised to protect them against corrosion. 

10. Inspection 

All lighting protective system shall be examined by a engineer in charge. A routine inspection 

shall be made periodically. 

11. Testing 

Suitable testing links shall be provided at required points as per the code of practice CP 326/IS 

2309. The ohmic resistance of the lightning protective system complete with air termination’s 

but without earth connection should be measured and this should be a fraction of an ohm. Earth 

resistance shall be measured in accordance with IS 3043. The Contractor shall carryout tests on 

completion of the installation and submit the readings for approval. 

R. STREET LIGHTING 

Page 94 of 174



NRDA 

The specifications covers the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following 

items ; 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Street/Boundary lighting poles complete with all accessories e.g. looping box, clamps and 

required hardwares etc. 

Street/boundary lighting fixtures complete with all accessories e.g lamps latest etc. 

Wiring of street light fixtures. 

Cable laying, earthing and inter connection 

Foundation of poles and erection. 

All the items should be tested and installed as per the latest Indian standards specifications and 

all the sundry items such as clamps, bolts, nuts, racks, support miscellaneous wiring etc., required 

to make the installation complete shall be taken care while quoting the major items. 

a) Steel Tubular pole 

The poles for street lighting purpose shall be complete in all respects and shall confirm to IS: 2713 unless 

otherwise specified. All poles shall be complete with base plate of of 400 mm x 400 mm x 10 mm thick 

welded to bottom. The poles shall be provided terminal box for looping in and looping out of cables and 

shall consists fuse / MCB as specified. The looping box shall be suitable for outdoor installation and 

complete with all hardwares such as clamp, bolts, earthing studs, lockable door etc. and shall be paint 

also in the same manner as specified for poles. The poles shall be provided with two numbers of GI pipes 

of suitable dia for cable entry as shown in drawing. The poles shall be painted with two coats of red oxide 

primer on both outside and the portion of the pole below the ground before erection and two coats of 

aluminium paint of approved shade after erection over the exposed portion. 

b) Erection of pole 

While loading, transporting, unloading and erecting the poles care shall be taken so that the poles do not 

get bent. Out of shape and where necessary such defects shall be rectified before the poles are erected 

in position. The poles shall be erected in plumb line and correct level as indicated in the drawing and to 

the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. They shall be kept in this position with the help of manila 

ropes until the foundation are constructed (for a minimum period of 10 days) and the backfilling is 

complete. Foundation shall be made with reinforced cement concrete (1:2:4) and not less than 200 mm 

thick all round. The pole base plate shall be fixed over 150 mm thick concrete bed. Foundation shall be 

continued upto 300 mm or more above ground level as per location of the pole to avoid ingress of water 

logging etc. The foundation shall be tapered suitably into a collar. The excavated portion shall be filled 

back with earth and consolidated. The cement concrete foundations shall be cured properly by covering 

the same with water soaked or moist gunny bags at least two weeks before loading the pole. 

c) Erection of light fixtures 

Each light fixture shall be connected to the supply through fuse/MCB of a suitable rating mounted in the 

looping box. The fitting shall be fixed to the pole properly and securely. 

d) Wiring of light fixtures 

The wiring of lighting fixtures from terminal block by means of 2.5 sq.mm PVC insulated single core 

copper conductor through a suitable rated MCB/fuse and neutral. Cost of single core connecting cable 

from junction box to lighting fixture and earth wire complete with connections are included in the quoted 

rate. 

e) Cabling works 

Page 95 of 174



NRDA 

All cable installation work shall be done as per relevent clauses of section cable work. 

f) Tests 

Before handing over the installation, tests on all fittings and cables shall be carried out as per IS 


The tests shall include; 

) Meggar test 

) Continuity test 

) Polarity test and phase sequence test 

OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION FEEDER PILLARS 

The feeder pillar shall be of the floor mounting type, totally enclosed and weather proof, conforming to 

IS-IP 55 incorporating MCCBs/MCBs having a certified rupturing capacity of not less than 50 KA at 415 V 

as per bill of quantities in the tender. 

The cubical should be fabricated out of heavy gauge sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.5 mm thick 

with suitable side frames and 2mm thick stiffeners,. Hinges doors of not less than 2mm thick should be 

provided at the front and rear of the cubical to provide access for installation, operation, test and 

inspection. The rear door is provided to facilitate cable termination and the front door for inspection of 

MCCBs/MCBs. All doors should also be fitted with suitable locking arrangements with 6 lever GODREJ 

pad lock with 2-keys to prevent unauthorised opening. The cubical should be designed for mounting over 

cement concrete plinth by the roadside and should be of robust construction capable of withstanding the 

vibrations normally experienced due to heavy vehicular traffic. The top of the feeder pillars is of slanting 

construction in all directions to prevent any collection of water due to rain. The front and rear sides of 

the concrete plinth foundation shall be closed with brick masonry and the surface all round shall be 

plastered. A gland plate is provided at the bottom of the feeder pillar (removable) for mounting the cable 

glands. The feeder pillar shall be fitted on an angle iron pedestal at the bottom covered with sheet metal 

from all the four sides which facilitates cable bending etc. specially with aluminium cables. Two lifting 

hooks shall be provide at the top. A door switch shall be provided in the feeder pillar so as to switch ON 

and OFF the lamp fixed in the brass batten holder below the top sheet of the pillar. 

The sheet steel materials used in the construction of the cubical should have undergone a rigorous rust 

proofing process comprising alkaline degreasing, descaling in dilute sulphuric acid solution and a 

recognised phosphating process. After metal t5reatment, the interior of the cubical should be paijnted 

with two coats of air drying red lead primer followed by two coats of air drying anti-condensation paint., 

The exterior of the cubical should be painted with two coats of primer followed by a coat of epoxy paint 

of approved shade. 

Ventilation louvers in the form of finely divided wire mesh shall be provided on the two sides to ensure 

natural ventilation. All the nuts, bolts shall be cadmium plated, zinc passivatged with spring washers. A 

minimum spacing from cable connection to the bottom of gland plate shall be 300mm. 

The bus bar should be of electrical grade aluminium unless specified otherwise. They should be designed 

for air insdulated clearance between conductors and between conductors and earth and shall be PVC 

heat shrinkable sleeved in extra insulation. These should be colur coded to enable immediate 

identification of the phases and neutral. The bus bars should be carried on supports made out for a 

Page 96 of 174



NRDA 

suitable SMC insulators. Suitable insulating phase barriers should be provided to prevent accidental short 

circuits during operation. 

The neutral bus bar shall be rated at not less than 50% of the phase bus bars. The design should allow for 

neutral cable sockets to be fitted directly to the bus bars. A aluminium earth bar of size 25x6mm 

together with two cable eyes shall be provided for connections to earth pits. All the cables shall be 

terminated at ELMEX tgerminal block and therefrom wiring shall be done with PVC insulated copper 

conductor cables to MCCBs . 

The wiring shall be neatly bunched and shall be secured to wiring cradles. 

A circuit card holder to be made inside the fron door and the card duly engraved on aluminium sheet. 

Identification ferrules shall be used for incoming and outgoing cables. Danger plate shall be fixed on both 

the doors of the feeder pillar. 

S. FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM 

1. Basis of Design 

An Intelligent Fire Alarm System herein after known as (IFAS) shall be provided to effect total control 

over the life safety services required in the building. The IFAS shall be of the digital, distributed 

processing, real time, multitasking, multi user and multi-location type. 

Page 97 of 174



NRDA 

The system shall be provided with Addressable and Analog fire alarm initiating, annunciating and 

control devices. 

The addressable and intelligent system shall be such that smoke sensors , thermal sensors , manual 

pull stations etc . can be identified with point address . The system shall be capable of : 

a. Setting smoke sensor sensitivity remotely to either high sensitivity manually or on a preprogrammed 

sequence e .g . occupied / unoccupied period . The IFAS shall be able to recognize 

normal and alarm values that reveal trouble condition , and above normal values that indicate 

either a pre alarm condition or the need of maintenance . 

b. Read-out or address at actual space temperature at thermal detector points . The operator shall 

also be able to adjust alarm and pre alarm thresholds and other parameters for the smoke 

sensors . 

c. Provide a maintenance / pre-alert alarm capability at smoke sensors to prevent the detectors 

from indicating a false alarm due to dust , dirt etc . 

d. Provide alarm verification of individual smoke sensors. Alarm verification shall be printed on the 

printer at the control station’s printer to enhance system maintenance and identify possible 

problem areas . 

e. Provide local numeric point address and LED display of the device and current condition of the 

point . Local annunciation shall not interfere with annunciation from the Fire Control System . 

f. Provide outputs that are addressable , i .e . outputs shall have point address . The operator shall 

be able to command such points manually or assign the points to logical point groups (Software 

Zones) for pre-programmed operation . 

In the event of fire alarm , but not in a fault condition , the following action shall be performed 

automatically . 

a. The System Alarm LED on the main fire alarm control panel shall flash 

b. A local piezo-electric sounder shall be sounded . 

c. The LCD display on the main fire alarm control panel shall indicate all information associated 

with Fire Alarm condition including the type of alarm point and its location within the premises . 

d. Printing the information associated with the Fire Alarm Control Panel condition , along with the 

time and date of occurrence . 

e. Air handling units on the affected floors shall automatically be switched OFF and simultaneously 

respective fire dampers shall also be closed. 

f. Pressurization fans on the evacuation shafts i.e. Stairwells etc. will automatically be switched 

ON. 

1. Fire Alarm Control Panel 

1.1 The Fire Alarm Control Panels shall function both as an independent stand alone system element as 

well as an interface between the control processing unit and the fire detectors , their accessories 

and the controlled devices . The control panel shall be intelligent type with its own microcomputer 

and memory . It shall be powered with high efficiency SMPS . 

Page 98 of 174



NRDA 

1.2 The Fire Alarm Panels shall be microprocessor based and shall have necessary detector interface 

units (for both addressable and non-addressable sensors) , alarm output modules for external 

hooter & lamp control output modules for various control functions through relay contacts and 

communication modules for interfacing with the outside world . The processor shall interact with 

the other modules through a common bus . The system shall store all basic system functionality and 

job specific data in non-volatile memory . All site specific and operating data shall survive a 

complete power failure intact . Password shall protect any changes to system operations . 

1.3 The Fire Alarm Panels shall have the facility to process the Input Signals and control the output 

functions either directly or through I/O Interface Modules as per the requirements . 

1.4 The Fire Alarm Panels shall continuously scan the various loops for conditions of Fire , Fault (Open 

circuit as well as short circuit) and provide audio-visual Alarm and Messages as the case may be . 

Each loop shall be capable for connecting minimum 198 addressable units and at least 99 detectors. 

1.5 System circuits shall be configured as follows: Addressable analog loops class 'A'; initiating devices 

circuits class 'A'; Notification appliance circuits Class A; Network communication A . Annunciates 

Communication 'A' . Any deviation in the style of wiring shall be with prior permission of the 

consultant. 

1.6 The Fire Alarm Panel shall be protected against any kind of short circuit , open circuit , over voltage 

and under voltage . In case of any abnormality , the system shall display appropriate message . The 

panel should have a CPU watch dog circuit to indicate trouble should the CPU fail . 

1.7 The system should perform Fire Pattern Recognition . For this purpose , it shall offer the following 

features: 

a) Smoke entering a detector for a short duration (e .g . cigarette smoke) shall not cause any 

alarm . 

b) A fast build up of smoke shall result in quick alarm generation . 

c) A gradual build up of smoke shall be detected early by reducing the pre-warning limit 

automatically (without disturbing the alarm level) . 

d) A slow build up of dirt in detectors shall be recognized and the alarm level shall be suitably 

modified without generating any false alarms . For this purpose , the Fire alarm Panels 

shall have necessary Hardware and Software filters , details of which must be submitted 

by the tenderer in the technical bid . 

e) The system shall have detector sensitivity test feature , which will be a function of the 

smoke detectors and perform automatically every four hours . 

1.8 The Fire Alarm Panels shall have the under mentioned additional features: 

a) Logging an alarm , time and action text on printer . 

b) Status check of disabled alarm addresses before they are restored . 

c) Storing of alarms and the possibility of internal organization of alarms . 

1.9 Offered Fire Alarm Panel shall have high degree of flexibility with: 

Page 99 of 174



NRDA 

a) The possibility of expanding to a bigger system with several control panels, and control and 

information units . 

b) Programmable actuation of control output relays for tripping ventilators , closing of fire doors , 

closing of fire dampers , etc . in case of fire . The system shall also provide a manual over-riding 

facility to operate/de-activate the above . 

c) Connection to addressable as well as non-addressable (Conventional) Detectors , Manual call 

station , etc . 

1.10 Fire Alarm panel shall have memory storage for last 600 events (with date and time of occurrence) 

and an alarm counter for number of alarms occurred after the system is installed . 

1.11 For reasons of reliability and preventing inadvertent changes, the software / database shall be 

maintained in Non-volatile Memory . It shall be possible to reprogram the software by authorized 

personnel only . Fire Alarm Panel shall provide Access Protection via Password (multilevel) . Hardware 

protection shall be via a security lock and key arrangement. 

1.12 Offered Fire Alarm Panels shall automatically scan the whole system and confirm the user entered 

configuration . It shall also generate the appropriate messages . 

1.13 System should check up all the detectors periodically (by scanning) for the sensitivity of the 

detectors . Whenever any detector sensitivity goes down due to/ soiling or dust accumulation it 

should provide the required biasing to bring the detector's sensitivity upto the required level . In 

case any detector goes below the minimum sensitivity level , it should issue a warning tone for 

cleaning the detector manually. Therefore each analog detector shall be monitored for maintenance 

alert . 

1.14 The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following operational 

attributes; integral multiple differential sensors , automatic device mapping , environmental 

compensation , pre alarm , dirty detector identification , automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment 

, normal / alarm LEDs , relay bases , sounder bases and isolator bases . 

1.15 The Fire Alarm Control Panels shall be of multiplex system using distributed memory , processing 

and control configured in regenerative network using a Master network controller and various field 

panels and remote controllers . These regenerative network shall be capable of generating critical 

system functions in the event of Master network controller fails or data line is severed . The network 

upon failure of these , shall sense the missing remote controllers or field panels and regenerate 

itself into a system or system dependent upon the remaining hardware . Each segment that has 

been regenerated shall be a full operating system capable of passing individual device or zone 

information to or from any remote field panel for operation of appropriate output devices and 

events . 

1.16 The Fire Control Panel shall be equipped with integrated fire fighters telephone system which shall 

automatically dial one or more programmed fire fighter's telephone numbers and convey preprogrammed 

messages in the event of fire in any of the zone . The fire panel should have a Dialer 

Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) module to transmit alarm , supervisory and trouble signal 

to a Central Monitoring Station (CMS) . The DACT shall support dual telephone lines , 20 pps 4/2 

communication and configured for Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) or pulse modes . 

1.17 Indications as mentioned hereunder shall be available on the Fire Alarm Panels. 

Page 100 of 174



NRDA 

a) RED and AMBER high power LED to indicate any zone on fire and fault respectively. Zone number 

and the area should be displayed on alphanumeric 4 line x 40 character backlit alphanumeric 

graphical LCD display on the control panel. Nature of fault shall also be indicated on the LCD display . 

The main LCD panel and operator console shall be in modular form and the same should be used as 

a repeater panel thus enabling full featured remote operation of the fire alarm system . 

b) Mains-on (Green) . In case of mains failure , SYSTEM ON BATTERY LIGHT (AMBER) should come up 

. 

c) Battery under voltage should be indicated by flashing RED LED with 1 KHz . broken audio signal . 

d) Other indications as per system design . 

e) It should have the facility of for the connection of printer . 

1.18 Matrix type connected printer should provide real time recording of all the system operations . In 

addition to the above , it should be able to provide Hard Copy of reports , system serviceability and 

faults etc . on demand . 

1.19 The system on demand shall provide analog detector sensitivity report . The system shall also 

provide history report of verification cycles per detector and the system status reports of detector 

analog reading both on computer and VDU as well as in the form of hard copy through the printer . 

1.20 The intelligent remote driver cards in control panel shall be listed in TAC / UL / LPCB / FM / AFNOR 

and the panel shall have the provision for connecting of 5 nos . of Repeater Panels to meet feature 

requirements . 

1.21 Modular system design , with a layered application design concept including an "operational layer" 

and a "human interface layer" to allow maximum flexibility of the system with a minimum physical 

size requirement. The panel should be dust and vermin proof . 

1.22 The panel should support 128 service groups within the system program to allow the testing of the 

installed system based on the physical layout of the system , not on the wiring of the field circuits 

connected to the FACP . 

1.23 All the metal portions of the panel shall be powder coated and earthed properly. All the loop cards 

and accessories specified will be housed in a single housing. 

1.24 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM : The Fire Alarm system shall incorporate a true digital integrated 

audio system into the network capable of multiplexing 2 independent audio channels over a single 

pair of wires . The system shall include distributed Audio Amplifiers , one for each speaker circuit , 

for the ultimate in system survivability . The system shall provide a local temporal back up tone at 

each amplifier to allow evacuation signals to be broadcast in the protected premises in the event of 

a loss of data communication from the multiplexed audio riser . A Digital Message Unit shall be 

provided which provides upto 30seconds of pre-recorded emergency messaging . The message 

contained in the fully digital message unit shall be recordable in the field on a computer . 

1.25 The Fire Alarm System shall be provided with a fully integrated Emergency Communications System 

. The Emergency Communications System shall include a paging microphone , digital message 

playback unit . Three dedicated page mode control switches shall provide the emergency operator 

with instantaneous one touch paging to safely control the staged evacuation of building occupants . 

Automatic programming shall dynamically group the most frequently targeted paging zones . 

Page 101 of 174



NRDA 

- The "All Call" switch will direct the manual page to the entire facility . 

- The "Page to Evac" switch will direct the manual page to those building areas automatically 

receiving the Evacuation Signal . 

- The "Page to Alert" switch will direct the manual page to those building areas automatically 

received the Alert Signal . 

The system shall have paging control switches and LEDs to support specific zone selection as shown 

on the plans . The zone control/displays shall confirm amplifier selection and annunciate amplifier 

and amplifier circuit trouble . The system shall automatically deliver a preannounce tone of 1000 Hz 

for three seconds when the emergency operator presses the microphone talk key . 

1.26 AUDIO AMPLIFIERS : Each audio power amplifier shall have integral audio signal de-multiplexers 

allowing the amplifier to select any one of digitized audio channels . The channel selection shall be 

directed by the system software . Up to 2 multiple and different audio signals must be able to be 

broadcast simultaneously from the same system network node . Each amplifier output shall include 

a dedicated , supervised 25/70 Vrms speaker circuit that is suitable for connection of emergency 

speaker appliances . Each amplifier shall also include a notification appliance circuit rated at 24 Vdc 

@ 3 .5A for connection of visible (strobe) appliances . This circuit shall be fully programmable and it 

shall be possible to define the circuit for the support of audible , visible or ancillary devices . Standby 

Audio amplifiers shall be provided that automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier , and 

automatically program themselves to select and de-multiplex the same audio information channel 

to the failed primary amplifier , and fully replace the function of the failed amplifier . In the event of 

a total loss of audio data communications , all amplifiers will default to the local "EVAC" tone 

generator channel . If the local panel has an alarm condition , then all amplifiers will sound the EVAC 

signal on their connected speaker circuits .In the event of a loss of the fully digitized , multiplexed 

audio riser , the audio amplifiers shall automatically default to an internally generated alarm tone. 

Audio amplifiers shall automatically detect a short circuit condition on the connected speaker circuit 

wiring , and shall inhibit itself from driving into that short circuit condition . 

1.27 FIRE FIGHTERS' TELEPHONE SYSTEM : The Fire Alarm system shall provide a fully integrated Fire 

Fighters' Emergency Telephone and Communications System . A Master Telephone handset shall be 

provided which will provide a totally independent 2-way communication between the Fire Alarm 

Control Panel and any of the Fire Fighters' Telephone Stations located as indicated on the plans for 

the building . The Fire Fighters' Telephone System shall include individual LEDs and switches per 

telephone station . The user shall connect a call by pressing the 'connect' switch .. Upto 5 

telephones may be connected on a conference type call . To terminate a call , the operator shall 

press the 'disconnect' switch . 

2. DETECTORS AND ADDRESSABLE DEVICES 

2.1 General Features common to all detectors : 

a. Detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of storing fire parameters information 

in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the 

data flow between detector and analog loop controller . Maximum total analog loop response 

time for detectors changing state shall be 5 seconds. The addressable detectors shall be 

designed to detect one or more characteristics of fire, light smoke or heat. The prime function 

of an addressable detector shall be to detect a fire in its early stages by one of its characteristic 

phenomena, both visual and invisible and convert the same into an electrical signal for 

initiating the local and remote alarm . 

Page 102 of 174



NRDA 

b. The addressable detectors shall be suitable for column / ceiling mounting. 

c. The detector shall be suitable for class A (ring main) preferable or Class B (Non ring main) 

wiring . 

d. The detectors shall be plug-in type and shall have common base . 

e. An indicator LED shall be provided on the detector which illuminates when the detector has 

reached a preset alarm level . The indicator shall be operated independently of the detector 

from the central control panel . 

f. Provision shall be made for an output from the detector suitable for operating a remote 

indicator or other device with a current limitation of 4 milli-amps . The output shall be 

operated independently of the smoke detector from the central control panel . 

g. The detector shall be capable of operating within the following environmental limits: 

Temperature operating range: 0 Deg .C to + 50 Deg .C 

Humidity Operating Range: 0 to 95% R .H . 

Wind resistance upto 10 meters per second without false alarming . 

h. Separate mounting bases shall be required which enable ready removal of detectors for 

maintenance . The bases shall be fitted with stainless steel terminal springs and stainless steel 

terminal screws and saddles . 

i. The construction of the detector and bases shall be in white self-extinguishing polycarbonate 

plastic . Full circuitry must be protected against moisture and fungus . Smoke entry points 

must be protected against dust and insect ingress by corrosion resistant gauze . The detectors 

must be unobtrusive when installed . 

j. Data transmissions to and from the fire control panel from the detector shall be via a 

communications module which is factory fitted to a detector by the original detector 

manufacturer and forms a complete and integral part of the detector . 

k. The detector shall be supplied complete , fully tested and each should bear the serial no . and 

seal of the approving laboratory/body . 

l. The detector shall be capable of automatic electronic addressing/custom addressing by the 

use of DIP or rotary switches . 

m. There shall be facility on the mounting base for writing in indelible ink the address of that base 

. The address code shall be obscured from sight when detector is fitted to the base . 

n. The build-up of dirt or similar contamination on the radio-active source will cause the output 

signal from the detector to gradually change . The control panel shall be capable of monitoring 

this slow change in signal and at a predetermined level indicate that the detector is in need of 

servicing . 

o. The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control panel by the 

transmission of a 3-bit code to the addressed detector . This shall result in a healthy detector 

Page 103 of 174



NRDA 

transmitting back an analogue value in excess of the recommended fire alarm threshold . The 

control panel shall recognize this as a test signal and shall not raise an alarm against this signal 

. These results should also be stored in the detector . 

2.2 Addressable Ionization Smoke Detectors 

a. Ionization smoke detectors shall respond to invisible and visible smoke and combustible gases . 

b. Ionization smoke detectors shall have an inherently stable sensor with built-in automatic 

compensation for changes in ambient conditions . 

c. All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and virtually hermetically sealed to prevent their 

operation from being impaired by dust , dirt or humidity . 

d. All circuitry must be protected against usual electrical transients and electromagnetic interference . 

e. Reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring shall not damage the detectors . 

f. The detector shall have serial no. and seal of the approving laboratory/body . 

g. All radioactive parts of the detectors shall be safeguarded against tampering . The radioactive source 

shall be fully gold plated . 

h. The response sensitivity of each detector shall be field adjustable to one of at least two predetermined 

(factory calibrated) levels . It shall be possible to test the sensitivity of a detector in the 

field . 

i. The response (activation) of a detector shall be clearly visible from the outside by a flashing light of 

sufficient brightness . 

j. The smoke entry windows of the detector shall be field adjustable to match local air current patterns 

. 

k. A built-in barrier shall prevent entry of insects into the sensor . 

l. The detector shall be designed for fast and simple laboratory cleaning . 

m. The detector shall be inserted into or removed from the base by a simple push-twist mechanism to 

facilitate exchange for cleaning and maintenance . 

n. The manufacturer shall produce and provide test equipment allowing to test and exchange ionization 

type smoke detectors upto 7 mtr . (23 ft .) above floor level . 

o. The detector shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Panel via fully supervised two-wire circuit stub line 

(class "B" wiring) or a two wire circuit loop (Class "A" wiring) as specified by the consultant. 

p. Specifications: 

a) Normal operating temperature : 0 Deg . C to 50 Deg .C . 

b) Relative Humidity : Max . 95% RH continuous 

c) Ambient air velocity : Max .15M/Sec Horizontal 

d) Operating Voltage : 24V DC nominal (18V-30V) 

e) Approval by : NFPA/FOC/FM/LPCB/UL 

Page 104 of 174



NRDA 

2.3 Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 

a. The photoelectric smoke detector shall respond predominantly to light white smoke . 

b. The photoelectric smoke detectors must exhibit uniform response behavior in course of time. 

c. The light source intensity shall automatically adjust to compensate for possible effects of dirt and 

dust accumulation in the sensor/lens . 

d. Smoke density in the chamber shall be measured by a symmetrical optical system. 

e. The detectors shall have serial no . and seal of the approving laboratory/body . 

f. The detection principle shall employ a multiple light pulse coincidence circuit in order to prevent the 

false alarms . 

g. All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and virtually hermetically sealed to prevent their 

operations from being impaired by dust , dirt or humidity . 

h. All circuitry must be protected against usual electrical transient and electromagnetic interference . 

i. Reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring shall not damage the detector . 

j. The response sensitivity of each smoke detector shall be field adjustable to a minimum of two predetermined 

(factory calibrated) levels . It shall be possible to test the sensitivity of a detector in the 

field . 

k. The response (activation) of a detector shall be clearly visible from the outside by a flashing light of 


l. A built-in (optional) integrated circuit shall allow the suppression of brief deceptive phenomenon . 

m. The smoke entry windows of the detector shall be field adjustable to match local air current patterns 

. 

n. A built-in barrier shall prevent entry of insects into the sensor . 

o. The detector shall be designed for fast and simple laboratory cleaning . 

p. The detector shall be inserted into or removed from the base by a simple push-twist mechanism to 

facilitate exchange or cleaning and maintenance . 

q. The detector shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Panel via fully supervised two-wire circuits stub line 

(class "B" wiring) or a two wire circuit (Class "A" wiring) as specified by the consultant. 

r. Specifications : 

a) Normal Operating Temperature : 0 Deg .C to 50 Deg .C 

b) Relative Humidity : Max .95% RH 

c) Approval by : NFPA/FOC/FM/LPCB/UL 

d) Operating Voltage : 24V DC nominal (18 V-30V) 

Page 105 of 174



NRDA 

1.1.1.11 2.4 Photoelectric/Heat Multisensor Detector 

The Multisensor analog detector shall use a light scattering type photoelectric\ smoke sensor and an 

ambient temperature sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings. 

The detector shall have a mechanically integrated photoelectronic volume smoke chamber. 

The integral microprocessor shall employ time-based algorithms to dynamically examine values 

from the two sensors simultaneously and initiate an alarm based on that data. 

The detector shall be equipped with dual bicolor light emitting diodes that are visible from the 

floor. The LEDs will flash green to indicate power and glow red to indicate alarm. 

The detector shall be capable of applying an output voltage to an optional remote LED 

annunciator as an indication of alarm status. 

It shall be field cleanable and shall have a magnetic test switch. 

Detector addressing shall be accomplished by means of rotary decade switches, capable of being 

selected and reset in the field without external programming equipment. 

The detector shall use a plug-in, low-profile, aesthetically appealing design. Wiring connections 

shall be by means of a clamping plate and screw in the base. 

Detector shall continuously monitor its sensitivity to smoke and compensates for any change or 

drift due to dust, temperature, and humidity. 

Its signal processing should allow each sensor to be individually set at an optimal set point to 

reduce nuisance alarms, while integration of the sensor input would permit advanced warning of 

fire. 

At least five sensitivity settings would be available to cover a broad range of applications. 

Specifications : 

a) Normal Operating Temperature : 0 Deg .C to 50 Deg .C 

b) Relative Humidity : Max .95% RH 


d) Operating Voltage : 24V DC nominal (18 V-30V) 

2.6 Addressable Air Sampling Smoke Detector 

Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer 

for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied shall : - 

a) The addressable duct smoke sensors shall be on the light scattering, photodiode principle, and 

shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control. The sensors shall not 

Page 106 of 174



NRDA 

have a self contained smoke sensitivity setting and shall automatically communicate actual smoke 

chamber values to the system control unit. The sensor’s electronics shall be shielded to protect 

against nuisance alarms from EMI and RFI. (EM Interference + R.F. Interference). 

b) The duct housing shall provide an auxiliary alarm relay with one “Form C” contacts rated at LA @ 

28 VDC or 0.5 A @ 120V AC resistive. This auxiliary relay operates when the sensor reaches its 

alarm threshold, or when the control unit via software control, manually or automatically 

operated the relay in response to inputs from other devices. 

2.7 Addressable Heat Detectors 

a. Combined rate of rise/fixed temperature heat detectors shall consists of two independent 

thermistors, designed to automatically compensate changes in ambient conditions. 

b. All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and virtually hermetically sealed to prevent their 

operations from being impaired by dust , dirt or humidity . 

c. All circuitry must be protected against usual electrical transients and electromagnetic interference . 

d. Reverse polarity or faulty zone wiring shall not damage the detectors . 

e. The detector shall have serial no . and seal of approving laboratory/body . 

f. The response (activation) of a detector shall be clearly visible from the outside by a flashing light of 


g. The detector shall be installed into the base by a simple push-twist mechanism to facilitate exchange 

for cleaning and maintenance . 

h. The detector shall connect to the Fire Alarm Panel via fully supervised two wire (zone type) circuit 

stub line (class "B" wiring) or a four wire circuit (Class "A" wiring) (loop type) as specified by the 

consultant. 

i. It shall be possible to test the sensitivity of detector in the field . 

j. Specifications : 

a) Normal Operating Temp : 0° C to 90° C 

b) Relative Humidity : Max. 93% 


d) Operating Voltage : 24 V DC nom . (15 V - 32V) 

e) Thermal Ratings 

Fixed Temperature Setpoint : 57°C 

Rate of Rise Detection : 9.4°C/min. 

2.8 Plug-in Bases 

a. The detectors of all types shall fit into a common type of standard base . 

b. Once a base has been installed , it shall be possible to insert , remove and exchange different types of 

detectors by a simple push twist movement . 

Page 107 of 174



NRDA 

c. The standard base shall be equipped with screwless wiring terminals capable of securing wire sizes 

upto 1 .5 sq .mm(SWG 15) and with built in strain limits to prevent permanent terminals deformation 

and weakening of contact pressure . 

d. The standard base shall be supplied with a sealing plate , preventing dirt , dust , condensation or 

water from the conduit reaching the wire terminals or the detector contact points . 

e. All standard bases shall be supplied with a removable dust cover to protect the contact area during 

installation and construction phase of the building . It must allow the inspection and verification of 

the zone wiring before insertion of any detectors. 

f. The standard base shall feature a built-in mechanism , which allows mechanical locking of any 

installed detector head , thus preventing unauthorized removal of tampering while maintaining . 

g. The detector contact points shall be designed to retain the detector safety and to ensure 

uninterrupted contact also when exposed to continuous severe vibrations . 

h. All electronic components of bases and modules must be solid state and virtually hermetically sealed 

to prevent their operations from being impaired by dust , dirt or humidity . 

i. All circuitry must be protected against usual electrical transients and electromagnetic interference . 

j. The standard base shall allow Snap-On insertion of an (optional) electronic module to drive remote 

visual alarm indicators . 

k. Reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring shall not damage the detectors . 

l. Bases shall be of the same make as that of the detector supplied . 

2.9 Addressable Manual Call Station 

a. Manual call stations shall be addressable and electrically compatible with standard range of 

automatic detectors so that it can be connected directly into supervised loop of the standard range of 

control units . 

b. The manual call station shall be of pleasant , streamlined and flat appearance permitting its use as 

flush and surface mounted unit as per site conditions . 

c) The Manual call station shall consist of the base plate insert and cover with break glass type. 

d) The cover must be secured against unauthorized removal . Every removal of the cover must release 

an alarm . 

e) All inscriptions , texts and marks must be on the manual call station front plate . 

f) The glass must be secured in the cover against falling out . 

g) The manual call station shall be designed for fail safe operation . 

h) The manual pull station may have a built in LED, lighting up automatically to confirm its actuation . 

i) Specifications: 

a) Type : Addressable with rotary switch or dip switch. 

Page 108 of 174



NRDA 

b) Standard : NFPA/EN54/LPCB 

c) Power supply : 17-24Volts DC 

d) Enclosure protection : IP – 22. 

e) Address device : Electronics. 

f) Alarm device : Break Glass Type. 

g) Out put signal : Red. 

h) Label : Instruction set as “In case of emergency break glass”. 

2.10 Addressable Monitor Modules 

The monitor module shall provide address setting by the use of DIP/Rotary switches . An LED shall be 

provided which shall flash under normal conditions , indicating that the monitor module is operational 

and in regular communication with the control panel . 

2.11 Addressable Control Modules 

The control module shall provide address setting by the use of DIP/Rotary switches. An LED shall be 

provided which shall flash under normal conditions , indicating that the control module is operational and 

in regular communication with the control panel. 

2.12 Repeater Panels 

a. Each repeater panel in the installed system shall include remote control and display annunciators . 

These annunciators shall have integral membrane style , tactile push button control switches for the 

control of system function and LEDs with programmable (software controlled) flash rates and slide in 

labels for annunciation of system events . 

b. It shall provide the system with individual zone annunciation also with zone disable . 

c. It shall provide the system with individual alarm and trouble annunciation per zone/device . 

d. It should support 2x40characters on it's LCD screen indicating current date and time , custom system 

title , alarm history of the system . 

e. There should be common control keys and visual indicators for; reset, silence and acknowledge. 

2.13 Speaker cum Hooter 

Fire alarm addressable speaker cum hooter should operate from 24V D.C. and should have a facility to be 

selected for steady tone and voice output. The microprocessor based speaker cum hooter should be 

completely self synchronized when set to temporal signal and should not required external synch control 

modules. A moveable jumper provided should have a choice for high (98 dbA) or low (94 dbA) outputs. 

Speaker cum hooter will be dual transformer speaker capable of operating at 25 and 70.7 Vrms and will 

have a frequency range of 400 to 4000 Hz. The synchronized speaker should be supplied with "FIRE" (wall 

orientation) as the standard marking. It should be for indoor and outdoor installation. 

2.14 Fire Fighters Telephone 

Remote telephones - Break Glass type should have the following features. 

- Red Hand Set 

- Rugged ABS Plastic Handset 

- 60" (1500mm) coiled cord set . 

- Supervised wiring 

- Flush or surface mount 

Page 109 of 174



NRDA 

- Break glass insert 

- Locking door 

- Concealed hinges 

- UL/FM/EN 54/LPCB Listed 

2.15 Exit Signs 

The exit signs shall assist in the identification of the escape routes, helping the occupants to the nearest 

fire exit. The Exit Signs shall have the lettering painted in red on a white perspex sheet as the front face of 

sheet steel enclosure constructed with 1.5 mm thick sheet. The perspex sheet shall be back lit with a 10 

W flouorescent lamp including an integral in-built rechargeable, high temperature nickel cadmium 

battery with a charger suitable for minimum 30 min. operation so as to operate independent of the mains 

supply in the event of a mains failure. The dimensions of the illuminated exit signs shall be 450 mm length 

and 225 mm height with 100 mm high lettering. They shall be suitable for surface or recessed mounting 

as required. 

2.16 Fault Isolator 

a. The fault isolator device shall detect and isolate a short circuited segment of a fault tolerant loop . 

b. The devices shall automatically determine a return to normal condition of the loop and restore the 

isolated segment . 

c. Devices shall be placed every 20 detectors / modules / field devices to limit the number lost in the 

event of short circuit . 

d. Specifications: 

a) Type : To segment wise disengage short or dewired circuit 

b) Power Supply : 17 - 25 V DC. 

c) Enclosure Protection : IP - 22 

d) Device Material : Poly carbonate or Proprietary self extinguishing type. 

3.1.1 General 

3.1 Interface and Integration 

The core computer shall be capable of interfacing to the following panel types. The electrical 

interface technique shall conform to EIA RS-422 and/or RS-232 and/or RS-485 standards: 

Fire Monitoring Controller 

Page 110 of 174



NRDA 

It shall be possible for all serial connections to the core computer to be routed via a terminal 

server and the LAN rather than directly to the host computer. The system shall be capable of 

supporting up to 40 simultaneous network connected Operator Stations 

It shall be possible to efficiently monitor dynamic, real time data from any of the above panel 

types. It shall also be possible to configure hardware and software points from the core 

computer for each of these panels using a consistent configuration data format across all 

panel/controller types. 

Given sufficient level of system privilege, it shall be possible to view, manipulate and analyze data 

acquired from the various panels through a common operator interface at any one of the 

Operator Stations. 

Operator Stations shall be capable of connecting/disconnecting to a fixed set of system core 

computers on a TCP/IP network. 

It shall be possible to interface to different types of devices using an industry standard interface 

such as MODBUS or Advance DDE from Rockwell Software. This shall allow simple interfaces to 

proprietary devices to be developed using a standard protocol. 

3.1.2 Sub-system Local Databases 

All controller subsystems shall have distributed intelligence. Normal Fire detection and control 

decisions shall be made at the local panel without reference to the host. 

The alarm limits (Night alarm , Night Pre alarm , Day Alarm and Day Pre alarm) for the smoke 

detectors shall be resident in Fire Controller only but it shall be possible to change it from the 

central station by an authorized operator. 

3.2 Application Software Functions 

3.2. 1 Operator Interface 

3.2.1 General 

The operator interface shall be interactive and totally graphics and/or icon based. Graphics shall 

be capable of supporting up to 65K colors at a minimum of 1024 x 768 pixel resolution. 

The operator interface shall be Windows based and shall employ standard windowing 

conventions so as to reduce required operator training. 

The operator interface software shall be capable of running in an environment defined by 

Windows 95 or Windows NT. The operator interface shall appear identical in all environments. 

There shall be at least 1700 displays reserved for user customization. These user configured 

displays shall be constructed using the integrated display building functions available through the 

Operator Station. 

3.2.2 Status Displays 

Page 111 of 174



NRDA 

System status displays shall be available on the main Operator Station. It shall display the 

following information: 

• Total number points in a collection of a certain type in a particular state 

• Points in alarm condition pending ACKNOWLEDGE command 

• Points which remain in an alarm state but which have been acknowledged 

• Communication failures 

• Printer status 

• Operator Stations status 

• Communication channels status 

• Controller status 

• Dead man Timer status 

3.2.3 Administration Displays 

The system shall provide the following full screen displays: 

• Master system menu 

• Report summary 

• Alarm summary 

• Event summary 

• Display summary 

• Operator Station configuration 

• Area assignment 

• Holiday assignment 

• History assignment 

• Pushbutton assignment 

• Operator assignment 

• Operator email message page 

• Point Detail for every configured Point 

• Controller specific database configuration information 

3.2.4 Pointing and Input Devices 

The operator interface shall be capable of being mouse driven and simultaneously support 

keyboard data input. Both fixed menus and configurable function keys shall be supported to aid 

novice and experienced operators respectively. The interface shall also be capable of supporting a 

touch screen for pointing and command input. 

The operator interface shall use a toolbar for common operator commands. The operator shall be 

able to request display of commonly used displays from Drop-Down menus Given sufficient level 

of system privilege, the operator shall be able to customize the Drop Down menus to reference 

new displays created with the display building tool. 

All operator interface input shall be possible using only the pointing device and QWERTY section 

of the keyboard. 

3.2.5 Operator Functions 

Page 112 of 174



NRDA 

The following functions shall be performed through the operator interface: 

• Display and control of field equipment 

• Display of and point status 

• Acknowledge alarms on a priority basis 

• Initiate printing of reports 

• Archive and retrieve event logs 

• Online generation of database and color graphic displays 

• Monitoring of data communications channels 

• Configure system parameters 

3.2.6 Multimode Window Sessions 

The core computer display unit shall also be capable of supporting multiple concurrent sessions. 

Each session shall allow an operator to choose between the following different modes: 

Master Operator Station Mode: 

Normal operator access to the system 

Engineering and Maintenance Mode: 

System configuration or application programming 

Graphics builder Mode: 

Display construction using the Graphics Display Building package 

It shall be possible for all modes to appear as separate Windows running simultaneously on one 

screen. 

3.2.7 Applications launcher 

It shall be possible to launch any Windows application from within the Operator Interface. For 

example, a button or menu item shall be able to be created in the FMS to launch an application 

such as Microsoft Word. 

3.2.8 Operator interface as a web browser 

It shall be possible to use the standard operator interface as a browser for viewing information in 

HTML format. This allows the operator to view information on the Internet or an Intranet without 

having to activate an external browser application. This enables the operator to view information 

in HTML while still monitoring and responding to alarms. The operator interface shall provide a 

mechanism to restrict access to all or particular URL addresses in order to prevent the viewing of 

undesirable information. The linking of operator displays to particular URL addresses shall be 

achieved using the Graphical Display Building Tool. 

3.2.9 Active Document support 

It shall be possible to display Active Documents (such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel 

documents) through the operator interface by incorporating these documents directly onto 

Page 113 of 174



NRDA 

displays. The linking of displays to Active Documents shall be achieved using the Graphical Display 

Building Tool. 

3.2.10 POint Collection summary 

There shall be an online display of selected points and their current states. It shall be possible to 

group points together based on common states, areas, controllers or channels and place them in 

a collection. The total number of all points in a collection shall be displayed along with the 

number of points in each possible state. An overall summary display shall be provided which 

shows this information about each point collection. 

3.3 Operator Security 

3.3.1 Security Levels 

The system shall support at least 6 levels of operator security. The functions allowed from each 

security level shall be as follows: 

Level 1: View only. 

Level 2: 

Level 3: 

Level 4: 

Level 5: 

Level 6: 

View only with Acknowledge - The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms 

as they occur. 

Permit all Level 1 and 2 functions and in addition the security guard or building 

manager shall be permitted to control points such as disable/enable, etc. 

Permit all Level 1 through Level 3 functions in addition to accessing master time 

schedules, system peripherals allocation, etc. This level shall typically be reserved 

for the building engineer. 

Permit all Level 1 through Level 4 functions in addition to accessing the 

engineering functions such as building and linking displays, allocating keyboard 

push button assignments, etc. Reserved for the building supervisor. 

This is the highest level of station security and shall allow the user unlimited 

access to all station functions. Typically reserved for the building manager and 

system administrator. 

3.3.2 Sign-On/Sign-Off 

The guard or operator shall be permitted to sign on to the system if the correct Operator ID and 

the Operator Password have been entered providing they are authorized for that particular 

Operator Station and time of day. 

After a series of unsuccessful attempts to sign-on, the Operator Station interface shall be locked 

for a configurable period of time. 

Page 114 of 174



NRDA 

It shall be possible to assign operators either single or multi-user passwords. Single user passwords 

enable the operator to sign-on to only a single Operator Station thus preventing simultaneous 

sign-on by the same operator. The multi-user password would typically be used by operators with 

the highest sign-on security level who may require simultaneous access to more than one 

Operator Station. 

The operator may sign-off at any time by entering a sign-off command. 

A time-out feature shall be provided such that the operator shall be automatically signed off after a 

defined period of keyboard or mouse inactivity. 

It shall also be possible to restrict operator sign-on to certain Operator Stations at certain times of 

the day. This is to prevent operators being able to sign-on when they are not currently on shift or 

at their normal terminal. 

3.3.3 Duress 

It shall be possible for an operator to indicate that they are signing on under duress. The system 

shall recognize that the operator is signing on under duress and it shall then be able to issue a 

control to alert appropriate assistance. 

3.3.4 Area Assignment 

Each operator shall be assigned one or more specific areas of the building with the appropriate 

monitoring and control responsibility. An area shall be defined in this context as a logical entity 

comprising a set of points, reports, display and other system elements in the system. This in turn 

may represent a physical space in the building. It shall be possible to define individual tenant 

access by means of area assignment. An operator can only view or control those points within the 

assigned areas. 

Area assignment control shall be capable of being superimposed over security control as defined 

in Section 5.2.1. 

3.3.5 Command Partitioning 

It shall be possible to assign to each operator a set of commands (equivalent to target output 

states) for each assigned area. These commands can be mapped against the output state of any 

given digital point in the respective area to determine whether a control command is allowed for 

the particular operator. 

3.3.6 Password Authentication 

Each password shall be an alphanumeric character string made up of a minimum of 5 characters 

and a maximum of 6 characters. The system shall provide a facility to allow all operators to 

change their own passwords at any time. 

When a password is changed, the system shall not permit the new password to be the same as 

any of a number of previous passwords used in the past three months. All passwords in the 

system shall be encrypted both when stored and when transmitted. 

Page 115 of 174



NRDA 

3.4 Operator Email 

It shall be possible for operators to email each other using the FMS. There shall be a dedicated 

display in the FMS which list the new messages for the current operator. From here, an operator 

shall be able to open, edit, delete and send and receive messages. The operators will be able to 

send messages to other people also, providing they have access to that email address. 

3.5 Time Schedules 

One thousand time schedules shall be provided by the system. 

The time schedule facility shall allow the scheduling of Point control on both a periodic and oneoff 

basis. All time schedules shall be configurable via the Operator Station. 

The available time schedule type shall as a minimum be: 

• One shot - to be executed only once then deleted 

• Daily - to be executed every day 

• Workday - to be executed Monday to Friday 

• Weekend - to be executed on Saturday and Sunday 

• Holiday - to be executed on holidays 

• Individual days - to be executed on individual days (e.g. Monday) 

3.5.1 Holiday Assignment 

The system shall be capable of defining up to thirty (30) days of holidays up to one year in 

advance. The holidays so defined shall be taken into account by other system functions such as 

time schedules. 

3.5.2 Event Initiated Programs 

Physical and software outputs or groups of outputs, shall be assignable through configurable 

algorithms to an input point. When an input changes state the outputs assigned shall be activated 

as specified by their physical or configured output modes. 

When alarm events of individual or groups of points are suppressed by event initiated programs, 

any occurrence of such alarm events during the suppress mode shall not be annunciated, 

reported or journalized. 

3.6 Grouping of Points 

The system shall provide a means by which a number of alarm inputs, outputs, doors, etc. can be 

grouped together by the building manager so that monitoring or control can be performed for a 

group. 

Page 116 of 174



NRDA 

3.7 Event Management 

3.7.1 Online Logging 

It shall be possible to log an event such that it shall be journalized in the event file and optionally 

printed on the event printer. 

Events shall consist of alarms, changes of state in a monitored status point, card holder 

movements, changes in system status and operator actions. 

All journalized events shall be recorded as necessary to include event description, condition, 

message, time of occurrence, operator responsible and any other information or tags. 

It shall be possible for these events to be retrieved online and shown on the screen or printed on 

the printer by using the reporting system. If events are viewed on the screen, it shall be possible 

to pause the real time view and prevent events from scrolling off the screen as new events occur. 

3.7.2 Events Archiving and Retrieval 

It shall be possible to have an on-line event file as large as the disk capacity can accommodate. 

Given the disk space, it shall be capable of storing more than 1,000,000 (one million) events on 

file, with 100,000 events being provided by the base system defined in Section 2.1. 

The event file shall store events in a current online buffer. When the buffer is full an alarm will be 

raised advising the operator to save the file to an external media. The current online buffer 

contents will then be transferred to an archive buffer to await archiving to an external media. The 

current online buffer shall, without interruption, continue to store current events. 

Another file area shall be available to hold archived event files ready for playback. These are 

event files previously archived to external media. Operators shall be able to restore previously 

archived files via the operator interface and a dedicated display. 

The events file system shall be fully integrated with the standard reporting system. The system 

shall be able to reference the restored playback file if a report is requested containing a time 

search window covered by the current playback file. 

3.8 Alarm Management 

3.8.1 Alarm Types 

Each monitored point in the system shall be able to assigned one of four alarm types to individual 

states. The meaning of the priorities shall be as follows: 

Priority Action 

Journal 

Changes of state shall be journalized to the Alarm/Event Log and optionally printed on the 

Alarm/Event printer. 

Page 117 of 174



NRDA 

Low 

Change of state will generate a Low priority alarm which will appear on the Alarm Summary. 

Optionally, the alarm may be printed on the Alarm/Event printer or generate an audible tone. 

High 

Change of state will generate a High priority alarm which will appear on the Alarm Summary. 

Optionally, the alarm may be printed on the Alarm/Event printer or generate an audible tone. 

Urgent 

This is the highest priority. Change of state will generate an Urgent priority alarm which will 

appear on the Alarm Summary. Optionally, the alarm may be printed on the Alarm/Event printer 

or generate an audible tone. 

Within each of the four alarm types there shall be 15 sub-priorities available. 

It shall be possible to configure a time such that if a low priority alarm is not acknowledged within 

this time then the alarm’s priority is elevated to high priority and if a high priority alarm is not 

acknowledged within a configured time, its priority is elevated to urgent priority. 

It shall be possible to associate additional messages to be logged into a message summary in the 

event of an alarm condition. 

When an alarm is acknowledged, it shall be possible to automatically issue a reset to a controller 

to indicate the alarm is acknowledged and to attempt to reset the alarm point. 

3.8.2 Alarm Annunciation 

Alarms shall be annunciated by: 

• Most recent, highest priority alarm message appearing on dedicated alarm line on 

operator interface. 

• Alarm message appearing on alarm summary display. 

• Available Tone - based on a “*.wav” file for each alarm priority 

• Alarm message printed on the alarm printer 

• Alarm indicator flashing on the operator interface 

Alarms shall be annunciated at the station even if there is no operator currently signed-on. This 

feature shall be available on network connected Operator Stations as long as the computer 

running the Operator Station software remains logically connected to the network. If the 

Operator Station is minimized in the Windows environment, then the Operator Station icon will 

indicate an alarm. An audible tone shall be able to be generated and this tone shall be specified 

by a “*.wav” file for each alarm priority. 

Points shall be annunciated whilst in alarm. If a point is set to alarm inhibited the point shall no 

longer cause annunciation. If a point goes into an alarm state whilst inhibited and then is still in 

the alarm state when the point is set to alarm enabled, the point shall immediately cause 

annunciation. 

Page 118 of 174



NRDA 

3.8.3 Dedicated Alarm Line and Alarm Indicator 

A dedicated alarm line shall appear on all displays showing either the most recent or oldest 

(configurable), highest priority, unacknowledged alarm in the system. The line shall be clear when 

there are no unacknowledged alarms for the operator to process. 

On occurrence of an alarm, the graphic display shall output the point identification, point type, 

and description on a dedicated line. If multiple alarm/change of state conditions occur, 

subsequent messages shall overwrite the display if they are higher priority. As subsequent alarms 

are displayed, the previous alarm information shall move to an unacknowledged alarm list 

awaiting acknowledgement by the operator. 

An alarm indicator shall also appear on all displays. This indicator will flash red when there are 

any unacknowledged alarms pending in the system. This indicator will remain solid red if there 

are alarms which have not returned to normal but which have all been acknowledged. The 

indicator will be clear if there are no points in an alarm condition awaiting acknowledgement in 

the system. 

3.8.4 Alarm Logging 

As well as being logged on the printer, alarms shall be logged to an event file for future retrieval 

in alarm reports or archived to removable media. 

3.8.5 Alarm Response Function Keys 

The following dedicated function keys shall be provided on the keyboard for alarm action: 

ACKNOWLEDGE: After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and selecting the 

point the operator shall be able to acknowledge an alarm by pressing this key. This action shall be 

logged in the event file and on the printer showing the operator ID with the message. 

ALARM SUMMARY : By pressing this key at any time the operator shall be able to view a display 

showing all currently active alarms. The alarm messages shall be color coded showing priorities. 

The operator shall be able to view the alarms according to priority. It shall be possible to 

acknowledge alarms from this display and also go to the associated display defined for the point. 

ASSOCIATED DISPLAY : After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and selecting 

the point the operator shall be able to bring up the display applicable to that alarm by pressing 

this key. Just selecting the associated display key directly will bring up the associated display for 

the point currently on the alarm line. 

3.8.6 Advanced alarm management 

The FMS shall be capable of advanced alarm management which includes set stages of alarm 

handling. 

The stages shall be:- 

Page 119 of 174



NRDA 

• silence alarm condition 

• acknowledge and action alarm condition 

• respond to alarm condition by using pre-defined responses 

• optionally reset alarm 

All actions shall be recorded in the event file for retrieval and auditing purposes. 

When an alarm is silenced, an instruction page for the alarm will be displayed. The alarm may 

then be acknowledged from this page and actioned. 

Once the alarm is acknowledged and appropriate action has been taken, the operator may move 

to the response page to select from up to 100 user defined responses to be logged in the event 

file. At the same time the alarm is removed from the alarm file. 

It shall be possible to enable/disable this feature on a point by point basis given the appropriate 

system privilege level. 

3.9 Report Management 

The FMS shall be capable of providing selected data in an ODBC format for the purpose of 

extracting data and creating custom reports. It shall be possible to access tables of data from the 

FMS through an ODBC compliant tool such as Crystal Reports. 

It shall also be possible to incorporate the activation of custom reports created through the 

Crystal Reports tool through the standard FMS report subsystem. Example reports shall be 

provided to illustrate how to access the ODBC data in the FMS. 

Reports shall be produced periodically, on demand or initiated by an event. The report detail 

display shall allow naming of reports, scheduling information and the destination of the report. 

The report destination shall be a printer, operator interface or internal file. The report output 

format shall be HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) or can be saved in Microsoft Word or RTF 

format. 

The following report types shall be provided: 

3.9.1 Alarm/Event Report 

A report shall be provided to produce a summary of all events of a specified type for nominated 

points occurring in a time period. The time period may be specified as an absolute start and end 

date and time, or as a period relative to the current time. This report shall also be able to 

produce a summary of all changes made by a specific operator. 

3.9.2 Point Cross Reference Report 

A report shall be provided to list information about a nominated point or group of points such as 

what other reports this point may be referenced in, what displays this point is included on and 

other related information. 

Page 120 of 174



NRDA 

3.9.3 Point Attribute Report 

A report shall be provided to list all points specified by one of the following attribute criteria: 

• Out-of-service 

• Alarm suppressed 

• Abnormal input levels 

• In Manual mode 

• Nominated state 

3.9.4 Point Change report 

A report shall be provided which calculates the total number of changes of state (including none) 

for specified points over a given time period. The time period may be specified as an absolute 

start and end date and time, or as a period relative to the current time. 

3.9.5 Alarm Duration Report 

A report shall be provided which calculates the total amount of time a nominated point or group 

of points has been in an alarm condition over a given time period. The time period may be 

specified as an absolute start and end date and time, or as a period relative to the current time. 

3.9.6 FIRE CONTROLLER REPORT 

It shall be possible to take out reports (in HTML Format) on status of field devices (smoke 

detectors, Modules etc.) connected to Fire Controller based on the following criteria's (AND/OR ): 

(1) Bus 

(2) Controller 

(3) Loop 

(4) Point Number 

(5) Point ID 

(6) States of field device (Normal , Pre alarm , Alarm ,Lockout , Disabled , Typemis match, 

Trouble, No Response.) 

(7) Analog Value of the smoke detector. 

For example: 

(1)It shall be possible to take out a report of all the smoke detectors and modules which are in 

trouble state in Loop 1 of Fire Controller 1.-- this report shall serve as maintenance report for 

Maintenance dept. 

(2) It shall also be possible to take out a report of the smoke detectors which have analog value 

between 70 % to 80 % in all fire controller or for individual fire controller or individual loops. 

3.10 Historical Data Collection 

The FMS may continuously collect and store analog and status point process variables (PV) such 

as historical data. The basic FMS shall contain fast, standard and extended history. Standard 

history consists of a value snapshot taken at a specified interval and various averages of this 

snapshot representing the average value over longer periods of time. Extended history is a series 

of snapshots. 

Page 121 of 174



NRDA 

Standard History 

• 1 minute snapshots 

• 6 minute averages 

• 1 hour averages 



Extended History 

• 1 hour snapshots 



Fast History 

• 5 second snapshots. 

The historical data can be retrieved by trend sets, operating groups, user built schematics, point 

detail trends, and point detail numeric history displays. Historical data can also be used in reports, 

application programs, or archived to off-line media for long term storage. 

An operator may review history either in real-time or with an historical offset. Previous history 

may be selected by scrolling forwards and backwards through the history file. 

Trend set displays shall be available to show historical data in the following formats: 

• Single Showing plotted historical values for one point 

• Dual Showing plotted historical values for up to 2 points 

• Triple Showing plotted historical values for up to 3 points 

• Multi Showing plotted historical values for up to 8 points 

• Numeric Showing numeric historical values for up to 8 points 

• X-Y Showing a graphical comparison between 2 points 

For each trend set display it shall be possible for operators to configure the number of historical 

samples and ranges displayed. Points configured in trend sets shall be changeable online. 

Operators shall be able to zoom in on information displayed on trend sets for closer inspection. 

Scroll bars shall be available to move the Trend set backwards and forwards across the historical 

records. The trend sets shall automatically access archived history files without operator 

configuration. 

4 FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM 

4.1 General 

It shall be possible to completely monitor and control fire devices for the Fire Control System 

from the Operator Stations. Full color displays shall be provided allowing operator to monitor the 

devices . 

Page 122 of 174



NRDA 

For each field device on the system the following information shall be displayed on a device detail 

display: 

• State of the device ( for example for smoke detector : Normal , Pre alarm, Alarm, lockout, 

Trouble, No Response , Type Mismatch, Disabled) 

• Area code 

• Full name 

• Address 

• Alarm priority 

Unless stated, the information above shall be configurable by an operator with appropriate 

security levels from the point detail display. 

4.2 GRAPHIC DISPLAY 

The Graphic Display on the operator station shall consist of following : 

(1) Smoke Detector's located on the layout 

(2) Current Analog Values of the smoke detectors 

(3) The dynamic state of the detector/modules represented by different 

Colours depending on the present state of the detector/module. 

(4) Movement of Mouse over the detectors/module shall indicate the point ID of the 

Detector/module in the message zone. 

(5) Combo-box for activating hooters/sounders manually by the authorized operator . 

The software shall reconfirm before activating hooters/sounders from the operator by way of user 

configured popup message. 

The minimum proposed configuration of the Operator work station will be as under : 

a) Intel Pentium IV 

b) Processor 1.5 GHz or better 

c) Serial ports (RS232) and USB ports. 

d) 256 Megabytes of RAM memory 

e) 40 Gigabytes of hard disk space. 

f) CD ROM Drive 52x or higher. 

(g) 1.4 MB FDD 

(h) 

(j) 

(k) 

(l) 

19” Colour Monitor SVGA with a minimum resolution of 1024 pixels Horizontal, 768 lines 

vertical minimum. 16 base colours. 

Mouse with 2 Mouse Pads. 

Standard Key Board. 

Windows Operating System. 

5. Conductors 

Page 123 of 174



NRDA 

6. Wiring 

All cables used shall be as per makes in the tender documents. MS conduits shall be painted red 

to differentiate from other electrical conduits. 

The detectors in the vicinity will be looped by 2x 1.5 sq.mm. twisted pair FRLS PVC insulated 650/1100 V 

grade copper conductor cables in MS conduits as specified in Bill of Quantities. Each loop will be connected 

directly to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 

T. SECURITY SURVELLIANCE (CCTV) 

1.1 General 

The Electronic Security and Surveillance shall be an integrated security management system, which shall 

include various sub-systems. The system shall broadly include Closed Circuit Television 

monitoring and recording system & Access Control System. 

All controls and monitoring of the security and surveillance system shall be done from the 

Security Control room. General Manager’s office (Administrator) shall be provided with facility of 

random monitoring of the complete system with help of LCD interactive keyboard with 

alphanumeric text display for camera selection. Location of the office shall be directed by 

Engineer /CSM. 

The system shall use time division multi plex signaling techniques, all communication taking place 

via cables laid from the various equipment / devices to the security control room / Administrators 

office. Safety features like Colour Coded Access Control Switch for Normal / Emergency / Test 

condition shall be provided. 

1.2 Closed Circuit Television System 

1.2.1 The Closed Circuit Television System is intended for comprehensive round the clock 

surveillance of the Main offices, Parking area and perimeter of complex from Security 

Control room and also from administrator’s office. The following category of areas shall 

be monitored by the system in the priority as given below: 

Corridors and lift lobbies in the building with the fixed cameras. 

Office Working areas with integrated Dome cameras with Pan/Tilt/Zoom Control. 

Parking area with integrated Dome cameras with Pan/Tilt/Zoom Control. 

Perimeter of the building with Outdoor Pan/Tilt/Zoom Cameras. 

1.2.2 The camera quantity & types have been chosen based on the size of the covered area & the 

obstruction . The type (fixed or Pan, Tilt & Zoom) have been considered to cover the areas at the 

most optimum cost. All the areas shall be provided with TV cameras of Charge Coupled Device type 

and these shall be mounted in such a manner as to provide continuous monitoring of the entire 

areas. 

1.2.3. All closed Circuit Television system equipment covered in this specification shall comply with PAL 

Page 124 of 174



NRDA 

standards and all equipment shall be manufactured by an ISO certified company. The Tenderer 

shall quote for colour system & provide necessary proof of ISO certification by the principal 

manufacturer of cameras, digital video recorder cum multiplexer and matrix switcher. 

1.2.4. The CCTV system shall be suited to the surveillance requirements and shall provide excellent 

performance through highly reliable equipment. 

1.2.5. The system shall provide clear and sharp picture on TV monitors in all lighting conditions at any time 

of the day or night with minimum illumination level as specified. 

1.2.6 All TV cameras shall be linked to TV monitor in the security control room through programmable 

video distribution / switching units, which shall enable operator to switch on any of the camera on 

any TV monitor. Pictures from various cameras locations shall be displayed on TV monitor in a 

programmed sequence and in short selectable time intervals with facility of automatic / manual 

selection. Continuous recording of all cameras shall be possible with the real time digital recorder for 

recording the event. 

1.2.7. All cameras shall also be linked to TV monitor in Administrators office in the administrative building 

through video switching unit and if required a booster amplifier for amplification of video signal shall 

be provided. This switching unit shall enable office to switch on any of the camera on the TV 

monitor. 

1.2.8. Facility shall be provided for multi view display on TV monitor. It shall also be possible to have free 

enlarged view and freezing of the picture on TV monitor from any camera and also its video 

recording, as required. 

1.2.9 Video recording facility integrated into the system through time lapse real time digital video 

recorders fitted with a time / date generators, identifying each frame recorded on the tape with date 

and time. This shall enable knowing at a later date the exact moment of the event occurrence and 

identification of the area / zone. 

1.3 Control Centre 

All monitoring and control functions related to security and surveillance system comprising of CCTV and 

all other security control systems, communications, between security control room and various 

action points shall be effected from the Central Control panel and console to be installed in the 

security control room of the building. 

1.3.1 The Security Control Room shall be able to control and perform surveillance of all security aspects 

effecting all camera controls like panning and tilting of cameras in required angle, adjustment of 

zooms, focus etc., initiating communication between the security control room and various action 

points, giving precise direction to mobile force to reach its goal, thus keeping situation under control 

all the times. It shall also house all the controls for access control system. 

1.3.2 The security and surveillance system shall be so designed as to enable the security control room to 

record the events for reviewing at a later date. 

2.0 EQUIPMENT DETAILS 

2.1.1. Closed Circuit Television System 

The CCTV system shall comprise TV cameras (as required) with motorised zoom / fixed focal length 

Page 125 of 174



NRDA 

lenses, mounting platform, pan & tilt head with control unit, camera control unit, video monitors, 

video switches, time lapse video recorders, alarm interface units, central control desk and panel, 

cables and accessories. 

2.1.2 TV Camera 

The TV Camera shall be compact, of rugged design and suitable for Surveillance requirement. 

The camera shall employ complete solid – state circuitry, ensuring high operational reliability and 

excellent performance. 

The camera shall deliver well defined, clear, high resolution, clear picture without lag or 

geometric distortion. 

The TV camera shall also possess the following features: 

Excellent sensitivity for usable picture suited to the ambient light level conditions and its 

variations. A highly sensitive automatic light compensation circuit ensuring constant video signal 

independent of wide variations in light levels. 

Electronic sensitivity control for shutter speed adjustment. 

High resolution 

Low power consumption 

Phase adjustable line lock facility 

Suitable for both top and bottom mounting 

Controls like back focus, lens select, phase adjustment, power ON/OFF etc. provided at the rear 

for on the spot adjustment. 

Video recording facility 

The camera unit shall be complete with all electronic circuitry, devices, components, control switches, 

standard mount for lenses, mounting assemblies etc. the mounting assemblies of the cameras 

shall be individually selected depending upon the special requirements as per actual site 

conditions. 

1.1.2 Technical data 

2.1.3 High resolution digital colour camera for fixed cameras 

TV System: 

PAL 

Image Sensor: 

1/4” Interline CCD Colour 

Focal Length: 

2-4 mm or 4-9mm as specified in the schedule of 

quantities 

Effective Pixels: 

752(h)x582(w) 

Resolution: 

480 TVL 

Sensitivity: 

1 Lux 

Video Output: 

Composite 1Vp-p/75. 

S/N Ratio: 

48dB 

AGC ON / OFF control should be present. 

Page 126 of 174



NRDA 

Backlight Compensation Auto Electronic Shutter (ON/OFF) 

Electronic Shutter (Auto): 1/50 - 1/100,000 

Synch. System: 

Internal/Linelock 

Lens Mount: 

Integrated 

Shutter Control Auto Electronic Shutter / Auto IRIS 

Auto Iris Lens compatibility 

Lens Mount- CS 

Auto White Balance shall be present 

Aperture Correction shall be Internal 

Operating Temp: 

Power Requirement: 

Adjustments: 

BRACKETS: 

-10° to +50°C 

(230Vac±10% 50Hz) 

line lock phase 

with pivot head. 

Camera Lens 

The camera lenses shall be fixed lens or remote controlled motorized zoom lens with auto IRIS. The 

choice of lenses, their focal length and viewing angle shall be judiciously done for effective 

monitoring suited to the specific application requirements as specified in this specification. Auto 

IRIS lenses with internal spot filters shall be used for varying lighting conditions. 

A. Motorized Zoom Lens for Outdoor Pan/Tilt/Zoom Dome Cameras. 

1) Format : 1/3” CCD 

2) Zoom Lense : 10 X Zoom 

3) Focal Length : 5.7-57 mm with ,Auto iris, spot filters with presets. 

4) Aperture : F 1.2 – 360 

B. Fixed Lens: Fixed Focal Length Auto iris Lens For Indoor. 


2) Focal Length : 4-9mm or 2-4 mm as specified in the schedule of quantities. 

C. Integrated Inbuilt Zoom Lens for Indoor Pan/Tilt/Zoom Cameras 


2) Zoom Lenses : 8 X Zoom 

3) Focal Length : 4-48 mm ,Auto iris with presets. 

4) Aperture : F 1.8 - 360 

2.1.4 Outdoor surveillance cameras 

The camera shall be an integrated unit to provide discrete surveillance and environmental protection to the 

camera. 

1.1.2.1.1.1.1.1 The cameras shall offers the following features 

Solid State’ CCD images for longer lasting distortion free video images discreet and aesthetically 

nice looking. Backlight compensation should be provided. 

Page 127 of 174



NRDA 

TV System: 

PAL 

Image Sensor: 

1/3” Interline CCD Colour 

Zoom Lens: 

1/3” 10 x 5.7-57mm F1.2 with Video Type auto iris, spot filter 


752(h)x582(w) 

Resolution: 

470 TVL 

Sensitivity: 

0.03 Lux Low light mode 

Video Output: 


S/N Ratio: 

60 dB 

Electronic Shutter (Auto): 1/50 - 1/10000 sec 

Synch. System: Internal/Line lock 

Lens Mount: 

CS 


-10° to +50°C 


(230Vac±10% 50Hz) 

Power Consumption: 



NRDA 

The high precision lens, combined with a highly sensitive 1/4" CCD image sensor shall be able to 

give excellent picture quality, even in a low light conditions, along with the Automation Gain 

Control (AGC) that ensures first class picture quality every time. The Dome shall have all the 

advanced features needed to ensure the widest coverage, whatever the application. 

Auto white balance and intelligent Back Light Compensation (BLC) shall be present for viewing 

objects against strongly lit backgrounds. An auto-pan and repeat option that enables the operator 

to set reverse positions, when constantly patrolling the area under surveillance 

Image Sensor: 

1/4” Interline colour CCD 


752(h) x 582(v) 

Resolution: 

470 TVL 

Sensitivity: 

4 Lux@F1.8 

Video Output: 


S/N Ratio: 

46dB 

Electronic Shutter (Auto): 1/50-1/30,000 

Synch. System: 

Int./Line lock 

Zoom lens ratio: 

12:1 4-48mm 

Digital Zoom: 

8x 

Angle of View: 

47°x36.2° to 4°x3.1° 


-10° to +40°C 


12Vdc±10% 

No. of presets: 64 

Auto focus: 

Yes 

Continuous rotation: 

Yes 

2.1.6 MATRIX SYSTEM 

The proposed Video Matrix Switcher shall be Microprocessor based and shall be modular in 

design, which shall be expandable to at least 128 or more Cameras inputs with additions of input 

Cards only. The Matrix switcher shall be of following configuration. 

Camera Inputs 

Minimum number of inputs is 16, and system can be expanded up to a minimum of 128 inputs. 

Inputs may have loop through facility and video loss alarm can also be specified. 

Monitor Outputs 

Page 129 of 174



NRDA 

Minimum number of outputs is 2, and systems can be expanded up to a maximum of 128 

outputs, in blocks of 2. 

Operator Keyboards 

Systems should have capability to connected from 1 to 25 no. of keyboards. The desk-top 

keyboard shall offer full system control, with variable speed pan/tilt operation and large 

status/menu display. 

Telemetry Control 

This system can offer coaxial or twisted pair (RS485) telemetry control and both types can be 

mixed on the same system. 

Views 

Up to 128 views can be programmed for display and selection from a menu. Views are presented 

in blocks of 8 on the keyboards, and this enables rapid selection of camera/pre-set combinations. 

Zones 

Up to 128 zones can be programmed for display and selection from a menu. Zones are groups of 

up to 8 cameras and / or views, which will be display on the system monitors in a single 

operation. Zones are presented in blocks of 8 on the keyboard, and the system allows the zones 

to be presented in the order most appropriate to the way the system is used, i.e most frequently 

accessed zones are presented first, with less common ones being presented in subsequent 

menus. 

Video Sequences 

Up to 64 video sequences can be programmed from the keyboard. Each sequence should contain 

up to 32 camera pictures, with individually adjustable dwell time. Moreover, a sequence can 

include pre-set positions. The system should be able to configure powerful ‘site tour’ facility. The 

system should offer facilities up to and including the following: 

128 Cameras 

128 Monitors 

25 Keyboards 

Page 130 of 174



NRDA 

1000 Alarm inputs 

120 Relay outputs 

64 Configuration serial interfaces 

99 Preset positions per camera 

236 Named ‘views’ – combinations of camera & preset position 

236 ‘Zones’ – multiple camera selection 

64 Video & preset sequences. 

32 Positions per sequence 

120 Timed events 

32 User ID’s 

3 Fully configurable text overlay 

‘Over-the-coax’ telemetry control 

‘Twisted pair’ (RS485) telemetry control 

PC configuration 

Fully-variable speed capability 

On-screen context sensitive help 

Key Board for Matrix 

The desktop keyboard which is to be integrated with matrix should have features of a large 

status/menu display on the LCD screen with ‘soft-keys and variable speed roller ball to control the 

pan/tilt/zoom/focus of cameras ’,which adapt to the current system status or mode of operation. 

Key board should allow cameras, views and zones to be selected from menus of text descriptions 

on the LCD screen. Keyboard should be able to ‘view’, as a combination of camera and pre-set 

position. . Views can also be included in video sequences, or called up by an alarm event. 

Keyboard should have the facility to Group up to eight cameras or views that can be combined 

into zones, and these zone can be given a text description that can be displayed in one operation, 

with cameras moving to pre-set views. 

Large status display and user control menus shall be able to allow selection of function name, 

rather than number control function, according to current system status and mode of operation 

Program keys should be present to restrict unauthorized programming, selection of camera, 

monitor and pre-sets. Key board shall have on-screen Help facility to guide operators when first 

using the system. 

2.1.7 Digital Type Video Recorder 

The proposed 16 channel Digital Type Video Recorder will provide simultaneous recording of upto 

16 cameras (Pan, Tilt and Zoom or Fixed) on Real Time Mode either in multi-view mode or Full 

screen mode, as desired, without affecting the simultaneous recording and play back of recorded 

images. It would support standardly functions such as an independent clock for split picture 

Page 131 of 174



NRDA 

renewal timing, ID title generation per camera, date / time stamping, spot out, alarm response 

and optional motion detector plus advanced functions obtained by using HD drive such as 

random access to recorded material (Time / Date or Alarm event), and data transition via optional 

LAN. Moreover, the Digital Type Video Recorder will have function which enables independent 

record and playback functions and a simultaneous display of Playback and Live pictures in split 

mode on the same monitor. The recording of the cameras shall be done based on any event or 

time schedule. Provisions shall be made for viewing and control from multiple locations. The 

system will display flicker free picture(s) on all monitors. 

Digital Type Video Recorder would offer the following features: 

16-camera inputs for PTZ/fixed cameras. 

Camera Pan / Tilt / Zoom Control via RS-422. 

Multiple camera displays for Live Viewing or Playback While Recording 

Continuous, Motion Detection, Alarm, Pre-Alarm, and Scheduled Recording Modes 

Recording Up to 60 images per Second 

Minimum Hard Disk Storage 60 GB 

High-speed searching (Date, Time and Alarm) 

Back-up Management with optional CD/DVD Drive 

Playback by Date, Time and Camera 

Built-in video Motion Detection 

On-screen menu programming and operation 

Remote viewing, access and control via PSTN, ISDN and TCP/IP (LAN/WAN/Internet) 

Sequence time range; 1 – 30 seconds 

Over voice audio record function for adding verbal comments. 

Camera title, time & date, and counter generators (w/memory backup) 

Configure with alarm devices to home to cameras with alarm video 

Security password lockout of operational control possible to ensure against tampering 

4 recording setting for each channel (Fast, Sens, Nor & Skip) 

Alarm event log should store up to 100 events. 

Page 132 of 174



NRDA 

Auto record start-up at power ON features 

Record to hard drive memory or DVD 

Configure internal HD drive with 8 or more external SCSI drives to maximize recording 

time. 

Motion JPEG recording, selectable compression ratio (1/6, 1/10, 1/20, 1/40) 

Variable or jog search video, retrieve by count, or freeze to still. 

RS-232C interface to control operations via computer command. 

LAN network control connection capability. 

Specifications: 

No of Inputs 

16 Looping 

No of Outputs 2 

Video Input Signal Color or B/W composite, 1.0 Vpp, 75 Ohm (auto – 

terminated) or loop through, 16 ea., BNC 

Monitor Output 

Composite (2 ea.) or Y/C (1 ea.), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ohm 

Audio Input 

-60 dBs (mic input), -10 dBs (line input), unbalanced 

RCA jack 

Audio Output 

-10 dBs, unbalanced RCA jack, low impedance, 2 ea. 

Mono (1 ea. Stereo) 

Camera Title 

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters per camera input 

Time Displays 

3 different informational modes; 

Time Reference 

Internal crystal oscillator, accuracy +/- 90 sec / month 

at 25 Deg C 

Playback Display Full Screen or split display selectable 

(4/6/8/9/10/13/16 – split patterns) 

Playback Mode 

Normal, Search and Still (Search jog or variable 

selectable) 

Record Compression Motion J-PEG, selectable 1/6, 1/10, 1/20 and 1/40 

field compression ratio 

Record Mode 

Real Time Mode: 60 fields / sec., Time lapse mode: 

Selectable as 1 field/0.1 sec, 0.2 sec, 0.5 sec, 1 sec, 2 

sec, 4 sec, or 8 sec. 

Record Performance 

Sequential, one – shot (1-20 frames), or pre – alarm 

(1sec – 10 minutes) 

Data Access Nonlinear, access alarm occurrence video via 

date/date or count 

Full Screen 

Auto sequence between single inputs or manually 

select 

Split Display 

Auto Sequence on all split displays 

Alarm 

Auto Switch camera to full screen display upon alarm 

input 

Page 133 of 174



NRDA 

Alarm Log 

Battery Backup 

Hard Disk Capacity 

Upto 100 events max. 

Time, Character settings, setup parameters, and alarm 

input data maintained for approx. 2 years with AC 

power OFF 

60 GB HDD Minimum 

2.1.8 CCTV Monitor 

The colour TV monitor shall be suitable of surveillance application and compatible for TV 

cameras. It shall be of fully solid state, modular in design and shall provide a bright, clear and well 

defined picture display on the TV screen. 

All controls for brightness, contrast, colour etc. shall be provided on front panel for readily 

adjusting the video signal. The rear panel shall be equipped with input and output BNC 

connectors for coupling the video output to other TV equipment. 

The video monitor shall be housed in a dust-proof metal enclosure with ant dazzling light shield. It 

shall be suitable for rack mounting / mounting on control console for specialised applications like 

surveillance, security etc. 

The monitor shall be compatible for time lapse and event alarm video recording system. 

Technical data 

Scanning system : PAL, 360 TVL (14” monitor) and 450 TVL (21” monitor) or 

more, 50 field/sec. 

Picture tube size : (a)21”for CCTV Monitor & Alarm 

monitor 

(b)14” for dedicated & sequential 

monitor 

Horizontal and : Within + 10% 

Vertical linearity 

Vertical scan rate : 50 Hz 

Video input : 1.0 Vpp, 75 Ohms 

Power supply : 240V, +10% 50 Hz +3%, AC single 

Phase. 

U. PUBLIC ADDRESS & MUSIC SYSTEM 

1.0 Scope of Work 

1.1 General 

Page 134 of 174



NRDA 

The system in brief shall include the following 

Amplifiers 

Network Controller, Mic. Mixer, Speaker Line Surveillance Units and Volume Control Units Paging 

board with microphones 

Speakers at various locations 

CD Player and Cassette Deck 

Control and signal wiring 

Power wiring and sockets as required 

All other accessories and electronics required to make the system totally functional as per design 

2.0 System Requirements 

The public address announcements shall be made from different locations in the entire building. 

2.1 System Operation 

The System design shall be based on fully digital Public Address / Emergency System with all audio 

processing, communication and control functions entirely in the digital domain. Signals of CD quality make 

sure that messages are just as clear coming out of the system, as they are when they go in. The System is 

fully programmable, which brings flexibility in terms of zone assignments and numbers, call stations, audio 

inputs and outputs, control inputs and control outputs. The whole building is divided into various functional 

zones that shall be addressable either through call station or automatic announcement. The cable 

connection between the system shall be arranged in the loop so in case of a cut/interruption, system still 

operates. 

Each Amplifier in the System has got its own Audio Digital Signal Processor and Parametric 

Equalizer, and delay parameters for adjusting sound quality for that particular zone / area. 

Amplifier should have interface for digital signal from the trunk lines and also local analogue 

inputs eg local microphone, local music source etc if required at later stage.. 

There shall be a Central Network Controller, which will be the heart of the complete Paging & Evacuation 

System for the complete area. This will facilitate relay of voice alarm messages in case alarm is 

received. It will be interfaced to alarm message from Fire Alarm System and other Detection 

Systems. Any of the control inputs (from fire alarm system) or any of the call station shall activate 

automatic messages stored in the network controller. Multiple music sources shall be routed as 

background music to different area. It should have built in real time clock so that it is possible to 

program time schedule relay of background music, pre recorded messages, tones etc. 

The system should comply to International Standards for Paging Evacuation System / Emergency Sound 

System. It can have automatic switching to back up equipment or battery power supplies if 

operation is interrupted or main power supply fails. The complete system shall be self supervised, 

i.e. any error in call station, trunk cable, Amplifier shall be reported to the central controller. The 

amplifier in the system shall also have in built monitoring facility to monitor the working of 

amplifier. The status of amplifier should be reported to the central controller. In case of failure of 

any amplifier, automatic changeover should take over to standby amplifier. 

Page 135 of 174



NRDA 

Verbal alerts, pre-recorded messages and alarm signals will be able to be broadcast throughout the entire 

premises. Pre recorded messages should be recorded in re-recordable memory space in the 

controller. 

The complete area of entire Building shall be divided into zones for grouping of speakers. The 

speakers in each zone shall be wired separately. The zones shall be divided block wise / floor wise 

to enable each facility / department to be addressed separately. The canteen block shall be put 

in a separate zone. 

2.1.1. The system shall be capable of making announcement / music in the designed zone either 

individually or to any group of zones or to all the zones simultaneously. Background Music shall 

be relayed, and announcement shall override music in that particular zone only. Also it should be 

possible to make multiple announcements in different zone simultaneously from multiple calling 

points. 

The basement has Car Parking and other utility areas and hence Horn Loudspeakers for car calling 

is being taken. Each zone should be individually addressable and it should be possible to 

enable/disable music in any zone at a later date through programming. 

Multiple Music sources shall also be there and it shall be possible to program the system so that 

different music can be relayed to different zones / building etc. 

In each zone there shall be a microphone or line level mixer / sound processor placed locally in the zone. 

This shall accept inputs from a microphone or a local music source, which shall be relayed only in 

that particular zone. It should have provision for connecting multiple microphones and music 

inputs. These signal shall be overridden by any input from main building paging/evacuation 

system. 

In addition to above there would be automatic pre-recorded emergency announcement flashed in that 

respective floor in case of an emergency. It should be possible to group/regroup the zones 

through configuration software. 

Each speaker line will have end-of-line surveillance unit to monitor the status of speaker line. The 

communication shall be done on the same speaker cable and no extra cable shall be required. 

Any short circuit, open circuit, short to ground shall reported/displayed on the display of central 

controller or Amplifier. 

All equipment shall be mounted into custom made steel racks. The sizing of rack shall be 

sufficient to provide adequate ventilation of the equipment. All steel members shall be powder 

coated in approved colours. 

The amplifier wattage shall be suitable for the operation of all speakers in its circuit. The power 

amplifier should have low distortion levels and should deliver the same low distortion levels at 

maximum output. 

The complete system including wiring shall be immune from normal RF interference and normal 

electrical noise. The system at no time should result in generation feedback at maximum sound 

pressure levels. 

Page 136 of 174



NRDA 

2.2 Speakers 

Speakers shall be installed on all the floors and blocks of the building including basement and also 

in the canteen block located away from the main building. 

The Speakers shall be installed mainly on the columns of the building and on walls where 

available. The size of the speaker shall be designed to blend with fixing location. 

2.3 Design Criteria 

The design of the system including placement of speakers shall be such as to achieve the 

following minimum criteria:- 

Uniform coverage throughout the area with the standard deviation of ± 3 db. 

Appropriate loudness of 80 db sound pressure level (SPL) with a standard deviation of ± 3 db. 

Speech intelligibility with speech transmission index > = 0.50 

3.0 Equipment Specifications 

3.1.1 Speakers 

The speaker shall be mounted on columns / walls and shall be actively equalized. These shall be wall 

Mounted loudspeaker for high fidelity music and speech reproduction with following 

specification: 

Frequency response 

Power Wattage 

Coverage 

: 10 W 

: 110 Hz – 20 KHz 

: 130 x 40 Deg. 

Two Way (4.5” Woofer for LF/MF+ 1” Tweeter) 

Mounting 

: For rotation of speaker any direction. 

Built in LMT for 100V/70 V operation with multitap power setting 

Speaker shall be complete with all accessories and hardware for mounting the units. Speakers in 

selected areas shall be provided with volume control with by pass facility. 

3.1.2 Horn Speakers 

For Car park Area horn speaker shall be used which should be weather resistance (IP65) along with wall 

bracket. 

Power Rating 

: 10 W ;Max Power : 15 W 

Frequency Range 

: 500 Hz – 5.5 kHz 

100 V line matching transformer 

Protection : IP 65 

Page 137 of 174



NRDA 

3.2 Power Amplifiers 

Power Amplifiers shall be digital type, 2 channel, 250 Watts each. Frequency response of the 

amplifier shall be 20 Hz to 20 KHz with a permissible deviation of +1 / - 3 dB. The total Harmonic 

Distortion (THD) at 1 KHz and at rated power output should be less than 0.2%. The signal to 

Noise ratio should be better than 87 db. The power amplifier will further incorporate: 

Audio delay of up to 1.2 seconds for each amplifier channel 

2x16 character display for monitoring. 

Headphone connection and VU meter for audio monitoring 

8 control inputs and 1 to 8 control outputs 

2 audio inputs 

1 to 8 audio outputs 

Supervision of external cable connected to control inputs 

Amplifier monitoring and changeover 

Loudspeaker line monitoring 

Temperature : -5°C to +55°C 

Relative Humidity : 15% to 90% 

3.3 Network Controller 

The network control unit is the heart of the public address system. The unit is capable of routing up to 28 

simultaneous audio channels, delivering power to the system (except for power amplifier), fault reporting 

and controlling of the system. The audio inputs can be announcements from call stations, background 

music or local audio inputs. This unit will be able to work either in stand-alone mode or with a PC 

connected to it. Operator Work Stations of the BAS will be connected to the network controller unit 

through a LAN network and any status changes in the system can be display through the configuration and 

diagnostic & logging software installed in the Operator Work Stations. The unit is supplied with userfriendly 

configuration and diagnostic & logging software. The network Controller will have the following 

specifications: 

* 28 audio channels 

* 8 supervised control inputs and 5 control outputs 

* 4 audio inputs and 4 audio outputs 

* Ethernet interface for configuration and diagnostic & logging functions 

* Digital message storage 

* Stores up to last 99 fault messages 

* RS 232 interface for logging 

* To satisfy even the most complex public address priority requirement, the system is 

designed to handle 256 priorities, and can be configured for up to 488 zones. 

Page 138 of 174



NRDA 

* The network controller monitors the status of all the equipment in the system and 

reports any status changes. This monitoring extends from the capsule of a call station 

microphone to the end of a loudspeaker line. The external cables connected to the 

control inputs are monitored for short and open circuit. 

* Seven attention tones and 45 alarm tones are stored in the network controller unit. 

These tones can be accessed by any call stations or control inputs for announcement 

broadcast or alarm broadcast. 

* The digital audio processing has 3 parameters and 2 shelving equalizer sections per audio 

inputs and outputs. 

* The network controller has an internal real time clock, which can be synchronized via 

control inputs. 

* The network controller has extensive audio processing possibilities for audio inputs and 

audio outputs. Parameters equalization, limiter and gain can be adjusted using the 

configuration software. 

* The network controller is provided with a monitoring loudspeakers and a headphone 

socket for monitoring of audio channels. 

* The network controller provides an open protocol, which can be used by third-party 

suppliers to integrate their systems for monitoring & logging. 

* Audio inputs - Analogue Line Inputs 

Frequency response : -3dB at 20 Hz and 20k Hz (tolerance ± 1 db) 

: 0dB at 100 Hz, 1 k Hz and 10k Hz (tolerance 1 ±dB) 

Signal-to-noise ratio : > 87dBA 

* Temperature : -5°C to +55°C 

* Relative Humidity : 15% to 90% 

* Indications and controls 

3.4 Paging Board 

2x16 character LCD display for status display. 

Rotary/Push control for selection of system enquiry mode and volume of the headphone 

or internal speaker. 

Power Supply ON/OFF switch. 

Paging Board shall be provided at the locations given in Para 1.2 above. Each board shall be able 

to select any individual zone or a group of zones or all the zones as desired. 

Page 139 of 174



NRDA 

Each board shall be provided with soft touch operating keys for selection of zones etc. The 

following shall be incorporated on each board. 

Zone / space selection keys with LED indicators to select separate zones. 

An ALARM or SELECT ALL key to select all zones at once. 

RESET key to clear the selected zones. 

TALK key with 2 LED indicators 

XLR plug connector for connecting an additional microphone 

Error indications 

Differentiation in indications for higher –and priority announcements 

Supervision of microphone. 

The call station basic has a speech filter with a cutoff frequency at 300 Hz. This improves 

intelligibility and prevents clipping of the audio input on low-frequency signals. 

The call station basic has a volume control for the monitoring loudspeaker and headset. 

The call station basic can be programmed for momentary actions on make contact and toggle 

actions without repeat on make contact. 

Up to 256 priorities can be assigned. 

Each board shall have the facility to connect additional paging boards. 

Temperature : -5°C to +55°C 

Relative Humidity : 15% to 90% 

3.5 Speaker Line Supervision Set 

The same loudspeaker line is used to communicate with the supervision-slave (speaker line 

supervision set) installed at the end of loudspeaker line to Know the status and monitor the 

speakers and other devices in the zone. The speaker line supervision set will incorporate the 

following: 

Loudspeaker line monitoring without additional cabling 

Supervision master mounting space in the power amplifier 

Open-circuit fault detection 

Page 140 of 174



NRDA 

Powering of the speaker line supervision set from the power amplifier 

1.1.3 3.6 Mic. Line Mixer 

In each zone there shall be a microphone or line level mixer / sound processor placed locally in 

the zone. This shall accept inputs from a microphone or a local music source, which shall be 

relayed only in that particular zone. It should have provision for connecting multiple microphones 

and music inputs. These signal shall be overridden by any input from main building 

paging/evacuation system. The mic. Line mixer will further incorporate the following: 

4 Mic Line Balanced inputs 

Built in Speech Filters 

Priority Among Local Mic Inputs 

Three Stereo Line/Music Level Inputs with Bass/treble control 

Selectable Chime Tone 

Mix Output for connection with Building Paging System 

3.7 Microphone 

The frequency response of the microphone should be from 50 to 17,000 Hz. The Open Circuit Sensitivity (at 

1kHZ, ref. 1V/microbar) should be –53.5dB(2.11mv). Maximum SPL (1kHZ at 1% THD, 1k Ohm load) should 

be 123dB. The Equivalent Output Noise (A-weighted) should be 29.0dB SPL. Signal to Noise Ratio 

(referenced at 94dB SPL) should be 65dB. The Dynamic Range at 1 K Ohm load should be 94dB. The 

Common Mode Rejection should be 45dB minimum. 

3.8 Multi - Disc CD Player 

The Compact Disc Player shall have a magazine holder capable of holding and playing 5 CDs. It 

shall have of full function remote control unit for operation. System shall incorporate a 1 bit DLC 

with high speed and high density pulse flow D/A converter. It shall have programme play and 

Random Play functions. 

3.9 Dual Cassette Deck 

The Dual Cassette Tape player shall use industry standard tape size and protocol. The units shall 

have Auto Reverse Play and Record facility. The tape drive system shall be with two motors. Units 

shall be front loading type with all controls on the front panel. Manual 2 – point tape calibration 

facility should be provided. 

Unit shall further meet the following specifications 

DOLBY B/C/S Noise reduction system shall be incorporated. 

Frequency Response 20 Hz to 19 KHz. 

Harmonic distortion less than 1% 

Minimum output line level of 570 mV 

3.10 Volume Control Units 

Page 141 of 174



NRDA 

The volume control units will be of the following specifications: 

Rated Power : 100 W 

Input Voltage : 100 V 

Attenuation Steps: 10 x 2dB + Off 

Frequency Response : 50 Hz – 20 K Hz 

THD :



NRDA 

P art 3- Plumbing, Water S upply and Fire 

Fighting S pecifications 

CONTENTS 

. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 

. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 

. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

. LIST OF ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

. SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES 

Page 143 of 174



NRDA 

Technical Condition of Contract for Plumbing Works 


Following is the detail of scope of work included in this Tender. 

a) Installation of Pumps in the U.G.Tank complete as required starting from suction line from 

underground tank to O.H.Tank/ distribution Ring Main Ball Valves, N.R.V, Elect-Panel & Wiring 

for Motor Necessary Foundation work for Pumps, Supports for Piping Bends, Tee’s Dead ends, 

Tail pcs. Valves, Vessel etc. as required. 

b) Laying of Soil, Waste, Rain Water & Water Supply Lines should be as approved make & quality. 

c) Supports for vertical risers/vertical pipes. Painting etc. as required. 

d) Pump & equipments, accessories and fitting as required. 

e) Installation, testing and commissioning of the entire installations to the satisfaction of employer, 

Consultant and Architects 

f) Manual operated Electrical Driven System. 

g) Maintaining the installation minimum for a period of 6 Month from the date of commissioning 

and imparting training to the workers/staff as asked for maintaining the installations as per IS 

requirement and exercising. 

h) Earth pits & earth strip for earthing the body of the motors is being provided by the Electrical 

Contractor. 

2. SCHEME: 

The Complete Building is being provided with following arrangements. 

a) Underground tank of capacity of adequate capacity with All the arrangements . 

b) Manual operated as well as automatic operated pump 

c) Raw Water Lifting System. 

Page 144 of 174



NRDA 

3. INSTALLATION SCHEMATIC 

The installation shall confirm to the schematic line diagram attached in the shape of drawings for pump 

house. Vertical riser/D Comer and Pipe layout drawing for building attached along with Tender Papers. 

Since the Agency executing the job is responsible for obtaining the NOC from the Local Authorities, 

deviation, if any, with respect to the scheme and drawing attached may be brought out clearly in the 

Tender Paper while quoting for the job. 

4. SPECIFICATIONS 

4.1.1 Work under Plumbing Services installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with 

specifications attached with the tender. 

4.1.2 Items not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or additional 

works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications or the latest N.B.C. manual up to date 

amendments as applicable in the work. 

5. EXECUTION OF WORK 

5.1.1 The Contractor should visit and examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the nature of 

the existing roads and other means of communication and other details pertaining to the work 

and local conditions and facilities for obtaining his own information on all matters affecting the 

execution of work. No extra charge made in consequence of any misunderstanding, incorrect 

information on any of these points or on ground of insufficient description will be allowed. 

5.1.2 The work shall be carried out in conformity with the plumbing drawings and within the 

requirements of Architectural, HVAC, Electrical, Structural and other specialized Services 

drawings. 

5.1.3 The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site. He shall make 

provision for hanger/support, sleeves, structural openings and other requirements well in 

advance to prevent hold up of progress of the construction schedule. 

5.1.4 On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the form of a PERT 

chart or BAR chart for approval of the Employer/ Architect/ Consultant. All dates and time 

schedule agreed upon should be strictly adhered to, within the stipulated time of 

completion/commissioning along with the specified phasing, if any. 

6. Drawings 

6.1.1 Drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction permits. Any 

deviations made shall be in conformity with the Architectural and other services drawings and 

subject to the consent of consultant/employer 

6.1.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over Plumbing drawing or other services drawings 

as to all dimensions. 

Page 145 of 174



NRDA 

6.1.3 Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Site 

Engineer/Consultant all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Site 

Engineer/Consultant/Employer shall be final. 

6.1.4 Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take 

precedence over small-scale drawings. 

6.1.5 Any drawings issued by the Architects/ Consultant for the work are the property of the 

Architects/ Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other intended 

without the written permission of the Architects/ Consultant. 

7. Inspection and testing of materials 

Contractor shall be required to produce if required manufacturers test certificate for the particular f 

materials supplied by him. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant Indian Standards. 

8. Metric conversion 

8.1.1 All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender document are 

commercial metric sizes. 

8.1.2 Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the nearest 

equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additional cost. 

9. Reference drawing 

9.1.1 Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These shall 

not be used on site. All-important drawings shall be mounted on boards and placed in racks 

indexed. No drawings shall be rolled. 

9.1.2 All corrections, deviations and change made on the site shall be shown on these reference 

drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings. All changes to be made shall be 

initialled by the Consultant or Architects. 

10. Shop drawings 

Shop drawings shall be submitted under following conditions: - 

a) Showing any changes in layout in the Plumbing drawings. 

b) Equipment layout, piping and wiring diagram. 

c) Manufacturer or Contractor’s fabrication drawings for any materials or equipment 

supplied by him. 

11. Completion drawings 

11.1 On completion of work, contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and two 

prints of “as built” drawings to the Project Manager. These drawings shall have the following 

information. 

a) Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of external services. 

Page 146 of 174



NRDA 

b) Run of all Plumbing lines with diameters, locations of control valves, access panels. 

c) Locations of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections. 

No completion certificate shall be issued unless the above drawings are submitted. Further, sum 

of Rs. 5,000.00 shall be deducted in case the Contractor does not submit the same. 

11.2 Contractor shall provide One sets of catalogues, service manuals if required manufacturer’s 

drawings, performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and address of the 

manufacturer for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him. 

11.3 All “warranty cards” given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the Employer. 

12. Contractor ‘s rates 

1.1.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, erection, 

tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to site, octroi and levies, breakage, 

wastage and all such expenses as may be necessary and required to completely do all the items of 

work and put them in a working condition. 

1.1.2 Rates quoted are for all heights and depths and in all positions as may be required for this work. 

1.1.3 All rates quoted are inclusive or cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making good the 

same with cement mortar/concrete/ water proofing of 

appropriate mix and strength as directed by Project Manager. Contractor shall provide holes, 

sleeves, recesses in the concrete and masonry work as the work proceeds. 

1.1.4 The Contractor shall furnish the vouchers & test certificates to prove that the materials are as 

specified and to indicate that the rates at which the materials are purchased in order to workout 

the rate analysis of non tendered items which he may be called upon to carryout. 

13. Testing 

13.1.1 Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses of the 

specifications. 

13.1.2 Tests shall be performed in presence of the Site Engineer/ Consultant. 

13.1.3 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work tested to meet the 

requirements of the specifications. 

13.1.4 Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the local authorities 

to meet municipal or other bye-laws in force. 

13.1.5 Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance of the tests. 

Page 147 of 174



NRDA 

14. Site clearance and cleanup 

14.1.1 The contractor shall, from time to time, clear away all debris and excess materials accumulated at 

the site. 

14.1.2 After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, contractor 

shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints, stains, stickers and other foreign matter or 

discoloration leaving the same in a ready to use condition. 

14.1.3 On completion of all works, contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus materials and 

leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which the same shall be done at Contractor’s risk 

and cost. 

15. Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free of cost 

15.1 If any materials issued to the Contractor, free of cost, are damaged or pilfered, the cost of the 

same shall be recovered from the contractor on the basis or actual cost to owner which shall 

include all freight and transportation, excise duty, sales tax, Octroi, import duty etc, plus 10%. The 

decision on the actual cost given by the Employer shall be final and binding on the Contractor. 

16. Cutting of water proofing membrane 

16.1 No walls terraces shall be cut for making and opening after waterproofing has been done without 

approval of Site Engineer/ Architects. Cutting of water proofing membrane shall be done very 

carefully so as other portion of water proofing is not damaged. On completion of work at such 

place the water proofing membrane shall be made good and ensured that the opening/ cutting is 

made fully water proof as per specifications and details of water proofing approved by Architects. 

17. Cutting of structural members 

17.1 No structural member shall be chased or cut without the permission of the Project Manager. 

18. Materials supplied by employer 

18.1 The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Employer conform to the 

specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the 

notice of the Site Engineer. 

19. Materials 

19.1 Unless otherwise specified and expressly approved in writing by the Employer, only materials of 

makes and specification as mentioned in the list of approved makes attached with the 

specifications shall be used 

Page 148 of 174



NRDA 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING WORKS 

1. Pipes 

i) All pipes within and outside the building in exposed location and shafts including connections 

buried under floor shall be APPROVED MAKE OF pipes & Fittings. 

2. Pipe Fittings 

a) Pipe fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, Unions, reducers etc. and all such connecting devices 

that are need to complete the piping work in its totality. 

b) Screwed fittings shall be approved type malleable with reinforced ring on all edges of the fitting 

suitable for screwed joints. 

3. Pipe Jointing: 

3.1 Flanged 

3.2 Unions 

Excavation 

Flanged joints shall be provided on : 

Straight runs not exceeding 25-30 m on pipelines of 65mm dia and above and as directed by 

Project Manager. 

For jointing all types of valves, apparatus pump, connections with other types of pipes, to water 

tanks and other places necessary and required as good for engineering practice. 

Flanged shall be as per Table E of IS specification with appropriate number of S.S. nuts and bolts, 

3 mm neoprene gasket complete as per relevant specifications 

Provide approved type of unions on pipelines 50mm dia and below in similar places as specified 

for flanges. 

4.1 Excavation for pipe lines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades shown on the drawings or 

as required at site. Pipelines shall be buried with a minimum cover of 1.0 meter or as shown on 

drawings. 

4.2 Wherever required contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining structures with adequate 

timber supports. 

Page 149 of 174



NRDA 

4.3 On completion of testing in the presence of the Project Manager and pipe protection, trenches 

shall be refilled with same excavated earth and consolidated. 

4.4 Contractor shall dispose off all surplus earth within a lead of 50 m or as directed by the Project 

Manager. 

5 Anchor Thrust blocks 

a) Contractor shall provide suitably designed anchor blocks in cement concrete to encounter excess 

thrust due to water hammer & high pressure. 

b) Thrust blocks shall be provided at all bends, tees and such other location as determined by the 


c) Exact location, design, size and mix of the concrete blocks shall be as shown on the drawings or as 

directed by the Project Manager prior to execution of work. 

6. Gun Metal valves 

Valves of 50 mm dia and below shall be heavy duty gunmetal Ball valves conforming to IS 778 

class II with female screwed ends. 

7. Cast Iron butterfly Valves. 

All valves 65 mm dia and above shall be CI butter fly valves of class PN 1.0 conforming to IS 5312 

with CI body, but rubber seat and teflon seal. 

8. Non-return Valve 

Non-return valves shall be CI double flanged with CI body and Gun metal internal parts 

conforming to IS 5312. 

9 Pipe protection 

a) All pipes above ground and in exposed location shall be painted with one coat of red oxide 

primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of Approved colour. 

b) Where specified, pipes buried in floors or below ground shall be protected against corrosion 

by the application of PYP COAT as specified in schedule of quantities. 

14. Pipe support 

All pipe clamps and supports shall be mild steel. When fabricated from chilly make G.I. Clamps, 

G.I. Threaded Rods & Dash Fasteners. 

Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fasteners of approved make and design. The 

hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanised nuts and bolts. The size/diameter of 

the anchor fasteners and the clamp shall be suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and 

dead weight normally encountered. 

Page 150 of 174



NRDA 

15 Testing 

Measurement 

All Water supply piping in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 8 Kg/sqcm 

without drop in pressure for at least for 10 hours. 

Rectify all leakages, make adjustment and retest as required and directed. 

16.1 All G.I/CPVC/uPVC pipes shall be measured per linear meter of the finished length and shall 

include all fittings, flanges, welding, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers, anchor 

fasteners, painting and testing complete in all respect. 

16.2 Butterfly valves, check valves, are measured by numbers and shall include all items necessary and 

required for fixing and as given in the specifications and schedule of quantities. 

1. SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS 

1.1 Vitreous China Sanitaryware 

SECTION - I 

All glazed Vitreous China Sanitary ware fixtures shall confirm to Indian Standard IS:2556. The details, 

make and type to be provided are given in the Schedule of Quantities. The Vitreous China 

Sanitary ware shall be of first quality only. They shall be non-porous and fully vitreous, with all 

the visible portions perfectly glazed and should be absolutely free from hairline cracks pinholes 

and local depressions. It shall be perfectly symmetrical, uniform and with smooth curves. All 

sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be stored under covered roof and handled carefully to prevent 

any damage. 

1.2 Chromium Plated Fittings 

All Chromium plated fittings shall be of brass/copper, heavy chromium plated, of the make 

and design approved by the Architects/Consultants. The fittings shall be cast fittings of screw 

type, machined and threaded properly for fixing to the supply pipes. 

The chromium plating shall conform to Indian Standard IS:482 (Electroplated coating of nickel and 

chromium of copper and copper alloys). 

The fittings shall be supplied complete with chromium plated matching flanges wall cover 

plates, nuts and extension pieces of required lengths. Metallic washers where required shall also 

be of chromium plated brass. All bib cocks and stop cocks shall conform to Indian Standard 

IS:781. Brass screw down pillar taps to IS:1701 and all other fittings shall match the supply fitting 

in construction and appearance. All fixing accessories and screws shall be similar to fittings. All 

washers shall conform to Indian Standard IS:4346. 

Page 151 of 174



NRDA 

All waste fittings (Waste, Chain, Overflow, Spreaders Caps etc.) shall be of brass/copper heavy 

chromium plated of the make and design specified and match the supply fittings. They shall 

con-form to Indian standard IS:2963. 

Bottle traps (for wash basins, sinks, urinals etc) shall be deep seal (Min. 6 cm seal) cast brass 

bottle traps, heavy chromium plated. All bottle traps shall be provided with suitable cleaning 

eye, extension piece, flare nuts, all chromium plated. 

Chromium plated brass flanges of suitable size shall be provided to screw the holes made for 

installing the pipes through walls, floors & columns. 

2.0 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FIXTURES AND FITTINGS 

2.1 General Requirement 

The fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete 

the item in satisfactory working conditions, whether specifically mentioned or not in the 

schedule of quantities, specifications and drawings. 

The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position as shown on 

the drawings and as directed by the Owner / Engineer in Charge./ Interior Designer, and shall fully 

meet with the aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the Engineer in Charge./ 

Interior Designer. 

All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching the tiles or 

interior finish as per Owner / Engineer in Charge. / Interior Designer requirements. Wherever 

necessary, the fittings shall be centered to dimensions and pattern as called for. 

Fixtures & fittings shall be installed by skilled workman with appropriate tools according to the 

best trade practice. Manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for the installation of 

fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height mounting as specified/shown for on 

the drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb, and true to alignment. 

2.2 Mock up and Trial Assembly 

The installation of the Sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop drawings approved 

by the Owner / Engineer in Charge./ Consultant. 

The contractor shall have to assemble for Mock Up atlas one set of each type of sanitary 

fixtures and fittings in order to determine precisely the required supply and disposal 

connections. Relevant instructions from manufacturers shall be followed as applicable. This trial 

assembly shall be developed to facilitate determining the location of puncture holes, holding 

devices etc., which will be required for final installation in position of all sanitary fixtures and 

fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to final approval by the Owner / Engineer in 

Charge./ Interior Designer. 

Page 152 of 174



NRDA 

The fixtures in the trial assembly can be re-used for final installation without any additional 

payments for fixing or dismantling of the fixtures. 

2.3 Supporting and Fixing Devices 

The contractor shall provide all supporting and fixing devices necessary to install the sanitary 

fixtures and fittings securely in position. The fixing devices 

shall be rigidly anchored into the building structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall 

be so fixed that they do not present an unsightly look in the final assembly. Where the location 

demands, the Owner/ Engineer in Charge./ Interior Designer may instruct the contractor to 

provide chromium plated or other similarly finished fixing devices. In such circumstances the 

contractor shall arrange to supply the fixing devices and shall be installed complete with 

appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets. 

2.4 Final Installation 

The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final position in accordance 

with approved trial assemblies and as shown on drawings. The installation shall be complete 

with all supply and waste connections. The connection between building and piping system 

and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanges to facilitate 

removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. All 

unions and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposed fittings. 

Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet pans 

and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving 

pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of 

obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of 

movement and settlement by other causes. 

3.0 PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGE 

The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse, 

cracking, staining breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking 

arrangement till the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, the 

contractor shall clean, disinfect and polish all fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found 

damaged, cracked chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings 

free from defects shall be installed at his own cost to complete the work. 

Page 153 of 174



NRDA 

SECTION - II 

INTERNAL DRAINAGE (SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAIN WATER PIPES). 

1. BASIC PIPING SYSTEM 

Soil and waste Pipes shall be u.P.V.C. pipes & fittings as called for. In general wastes smaller 

than 63mm dia shall be of heavy class 10kg/cm2 All soil, Waste, Vent & rain water pipes shall be 

class A uPVC pipes of SWR system. 

The soil pipes shall be circular with a minimum diameter of 110mm. Pipes shall be fixed by 

means of stout u.P.V.C. clamps in two sections, bolted together, built into the walls, wedged and 

neatly jointed as directed and approved by the Owner / Engineer in Charge./ Consultant. All 

bends, branches, swan neck and other parts shall conform to the requirement and standards as 

described for the pipes. Pipes shall be rested against the walls on suitable wooden cradles. 

Local Authority Regulations applicable to the installations shall be strictly followed. 

Where indicated, the soil pipes shall be continued up wards without any diminution in its 

diameter, without any bend or angle to the height shown in the drawings. Joints throughout shall 

be made with rubber rings described by the manufacturer under jointing of pipes. The soil 

pipes shall be clamped on top with M.S. iron terminal ogaurds as directed and approved. All 

vertical soil pipes shall be firmly fixed to the walls with properly fixed clamps, and shall as far 

as possible be kept 50 mm clear of wall. Waste pipes and fittings shall be of u.P.V.C. pipes. Pipes 

shall be fixed. jointed and fixed as described in installation of soil, Waste & vent pipes. 

Every waste pipe shall discharge above the grating of a properly trapped gully. The contractor 

shall ensure that this requirement is adequately met with. Wherever floor traps are provided, 

it shall be ensured that at least one wash is connected to such floor traps to avoid drying of 

water seal in the trap. 

All the fittings used for connections, between soil, waste and ventilation pipes and branch pipes 

shall be made by using pipe fittings with inspection doors for cleaning. The doors shall be 

provided with 3mm thick rubber insertion packing and when closed and bolted shall be air and 

water tight. 

2.0 PIPING MATERIALS 

2.1 uPVC Pipes and Fittings: 

The pipes shall be round and shall be supplied in straight lengths with scooted ends. The internal 

and external surfaces of pipes shall be smooth, clean, free from grooving and other defects. The 

ends shall be cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe. The pipes shall be designated by 

external diameter and shall conform to SWR pipe system. 

3.0 INSTALLATION OF SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAIN WATER PIPES. 

Page 154 of 174



NRDA 

Soil, waste & vent pipes in shafts, under the floors etc shall consist of u.P.V.C. pipes as described 

earlier. Waste pipes from bottle trap to floor/urinal traps for wash basin, urinal and sink shall be 

of heavy class u.P.V.C. pipes and fittings.All horizontal pipes running below the slab and along the 

ceiling, shall be fixed on structural adjustable clamps, sturdy hangers of the design as called 

for in the drawings. The pipes shall be laid in uniform slope and proper levels. All vertical pipes 

shall be truly vertical fixed by means of stout clamps in two sections, bolted together, built into 

the walls, wedged and neatly jointed. The branch pipes shall be connected to the stack at the 

same angle as that of fittings. All connections between soil, waste and ventilating pipes and 

branch pipes shall be made by using pipe fittings with inspection doors for cleaning. Pipes shall 

be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not 

cause obstruction in shafts. Where the horizontal run of the pipe is long or where the pipes 

cross over building expansion joints etc., suitable allowance shall be provided for any movements 

in the pipes by means of expansion joints etc., such that any such movement does not damage 

the installation in any way. 

All u.P.V.C. pipes and fittings shall be jointed as per the manufacturer’s specification. 

The jointed portion of the pipe shall be carefully leveled & aligned and the joint shall not be 

covered till the pipe line has been tested under pressure. 

4.0 Cutting and Making good: 

Pipes shall be fixed and tested as building proceeds. The Contractor shall provide all necessary holes, 

cutouts and chases in structural members as building work proceeds. Wherever holes are cut or 

left originally they shall be made good with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement:2 coarse sand:4 

stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 coarse sand). Cured and the surface 

restored to original condition. 

5.0 Painting: 

All M.S. Hangers shall be painted as per the shade & colour approved by the Project Manager. 

6.0 Testing: 

6.1 Before use at site, all u.P.V.C. soil pipes shall be tested by filling up with water for at least 10 

minutes. After filling, pipes shall be inspected for below holes and cracks. All defective pipes shall 

be rejected and removed from the site within 48 hours. 

Pipes shall be tested after installation by filling up the stack with water. All opening and 

connections shall be suitably plugged. The total head in the stack shall however not exceed 3 M. 

Alternatively, the Contractor may test all soil and waste stacks by a smoke testing machine. Smoke 

shall be pumped into the stack after plugging all inlets end connections. The top end shall 

however be left open. The stack shall then be observed for leakage’s and all defective pipes and 

fittings removed or repaired as directed by the Project Manager. 

A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by the Contractor and 

the Project Manager or his representative. 

Page 155 of 174



NRDA 

SECTION - III 

B. WATER SUPPLY 

1.0 PIPING SYSTEM. 

The piping system consists of SDR 11 Grade CPVC pipes and fittings conforming to relavent IS 

codes. The sizes and makes is specified in the Schedule of Quantities. 

For any internal works if specified in the B.O.Q. the CPVC pipes and fittings shall be embedded 

in the wall chase or run on the floor / ceiling unless otherwise specified. No unsightly exposed 

runs shall be permitted. 

2. PIPING MATERIAL 

2.1 CPVC Pipes 

The pipes shall be CPVC pipes & shall be uniform, adherent reasonably smooth and free from any 

imperfections. The pipes and sockets shall be cleanly finished, All screw threads shall be clean 

and well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly, and square with the axis of the pipe. 

The fittings also shall be SDR 11 Grade CPVC. The sizes of pipes and fitting is specified in the 

schedule of quantities. 

2.2 Valves & Controls 

All valves (gate, ball, check, safety) shall be of CPVC suitable for the particular service as called 

for. All valves shall be of the particular duty and design as called for. 

3. LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES 

All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable. The pipes 

shall be fixed to walls with standard slotted angles Ù’ shape threaded bolts, nuts for clamping 

pipes to angles. Slotted angles shall be grouted to R.C.C. work with dash fasteners. These 

slotted angles shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight lengths and heights at 1.8M c/c. 

3.1 Laying and jointing of pipes 

The galvanized pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase or ceiling or as specified. The fixing 

shall be done by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps keeping the pipes about 1.5 cm 

clear of the wall where to be laid on 

surface. Where it is specified to conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in the 

shafts, ducts etc. provided there is a sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. 

As far as possible, pipes may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is 

given against damage and where so required special care to be taken at joints. Where directed 

Page 156 of 174



NRDA 

by the Construction Manager/Architect, Pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing 

through a wall or floor for reception of the pipe and allow freedom for expansion and 

contraction and other movements. In case of pipe is embedded in walls or floors it should be of 

approved quality. Under the floors the pipes shall be laid in layer of sand filling. 

CPVC pipes shall be jointed with male & Female joints, using Solvent Adhesive. shall be taken to 

remove any burr from the end of the pipes jointing compound of proprietary make shall be 

used, according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Pipes and joints laid for water supply shall be 

tested to a pressure of 7 Kg. per Sq. cm. 

3.2 Cutting Chases in Masonry Walls 

The chases upto 7.5 x 7.5 cm shall be made in the walls for housing water supply pipes etc. 

These shall be provided in correct positions as shown in the drawings or directed by the 

Construction Manager/Architects. Chases shall be made by chiselling out the masonry to proper 

line and depth. After GI pipes etc are fixed in chases, the chases shall be filled with cement 

mortar 1:2:4 or as may be specified made flush with the masonry surface. The concrete surface 

shall be roughened with wire brush to provide a key for plastering. 

3.3 Water Fittings 

Unless otherwise specified all Gunmetal fittings such as gate, globe, check & safety valves shall 

be fitted in pipe line in workman like manner. Necessary unions shall be provided on both ends 

of the valves for easy replacement. The joints between fittings and pipes shall be leak-proof 

when tested to a pressure. The defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone. 

Page 157 of 174



NRDA 

SECTION - IV 

EXTERNAL DRAINAGE & SEWAGE DISPOSAL 

1. PIPING MATERIAL 

1.1 RCC Pipes 

All underground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines where specified (other than those 

specified ) shall be centrifugal spun RCC pipes NP2 for general and NP3 where road crossing. 

Pipes shall be true and straight with uniform bore throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be 

used on the work. All pipes shall be tested by the manufacturer and the Contractor shall produce, 

prior to use on site, a certificate to that effect from the manufacturer. 

The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and of the class as specified. These 

shall conform to IS:458 – 1971. The reinforced cement concrete pipes shall be manufactured by 

centrifugal (or spun) process. 

All pipes shall be true to shape, straight, perfectly sound and free from cracks and flaws. The 

external and internal surface of the pipes shall be smooth and hard. The pipes shall be free from 

defects resulting from imperfect grading of the aggregate mixing or molding. The pipes shall be 

R.C.C. light duty, NP2 and NP3 type. 

1.1.2 Laying: 

R.C.C. spun pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed of cradles as specified and shown on the 

detailed drawings. The cradles may be precast and sufficiently cured to prevent cracks and 

breakage in handling. The invert of the cradles shall be left 12mm below the invert level of the 

pipe and properly placed on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be placed on 

the bed concrete or cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of sight rails and boning 

rods, etc. Cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if directed by the Developer’s 

Representatives. 

1.1.3 Jointing: 

(Regid Spigot and Socket Joint): 

Hemp rope soaked in neat cement wash shall be passed round the joint and inserted in it by 

means of caulking tool. More skein of yarn shall be added and rammed home. Cement mortar with 

one part of cement and one part of sand and with minimum water content but on no account soft or 

sloppy, shall be carefully inserted, punched and caulked into the joint and more cement mortar 

added until 

the space of the joint has been filled completely with tightly caulked mortar. The joint shall then be 

finished off neatly outside the socket at an angle of 45 deg. 

1.1.4 Curing: 

Page 158 of 174



NRDA 

The joint shall be cured for at least seven days. Refilling at joints will be permitted only on 

satisfactory completion of curing period. 

1.1.5 Cement Concrete for Pipe Supports: 

Unless otherwise directed by the Developer’s Representative cement concrete for bed, all round 

or in haunches shall be laid as follows: 

Upto 1.5m Upto 3m Beyond 3m 

Depth (5’) depth (10’) depth (10’) 

Pipes in open ground all round in haunches all round 

(no sub soil water) (1:5:10) (1:3:6) (1:5:10) 

RCC/C.I. pipes in sub all round in haunches in haunches 

soil water (1:3:6) (1:3:6) (1:3:6) 

RCC/C.I. pipes (in all all round in haunches in haunches 

Conditions) (1:3:6) (1:3:6) (1:3:6) 

RCC/C.I. pipes under all round all round all round 

Road or building (1:3:6) (1:3:6) (1:3:6) 

RCC pipes or CI pipes may be supported on brick masonry or precast RCC or in situ cradles. 

Cradles shall be as shown on the drawings. 

Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on brick or stone masonry pillars as shown 

on the drawings. 

Measurement: 

Excavation: 

Measurement for excavation of pipes trenches shall be made per linear meter. 

Trenches shall be measurement between outside walls of manholes at top and the depth shall be 

the average depth between the two ends to the nearest cm. 

The rate quoted shall be for a depth upto 1.5 meter or as given in the Bill of Quantities. 

Payment for trenches more than 1.5m in depth shall be made for extra depth as given in 

the Bill of Quantities and above the rate for depth upto 1.5m. 

RCC pipes shall be measured for the length of the pipe line per linear meter i.e.: 

Length between manholes shall be recorded from inside of one manhole ot inside of 

other manhole. 

Page 159 of 174



NRDA 

1.1.7 Stoneware Pipes 

Length between gully trap and manhole shall be recorded between socket of pipe near 

gully trap and inside of manhole. 

Stoneware pipes, where used, shall be perfectly salt glazed, sound, free from cracks, 

deformities and imperfections in glazing. They shall be cylindrical, straight and of standard 

nominal diameter, length and depth of socket. They will be made of hard burnt stoneware of 

dark grey colour and thoroughly glazed and shall give a sharp clear note when struck with a 

light hammer. The pipe shall conform to the requirements of Indian Standards IS:651 and the 

sizes and make specified in the schedule of Quantities. 

1.1.8 Gully Trap 

Gully trap, where used, shall be conforming to IS:651. These shall be sound and free from 

visible defects such as hair cracks. There shall be no broken blisters. Each gully trap shall have 

one grating of square size corresponding to the dimensions of inlet of gully trap. It will also 

have a water tight CI cover with frame inside dimensions 300 x 300mm the cover weighing not 

less than 4.5 kg and the frame not less than 2.7 kg. The grating cover and frame shall be of good 

casting and shall have truly square machined seating faces. 

1.1.9 Cast Iron Manhole Cover and Frame 

The Cast Iron Manhole Cover and Frame shall conform to IS:1726 and the grade and types have 

been specified in the schedule of quantities. The cover and frames shall be cleanly cast and 

they shall be free from air and sand holes and from cold shuts. They shall be neatly dressed and 

carefully trimmed. All castings shall be free from voids whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusion 

or other causes. Covers shall have a raised checkered design on the top surface to provide an 

adequate non-slip grip. 

The sizes of covers specified shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the frame. 

The covers and frames shall be coated with a black bituminous composition. The coating shall 

be smooth and tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of 63 C and shall 

not brittle as to chip off temperature of 0 C. 

1.1.10 SFRC Manhole Cover and Frame 

The Cast Iron Manhole Cover and Frame shall conform to latest IS specifications and the grade 

and types have been specified in the schedule of quantities. The cover and frames shall be 

cleanly cast and they shall be free from air and sand holes and from cold shuts. They shall be 

neatly dressed and carefully trimmed. All castings shall be free from voids whether due to 

shrinkage, gas inclusion or other causes. Covers shall have a raised checkered design on the 

top surface to provide an adequate non-slip grip. 

The sizes of covers specified shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the frame. 

Page 160 of 174



NRDA 

2. TRENCHES FOR PIPES AND DRAINS 

2.1 General 

All the material shall be new of best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the 

approval of the Architects. Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles. 

All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal by-laws. 

Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage system from the 

municipal or any other competent authority. Location of all manholes, catch basins etc shall be 

gotten confirmed by the Architects before the actual execution of work at site. All work shall 

be executed as directed by the Architects. 

2.2 Alignment and Grade 

The storm water drainage pipes shall be carefully laid to levels and gradients shown in the plans 

and sections but subject to modifications as shall be ordered by the Architects from time to 

time to meet the requirements of the works. Great care shall be taken to prevent sand etc. 

from entering the pipes. The pipes between two manholes shall be laid truly in straight lines 

with-out vertical or horizontal undulations. The body of the pipes shall for its entire length rest 

on an even begin the trench and places shall be excavated to receive the collar for the purpose 

of jointing. No deviations from the lines, depths of cuttings or 

gradients called for on the drawings shall be permitted without the written approval of the 

Architect. All pipes shall be laid atleast 60cms below the finished ground level or as called for on 

the drawings. 

2.3 Setting out Trenches 

The contractor shall set out all trenches, Manholes, chambers and such other works to true 

grades and alignments as called for. He shall provide the necessary instruments for setting out 

and verification of the same. All trenches shall be laid to true grade and in straight lines and 

as shown on the drawings. The trenches shall be laid to proper levels by the assistance of 

boning rods and sight rails which shall be fixed at intervals not exceeding 10 meters or as directed 

by the Architect. 

2.4 Trench Excavation 

The trenches for the pipes shall be excavated with bottoms formed to level and gradients as 

shown on the drawings or as directed by the Architect. In soft and filled in ground the Engineer 

in Charge. may require the trenches to be excavated to a greater depth then the shown on the 

drawings and to fill up such additional excavation with concrete (1:4:8) consolidated to bring the 

excavation to the required levels as shown on the drawings. 

All excavation shall be properly protected where necessary by suitable timbering, piling and 

sheeting as approved by the Architect. All timbering and sheeting when withdrawn shall be 

Page 161 of 174



NRDA 

done gradually to avoid falls. All cavities be adequately filled and consolidated. No blasting shall 

be allowed without prior approval in writing from the Architect. Where allowed it shall be carried 

out under thorough and competent supervision, with the written permission of the appropriate 

authorities taking full precaution connected with the blasting operations. All excavated earth 

shall be kept clear of the trenches to a distance equal to 75 cms. 

2.5 Obstruction of Roads 

The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width of 

any road or street and sufficient space shall then left for public and private transit, He shall 

remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when the trench is required to be 

refilled. The contractor shall obtain the consent of the Engineer in Charge.in writing before 

closing any road to vehicular traffic and the foot walks must be clear at all times. 

2.6 Protection of Pipes etc. 

All pipes, water mains, cables etc, met in the course of excavation shall be carefully protected 

and supported. Care shall be taken not to disturb the cables, 

the removal of which shall be arranged by the contractor with the written consent from the 

Owner. 

2.7 Trench Back Filling 

Refilling of the trenches shall not be commenced until the length of pipes therein has been 

tested and approved. All timbering which may be withdrawn safely shall be removed as filling 

proceeds. Where the pipes are unprotected by concrete hunching selected fine material shall 

be carefully hand-packed around the lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them to the sides 

of the trench. 

The refilling shall then be continued to 150mm over the top of the pipe using selected fine 

hand picked material, watered and rammed on both sides of the pipes with a wooden 

hammer. The process of filling and tamping shall proceed evenly in layers not exceeding 150mm 

thickness, each layer being watered and consolidated so as to maintain an equal pressure on 

both sides of the pipe line. In gardens and fields the top soil and turf if any, shall be carefully 

replaced. 

2.8 Contractor to ensure Settlement and Damages 

The contractor shall at his own costs and charges, make good promptly during the whole 

period for the works in hand, any settlement that may occur in the surfaces of roads, beams, 

foot-paths, gardens, open spaces etc. whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his 

other excavations and he shall be liable for any accident caused thereby. He shall also, at his 

own expense and charges, repair and make good and damage done to building and other 

property. If in the opinion of the Architects he fails to make good such works with all practicable 

dispatch, the Engineer in Charge. shall be at his liberty to get the work done by other means 

and the expenses thereof shall be paid by the contractor or deducted from any money that may 

be or become due to him or recovered from him any other manner according to the law of the 

land. 

Page 162 of 174



NRDA 

The contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal of all surplus 

materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled in the surplus soil shall 

be immediately removed, the surface properly restored and roadways and sides left clear. 

2.9 Removal of water from Sewer, trench etc 

The contractor shall at all times during the progress of work keep the excavations free from 

water which shall be disposed by him in a manner as will neither cause injury to the public health 

nor to the public or private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the 

surface of any road or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. 

If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width than the specified 

cross section of the sewer with its envelope, the full width of the trench shall be filled with 

concrete by the contractor at his own expense and to the requirements of the Architects. 

3.0 TESTING 

All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be carefully tested for water tightness by means of 

water pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from 

manhole to manhole. All pipes shall be subject to a test pressure of 1.5 meter head of water. The 

test pressure will however, not exceed 6 meters head at any point. The pipes shall be plugged 

preferably with standard design plugs or with rubber plugs on both sides, the upper end shall, 

however, be connected to a pipe for filling with water and getting the required head poured at 

one time. 

Sewer lines shall be tested for a straightness by : 

i) Inserting a smooth ball 12mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe. In the absence 

of obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at the joints the ball should roll down 

the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end. 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

Means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If the pipe is straight the full 

circle of light will be seen otherwise obstructions or deviations will be apparent. 

The contractor shall give a smoke test to the drain and sewer at his own expense and 

charges, if directed by the Architect. 

A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor, 

Engineer in Charge.and representative of consultants. 

4.0 FIXING OF GULLY TRAP 

4.1 The excavation for gully traps shall be done true to dimensions and levels as indicated on plans 

or as directed by the Architect. The gully traps shall be fixed on cement concrete foundation 

65cm square and not less than 10cm thick. The mix for the concrete will be 1:4:8. The jointing 

of gully outlet to the branch drain shall be done similar to the jointing of Pipes described 

earlier. After fixing and testing gully and branch drain, a brick work of specified class in cement 

mortar 1:5 shall be built with a half brick masonry work round the gully trap from the top of the 

bed concrete upto ground level. The space between the chamber wall and trap shall be filled in 

with cement concrete 1:3:6. The upper portion of the chamber i.e, above the top level of the 

Page 163 of 174



NRDA 

trap shall be plastered inside with cement mortar 1:3 finished with a floating coat of neat 

cement. The corners and bottom of the chamber shall be rounded off so as to slope towards the 

grating. 

CI cover with frame 300 x 300mm (inside) shall then be fixed on the top of the brick masonry 

with cement concrete 1:2:4 and rendered smooth. The finished top of cover shall be so as to 

exclude the surface water from entering the gully trap. 

4.2 Measurements: 

Gully traps shall be measured by the number and rate which shall include all excavation, 

foundation, concrete, brick masonry, cement plaster inside and outside, CI grating and sealed 

cover and frame. 

5.0 CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLE 

Where manholes are to be constructed, the excavation, filling back and ramming, disposal of 

surplus earth, preparation of bottom and sides etc. shall be carried out as described earlier 

under trench excavation. Manhole shall be sized and depths as called for in the drawings and 

Schedule of Quantities. 

The manhole shall be built on a base concrete 1:2:4 of 150mm thickness for manholes upto 

1500mm depth and 250mm thickness for manholes from 1500 to 2500mm depth and 300mm 

thickness manholes of depth greater than 2500mm. Reinforcement as shown shall be provided 

in the base slabs. The walls shall be of brick work of thickness as shown in drawings built in 

cement mortar 1:5. The joints of brick work shall be raked and plastered internally and 

externally with cement plaster 1:3 to a thickness of 20mm and finished with a coat of neat 

cement. In the bottom of the manholes, semi circular channels of the same diameter as the 

pipes shall be provided. 

Above the horizontal diameter the sides of channel shall be extended vertically to the same 

level as the crown of the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The 

branch channels shall also be similarly constructed with respect to the benching but at their 

junction with the main channel an appropriate fall suitably rounded of in the direction of flow in 

the main channel shall be given. Rungs of cast or mild steel of suitable dimensions shall be 

provided in all manholes over 800mm depth. These rungs shall be set at 30cms interval in two 

vertical runs at 380mm apart horizontally. The top rung shall be 450mm below the manhole 

cover. Unless otherwise mentioned, manholes shall be constructed to requirements of Indian 

Standard IS:4111 (Part I). All manholes shall be constructed so as to be water tight under test. 

All angles shall be rounded to a 75mm radius with cement plaster 20mm thick. The benching at 

the side shall be carried up in such manner as to provide no lodgment for any splashing in 

case of accidental flooding. Manhole cover with frame shall be SFRC of an approved make. 

The covers and frame shall generally be double seal as specified in the Schedule of Quantities. 

5.2 Measurements: 

Manhole shall be measured in numbers as indicated in the Bill of Quantity. The depth of manhole 

shall be measured from invert of channel to the top of manhole shall be measured from invert of 

channel to the top of manhole cover. Quoted rate shall cover the range of ± 0.24 meter on the 

depth specified in schedule and also the cost of items specified in the Bill of Quantities and 

Specifications viz. 

Manhole with depth greater than specified under the main item shall be paid for under Èxtra 

Depth’ and shall include all items as given for manholes depth will be measured to the nearest 

Page 164 of 174



NRDA 

cm. Depth of the manholes shall be measured from top of the manhole cover to bottom of 

channel. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

Bed concrete. 

Brick work. 

Plastering. 

R.C.C. top slab, benching and channeling including drop connections. 

Supply and fix foot rests. 

Keeping holes and embedding pipes for all the connections. 

Excavation, refilling, necessary de watering and disposing off surplus soil to a place as 

directed by clients Representative. 

Curing. 

Cost of frame and cast iron cover including reinforcement, angle frame and embedding 

the frame in concrete bed. 

Testing. 

De-watering of chambers. 

Technical Condition of Contract for Fire Fighting Works 


Following is the detail of scope of work included in this Tender. 

i) Installation of Pumps in the Terrace lvl. complete as required starting from suction line 

from over head water tank. The distribution Main butterfly Valves, N.R.V, Air Vessel, 

Pressures Gauges, Pressure Switches, Elect-Panel & Wiring for Motor & Pr. Switches. 

Necessary Foundation work for Pumps, Supports for Piping Bends, Tee’s Dead ends, Tail 

pcs. Valves, Vessel etc. as required. 

j) Laying of Main of MS pipe Heavy Grade (class) for the Hydrant on terrace and dn. comer 

inside the building. 

k) Supports for vertical risers/vertical pipes. Painting etc. as required. 

Page 165 of 174



NRDA 

l) Fire fighting equipments, accessories and fitting as required. 

m) Installation, testing and commissioning of the entire installations to the satisfaction of 

employer, Consultant and Local fire. Authorities. 

n) Obtaining NOC for the installations from Local fire Authorities. 

o) Maintaining the installation minimum for a period of 1 year from the date of 

commissioning and imparting training to the workers/staff of the factory as asked for 

maintaining the installations as per IS requirement and exercising. Fire drills as asked for 

by the client/Local fire Authorities. 

p) Earth pits & earth strip for earthing the body of the motors is being provided by the 


2. SCHEME: 

The Complete Building is being provided with following Fire Fighting arrangements. 

d) Overhead water tank of capacity of adequate capacity with arrangement for 

replenishment for Fire Fighting. 

e) Dn.commer with First Aid Reel inside the Building throughout and on different floor 

f) Portable fire extinguishers in the complete building. 

3. INSTALLATION SCHEMATIC 

The installation shall confirm to the schematic line diagram attached in the shape of drawings for 

p. D Comer and Pipe layout drawing for building attached along with Tender Papers. 

Since the Agency executing the job is responsible for obtaining the NOC from the Local fire 

Service Authorities, deviation, if any, with respect to the scheme and drawing attached may be 

brought out clearly in the Tender Paper while quoting for the job. 

4. SPECIFICATIONS 

2.1 Work under Fire suppression system installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance 

with specifications attached with the tender. 

2.2 Items not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or 

additional works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications or the latest N.B.C. 

manual up to date amendments as applicable in the work. 

Page 166 of 174



NRDA 

2.3 Works not covered under para 2.1 and 2.2 shall be carried out as per relevant Indian 

Standards and in case or its absence as per British Standard code of practice. 

4. Drawings 

4.1 Fire drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction 

permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the Architectural and other 

services drawings and subject to the consent of consultant/employer 

4.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over Fire drawing or other services 

drawings as to all dimensions. 

4.3 Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Site 

Engineer/Consultant all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Site 

Engineer/Consultant/Employer shall be final. 

4.4 Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall 

take precedence over small-scale drawings. 

4.5 Any drawings issued by the Architects/ Consultant for the work are the property of the 

Architects/ Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other 

intended without the written permission of the Architects/ Consultant. 

5. Inspection and testing of materials 

5.1 Contractor shall be required to produce original manufacturers test certificate for the 

particular batch of materials supplied to him. The tests carried out shall be as per the 

relevant Indian Standards. NO PAYMENT SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT TEST CERTIFICATE 

OF THE ITEM. 

6. Metric conversion 

6.1 All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment giver in the tender document are 

commercial metric sizes. 

6.2 Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the 

nearest equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any 

additional cost. 

7. Reference drawing 

7.1 Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. 

These shall not be used on site. All-important drawings shall be mounted on boards and 

placed in racks indexed. No drawings shall be rolled. 

Page 167 of 174



NRDA 

7.2 All corrections, deviations and change made on the site shall be shown on these 

reference drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings. All changes to be 

made shall be initialled by the Consultant or Architects. 

8. Shop drawings 

8.1 Shop drawings shall be submitted under following conditions: - 

d) Showing any changes in layout in the Fire drawings. 

e) Equipment layout, piping and wiring diagram. 

f) Manufacturer or Contractor’s fabrication drawings for any materials or equipment 

supplied by him. 

9. Completion drawings 

9.1 On completion of work, contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and 

two prints of “as built” drawings to the Project Manager. These drawings shall have the 

following information. 

d) Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of external 

services. 

e) Run of all fire lines with diameters, locations of control valves, access panels. 

f) Locations of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections. 

No completion certificate shall be issued unless the above drawings are submitted. 

Further, sum of Rs. 5,000.00 shall be deducted in case the Contractor does not submit 

the same. 

9.2 Contractor shall provide four sets of catalogues, service manuals manufacturer’s 

drawings, performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and address 

of the manufacturer for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him. 

9.3 All “warranty cards” given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the Employer. 

10. Contractor ‘s rates 

10.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, 

erection, tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to site, taxes, octroi and 

levies, breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be necessary and required to 

completely do all the items of work and put them in a working condition. 

10.2 Rates quoted are for all heights and depths and in all positions as may be required for this 

work. 

10.3 All rates quoted are inclusive or cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making 

good the same with cement mortar/concrete/ water proofing of appropriate mix and 

Page 168 of 174



NRDA 

strength as directed by Project Manager. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses 

in the concrete and masonry work as the work proceeds. 

10.4 The Contractor shall furnish the Architects with vouchers & test certificates to prove that 

the materials are as specified and to indicate that the rates at which the materials are 

purchased in order to workout the rate analysis of non tendered items which he may be 

called upon to carryout. 

11. Testing 

11.1 Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses of the 


11.2 Tests shall be performed in presence of the Site Engineer/ Consultant. 

11.3 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work tested to 

meet the requirements of the specifications. 

11.4 Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the local 

authorities to meet municipal or other bye-laws in force. 

11.5 Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance of the 

tests. 

12. Site clearance and cleanup 

12.1 The contractor shall, from time to time, clear away all debris and excess materials 

accumulated at the site. 

12.2 After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, 

contractor shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints, stains, stickers and 

other foreign matter or discoloration leaving the same in a ready to use condition. 

12.3 On completion of all works, contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus 

materials and leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which the same shall be 

done at Contractor’s risk and cost. 

13. Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free of cost 

13.1 If any materials issued to the Contractor, free of cost, are damaged or pilfered, the cost 

of the same shall be recovered from the contractor on the basis or actual cost to owner 

which shall include all freight and transportation, excise duty, sales tax, Octroi, import 

duty etc, plus 10%. The decision on the actual cost given by the Employer shall be final 

and binding on the Contractor. 

14. Cutting of water proofing membrane 

Page 169 of 174



NRDA 

14.1 No walls terraces shall be cut for making and opening after waterproofing has been done 

without written approval of Site Engineer/ Architects. Cutting of water proofing 

membrane shall be done very carefully so as other portion of water proofing is not 

damaged. On completion of work at such place the water proofing membrane shall be 

made good and ensured that the opening/ cutting is made fully waterproof as per 

specifications and details of waterproofing approved by Architects. 

15. Cutting of structural members 

15.1 No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the 


16. Materials supplied by employer 

16.1 The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Employer conform to the 

specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought 

to the notice of the Site Engineer. 

17. Materials 

17.1 Unless otherwise specified and expressly approved in writing by the Employer, only 

materials of makes and specification as mentioned in the list of approved makes attached 

with the specifications shall be used 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 

2. Pipes 

a) All pipes within and outside the building in exposed location and shafts including 

connections buried under floor shall be MS pipes as follows” 

ii) Pipes upto 80 mm dia - IS1239, Heavy class. 

3. Pipe Fittings 

Page 170 of 174



NRDA 

c) Pipe fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc. and all such connecting 

devices that are need to complete the piping work in its totality. 

d) Screwed fittings shall be approved type malleable with reinforced ring on all edges of the 

fitting suitable for screwed joints. 

e) Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm and below. 

4. Pipe Jointing: 

3.1 Screwed jointing 

Joints between black steel pipes and fittings up to 50 mm dia shall be metal to metal 

thread joints with teflon tape/sut safeda suitable for pipe joints. Joints shall not be 

welded. 

3.2 Welded 

Joints between MS pipes (above 50mm dia) and fittings shall be made with pipes and 

fittings having V groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved 

manner. 

3.3 Flanged 

3.4 Unions 

Flanged joints shall be provided on : 

a) Straight runs not exceeding 25-30 m on pipelines of 65mm dia and above and as 

directed by Project Manager. 

b) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pump, connections with other types of 

pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and required as good for engineering 

practice. 

c) Flanged shall be as per Table E of IS specification with appropriate number of GI nuts 

and bolts, 3mm neoprene gasket complete as per relevant specifications 

Provide approved type of unions on pipelines 50mm dia and below in similar places as 

specified for flanges. 

9. Gun Metal valves 

Valves of 50 mm dia and below shall be heavy duty gunmetal full way valves or globe 

valves conforming to IS 778 class II with female screwed ends. 

Page 171 of 174



NRDA 

10. Cast Iron butterfly Valves. 

All valves 65 mm dia and above shall be CI butter fly valves of class PN 1.6 conforming to IS 

5312 with CI body, butyl rubber seat and teflon seal. 

11. Non-return Valve 

Non-return valves shall be CI double flanged with CI body and Gun metal internal parts 

conforming to IS 5312. 

11. Hose reel 

Hose reel drum shall be fabricated from 16SWG CRCA sheets well painted with red colour 

stove enameled paint. Hose reel drum shall be provided with 36 kg/sqcm bursting 

pressure 20 mm dia nominal bore high pressure 36.5 m long rubber tube, shut-off nozzle. 

Hose reel shall be connected directly to the wet riser. Hose reel shall conform to IS 884. 

12. Fire Hose cabinet 

Hose cabinet shall be fabricated from 16 SWG MS powder coated sheet of fully welded 

construction with hinged double door partially glazed with locking arrangement, stove 

enameled fire red paint with “FIRE HOSE ” written on it prominently. 

13. Pipe protection 

c) All pipes above ground and in exposed location shall be painted with one coat of red 

oxide primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of red colour. 

d) Where specified, pipes buried in floors or below ground shall be protected against 

corrosion by the application of two coats of black Japan paint and wrapping with 

hessian cloth as specified in schedule of quantities. 

15. Pipe support 

14.1 All pipe clamps and supports shall be galvanised steel. When fabricated from MS steel 

sections, the support shall be factory galvanised before use at site. 

14.2 Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fasteners of approved make and 

design. The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanised nuts and bolts. 

The size/diameter of the anchor fasteners and the clamp shall be suitable to carry the 

weight of water filled pipe and dead weight normally encountered. 

15. Testing 

Page 172 of 174



NRDA 

15.1 All piping in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 14 Kg/sqcm without 

drop in pressure for atleast for 10 hours. 

15.2 Rectify all leakages, make adjustment and retest as required and directed. 

16. Measurement 

16.3 MS pipes shall be measured per linear meter of the finished length and shall include all 

fittings, flanges, welding, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers, anchor fasteners, 

painting and testing complete in all respect. 

16.4 Butterfly valves, check valves, air vessel, fire hydrants, hose reels, hose boxes, fire 

extinguishers, fire brigade connections are measured by numbers and shall include all 

items necessary and required for fixing and as given in the specifications and schedule of 

quantities. 

Page 173 of 174



NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

S ection-III 

Technical S pecification of Works 

P art 4- Hvac Works 



Page 1 of 74



NRDA 

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR HVAC WORK 

1(a) The definition of terms used in these specifications shall be in accordance with IS: 3615. 

1(b) 

1(c) 

1(d) 

1(e) 

Site Information 

The tenderer should, in his own interest, visit the site and familiarize with the site conditions 

before tendering. For any clarification, tenderer may discuss with the Consultant / customer. 

Heat Load Calculations and Equipment Selection 

i) The tenderer should give detailed heat load calculations wherever required separately 

for all the seasons in which, the specified conditions are to be maintained. 

ii) 

The equipment selection shall be made on the basis of the above heat load calculations 

wherever required. 

CONFORMITY WITH STATUTORY ACTS, RULES, STANDARDS AND CODES 

i) All components shall conform to relevant Indian Standard Specifications, wherever 

existing, amended to date. 

ii) 

All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Indian 

Electricity Act, 2003 and Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 amended to date. 

SAFETY CODES AND LABOUR REGULATIONS 

i) In respect of all labour employed directly or indirectly on the work for the performance 

of the air conditioning contractor’s part of work, the contractor at his own expense, will 

arrange for the safety provisions as per the statutory provisions, B.I.S. recommendations, 

factory act, workman’s compensation act, instructions issued from time to time. Failure 

to provide such safety requirements would make the tenderer liable for penalty for each 

violation. In addition the customer, shall be at liberty to make arrangements and provide 

facilities as aforesaid and recover the cost from the contractor. 

iii) 

The contractor shall provide necessary barriers, warning signals and other safety 

measures while laying pipelines, ducts cables etc. or wherever necessary so as to avoid 

accident. He shall also indemnify OWNER against claims for compensation arising out of 

negligence in this respect. Contractor shall be liable, in accordance with the Indian Law 

and Regulations for any accident occurring due to any cause. The Owner shall not be 

responsible for any accident occurred or damage incurred or claims arising there from 

during the execution of work. The contractor shall also provide all insurance including 

third party insurance as may be necessary to cover the risk. No extra payment would be 

made to the contractor due to the above provisions thereof. 

1(f) 

WORKS TO BE ARRANGED BY THE OWNER 

Unless otherwise specified in the tender documents, the following works shall be 

arranged by the Owner: 



Page 2 of 74



NRDA 

i) Space for accommodating all the equipment and components involved in the work, 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

iv) 

False ceiling and/or return air enclosure excluding return air duct wherever provided as 

required. 

Make up water tank for condenser water, 

Power supply, Water supply and Drain points as per para 1(h). 

Masonry ducts within and outside the building for carrying pipe lines and cables 

wherever specified. 

v) Air-tight fire doors with minimum one hour fire rating for Air Handling unit rooms, fan 

rooms and other equipment rooms. 

vi) 

vii) 

viii) 

ix) 

Water proofing of floors of AHU rooms and fan rooms. 

Under deck insulation of top floor slab. 

Providing 15 amps power outlet within 2 meter reach of each single phase equipment at 

locations called for on air conditioning contractor’s shop drawings. 

Providing wiring and earthing for sump pumps with pumps in plant room. 

x) Providing soft makeup water at Cooling tower, expansion tank, humidifiers and AHU & 

plant room. 

xi) 

Providing sump pumps and necessary piping for drainage of AHU room at each level and 

other machine rooms located below ground level. 

xii) 

xiii) 

xiv) 

xv) 

xvi) 

xvii) 

Disposal of condensate drain from fan coil units beyond the condensate drain riser. 

Foundations for equipments Support columns and beams for cooling towers, 

Excavation and refilling of trenches in soil wherever the pipes are to be laid directly in 

ground, including necessary base treatment and supports. 

Sealing of all floor slab / wall openings for pipes and cables, from fire safety point of 

view, after laying of the same. 

Making openings in the walls/ floors/ slabs or modification in the existing openings 

wherever provided for carrying pipe line, ducts, cables etc. 

Providing wooden/ metallic frames for fixing grills/ diffusers 

1(g) 

WORKS TO BE DONE BY THE CONTRACTOR 

Unless otherwise mentioned in the tender documents, the following works shall be done by the 

contractor and therefore, their cost shall be deemed to be included in their tendered costwhether 

specifically indicated in the schedule of work or not: - 

i) Foundation bolts and vibration isolation spring/pads, 

ii) 

Suspenders, brackets and floor/ wall supports for suspending / supporting ducts and 

pipes, 



Page 3 of 74



NRDA 

iv) 

Suspenders and/or cable trays for laying the cables, 

v) Painting of all exposed metal surfaces of equipments and components with appropriate 

colour. 

1(h) 

1(i) 

POWER SUPPLY, WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE 

i) Unless otherwise specified, 3 phase, 415 volts, 50 Hz power supply shall be provided by 

the Owner free of charge to the contractor at one point for installation at site. 

Termination switchgear however, shall be provided by the contractor. Further extension 

if required shall be done by the contractor. 

ii) 

iii) 

The power supply for testing and commissioning of the complete installation shall be 

made available free of charge to the contractor. The termination of feeder in the main 

incomer unit shall be the responsibility of the contractor and nothing extra shall be paid 

on this account. Further power distribution to the various equipments shall be done by 

the contractor. 

The contractor shall not use the power supply for any other purpose than that for which 

it is intended for. No major fabrication work shall be done at site. Power shall be used 

only for welding / cutting works. The power supply shall be disconnected in case of such 

default and the contractor shall then have to arrange the required power supply at his 

cost. 

v) Wherever there is a possibility of lower supply voltage, which does not allow motors to 

be operated, necessary voltage correction devices like HT voltage regulator/ ON- Load 

tap changer/ Servo Stabilizer etc may be provided to ensure proper voltage. 

c) Power supply shall also be backed by suitable standby DG set. It is necessary to provide 

stand by supply to fan motors of all AHUs, to ensure air circulation in air conditioning 

areas when the AC plant is not working due to non availability of normal electrical 

supply. Additionally where the air conditioning is a functional/ critical requirement such 

as hospitals, computer centers, labs etc, provision shall be made by the Owner for 

operation of suitable number of chilling units on standby power supply. 

WATER SUPPLY 

i) Water supply shall be made available to the contractor free of charge at only one point 

for installation. Further extension if required shall be done by the contractor. 

ii) 

iii) 

Water shall be made available by the Owner free of charge in makeup water tank near 

the cooling tower, AC plant room, AHU room, expansion tank, hot water generator, air 

washer, etc. as required for testing and commissioning. Further connection from makeup 

water tank to cooling tower shall be carried out by the contractor and shall be separately 

measured & paid for as per contract. 

Water analysis should be obtained of the water available at site and if required water 

softening plant may be provided. 



Page 4 of 74



NRDA 

1(j) 

DRAINAGE 

i) Drain traps in A.C. plant room, AHU room, hot water generator and near cooling tower 

shall be arranged by customer. 

ii) 

iii) 

All drainage arrangements from the drain traps in the A.C. plant room, AHU room, air 

washer room, hot water generator room etc to the drain line shall be arranged by 

customer as required. 

Piping Connections from the equipment to the drain trap including providing valves at 

the drain points shall be done by the contractor. These items of work shall be separately 

measured and paid as per contract. 

1(k) 

MACHINERY FOR ERECTION 

All tools and tackles required for unloading / handling of equipments and materials at site, their 

assembly, erection, testing and commissioning shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 

1(l) 

1(m) 

COMPLETENESS OF THE TENDER, SUBMISSION OF PROGRAMME, APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS 

AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK 

i) Completeness of the tender 

All sundry equipments, fittings, assemblies, accessories, hardware items, foundation 

bolts, supports, termination lugs for electrical connections, cable glands, junction boxes 

and all other items which are useful and necessary for proper assembly and efficient 

working of the various equipments and components of the work shall be deemed to 

have been included in the tender, irrespective of the fact whether such items are 

specifically mentioned in the tender or not. 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

Submission of program 

Within fifteen days from the date of receipt of the letter of acceptance, the successful 

tenderer shall submit his program for submission of drawings, supply of equipment, 

installation, testing, commissioning and handing over of the installation to the 

Consultant / customer. This program shall be framed keeping in view the building 

progress. Items like ducting, piping etc. that directly affect the building progress shall be 

given priority. 

Submission of Drawings 

The contractor shall submit the drawings to the consultant / architect for approval 

before start of work. 

Commencement of Work 

The contractor shall commence work as soon as the drawings submitted by him are 

approved. 

DISPATCH OF MATERIALS TO SITE AND THEIR SAFE CUSTODY 



Page 5 of 74



NRDA 

1(n) 

1(o) 

1(p) 

The contractor shall dispatch materials to site in consultation with the customer / consultant / 

architect. Suitable lockable storage accommodation shall be made available free of charge 

temporarily. Watch & ward however, shall be the responsibility of contractor. Program of 

dispatch of material shall be framed keeping in view the building progress. Safe custody of all 

machinery and equipment supplied by the contractor shall be the responsibility of the contractor 

till final taking over by the Owner. 

CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES 

The contractor shall co-ordinate with all other agencies involved in the work so that the work of 

other agencies is not hampered due to delay in his work. Ducting, piping, cabling or any other 

work, which directly affect the progress of building work, shall be given priority. 

QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 

i) The components of the installation shall be of such design so as to satisfactorily function 

under all conditions of operation. 

ii) 

iii) 

The entire work of manufacture/fabrication, assembly and installation shall conform to 

sound engineering practice. The entire installation shall be such as to cause minimum 

transmission of noise and vibration to the building structure. 

All equipments and materials to be used in work shall be manufactured in factories of 

good repute having excellent track record of quality manufacturing, performance and 

proper after sales service. 

CARE OF THE BUILDING 

Care shall be taken by the contractor during execution of the work to avoid damage to the 

building. He shall be responsible for repairing all such damages and restoring the same to the 

original finish at his cost. He shall also remove all unwanted and waste materials arising out of 

the installation from the site of work from time to time. 



Page 6 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

1 General: These special conditions are intended to amplify the General Conditions of Contract, 

and shall be read in conjunction with the same. For any discrepancies between the General 

Conditions and these Special Conditions, the more stringent shall apply. Notwithstanding the 

sub-division of the documents into separate sections and volumes, every part shall be deemed 

to be supplementary to and complementary of every other part of each shall be read with and 

into the contract so far as it may be practicable to do so Where any portion of the general 

conditions of contract is repugnant to or at variance with any provision of the special conditions 

of contract, then unless a different intention appears, the provision(s) of special condition of 

contract shall be deemed to override the provision(s) of general conditions of contract only to 

the extent that such repugnance or variance cannot be reconciled with the general conditions of 

contract and shall be to the extent of such repugnance of variations, prevail; it being 

understood that the provisions of general conditions of contract shall otherwise prevail. 

2. Scope of Work: The general character and the scope of work to be carried out under this 

contract are illustrated in Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities. The Contractor 

shall carry out and complete the said work under this contract in every respect in conformity 

with the contract documents and with the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Consultant 

/ customer/Architect/Consultant. The contractor shall furnish all labour, materials and 

equipment (except those to be supplied by the Owner) as listed under Schedule of Quantities 

and specified otherwise, transportation and incidental necessary for supply, installation, testing 

and commissioning of the complete air conditioning system as described in the Specifications 

and as shown on the drawings. This also includes any material, equipment, appliances and 

incidental work not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings / Documents as 

being furnished or installed, but which are necessary and customary to be performed under this 

contract. The central Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) system shall comprise of 

following: 

a. VRV System 

b. Aircooling system 

c. Indoor units 

d. Motor control centers, Wiring and earthing from MCC panels to various air conditioning 

equipment, control wiring and interlocking. 

e. Refrigerant & condensate drain piping inclusive of all valves and fittings. 

f. Sheet metal ducts inclusive of external insulation, acoustic lining, canvas connections, 

volume control dampers and smoke dampers as required, Supply and return air 

registers and diffusers. 



Page 7 of 74



NRDA 

g. Insulation of pipes, ducts. 

h. Automatic controls and instruments. 

i. Vibration isolators for all HVAC equipment. 

j. Wiring and earthing from MCC panels to various refrigeration, air conditioning and 

mechanical ventilation equipment, control wiring and interlocking. 

k. Balancing, testing and commissioning of the entire HVAC and mechanical ventilation 

installation. 

l. Test reports, list of recommended spares, as-installed drawings, operation and 

maintenance manual for the entire HVAC installation. 

m. Training of Customer’s Staff. 

3. Associated Civil Works: Following civil works associated with HVAC installation are excluded 

from the scope of this contract. These shall be executed by other agencies in accordance with 

approved shop drawings of and under direct supervision of the air conditioning contractor. 

• Air-tight fire doors with minimum one hour fire rating for Air Handling unit rooms, fan 

rooms and other equipment rooms. 

• Water proofing of floors of AHU rooms and fan rooms. 

• Supply and fixing of G.I. / wooden frame for mounting of grilles in masonry walls. 

• Supply and fixing of GSS frame for mounting of grilles / diffusers in false ceiling / boxing. 

• Cutting holes, chases and the like through all types of non structural walls, and finishing for 

all services crossings, including sealing, frame work, fire proofing, providing sleeves, cover 

plates, making good structure and finishes to an approved standard. 

• Foundations for all HVAC equipment. 

4. Associated Services Works 

4.1 All associated ELECTRICAL WORKS listed below are excluded from the scope of this contract. 

These shall be installed by other agencies in accordance with approved shop drawings of, and 

under direct supervision of the air conditioning contractor. 

• Providing power supply with earthing at the incoming of control panel in A/C plant room. 

• Providing power supply and earthing at the incoming MCCB in each air handling unit control 

panel. 

• Providing power and earthing at the incoming MCCB in each centrifugal fan panel and pump 

panel at locations called for on air conditioning Contractor’s shop drawings. 



Page 8 of 74



NRDA 

• Providing 15 amps power outlet within 2 meter reach of each fan coil unit at locations called 

for on air conditioning Contractor’s shop drawings. 

• Providing 15 amps power outlet within 2 meter reach of each single phase propeller fan at 

locations called for on air conditioning contractor’s shop drawings. 

• Providing wiring and earthing for sump pumps in air conditioning plant room. 

4.2 All associated PLUMBING WORKS listed below are excluded from the scope of this contract. 

These shall be installed by other agencies, in accordance with approved shop drawings of, and 

under direct supervision, of the air conditioning contractor. 

• Providing soft makeup water at cooling tower. 

• Providing sump pumps and necessary piping for drainage of plant room and other machine 

rooms located below ground level. 

• Providing floor drains in air handling unit rooms. 

• Disposal of condensate drain from AHU / fan coil units beyond the condensate drain riser. 

5. Project Execution and Management: The Contractor shall ensure that senior planning and 

erection personnel from his organisation are assigned exclusively for this project. They shall 

have minimum 3 years experience in this type of installation. The Contractor shall appoint one 

Project manager. He shall be assisted on full time basis by erection engineers & supervisors. The 

entire staff shall be posted at site on full time basis. 

The project management shall be through modern technique. The Contractor’s office at site 

shall be fully equipped with fax, modem, computers, plotter etc. Erection engineer and 

supervisors shall be provided with mobile communication system so that they can always be 

reached. 

For quality control & monitoring of workmanship, contractor shall assign at least one full-time 

engineer with minimum 5 years relevant experience, who would be exclusively responsible for 

ensuring strict quality control, adherence to specifications and ensuring top class workmanship 

for the air conditioning installation. 

The Contractor shall arrange to have mechanised & modern facilities of transporting material to 

place of installation for speedy execution of work. 

6. Performance Guarantee: The contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the 

Drawings, Specifications, Schedule of Quantities and other documents forming part of the 

Contract. 

The contractor shall be fully responsible for the performance of the selected equipment 

(installed by him) at the specified parameters and for the efficiency of the installation to deliver 

the required end result. 

The contractor shall guarantee that the HVAC system as installed shall maintain the inside 

conditions in the air-conditioned spaces as described under “Basis of Design” in the 




Page 9 of 74



NRDA 

Complete set of drawings is available in the Owner / Architect / Consultant office and reference 

may be made to same for any details or information. The contractor shall also guarantee that 

the performance of various equipment individually, shall not be less than the quoted capacity; 

also actual power consumption shall not exceed the quoted rating, during testing and 

commissioning, handing over and guarantee period. 

7. Bye-Laws and Regulations: The installation shall be in conformity with the Bye-laws, Regulations 

and Standards of the local authorities concerned, in so far as these become applicable to the 

installation. But if these Specifications and Drawings call for a higher standard of materials and / 

or workmanship than those required by any of the above regulations and standards, then these 

Specifications and Drawings shall take precedence over the said regulations and standards. 

However, if the Drawings and specifications require something which violates the Bye-laws and 

Regulations, then the Bye-laws and Regulations shall govern the requirement of this installation. 

8. Fees and Permits: The contractor shall obtain all permits / licenses and pay for any and all fees 

required for the inspection, approval and commissioning of their installation. 

9. Drawings: The HVAC Drawings issued with tenders, are diagrammatic only and indicate 

arrangement of various systems and the extent of work covered in the contract. These Drawings 

indicate the points of supply and of termination of services and broadly suggest the routes to be 

followed. Under no circumstances shall dimensions be scaled from these Drawings. The interiors 

drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of equipment, controls, grilles and 

diffusers. The contractor shall follow the tender drawings in preparation of his shop drawings, 

and for subsequent installation work. He shall check the drawings of other trades to verify 

spaces in which his work will be installed. Maximum headroom and space conditions shall be 

maintained at all points. Where headroom appears inadequate, the contractor shall notify the 

Owner / Architect / Consultant before proceeding with the installation. In case installation is 

carried out without notifying, the work shall be rejected and contractor shall rectify the same at 

his own cost. The contractor shall examine all interior, structural, plumbing, and electrical and 

other services drawings and check the as-built works before starting the work report to the 

Owner / Architect / Consultant any discrepancies and obtain clarification. Any changes found 

essential to coordinate installation of his work with other services and trades, shall be made 

with prior approval of the Owner / Architect / consultant without additional cost to the Owner. 

The data given in the Drawings and Specifications is as exact as could be procured, but its 

accuracy is not guaranteed. 

10 Technical Data: Each tenderer shall submit along with his tender, the technical data for all items. 

Failure to furnish complete technical data with tenders may result in summary rejection of the 

tender. 

11. Shop Drawings: 

11.1 All the shop drawings shall be prepared on computer through AutoCAD System based on 

Drawings, site measurements and Interior Designer’s Drawings. All heat load calculations shall 

be done using latest software. Within one week of the award of the contract, contractor shall 



Page 10 of 74



NRDA 

furnish, for the approval of the Owner / Architect / Consultant, two sets of detailed shop 

drawings of all equipment and materials including layouts for Plant room, AHU rooms, fan 

rooms, fan coil units, ventilation fans; CFD analysis report for jet fans detailed ducting drawings 

showing exact location of supports, flanges, bends, tee connections, reducers, guide vanes, 

silencers, distribution grids, volume control dampers, collars, grilles, diffusers; detailed piping 

drawings showing exact location and type of supports, valves, fittings etc; acoustic lining and 

external insulation details for ducts, pipe insulation etc; electrical panels inside / outside views, 

power and control wiring schematics, cable trays, supports and terminations. These shop 

drawings shall contain all information required to complete the Project as per specifications and 

as required by the Owner / Architect / consultant. These Drawings shall contain details of 

construction, size, arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics and capacity 

of all items of equipment, also the details of all related items of work by other contractors. Each 

shop drawing shall contain tabulation of all measurable items of equipment / materials / works 

and progressive cumulative totals from other related drawings to arrive at a variation-inquantity 

statement at the completion of all shop drawings. Minimum 6 sets of drawings shall be 

submitted after final approval along with softcopy. 

Each item of equipment / material proposed shall be a standard catalogue product of an 

established manufacturer strictly from the manufacturers given in list of makes and quoted by 

the tenderer in technical data part. 

When the Owner / Architect / Consultant makes any amendments in the above drawings, the 

contractor shall supply two fresh sets of drawings with the amendments duly incorporated 

alongwith check prints, for approval. The contractor shall submit further six sets of shop 

drawings to the Owner / Architect / Consultant for the exclusive use by the Owner / Architect / 

Consultant and all other agencies. No material or equipment may be delivered or installed at the 

job site until the contractor has in his possession, the approved shop drawing for the particular 

material / equipment / installation. 

11.2 Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval four weeks in advance of planned delivery and 

installation of any material to allow Owner / Architect / Consultant ample time for scrutiny. No 

claims for extension of time shall be entertained because of any delay in the work due to his 

failure to produce shop drawings at the right time, in accordance with the approved program. 

11.3 Manufacturers drawings, catalogues, pamphlets and other documents submitted for approval 

shall be in four sets. Each item in each set shall be properly labeled, indicating the specific 

services for which material or equipment is to be used, giving reference to the governing section 

and clause number and clearly identifying in ink the items and the operating characteristics. 

Data of general nature shall not be accepted. 

11.4 Samples of all materials like grilles, diffusers, controls, insulation, pre-moulded pipe section, 

control wires etc shall be submitted to the Owner / Architect / Consultant prior to procurement. 

These will be submitted in two sets for approval and retention by Owner / Architect / Consultant 

and shall be kept in their site office for reference and verification till the completion of the 

Project. Wherever directed a mockup or sample installation shall be carried out for approval 

before proceeding for further installation. 



Page 11 of 74



NRDA 

11.5 Approval of shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or of 

building dimensions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that the 

drawings supersede the contract requirements, nor does it in any way relieve the contractor of 

the responsibility or requirement to furnish material and perform work as required by the 

contract. 

11.6 Where the contractor proposes to use an item of equipment, other than that specified or 

detailed on the drawings, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundation, 

piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical layouts; all such re-design, and all 

new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the contractor at his own 

expense and gotten approved by the Owner / Architect / Consultant. Any delay on such account 

shall be at the cost of and consequence of the Contractor. 

Where the work of the contractor has to be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with 

work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory 

adjustment. If so directed by the Owner/Architect/Consultant, the contractor shall prepare 

composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale, not less than 1:100, clearly 

showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the Contractor 

installs his work before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with 

work of other trades, he shall make all the necessary changes without extra cost to the Owner. 

11.8 Within two weeks of approval of all the relevant shop drawings, the contractor shall submit four 

copies of a comprehensive variation in quantity statement, and itemized price list of 

recommended (by manufacturers) imported and local spare parts and tools, covering all 

equipment and materials in this contract. The Owner / Architect / Consultant shall make 

recommendation for acceptance of anticipated variation in contract amounts. 

12. Quiet Operation and Vibration Isolation: All equipment shall operate under all conditions 

of load without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Owner / 

Architect / Consultant. In case of rotating machinery sound or vibration noticeable outside the 

room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, shall be considered 

objectionable. Such conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense. The 

contractor shall guarantee that the equipment installed shall maintain the specified NC levels. 

13. Accessibility: The Contractor shall verify the sufficiency of the size of the shaft openings, 

clearances in cavity walls and suspended ceilings for proper installation of his ducting and 

piping. His failure to communicate insufficiency of any of the above, shall constitute his 

acceptance of sufficiency of the same. The Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be 

serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. The exact location and size of all 

access panels, required for each concealed control damper, valve or other devices requiring 

attendance, shall be finalized and communicated in sufficient time, to be provided in the normal 

course of work. Failing this, the Contractor shall make all the necessary repairs and changes at 

his own expense. Access panel shall be standardised for each piece of equipment / device / 

accessory and shall be clearly marked. 



Page 12 of 74



NRDA 

14. Materials and Equipment: All materials and equipment shall conform to the relevant Indian 

Standards and shall be of the approved make and design. Makes shall be strictly in conformity 

with list of approved manufacturers as per attached list. 

15. Manufacturers Instructions: Where manufacturer has furnished specific instructions, relating to 

the material and equipment used in this project, covering points not specifically mentioned in 

these documents, such instructions shall be followed in all cases. 

16. Electrical Installation: The electrical work related to air conditioning services, shall be carried out 

in full knowledge of, and with the complete coordination of the contractor. The electrical 

installation shall be in total conformity with the control wiring drawings prepared by the 

contractor and approved by the Owner/Consultant. All air conditioning equipment shall be 

connected and tested in the presence of an authorized representative of the contractor. The 

system shall be commissioned only after the contractor has certified in writing that the electrical 

installation work for air cooling services has been thoroughly checked, tested and found to be 

totally satisfactory and in full conformity with the contract Drawings, Specifications and 

manufacturer’s instructions. It is to be clearly understood that the final responsibility for the 

sufficiency, adequacy and conformity to the contract requirements, of the electrical installation 

work for air conditioning services, lies solely with the contractor. 

17. Completion Certificate: On completion of the Electrical installation for air conditioning, a 

certificate shall be furnished by the contractor, counter signed by the licensed supervisor, under 

whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in the 

prescribed form as required by the local authority. 

The contractor shall be responsible for getting the entire electrical installation for air 

conditioning system duly approved by the local authorities concerned, and shall bear expenses if 

any, in connection with the same. 

18. Balancing, Testing And Commissioning : Balancing of all air and water systems and all tests as 

called for the Specifications shall be carried out by the contractor through a specialist group, in 

accordance with the Specifications and ASHRAE Guide lines and Standards. Performance test 

shall consist of three days of 10 hour each operation of system for each season. Cost of 

performance witness test of major equipment such as chillers, at factory with two personnel 

from Owners / Consultant shall be included. The results for summer, monsoon and winter air 

conditioning in quadruplicate shall be submitted for scrutiny. Four copies of the certified 

manufacturer performance curves for each piece of equipment, high lighting operational 

parameters for the project, shall be submitted along with the test certificates. Contractor shall 

also provide four copies of record of all safety and automatic control settings for the entire 

installation. The installation shall be tested again after removal of defects and shall be 

commissioned only after approval by the Owner / Architect / Consultant. All tests shall be 

carried out in the presence of the representatives of the Owner / Architect / Consultant. 

19. As Built Drawings: Contractor shall submit as built drawings as and when work in all respects is 

completed in a particular area. These drawings shall be submitted in the form of two sets of 

CD’s and four portfolios (300 x 450 mm) each containing complete set of drawings on approved 



Page 13 of 74



NRDA 

scale indicating the work as - installed. These drawings shall clearly indicate complete plant 

room layouts, ducting and piping layouts, location of wiring and sequencing of automatic 

controls, location of all concealed piping, valves, controls, dampers, wiring and other services. 

Each portfolio shall also contain consolidated control diagrams and technical literature on all 

controls. The contractor shall frame under glass, in the air-conditioning plant room, one set of 

these consolidated control diagrams. 

20. Operating Instruction & Maintenance Manual: Upon completion and commissioning of system 

the contractor shall submit a draft copy of comprehensive operating instructions, maintenance 

schedule and log sheets for all systems and equipment included in this contract. This shall be 

supplementary to manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manuals. Upon approval of the 

draft, the contractor shall submit four (4) complete bound sets of typewritten operating 

instructions and maintenance manuals; one each for retention by Consultant and Owner / 

Architect / Consultant and two for Owners Operating Personnel. These manuals shall also 

include basis of design, detailed technical data for each piece of equipment as installed, spare 

parts manual and recommended spares for 4 year period of maintenance of each equipment. 

21. On Site Training: Upon completion of all work and all tests, the Contractor shall furnish 

necessary operators, labor and helpers for operating the entire installation for a period of 

fifteen (15) working days of ten (10) hours each, to enable the Owner’s staff to get aquatinted 

with the operation of the system. During this period, the contractor shall train the Owner’s 

personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment installed. 

22. Maintenance during Defects Liability Period 

22.1 Complaints: The Contractor shall receive calls for any and all problems experienced in the 

operation of the system under this contract, attend to these within 10 hours of receiving the 

complaints and shall take steps to immediately correct any deficiencies that may exist. 

22.2 Repairs: All equipment that requires repairing shall be immediately serviced and repaired. Since 

the period of Mechanical Maintenance runs concurrently with the defects liability period, all 

replacement parts and labour shall be supplied promptly free-of-charge to the Owner. 

23. Uptime Guarantee: The contractor shall guarantee for the installed system an uptime of 98%. In 

case of shortfall in any month during the defects liability period, the Defects Liability period shall 

get extended by a month for every month having shortfall. In case of shortfall beyond the 

defects liability period, the contract for Operation and Maintenance shall get extended by a 

month for every month having the shortfall and no reimbursement shall be made for the 

extended period. 

The Contractor shall provide log in the form of CD and bound printed comprehensive log book 

containing tables for daily record of all temperatures, pressures, humidity, and power 

consumption, starting and stopping times for various equipment, daily services rendered for the 

system alarms, maintenance and record of unusual observations etc. Contractor shall also 

submit preventive maintenance schedule. 



Page 14 of 74



NRDA 

Each tenderer shall submit along with the tender, a detailed operation assistance proposal for 

the Owner / Architect / Consultants review. This shall include the type of service planned to be 

offered during Defects Liability Period and beyond. The operation assistance proposal shall give 

the details of the proposed monthly reports to the Management. 

The tenderer shall include a list of other projects where such an Operation Assistance has been 

provided. 

24. Partial Ordering: Owner through the Owner/Architect/Consultant reserves the right to order 

equipment and material from any and all alternates, and /or to order high side and / or low side 

equipment and materials or parts thereof from one or more tenderer. 

25. Soft Water and Power Requirement: The contractor shall submit with their tender, their 

requirement of soft make-up water and power at each of their equipment / system wise / floor 

wise / section wise. 

26 The following documents shall generally constitute the contract agreement: 

a) Invitation to tenders. 

b) Special conditions of contract, tender documents and drawings. 

c) Complete correspondence with the successful bidder and owner shall be consolidated in 

one letter by the bidder. 

d) Any other document necessary for completion of contract agreement. 

27. Copy of the latest income tax clearance certificate must be submitted alongwith the offer. 

28. Storage at site: Plant room/ AHU rooms, if available, can be used by the contractor for storage 

of equipments/ materials brought to site for execution of the work. However, watch and ward 

of the same shall be at contractor’s risk. 



Page 15 of 74



NRDA 

DESIGN PARAMETRS 

Given blow are some design parameters which should be followed in addition to those given in various 

sections of technical specifications enclosed 

DUCTING WORK 

a) Method of Duct Design : Equal friction method / constant 

friction method 

b) Maximum Air Velocity in supply air duct : 450.00 

c) Maximum Air Velocity in return air duct : 305.00 

d) Friction loss in duct (max) MM wg in 100 Mt run : 10 

e) Maximum Velocity at supply air grill outlet MPM : 150.00 

INSULATION 

Maximum temperature rise in the supply air duct from Air Handlers outlet to farthest outlet 1.1Deg C 



Page 16 of 74



NRDA 

APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES 

TERMS AND DEFINATIONS 

The following terms have been used in the tender specifications and drawings etc. 

ISI 

Bureau of Indian standards 

ASHRAE American society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers 

ASME 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

BS 

British Standard 

CMH 

Cubic Meter per hour 

USGPM US gallons per Minute 

RPM 

Rotations per minute 

BTU/Hr. 

British Thermal unit per hour 

Kcal/ Hr Kilo calories per hour 

SAG 

Supply air Grill 

RAG 

Return Air Grill 

FD 

Fire damper 

FAD 

Fresh air damper 

DP 

Drain Point 

SAD 

Supply air diffuser 

RAD 

Return air Diffuser. 

LIST OF BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS CODES 

Following relevant IS codes shall apply read in concurrence with there latest amendments. 

IS:226-1975 

IS:277-1992 

IS:325-1978 

IS:554 – 1975 

IS:655-1963 

IS 659-1964 (1991) 

IS:660-1963 (1991) 

IS:778-1984 

IS:780-1984 

IS:800-1984 

IS:808-1964 

IS:816-1969 

IS:823-1964 

IS:1239-1979 (Part 1) 

Specification for structural steel 

Specification for galvanised sheet (plain and corrugated) 

Specification for three phase induction motors 

Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are required on the 

threads. 

Specification for metal duct 

Safety code for air-conditioning (resived) 

Safety code for mechanical refrigeration 

Specification for copper alloy and gate , globe & check valves for water works 

Specification for sluice valves for water works (50 to 300 mm size) 

Code of practice for general construction in steel 

Specification for rolled steel beam channel and angle section 

Code of practice for metal arc welding for general purpose in mild steel 

Code of procedure for manual metal arc welding of mild steel 

MS tubes,tubulars and other wrought steel fittings 



Page 17 of 74



NRDA 

1990 

IS:1239-(Part 2) –1992 MS tubes tubulars and other wrought steel fittings 

IS:1536 - 1976 Flanges configuration 

IS:1554-(Part 1) –1976 Specs for PVC insulated (heavy duty electrical cables) 

IS:2253-1974 Designation for types of construction and mounting arrangement of rotating 

electric machine. 

IS:2312-1967 Specs for propeller type AC ventilating fans 

IS:2379 - 1963 Colour code for the identification of pipelines 

IS : 3103-1975 Code of practice for Industrial Ventilation 

IS 4064 - (Part -II) 1978 Specific requirements for the direct switching of individual motors. 

IS: 4736 - 1968 Hot-dip zinc coatings on steel tubes 

IS: 4894-1987 Test Code for Centrifugal Fan. 

IS : 7240-1981 Application & Finishing of thermal insulation material 

IS:8544 (Part-I to IV) 

1979 Starters 

IS:9224 (Part II) - 1979 HRC cartridge fuse links upto 650 volts. 

IS:3069-1965 Glossary of terms, symbols and unit relating to thermal insulation material 

IS:3346-1980 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity thermal I 

insulation materal ( two slab, guarded hot plate method) 

IS:3588-1966 Specification for electric axial flow fans 

IS:3589-1981 and 1991 Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (168.3 to 

2032 mm outside dia) 

IS:3724-1966 Specs for cartridge type heating elements (non embedded type) 

IS:4158-1967 Specs for solid embedded type electric heating elements 

IIS:4671-1984 Specs for expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purpose 

IS:4691-1984 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical machine 

IS:4722-1968 Specs for rotating electrical machine 

IS:4729-1968 Measurement and evaluation of vibration of rotating electrical machine. 

IS:4831-1968: Recommendation on units and symbols for Refrigeration 

IS:4894-1987 Specs for centrifugal fans 

IS:5111 -1993 Testing of Refrigerating compressors. 

IS:5512:(Part 1) –1984 Specs for swing check type (non return) for water works purposes. 

IS:6272-1971: Specs of industrial cooling fans 

IS: 6392-1971 Specs for steel pipe flanges 

IS:6168-1976 Code of practice for treatment of water for industrial cooling system 

IS:7616-1975 Method of testing panel type air filters for air conditioning and ventilation 

purposes 

IS;8623 1977 

Specs of factory built switch / control section. 

IS:8623(Part3) 1993: Specs for low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies 

IS: 8789- 1978 Values of performance characteristics for three phase induction motor 

IS:9137-1978 

Code for acceptable tests for centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps class C 



Page 18 of 74



NRDA 

IS:9338-1964 Specs for Cl screw down stop valves on stop and check valves for water works 

purpose 

IS-13947 (Part-1)1993 Specs for low voltage switchgear and control gear. 

In case of any revision in above BIS code the REVISED one shall only be applicable. 



Page 19 of 74



NRDA 

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

This chapter deals with the general mechanical requirements specifically applicable to HVAC. The 

additional requirement given in any chapter is in addition to the bare minimum stated in this chapter 

and shall be complied with. 

1 SUBMITTALS 

Under provisions of the NIT sample approval for all major items like grills, diffusers, valves, 

insulation, sheet etc is necessary before the commencement of the project. The products 

mentioned in the Approved list of manufacturers shall only be acceptable. In case of any 

alternate make is required to be used the same will have to be approved by the customer / 

engineer in charge with proper quality and rate justification as per the mode of approval 

mentioned in the list. Shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals 

of related Systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. Shop Drawings shall be based 

on the actual duct routes after the site survey, details of concrete pads and foundations for the 

various equipments, Layout of the AHU including dimensions of the room / boxing with 

inspection window dimensions, the foundations and the sizes and all necessary construction 

details required on site, location of the allied equipments and the requirements from other 

agencies, trench locations if any, Sump location and size, sleeve location if any, fresh air / 

exhaust air locations, location of wall mounted equipment (If any) and any structural inputs. 

2 BROCHURES 

Submit manufacturer’s product data and brochure including complete description of the item 

with illustrations, rating charts, accessories, dimensional data, capacities stated in the terms 

specified in the NIT and Performance curves, wherever applicable like fans and pumps. 

3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

Liaison / Approvals from the bodies mentioned below (or any other), if required shall be taken 

by the contractor on behalf of the client and at his own cost. BIS / Local Fire Authority / LOCAL 

CODES. 

4 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS 

• Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical. Co-ordination (final) shall be 

required with other trades prior to installation. Install all works as shown on the drawings, 

unless prevented by project conditions. 

• Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet the project conditions. 

Obtain permission from of engineer in charge before proceeding. 

• Place anchors, sleeves and supports prior to pouring concrete on installation of masonry 

works. 

• Keep roads and site clear of debris and scrap. 



Page 20 of 74



NRDA 

5 GENERAL INSTALLATION FEATURES 

• Piping / ducting installation requirements are specified in other section. The Drawings 

indicate the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, ducts and specialties. The 

following are specific connection requirements: 

• Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and maintenance. 

• Connect piping to all equipment with flanges enabling easy removal of the coil. 

• Connect condensate drain pans using drain pipe and extend to nearest floor drain. Construct 

deep trap connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. 

• Make final duct connections with flexible connections. 

• Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 

6 All shop drawing shall be prepared by the AC contractor after examining the architectural, 

interior and tender drawings. The tentative layout plans enclosed with the tender documents 

are only for guidance purposes only. 



Page 21 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTING & IDENTIFICATION 

1 Scope: The scope of this section comprises of identification of services for each piece of 

equipment 

2 Identification of Services: Pipe work and duct work shall be identified by colour bands 150 mm. 

wide or colour triangles of at least 150 mm. / side. The bands of triangles shall be applied at 

termination points, junctions, entries and exits of plant rooms, walls and ducts, and control 

points to readily identify the service, but spacing shall not exceed 4.0 metres. Pipe work 

Services: For pipe work services and its insulation the colours of the bands shall comply with BS. 

1710:1971. Basic colours for pipe line identification: 

Pipe Line Contents BS.4800 Colour Reference Colour. 

Water 12 D 45 Green 

Air 20 E 51 Blue 

Drainage 00 E 53 Black 

Colour code indicator bands shall be applied as colour bands over the basic identification colour 

in the various combinations as listed below:- 

Pipe Line Contents Colour Bands as per BS. 4800 

Water Services : 

Cooling 00 E 55 

Fresh / drinking 18 E 53 

Condensate 04 D 45/14 E 53 / 04 D 45 

Chilled 00 D 55/14 E 53 / 00 D 45 

Central Heating Services : 

Below 100 o C 18 E 55/04 D 45/18 E 53 

Cold Water Storage Tanks : 00 E 55/18 E 53/00 E 55 

Hot Water Supply 00 E 55/04 D 45/00 E 55 

Drainage and other fluids : 

Basic Colour only 

In addition to the colour bands specified above all pipe work shall be legibly marked with black 

or white letters to indicate the type of service and the direction of flow, identified as follows :- 

Medium Temperature Hot Water MTHW 

Low Temperature Hot Water LTHW 

Chilled Water 

CHW 

Condenser Water 

CONDW 



Page 22 of 74



NRDA 

Condensate 

CN 

Pipe shall have the letters F and R added to indicate flow and return respectively as well as 

directional arrows. Valve Labels and Charts: Each valve shall be provided with a label indicating 

the service being controlled, together with a reference number corresponding with that shown 

on the Valve Charts and “ as fitted” drawings. The labels shall be made from 3 ply (black / 

white/ black) Traffolyte material showing white letters and figures on a black background. 

Labels to be tied to each valve with chromium plated linked chain. A wall mounted, glass 

covered plan to the approval of the Engineer in charge shall be provided and displayed in each 

plant room showing the plant layout with pipe work, valve diagram and valve schedule 

indicating size, service, duty, etc. 

Duct Work Services: For Duct work services and its insulation the colours of the triangles shall 

comply with BS.1710: 1971. The size of the symbol will depend on the size of the duct and the 

viewing distance but the minimum size should not be less than 150 mm. length per side. One 

apex of the triangle shall point in the direction of airflow. 

Services Colour BS.4800Colour Reference 

Conditioned Air Red and Blue 04 E 53 / 18 E 53 

Fresh Air Green 14 E 53 

Exhaust / Extract / Recirculated Air Grey AA 0 09 

Foul Air Brown 06 C 39 

Dual Duct System Hot Supply Air Red 04 E 53 

Cold Supply Air Blue 18 E 53 

In addition to the colour triangles specified above all duct work shall be legibly marked with 

black or white letters to indicate the type of service, identified as follows :- 

Supply Air 

Return Air 

Fresh Air 

Exhaust Air 

S 

R 

F 

E 

The colour banding and triangles shall be manufactured from self adhesive cellulose tape, 

laminated with a layer of transparent ethyl cellulose tape. 



Page 23 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR NOISE CONTROL 

1 Scope: The scope of this section comprises of the supply, installation, testing and commissioning 

of noise and vibration control equipment and accessories. 

2 General: Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with provisions to contain 

noise and the transmission of vibration, generated by moving plant and equipment at source 

where illustrated on the tender drawings and plant and equipment schedules to achieve 

acceptable noise rating specified for occupied areas. In addition to the provisions specified in 

the Specification, particular attention must be given to the following details at time of ordering 

plant and equipment and their installation :- 

• All moving plant, machinery and apparatus shall be statically and dynamically balanced at 

manufacturers works and certificates issued. 

• The isolation of moving plant, machinery and apparatus including lines equipment from the 

building structure. 

• Where duct work and pipe work services pass through walls, floors and ceilings, or where 

supported shall be surrounded with a resilient acoustic absorbing material to prevent 

contact with the structure and minimise the outbreak of noise from plant rooms. 

• The reduction of noise breakout from plant rooms and the selection of externally mounted 

equipment and plant to meet ambient noise level requirement of the Specifications. 

• Electrical conduits and connections to all moving plant and equipment shall be carried out in 

flexible conduit and cables to prevent the transmission of vibration to the structure and 

nullify the provisions of anti-vibration mountings. 

• All duct connections to fans shall incorporate flexible connections, except in cases where 

these are fitted integral within air handling units. 

• Duct work connections to the fan inlets / outlets shall be concentricity aligned so that the 

flexible connections are not subjected to any strain and not used as a means of correcting 

bas misalignment. 

• All resilient acoustic absorbing materials shall be non flammable, vermin and rot proof and 

shall not tend to break up or compress sufficiently to transmit vibration or noise from the 

equipment to the structure. 

• Where practicable, silencers shall be built into walls and floors to prevent the flanking of 

noise the duct work systems and their penetrations sealed in the manner previously 

described. 

• Where this is not feasible, the exposed surface of the duct work between the silencer and 

the wall subjected to noise infiltration shall be acoustically clad as specified. 

3 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS. 



Page 24 of 74



NRDA 

All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the structure 

by the use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring loaded supports fixed to either 

concrete bases, inertia blocks or support steels as indicated. 

Centrifugal fans and motors within air handling units shall be isolated from the frame of the air 

handling unit by suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fan discharge air connections shall be fitted 

with approved flexible connections internally isolating the fan scroll from the air handling unit 

casing. 

Centrifugal pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases consisting of reinforced concrete sub-base, 

anti-vibration mountings and concrete filled steel upper plinth. The Contractor shall be 

responsible for issuing the steel upper plinth and mountings to the Contractor for building-in. 

Pipe work connections to circulating pumps, chillers, cooler coils and other equipment shall be 

made with flexible connections as per Specifications. 

The construction of the anti-vibration mountings shall generally comply as under: 

Enclosed Spring Mounting (Caged or Restrained Springs or cushy foot mounting) : Each 

mounting shall consist of cast or fabricated telescopic top and bottom housing enclosing one or 

more helical steel springs as the principle isolation elements, and shall incorporate a built- in 

leveling device. The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating 

height, and be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound. The 

bottom plate of each mounting shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate 

any high frequency energy transmitted by the springs. Mountings incorporating snubbers of 

restraining devices shall be designed so that the snubbing damping or restraining mechanism is 

capable of being adjusted to have no significant effect during the normal running of the isolated 

machine. Restrained isolator shall be provided on chillers subject to approval by the 

manufacturers. 

Neoprene-In-Shear Mountings: Each mounting shall consist of a steel top plate and base plate 

completely embedded in oil resistant neoprene. Each mounting shall be capable of being fitted 

with a leveling device, and bolt holes in the base plate and tapped holes in the top plate so that 

they may be bolted to the floor and equipment where required. 

Inertia Bases for Pumps: The inertia base shall be an all welded mild steel channel frame the 

minimum depth of which shall be 1 / 12 of the longest span between isolator but not less than 150 

mm. filled with concrete the density of which shall be 2300 kg/m 3 . The inertia base shall be 

sufficiently large to provide support for all parts of the equipment, including any component 

which overhangs the equipment base, such as suction and discharge elbows on centrifugal 

pumps. The frame shall include pre-located equipment anchor bolts fixed into position and 



Page 25 of 74



NRDA 

housed in a steel sleeve allowing minor bolt location adjustment. Isolator support brackets shall 

be welded into the corners of the base and suitably re-enforced for the load of the equipment 

and base. Additional reinforcing rods shall be provided at 200 mm centre to ensure the concrete 

and frame is adequately stiffened against distortion. 

Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be provided on all duct work connections to 

fans, rotating plant and equipment isolated from structure and anti-vibration materials or 

mountings. Pipe work and duct work crossing building movement or construction joints shall be 

installed with flexible connections. Flexible connections on duct work to fans etc. shall be a 

minimum / maximum free length of 100 mm. / 200 mm. respectively to minimize noise 

transmission and noise breakout. They shall be completely free from stress and shall not be 

required to accept any weight. Thickness and strength of flexible connection materials shall be 

suitable to withstand the positive and negative fan pressures to which they will be subjected to 

and shall not allow perceptible leakage. The materials shall be durable, non flammable having 

food acoustical quality. 

Flexible connections shall be fitted to all pump suction and discharge connections, chillers and 

other vibrating equipment and where anti-vibration mounts and inertia basis are fitted. Flexible 

connections shall be fitted to all cooler coil chilled water pipe work connections. Flexible 

connections shall allow freedom of movement of plant in all plans. Making flanges to pipe work 

flexible connections shall be of the smooth faced weld-nick type. Flexible pipe connections on 

chilled water systems shall be suitable for a working pressure of 10 bar and test pressure of 17 

bar. 

Rubber Bellows shall be fitted as close to the source of vibration at practicable. The pipe at the 

other end of the bellows shall be a fixed point. Rubber bellows shall be single convolution of 

multiply reinforced EPDM rubber with wire reinforced cuffs. Flanges shall be able to swivel and 

be removable. The date of manufacture shall be moulded on the bellows. For traceability 

membranes shall have an indelible identification showing manufacturer, country of origin, the 

type and a batch number. Tie bars with rubber top hat washers shall be used on bellows. For 

working temperatures up to 70 o C the rubber bellows shall be high tensile synthetic fibre 

reinforced. For working temperature between 70 o C and 100 o C the bellows carcase shall be steel 

wire mesh reinforced throughout. Steel reinforced bellows shall be manufactured and approved 

to the Standards. For temperatures above 100 o C bellow shall be multiply stainless steel with Van 

Stone ends swivel flanges. The overall length shall not exceed 130 mm. Flexible connections 

with screwed connections shall be reinforced EPDM rubber hoses and shall have at least one full 

union to avoid torquing on installation 



Page 26 of 74



NRDA 

INSPECTION AND TESTING PROCEDURES 

7.1 All major equipment such as Air washing units, panels, fans shall be got inspected by the 

engineer in charge at works by the contractor. All routine tests shall be carried out and the test 

reports shall be submitted for approval before dispatch. The engineer in charge is free to 

witness any or all tests. In any case the OEM test certificates shall be submitted to the engineer 

in charge for verification of the same before the payments for the same can be processed. The 

contractor shall inform the engineer in charge well in time about the date of readiness of the 

equipment for inspection and testing. The inspection process shall be as under: 

7.2 Air washer units: Salient features such as model and make shall be checked as per the contract 

requirement and shall be related with name plate/performance curves. The manufacturer’s test 

certificate shall be furnished and verified. The test certificates shall be correlated with the serial 

no. for parts/equipment. Fans shall be checked for correctness with respect to the computer 

selection printouts. All material shall be physically verified and checked. 

7.3 Pumps: Salient features such as model and make shall be checked as per the contract 

requirement and shall be related with name plate / performance curves. The manufacturer’s 

test certificate shall be furnished and verified. The test certificates shall be correlated with the 

pump serial no. 

7.4 Electric Motor: The motor shall be of approved make. The OEM’s test certificates shall be 

furnished and verified with the name plate and serial no. The requirement shall be as per 

technical data submitted. 

7.5 Ducting: The GI sheet to be used shall be physically checked for gauge as per IS 277. The bend 

test shall be performed at site. Randomly sample of each gauge shall be checked. 

7.6 Insulation: All type of insulation material shall be physically checked for quality, thickness as per 

tender specification. The samples shall be checked for density at site. The same shall be 

correlated with the OEM test certificates. The material shall be having required thermal 

conductivity which will be verified from Test certificate. 

7.7 Final Inspection: After completion of entire installation as per specifications in all respects, the 

contractor shall demonstrate trouble free operation of the entire installation simultaneously for 

a period of 48 hours spread over a period of 6 days continuous. The test readings shall be 

recorded in a mutually acceptable format. All tests shall be carried out by the contractor at his 

own expenses. However necessary utilities such as power and water shall be provided by the 

owner free of cost. The tests shall include but will not be limited to the following: 

• To check satisfactory functioning of all equipment installed such as air washer units, panels, 

exhaust Blowers etc. 

• Clean all equipment to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust with Vacuum 

cleaner. 

• Verify that the equipment is secure on mounting and supporting devices and that 

connection for piping, ductwork and electrical are complete. 



Page 27 of 74



NRDA 

• Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 

• Perform cleaning and adjusting specified as per OEM. 

• Check proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel / pump free rotation and 

smooth bearing operations. 

• Reconnect drive system and align belts. 

• Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory recommended 

lubricants. 

• Install temporary throw away filters for initial run and finally install clean filters. 

• Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire dampers in connected ductwork 

system are in the full-open position. 

• Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 

• Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 

• Flow measurements shall be by a calibrated rotating vane anemometer. Computed ratings 

shall conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be 

computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current, whereas, noise level 

at various locations within the conditioned spaces shall be measured by a sound pressure 

level meter. 

NOTE: 

• All measuring instruments such as thermometer, Psychrometer, Pressure gauges, 

anemometers, dB Meter, Tong tester, etc or any other necessary instrument shall be 

arranged by the contractor at his own expense. 

• The instruments shall be new and shall have a valid calibration certificate from a renowned 

test lab. 

• The plant shall be run initially and all equipments shall be adjusted to give desired results as 

per contract. Thereafter the plant shall be test run for 48 hours as described above and the 

readings shall be demonstrated in the required format. The test shall be witnessed by the 

engineer in charge or his representative. In case the conditions are not achieved during the 

initial run test the plant shall be readjusted and the new dates for tests shall be determined. 

The entire test shall be repeated and satisfactory results shall have to be obtained. Only 

after satisfactory test the installation shall be taken over by the customer and warranty 

period for one year shall commence. 

• The snag list prepared after initial test shall be attended to by the contractor during a 

maximum of 30 days from the start of warranty period. Failure to do so shall result in 

corresponding increase of warranty period. 



Page 28 of 74



NRDA 

AIRCOOLED VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME / FLOW SYSTEM UNITS 

1 TYPE: Units shall be air cooled Heat pump type, variable refrigerant volume / flow air 

conditioner consisting of outdoor unit and multiple indoor units. Each indoor unit shall have 

capability to cool or heat. The indoor units on any circuit can be of different type and also 

controlled individually. Compressor installed in each modular outdoor unit shall be equipped 

with Scroll / rotary compressors for higher reliability, improved life, better backup and duty 

cycling purpose. Outdoor unit shall be suitable for mix match connection of all type of indoor 

units. 

The refrigerant piping between indoor units and outdoor unit shall be possible to extend up to a 

minimum of 165m with maximum 50m level difference without any oil traps. 

Both indoor units and outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, tested and filled with first charge 

of refrigerant before delivering at site. 

2 OUTDOOR UNIT: The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, weather proof casing, 

constructed from heavy gauge mild steel panels and coated with baked enamel finish. The unit 

should be completely factory wired tested with all necessary controls. 

The outdoor unit shall have multiple scroll / rotary compressors and be able to operate even in 

case of breakdown of one of compressors. The noise level shall not be more than 68 dB(A)at 

normal operation measured horizontally 1m away and 1.5m above ground. 

The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and shall be allowed for side by side installation. 

Each modular outdoor unit shall have multiple inverter Scroll / rotary or hermetic Scroll type 

compressors. The compressors shall be designed and coordinated to achieve the highest 

efficiency. The unit shall be provided with its own microprocessor control panel. The outdoor 

units should have anti-corrosion paint. 

The machine must have a sub cool feature to use coil surface more effectively thru proper 

circuit / bridge so that it prevents the flushing of refrigerant from long piping due to this effect 

thereby achieving energy savings. 

The outdoor unit should be fitted with low noise fan with grill to reduce pressure loss. 

The Outdoor machines shall be preferably compact machines for purpose of space saving and 

smaller foot print shall be preferred. 

3 COMPRESSOR The compressor shall be Scroll / Rotary type and capable of inverter control. The 

inverter compressor shall change the speed in accordance to the variation in cooling or heating 

load requirement. Digital scroll compressors are also acceptable. 



Page 29 of 74



NRDA 

All outdoor units shall have multiple steps of capacity control to meet load variations / 

fluctuation and indoor unit individual control. All parts of compressor shall be sufficiently 

lubricated stock. Forced lubrication may also be employed. Oil heater shall be provided in the 

compressor casing. 

4 HEAT EXCHANGER The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically 

bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil. The aluminum fins shall be covered by anticorrosion 

resin film. The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven low noise 

level propeller type fans. Each fan shall have a safety guard. The Condenser fins must be coated 

with Anti-corrosive treatment. 

5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT The refrigerant circuit shall include liquid & gas shut-off valves and a 

solenoid valves and an accumulator is the system demands. All necessary safety devices shall be 

provided to ensure the safely operation of the system and personnel. Refrigerant should be 

R410a Only. 

6 SAFETY DEVICES All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safe operation of the 

system. Following safety devices shall be part of outdoor unit: 

High pressure switch, fuse, fan drive overload protector/ fan motor safety thermostat, fusible 

plug, over load relay, overload protection for inverter / Over Current Relay 

7 OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system /oil separator to 

ensure stable operation with long refrigeration piping lengths. The system must be provided 

with oil balancing circuit to avoid poor lubrication. 

8 INDOOR UNIT: The type, capacity and size of indoor units shall be as specified in detailed Bill of 

Quantities. Indoor units shall be either ceiling mounted cassette type, or ceiling mounted 

ductable type or floor standing type or wall mounted type or any other type. Each unit shall 

have electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to load variations of 

the room. The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type and statically and dynamically 

balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. The address of the indoor unit shall 

be set automatically in case of individual and group control. The fan shall be direct driven 

type/belt driven as per the OEM design. 

The cooling coil shall be made out of seamless copper tubes and have continuous aluminum fins. 

The fins shall be spaced by collars forming an integral part. The tubes shall be staggered in the 

direction of airflow. The tubes shall be hydraulically/ mechanically expanded for minimum 

thermal contact resistance with fins. Each coils shall be factory tested at 21kg/sqm air pressure 

under water. 

Unit shall have cleanable type filter fixed to an integrally moulded plastic /aluminium frame. The 

filter shall be easily serviceable. 



Page 30 of 74



NRDA 

Each indoor unit shall have computerized control for maintaining design room temperature. 

Each unit shall be provided with microprocessor thermostat for cooling or cooling and heating. 

Each unit shall be with wired LCD type remote controller. The remote controller shall memorize 

the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance. The controller shall have self-diagnostic 

features for easy and quick maintenance and service. The controller shall be able to change fan 

speed and angle of swing flap individually as per requirement. 

10 CEILING MOIUNTED CASSETTE TYPE UNIT (MULTI FLOW TYPE) The unit shall be ceiling mounted 

type. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan section and DX-coil section. The housing of the unit 

shall be powder coated galvanized steel. The body shall be light in weight and shall be able to 

suspend from four corners. The fan shall be aerodynamically designed diffuser turbo fan type. 

Unit shall have an external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have four way 

supply air grilles on sides and return air grille in center. Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, 

fresh air intake provision (if specified) Low gas detection system and very low operating sound. 

All the indoor units regardless of their difference in capacity should have same decorative panel 

size for harmonious aesthetic point of view. It should have provision of connecting branch ducts. 

11 CEILING MOIUNTED DUCTABLE TYPE UNIT Unit shall be suitable for ceiling mounted type. The 

unit shall include pre filter, fan section & DX coil section .The housing of unit shall be light 

weight powder coated galvanized steel. The unit shall have high static fan for Ductable 

arrangement. 

12 CEILING SUSPENDED TYPE Unit shall be suitable for ceiling suspended arrangement below 

false ceiling. The unit include pre filter, fan section & DX coil section. The housing of unit 

shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel. Unit shall have an attractive external 

casing for supply and return air. 

13 CENTRALIZED TYPE REMOTE CONTROLLER A multifunctional compact centralized controller shall 

be provided with the system. It shall be able to control up to a minimum of 64 groups of indoor 

units with the following functions: - 

• Starting/stopping of Air-conditoners as a zone or group or individual unit. 

• Temperature settling for each indoor unit or zone. 

• Switching between temperature control modes, switching of fan speed and direction of 

airflow, enabling/disabling of individual remote controller operation. 

• Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature setting of individual 

indoor units, maintenance information, and trouble shooting information. 

The controller shall have wide screen user friendly display and can be wired by a non polar 2 

wire transmission cable upto a distance of 1 km. away from indoor unit. 



Page 31 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR WASHING UNITS 

1 Scope: The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 

double skin construction Air Washing Units, conforming to these Specifications and in 

accordance with requirement of drawings and of the Schedule of Quantities. 

2 Type: The air washing units shall be double skin construction, draw-thru type comprising of 

various sections, filter section, cooling pad section and fan section as shown on drawings and 

included in schedule of quantities. 

11.3 Capacity: The air capacities, maximum motor horse power and static pressure shall be as 

shown on Drawings, Schedule of equipment and in Schedule of Quantities. 

11.4 Casing: Double skinned panels shall be 23 mm thick made of galvanised steel, pressure 

injected with foam insulation (density 40 kg/m3) with K factor not exceeding 0.02 Watt/M 

shall be fixed to 1.5 mm thick aluminium alloy twin box section structural framework with 

stainless steel screws. Outer sheet of panels shall be made of galvanised pre-plasticised sheet 

of 0.63 mm thick and inner sheet of 24 Gauge plain G.I. Sheet. The entire framework shall be 

mounted on an aluminium alloy or galvanized steel (depending on size) channel base as per 

manufacturer’s recommendation. The panels shall be sealed to the framework by heavy duty 

Ò’ ring gaskets held captive in the framed extrusion. All panels shall be detachable or hinged. 

Hinges shall be made of die cast aluminium with stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made 

of hard nylon and be operational from both inside and outside of the unit. Units supplied with 

various sections shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing 

and gaskets shall be concealed. Units shall have hinged, quick opening access door in the fan 

section and also in filter section where filters are not accessible from outside. Access doors 

shall be double skin type. 

11.5 Fan: Fans shall be centrifugal, backward curved blades. Fan casing shall be made of galvanised 

steel sheet. Fan wheels shall be made of galvanised steel. Fan shaft shall be grounded C40 

carbon steel and supported in self-aligning plumber block operating less than 75% of first 

critical speed, grease lubricated bearings. Fan wheels and pulleys shall be individually tested 

and precision balanced dynamically. Motors shall be mounted inside the AWU casing on slide 

rails for easy belt tensioning, and be totally enclosed, fan cooled, to be class `F’ insulation. 

Motors shall drive heavy duty V-belt, constant pitch, drive selected at 110% of motor 

horsepower. Both fan and motors assemblies shall be mounted on a deep section aluminium 

alloy or galvanised steel (depending on size) base frame. Isolation shall be provided from the 

unit casing by combination spring and rubber anti vibration mounts and flame retardant, 

waterproof neoprene impregnated flexible connection on the fan discharge. 

11.6 Cooling Pads: The cooling pads shall be of honey comb design to provide extended and 

sufficient wetted surface to give a water absorbing efficiency of at least 90% at an air 

efficiency velocity of 500 fpm (2.5 m/sec.) The thickness of pad shall be as given in the 

schedule of equipment. The cooling pads shall be made of acetate paper. The cross section 

and depth shall be sufficient for specified efficiency. The cooling pad section shall be of 

1.60mm thick GI. It shall be complete with GI channel / galvanised angle supports for 

mounting the pads and a water distribution trough for the uniform supply of water over the 



Page 32 of 74



NRDA 

entire surface. The cooling pads shall be imported from OEM. The Water distribution tray 

shall be of SS 304 construction and shall be contructed to avoid any spilling of water. 

11.7 Motor and Drive: Fan motors shall be energy efficient and shall be 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, 

three phase, totally enclosed fan-cooled class F, with IP-55 protection. Motors shall be especially 

designed for quiet operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm. Drive to fan shall be 

provided through belt-drive arrangement. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. 

11.8 Water Sump: The water sump below the pad section shall be of 3 mm thick mild steel sheet 

covered with reinforced FRP or double skin with outer sheet being 20 G GSS and inner skin being 

of 22 G SS 304 in kitchen sink design. The panel shall be insulated with 15 mm nitrile rubber. The 

tank shall be complete with make-up, overflow and drain connection. A float valve shall be 

provided for makeup water line. Water pan shall be sufficiently deep to avoid any spilling of 

water. 

11.9 Water Pump: The water pump shall be “monobloc type”, with strainer chamber. There shall be 

provision for standby pump. The pump specifications shall be as given in relevant chapter. 

11.10 Filters: Each unit shall be provided with a factory assembled filter section containing washable 

synthetic type air filters having anodised aluminium frame. The filter shall have minimum 90% 

efficiency down to 10 microns. The media shall be supported with HDPE mesh on one side and 

aluminium mesh on other side. Filter banks shall be easily accessible and designed for easy 

withdrawal and renewal of filter cells. Filter framework shall be fully sealed and constructed 

from aluminium alloy. 

11.11 Damper: Dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades shall be made of double skinned aerofoil 

aluminium sections with integral gasket and assembled within a rigid extruded aluminium alloy 

frame. All linkages and supporting spindles shall be made of aluminium or nylon, turning in 

teflon bushes. Manual dampers shall be provided with a bakelite knob for locking the damper 

blades in position. Linkages shall be extended wherever specified for motorised operation. 

Damper frames shall be sectionalised to minimise blade warping. 

11.12 Accessories: Each air washing unit shall be provided with drain plug in the bottom.. In addition, 

the following accessories may be required; their detailed specifications are given in individual 

sections. These shall be part of Air washer units and no extra payment shall be done except 

wherever clearly specified. 

• Internal piping within Air Washer unit to interconnect the monobloc pumps. 

• Vibration isolators shall be provided with all units. Vibration isolators shall be cushy foot 

mounting type. Fan should be cushy foot mounted and air washer should be mounted on 

resistoflex / EQ pads. 

• Double canvas connections and Fan outlet damper at the outlet of each fan with proper 

locking arrangement. 



Page 33 of 74



NRDA 

• Nuts, bolts, shims etc. as required for the grouting of the equipment. 

• PVC water eliminators to avoid water carry over. 

11.13 Painting: Shop coats of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be 

cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then 

coated with paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surface. 

11.14 Performance Data: Unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the equipment. 

Fan performance rating and power consumption data, with operating points clearly indicated 

shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation. 

11.15 Testing: Air washing unit shall be tested for the measurements of air flow and dry and wet bulb 

temperatures of air entering and leaving the air washing units. Flow measurements shall be by 

an anemometer and temperature measurements by accurately calibrated mercury-in-glass 

thermometers. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage 

and input current. 



Page 34 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUMPS 

1 Scope: The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 

water pumps conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with requirements of 


2 Type: The type and size of pumps shall be in accordance with requirement of Drawings and 


3 Capacity: Water flow rates and head of the pumps shall be in accordance with the requirements 

of Schedule of Quantities. 

4 Monobloc Pumps: Pump shall be monobloc end-suction design directly connected to motor. The 

pump casing shall be of cast iron. Impeller shall be of Bronze/ gunmetal, hydraulically balanced 

and keyed to shaft. Stuffing boxes shall be integral with casing and water sealed. Shaft sleeve 

shall be of gun metal extending through stuffing boxes. Motor shall be drip and splash proof, 

designed as integral part of pump. Motor shall be suitable for 415±6% volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles 

AC power supply. The pump base shall be mounted on MS steel foundation as per on Approvedfor-Construction 

shop drawings. 

5 Lubrication: Upon installation of the complete system and before testing, the pump shall be 

lubricated in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 

6 Painting: All pumps, motors and bases shall be supplied with approved finish. Shop coat of 

paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with 

mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with 

enamel paint to match the adjoining areas. 



Page 35 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR FANS AND BLOWERS 

1 Scope: The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning 

of centrifugal, in-line and propeller type fans and roof mounted units conforming to these 

Specifications and in accordance with the requirement of Drawings and Schedule of Quantities. 

2 Type: Centrifugal, in-line AXIAL FLOW FANS, Duct fans and propeller fans shall be of the type as 

indicated on Drawings and identified in Schedule of Quantities. 

3 Capacity: The air-moving capacity of fans shall be as shown on Drawings and in Schedule of 

Quantities. 

4 Centrifugal Fan: Centrifugal fan shall be DIDW / SISW Class I construction arrangement 3 (i.e. 

bearings on both the sides). Split casing shall be provided on larger sizes of fans, however 

neoprene / asbestos packing should be provided throughout split joints to make it air-tight. 

18 gauge galvanized wire mesh inlet guards of 5 cm sieves shall be provided on both inlets. Fan 

Wheel shall be forward / backward-curved as specified in schedule of equipment. Fan wheel and 

housing shall be statically and dynamically balanced. For fans upto 450 mm dia, fan outlet 

velocity shall not exceed 550 meter/minute and maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. 

For fans above 450mm dia, the outlet velocity shall be within 700 meter/minute. High static 

pressure fan speed shall be as per manufacturer. Shaft shall be constructed of steel, turned, 

ground and polished. Bearings shall be of the sleeve / ball-bearing type mounted directly on the 

fan housing. Bearings shall be designed especially for quiet operation and shall be of the selfaligning, 

oil / grease pack pillow block type. Fan motor shall be energy efficient and suitable for 

415±10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase AC power supply, squirrel-cage, totally enclosed, fan-cooled, 

provided with class F insulation. Motor name plate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower 

by a minimum of 15%. Motor speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. The fan and motor combination 

selected for the particular required performance shall be of the most efficient (smallest horse 

power), so that sound level is lowest. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt with adjustable 

motor sheave and a standard belt guard. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. 

Centrifugal fan casing (fan Box) shall single skin and shall be complete with access door, squirrelcage 

induction motor, V-belt drive, belt guard and vibration isolators, direction of discharge / 

rotation, and motor position shall be as per the Approved-for-Construction shop drawings. 

Housing shall be constructed of 16 gauge GI sheet steel construction. It shall be rigidly reinforced 

and supported by structural angles. Housing shall be provided with standard cleanout door with 

handles and neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on the housing. 

MS base shall be provided for both fan and motor, built as an integral part, and shall be mounted 

on a concrete foundation through vibration isolators. The concrete foundation shall be atleast 15 

cm above the finished floor level, or as shown in approved-for-construction shop drawings. 

5 Axial Flow Fan: Fan shall be complete with motor, motor mount, direct driven and 

vibration isolation type, suspension arrangement as per approved for construction shop 

drawings. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel. Fan casing, motor mount and 

straightening vane shall be of welded steel construction. Motor mounting plate shall be 



Page 36 of 74



NRDA 

minimum 15 mm thick and machined to receive motor flange. An inspection door with handle 

and neoprene gasket shall be provided. Casing shall have flanged connection on both ends 

for ducted applications. Support brackets for ceiling suspension shall be welded to the casing for 

connection to hanger bolts. Straightening vanes shall be aerodynamically designed for maximum 

efficiency and minimizing turbulence. Casing shall be bonderized, primed and finish coated with 

enamel paint. Rotor hub and blades shall be cast aluminium alloy construction. Blades shall be 

die-formed aerofoil shaped for maximum efficiency and shall vary in twist and width from hub to 

tip. Fan blades mounting on the hub shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Extended 

grease leads for external lubrication shall be provided. The fan pitch control may be manually 

readjusted at site upon installation, for obtaining actual air flow values as specified and quoted. 

Motor shall be energy efficient squirrel-cage, totally-enclosed, fan cooled, standard frame, 

constant speed, continuous duty, single winding, suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase 

AC power supply, provided with class `F’ insulation. The speed of the fans shall not exceed 1500 

RPM for fans with impeller diameter above 450 mm, and 2880 RPM for fans with impeller 

diameter 450 mm and less. Fan shall be selected for maximum efficiency or minimum 

horsepower. Motor conduit box shall be mounted on exterior of fan casing, and lead wires from 

the motor to the conduit box shall be protected from the air stream by enclosing in a flexible 

metal conduit. Drive to fan shall be provided through direct drive with adjustable motor sleeve. 

The assembly of fan and motor shall be suspended from the slab by vibration isolation 

suspension of rubber-in-shear type. Fans shall be factory assembled and shipped with all 

accessories factory-mounted. Outlet cone and inlet cone shall be provided with fan. 

6 Propeller Fan: Propeller fan shall be direct-driven, three or four blade type, mounted on a steel 

mounting plate with orifice ring. Mounting Plate shall be of steel construction, square with 

streamlined venturi inlet coated with baked enamel paint. Mounting plate shall be of standard 

size, constructed of 12 to 16 gauge sheet steel depending upon the fan size. Orifice ring shall be 

correctly formed by spinning or stamping to provide easy passage of air without turbulence and 

to direct the air stream. Fan blades and hub assembly shall be statically and dynamically 

balanced at the manufacturer’s works. Motor shall be standard permanent split capacitor or 

shaded pole for small sizes, totally enclosed with pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, designed 

for quiet operation with a maximum speed of 1000 rpm for fans 60 cm dia or larger and 1440 

rpm for fans 45 cm dia and smaller. Motors for larger fans shall be suitable for 415±6% volts, 

50 cycles 3 phase power supply, and for smaller fans shall be suitable for 220 ± 6% volts, 50 

cycles single phase power supply. Motors shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical 

service. Wire guard on inlet side and bird screen at the outlet, Fixed or gravity louvers built into 

a steel frame at the outlet., Regulator for controlling fan speed for single phase fan motor, 

Single phase preventors for 3 phase fans shall be included in fan cost. 

7 Exhaust Blower: Exhaust blowers shall be complete with motor, with impeller and should be 

direct driven fan. The motor shall be suitable for outdoor application. The motor should have 

maintenance free bearings. The direction of rotation, discharge direction shall be marked on the 

fan assembly. The fans shall be suitably installed as per the locations shown in the drawings with 

direction of air flow towards outside of the building. The impeller of the fan shall be forward / 

backward curved (depending on the static pressure requirement). The whole fan assembly shall 

be statically and dynamically balanced. Ball bearings should be completely maintenance free. 

The fan can be mounted on any axis. The bearing lubricant should be suitable for application at 



Page 37 of 74



NRDA 

maximum ambient temperature with a life expectancy of minimum of 40000 hours. The fan 

motor, which will be direct driven, should have a built in thermal contact. At the critical high 

temperature point the thermal contact will open and break the power supply to the fan. The fan 

motor should have class B insulation and should be rated for IP 54. 

8 Performance Data: All fans shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity 

ratings, power consumption, with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted and 

verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation. 

9 Testing: Capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer. Measured air flow capacities 

shall conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be 

computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current. 



Page 38 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPING 

1 Scope: All piping work shall conform to quality standards and shall be carried out as per 

specifications and details given hereunder :- 

2. Piping : 

2.1 Drain Piping: PPRC Pipes 

2.1.1 The drain piping shall be PN16 grade PPRC and laid in continuous slope. 

2.1.2 The fittings shall be of PN25 grade of equal forged connections. 

2.1.3 Pipe crosses shall be provided at bends, to permit easy cleaning of drain line. 

2.1.4 The drain line shall be provided upto the nearest drain trap and pitched towards the trap. 

2.1.5 Drain lines shall be provided at all the lowest points in the system, as well as at equipment, 

where leakage of water is likely to occur, or to remove condensate and water from pump 

glands. 

2.3 Copper Piping : 

2.3.1 Seamless soft copper tubing, type L shall be used to make connections to equipment, wherever 

required or specified. 

2.3.2 Flare fittings e.g. flare nuts, tees, elbows, reducers etc. shall all be of brass. 

2.4 Refrigerant Piping : 

All refrigerant piping for the air conditioning system shall be constructed from soft seamless 

upto 19.1mm and hard drawn copper refrigerant pipes for above 19.1mm with copper fittings 

and silver-soldered joints. The refrigerant piping arrangements shall be in accordance with good 

practice within the air conditioning industry, and are to include charging connections, suction 

line insulation and all other items normally forming part of proper refrigerant circuits. 

All joints in copper piping shall be sweat joints using low temperature brazing and or silver 

solder. Before jointing any copper pipe or fittings, its interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned by 

passing a clean cloth via wire or cable through its entire length. The piping shall be continuously 

kept clean of dirt etc. while constructing the joints. Subsequently, it shall be thoroughly 

blown out using nitrogen. 

After the refrigerant piping installation has been completed, the refrigerant piping system shall 

be pressure tested using nitrogen at pressure of 20Kg per sq.cm and 10 Kg per sq.cm (lowside). 



Page 39 of 74



NRDA 

Pressure shall be maintained in the system for 24 hours. The system shall then be evacuated to 

minimum vacuum if 700mm hg and held for 24 hours. 

The air-conditioning system supplier shall be design sizes and erect proper 

interconnections of the complete refrigerant circuit. 

The thickness of copper piping shall not be less than mentioned below: 

Pipe Size in mm( OD) 

Wall Thickness in mm 

54.1 1.5 

41.3 – 34.9 1.3 

28.6 – 25.4 1.2 

22.2 – 15.9 1.0 

12.7 - 6.4 0.8 

The suction line pipe size and the liquid line pipe size shall be selected according to the 

manufacturers specified outside diameter. All refrigerant pipes shall be properly supported and 

anchored to the building structure using steel hangers, anchors, brackets and supports which 

shall be fixed to the building structure by means of inserts or expansion shields of adequate size 

and number to support the load imposed thereon. 

3. Pipe Insulation : 

a. Refrigerant Pipe Insulation 

The whole of the liquid and suction refrigerant lines including all fittings, valves and strainer 

bodies, etc. shall be insulated with 19mm /13 mm thick elastomeric nitrile rubber Class I 

as specified in BOQ. 

b. Drain Pipe Insulation 

Drain pipes carrying condensate water shall be insulated with 6 mm thick elastomeric nitrile 

rubber insulation. 

For proper drainage of condensate, U Trap shall be provided in the drain piping (wherever 

required). All pipe supports shall be of pre fabricated & pre painted slotted angle supports, 

properly installed with clamps etc. 



Page 40 of 74



NRDA 

1. SCOPE 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SHEET METAL WORKS 

The scope of this section includes supply, fabrication, installation & testing of all sheet metal 

ducts as per specifications & drawings. Except as otherwise specified all ductwork and related 

items shall be in accordance with these specifications. Duct work shall mean all ducts, casings, 

dampers, access doors, joints, stiffeners, hangers & all accessories. 

2. DUCT MATERIALS 

2.1 The ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets class VIII - Light coating of Zinc 

conforming to ISS: 277-1962 (REVISED) with accompanying Mill test Certificates. Galvanizing 

shall be of 120gms/sq.m. (total coating on both sides). In addition, if deemed necessary, samples 

of raw material, selected at random by owner’s site representative shall be subject to approval 

and tested for thickness and zinc coating at contractor’s expense. 

Only new, fresh, clean (unsoiled) and bright GI / Aluminum sheets shall be used. The Owner / 

Consultants reserve the right to summarily reject the sheets not meeting these requirements. 

Fabrication of ducts shall be through Lock forming machines. 

In case of factory fabricated duct the G.I. raw material should be used in coil-form (instead of 

sheets) so as to limit the longitudinal joints at the edges only irrespective of cross-section 

dimensions 

3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR SITE FABRICATED DUCING 

All duct work, sheet metal fabrication unless otherwise directed, shall strictly meet 

requirements, as described in IS:655-1963 with Amendment-I (1971 Edition) 

Longer size 

of Duct 

Sheet 

Thickness 

GI (MM) 

Type of Joints 

Bracing 

Up to 750 0.63 GI Flange - 

751-1000 0.80 25x25x3 mm angle iron frame 

with 8 mm Dia nuts & bolts 


with 8 mm Dia nuts & bolts 


with 10 mm Dia nuts & bolts at 

125 mm center 

25X25X3 MM @ 1M 

40x40x5 MM @1M 

40x40x3mm@ 1.2m to be braced 

diagonally. 

2251 & 

above 

1.25 50x50x6 mm angle iron frame 

with 10 mm Dia nuts & bolts at 

125 mm center 

40x40x3mm @ 1.6m diagonally 

braced 



Page 41 of 74



NRDA 

Ducts larger than 450 mm shall be cross broken, duct sections up to 1200 mm length may be 

used with bracing angles omitted. 

Changes in section of ductwork shall be affected by tapering the ducts with as long a taper as 

possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45 Deg. Angle from the axis of the 

main duct unless otherwise approved by the Customer / consultant. 

All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling/slab by means of M.S. rods of 10 MM Dia with M.S. 

angle at the bottom of size 40 mm x 40 mm x 6 mm for sizes up to 1500 mm at 3 m intervals. 

Above size 1500 mm upto 2250, support shall be provided with 10 mm dia. MS rod and MS 

angle size 50 mm x 50 mm at bottom at 2.5 m intervals. Above size 2250 mm support shall be 

provided with 12 mm dia MS rod and MS angle size 50 mm x 50 mm at bottom 

3. INSTALLATION 

All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workman like manner, generally conforming to 

relevant BIS codes. Round exposed ducts shall be die formed for achieving perfect circle 

configuration 

Ducts so identified on the drawing shall be acoustically lined and thermally insulated as 

described in the section ‘Insulation’ and as indicated in ‘Schedule of Quantities. Duct dimensions 

shown in drawings are overall sheet metal dimensions inclusive of the acoustic lining where 

required and indicated in ‘Schedule of Quantities’. 

Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. All joints shall be 

made airtight. 

All exposed ducts upto 60 cm width within conditioned spaces shall have slip joints. The 

internal ends of the slip joints shall be in the direction of airflow. Ducts and accessories within 

ceiling spaces visible from air-conditioned areas shall be provided with two coats of matt black 

finish paint. 

Change in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual. Air turns shall be installed in all vanes 

arranged to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable turbulence. 

Ducts shall be fabricated as per details shown on drawings. All ducts shall be rigid and shall be 

adequately supported and braced where required with standing seams, tees of ample size to 

keep the ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling, vibration or breaking. 

All sheets metal connections, partitions and plenums required to confine the flow of air to/ 

through the filters and fans shall be constructed of 18 Gauge GSS thoroughly stiffened with 

25mm x 25mm x 3mm angle iron braces and fitted with all necessary inspection doors as 

required to give access to all parts of the apparatus. Doors shall be not less than 45cm X 45cm in 

size. 



Page 42 of 74



NRDA 

Plenums shall be panel type and assembled at site. Fixing of MS angle iron flanges of duct pieces 

shall be with rivet heads inside i.e. Towards G.S. sheet and riveting shall be done from outside. 

Rubber gasket 3 mm thick shall be used between duct flanges and between duct and duct 

supports instead of felt in all ducting installation for complete sealing. 

During the construction, the Contractor shall temporarily close duct openings with sheet metal 

covers to prevent debris-entering ducts and to maintain opening straight and square, as per 

direction of Customer / consultant. 

Great care should be taken to ensure that the ductwork does not extend outside and beyond 

height limits as noted on the drawings. 

All duct work shall be of high quality approved galvanized sheet steel guaranteed not to crack or 

peel on bending or fabrication of ducts. All joints shall be tight and shall be made in the 

direction of airflow. 

The ducts shall be reinforced where necessary, and must be secured in place so as to avoid 

vibration of the duct on its support. 

All air turns of 45 degrees or more shall include curved metal blades or vanes arranged so as to 

permit the air to make the abrupt turns without an appreciable turbulence. Turning vanes shall 

be securely fastened to prevent noise or vibration. All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in 

accordance with modern design practice. The sheet metal gauges and fabrication procedures as 

given in I.S. specifications shall be adhered to and shall be considered as an integral part of 

these specifications. 

The ductwork shall be varied in shape and position to fit actual conditions at building. All 

changes shall be in accordance with accepted duct design and subject to the approval of the 

customer / consultant. The Contractor shall verify all measurements at building and shall notify 

the Customer / consultant of any difficulty in carrying out his work before fabrication. 

Sponge rubber or approved equal gaskets shall be installed between all connections of sheet 

metal ducts to walls. Sheet metal connections shall be made to walls and floors by means of 

galvanized steel angles anchored to the building structure with anchor bolts and with the sheet 

bolted to the angles. Sheet metal connections shall be as shown in the drawings or as directed 

by Customer / consultant. 

All ductwork shall be independently supported from building construction. All horizontal ducts 

shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with trapeze hangers formed of 

galvanized steel rods and galvanized steel angel/channel under ducts. All vertical ductwork shall 

be supported by structural members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through 

galvanized steel insert plates left in slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with a 

hole for passing the hanger rods shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze hanger formed of 

galvanized steel rods and angles / channels shall be hung through these cleats. Wherever use of 

metal insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash / anchor fastener driven 



Page 43 of 74



NRDA 

into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger rods shall then hang through the 

cleats. 

Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, it shall be provided with 25 mm thick TF 

quality thermo Cole around the duct prior to sealing of the opening. 

All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever 

ductwork is connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may cause vibration in 

the ducts, ducts shall be provided with a flexible connection, located at the unit discharge. 

Flexible connections shall be constructed of fire retarding flexible heavy canvas sleeve at least 

100 mm long but not more than 200 mm, securely bonded and bolted on both sides. Sleeve 

shall be made smooth and the connecting ductwork rigidly held by independent supports on 

both sides of the flexible connection. The flexible connection shall be suitable for pressure at 

the point of installation. 

Flanges and supports are to be black, mild steel and are to be primer coated on all surfaces 

before erection and painted with aluminum thereafter. Accessories such as damper blades and 

access panels are to be of materials of appropriate thickness and the finish similar to the 

adjacent ducting, as specified. 

The ductwork should be carried out in a manner and at such time as not to hinder or delay the 

work of the other agencies especially the boxing or false ceiling Contractors. 



Page 44 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR TERMINALS 

1 SCOPE 

2. TYPE 

The scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of air 

terminals and dampers conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the 

requirement of drawings and ‘Schedule of Quantities’. 

The terminals shall be of type as indicated in drawings and ‘Schedule of Quantities’ 

3. DAMPERS 

At the junction of each branch duct with main duct and split of main duct, volume control 

dampers must be provided. Dampers shall be rigid in construction to the passage of air. 

The volume dampers shall be of an approved type, lever operated and complete with suitable 

level links & quadrants, locking devices, which will permit the dampers to be adjusted and 

locked in any position. 

The dampers shall be of opposed blade or louver type. The damper blade shall not be less than 

1.25 mm (18) gauge and shall not be over 225 mm wide. Automatic and manual volume 

opposed blade dampers shall be complete with frames and bronze bearings as per drawings. 

Damper frames shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel 

After completion of the ductwork, dampers are to be adjusted and set to deliver the required 

amount of air as specified in the drawings. 

4 ACCESS PANEL 

A hinged and gasket access panel shall be provided on ductwork before each control device that 

may be located inside the ductwork. Doors shall be provided with neoprene rubber gaskets. 

Angle joints shall be provided with neoprene rubber gaskets for leak tightness of the joints. 

Access door/panels shall be provided: - 

• Near each smoke sensor 

• Any other place specifically mentioned in the drawing or if asked by Owner / Consultants 

during execution stage. 

5. LINEAR GRILLS: 

Linear continuous supply or return air grills shall be extruded aluminum construction with fixed 

horizontal bars at 0 / 15 0 inclination with flanges on both sides. The thickness of fixed bar 

louvers shall be 3mm in front and the flange shall be 20mm wide with round edges. The grille 



Page 45 of 74



NRDA 

shall be suitable for concealed fixing and horizontal bars of the grille shall be mechanically 

crimped from the back to hold them. 

Volume control device of GSS construction in black mat finish shall be provided in S.A. duct 

collars. 

6. SUPPLY / RETURN AIR GRILLS WITH HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL OR VERTICAL / HORIZONTAL 

LOUVER ARRANGEMENT: 

The grille shall be adjustable as each louver shall be pivoted to provide pattern with 00 to plus 

or minus 150 ARC upto 300 deflection down towards. The louvers shall hold deflection settings 

under all conditions of velocity and pressure. The rear louver of the register shall be in black 

shade. 

Volume control device of GSS construction with black mat finish shall be provided in S.A. grills. 

7. EXHAUST AIR REGISTER: 

Exhaust air register shall be made of extruded aluminum with fixed horizontal louvers at 40 

degree angle setting on a 20 mm louvers pitch. The register shall have 20 mm wide flange with 

round edges all around. The register shall be suitable for front screw fixing. 

Volume control device of GSS construction with black mat finish shall be provided. 

8. MISCELLANEOUS 

Sponge rubber gaskets also to be provided behind the flange of all grills. Each shoot from the 

duct, leading to a grille, shall be provided with an air deflector to divert the air into the grille 

through the shoot. Inspection doors measuring at least 450 mm x 450 mm are to be provided in 

each system at an appropriate location, as directed by Customer / consultant. 

Diverting vanes must be provided at the bends exceeding 600 mm and at branches connected 

into the main duct without a neck. Proper hangers and supports should be provided to hold the 

duct rigidly, to keep them straight and to avoid vibrations. Additional supports are to be 

provided where required for rigidity or as directed by Customer / consultant. All duct work joints 

are to be true right angle and with all sharp edges removed. 

9 PAINTING 



Page 46 of 74



NRDA 

All grilles, and diffusers shall be powder coated in color as approved by Architect / Consultant 

before installation. 

All ducts immediately behind the grilles / diffusers etc are to be given two coats of black paint in 

Matt finish. The return air and dummy portion of all linear grilles shall be provided with a vision 

barrier made of 24 gauge galvanised sheets. The vision barrier shall be fixed to the false ceiling 

frame with self tapping screws and shall be given two coats of black paint in matt finish. Care 

shall be taken to ensure that the return air path is not obstructed. 



Page 47 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSULATION 

1 SCOPE 

The scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of air 

terminals and dampers conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the 

requirement of drawings and ‘Schedule of Quantities’. 

2 MATERIAL 

Insulation material for Duct insulation shall be Closed Cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber. Thermal 

conductivity of elastomeric nitrile rubber shall not exceed 0.038 W/m o K or 0.313 Kcal/M hr o C or 

0.212 BTU/(Hr-ft 2 -°F/inch) at an average temperature of 30°C. The product shall have 

temperature range of –40°C to 105°C. Density of material shall not be less than 0.06 gm/cm 3 . 

The insulation shall have fire performance such that it passes minimum CLASS O as per BS476 

part 7 for surface spread of flame. Water vapour permeability shall not exceed 0.024 per inch (3 

x 10 –14 Kgs/m.sec.Pa). The material shall have approval from the Chief Fire Officer. 

Insulation material for Duct Acoustic Lining shall be resin bonded fibre glass. The thermal 

conductivity shall not exceed 0.034K Cal/(hr-sq.m-deg C/meter) or 0.23 BTU/(hr.sq.ft.-deg 

F)/inch) at 32 deg C (90 deg F) mean temperature and density shall be not less than 32 Kg/Cum. 

Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application. Each lot of 

insulation material delivered at site shall be accompanied with manufacturer test certificate for 

thermal conductivity values and density. Samples of insulation material from each lot delivered 

at site may be selected by Engineer in charge and gotten tested for thermal conductivity and 

density at Contractor’s cost All joints shall be sealed properly with adhesive, which shall provide 

similar vapour barrier as the original insulating material. 

3 APPLICATION 

3.1 Duct acoustic Lining: Thickness of the material shall be as specified for the individual application. 

Ducts so identified and marked on drawings and included in Schedule of Quantities shall be 

provided with acoustic lining of thermal insulation material for a distance of minimum 5 meters 

as follows: 

The inside surface for the ducts shall be cleaned, and provided with 22 gauge GI Channels 25 x 

25 mm screwed back to back and fixed on the inside of duct, spaced not more than 60 cm 

center to form a frame work of 60 x 60 cms square. Cut panels 60 x 60 cms of fiber 25 mm thick 

shall be fitted in the squares. The insulation panels shall be fired to the sheet metal with cold 

setting adhesive compound and covered with fibre glass tissue paper. 



Page 48 of 74



NRDA 

The inner most surfaces shall be covered with 28 gage perforated aluminium sheet having 

atleast 15 percent perforations. The aluminium sheet shall be screwed to GI channels using cup 

washer and neatly finished to give true inside surface. 

3.2 Duct Insulation: External thermal insulation shall be provided as follows: The thickness of closed 

cell shall be as shown on drawing or identified in the schedule of quantity. Following procedure 

shall be adhered to: 

• Duct surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all grease, oil, dirt, etc. prior to carrying out 

insulation work. Measurement of surface dimensions shall be taken properly to cut closed 

cell elastomeric rubber sheets to size with sufficient allowance in dimension. 

• Material shall be fitted under compression and no stretching of material shall be permitted. 

• A thin film of adhesive shall be applied on the back of the insulating material sheet and then 

on to the metal surface. When adhesive is tack dry, insulating material sheet shall be placed 

in position and pressed firmly to achieve a good bond. 

• All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed with adhesive SR 998 or equivalent. 

• 26 G GI Chicken wire mesh shall than be wrapped on the insulated duct to hold the 

insulation. 

3.3. FIRE BREAKS INSULATION 

Firebreaks shall be provided in all ducts for internal lining/external thermal insulation after a run 

of 10 m center to center. There shall be a discontinuity of the insulating material in the form of 

MS angle of a minimum of 50 mm x 50 mm x 3 mm size. At the interface of the MS angle and 

insulating material, proper care of tucking in of the insulating material shall be taken so as to 

prevent erosion. 



Page 49 of 74



NRDA 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK AND CABLING 

1. Scope: The scope of this section comprises of the supply, erection testing and commissioning of 

electrical switchgear and wiring installation. 

2. General: Work shall be carried out in accordance with the specifications, local rules, IE Act 1910 

as amended up to date and rules issued there under, regulations of the local fire insurance 

association and Indian Standards Code of Practice No. IS: 732-1963 or relevant BSS and CPWD 

General Specifications for Electrical work (Internal)-1977. For items of work not covered by any 

of the above regulations, wiring rules in the 13th Edition of the Institution of Electrical Engineer, 

London, shall apply. Definition of terms shall be as in the IEE Rules. 

3 MOTORS 

3.1 General: These specifications cover all types of motors used. The motor installation, wiring 

control shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the specification here-in-after laid down. 

3.2. Rating: The ratings of the motors shall be minimum as indicated in schedule of equipment and 

schedule of quantities. The rating shall be on the basis of ambient temperature and allowable 

maximum temperature rise as specified. 

Standards: All motors shall comply with IS: 325 in respect of general requirements and 

performance. Motors shall also conform to IS: 1231 or relevant BSS, IEC 72.1 for foot mounted 

motors and IS: 2223 or relevant BSS and IEC 72.2 for flange-mounted motors. 

In general, all the motors above 1 hp. shall be 3 phase unless otherwise specified, motors of 1 

hp of or below shall be either 3 phase or single phase as required. 

Motors shall run at all loads without appreciable noise or hum. Motors shall be one of the 

following design as specified: 

• Squirrel cage 

• Totally enclosed 

• Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 

Windings of motors shall be Class 'B' insulated and fully tropicalised. The insulating materials 

used shall not be liable for action of fungi or microbes. The insulation shall afford adequate 

protection against chemically aggressive gases and vapour as well as against conductive dust. 

Motors shall be rated for continuous duty as defined in IS 325 or relevant BSS. All motors shall 

have suitable torque characteristics as required by the duty of driven equipment. Motors shall 

be suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 HZ, AC supply. 

Motors shall be provided with a combination of ball and roller bearing. The roller bearing shall 

be fitted at the driving end and the ball bearing shall be fitted at the free end and shall have 

ample capacity to deal with ray axial thrust. The bearing shall be of standard cartridge type 

which effectively seals of dust and moisture. Suitable grease nipple shall be provided for regreasing 

the bearing. 



Page 50 of 74



NRDA 

Motors shall be provided with a cable box to suit aluminium conductor, PVC insulated, PVC 

sheathed and steel armored cable. 

Motors shall be so designed to operate successfully under the following conditions of voltage 

and frequency variation. 

• Where the voltage variation does not exceed 10% above or below normal 

• Where the frequency variation does not exceed 5% above or below normal 

• Where the sum of the voltage and frequency variation does not exceed 10% (provide the 

frequency variation does not exceed 5%) above or below normal. 

Motors, except fractional horse power motors of 1/8 hp. and below shall be provided with 

running over current protection, generally by means of a bimetallic thermal over load protective 

device incorporated in the starter panel. Motors starting current shall not exceed 600% of full 

load current 

The starting current of the motors shall be limited by using the following starters, as required. 

Type of Motors 

a) Squirrel cage motors upto 7.5 HP : Direct on line starters 

b) Squirrel cage motors of of 10 HP and above : Automatic Star/Delta starters. 

3.3 Motor Starters 

Motor starters shall be manufactured in accordance with IS:1882 or BS:587. The starters shall be 

totally enclosed, metal clad, dust and vermin proof construction. Unless otherwise specified, all 

starters shall be direct on lines, automatic star / delta, auto-transformer startor-rotor pattern as 

required. All starters shall be continuously rated and shall be of automatic contactor type. All 

starters shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 HZ. AC supply. 

Contactors shall be of the number and poles as required for appropriate duty. The making and 

breaking capacity of the contactor shall be as per category A-4 conforming to BS: 775. All the 

contacts shall be solid silver or silver faced and all the contactors and starter equipment shall be 

designed for not less than 40 operations per hour. Means shall be inherent in the starter for 

automatically disconnecting the starter from electricity supply in the event of interruption of 

supply, however, the contactor, and/or associated under voltage relays shall be suitable for 

voltage not lower than 25% below the normal supply voltage. Unless otherwise specified, all 

starters shall have integral 'Start / Stop' push buttons. Start push buttons shall be coloured 

green and shall be shrouded to prevent inadvertent operation. Stop push buttons shall have 

mushroom heads and coloured red. All push buttons operated contactors shall be provided with 

a maintenance/running contact. All remote control circuit taken from the starter shall operate 

at 230 volts or lower voltage. 

Motor starters shall be provided with thermal over load relay with adjustable settings, on each 

phase for three phase motor. The motors of 10 hp. and above shall be provided with current 

transformer operated thermal over load relays. The thermal overload relays shall have thermal 

characteristics suitable for the associated motor, its starting characteristics and suitable 

compensated for ambient air temperature variations. Single phase preventors shall be provided 

for all the three phase motors. Green, Red, amber indicating lamps shall be installed on each 



Page 51 of 74



NRDA 

starter to indicate open and close conditions of the contactors and fault conditions of motor as 

detected by the thermal overload relay. 

Thermal blocks with integral insulating barriers shall be provided for each starter. All the 

starters shall be provided with a schematic diagram on a durable material fixed permanently 

within each lid or cover. Starters shall be provided with sufficient extra N/O and N/C contacts for 

interlocks, indicating lamps etc. Automatic Star/Delta starters shall be provided with adjustable 

timers. 

3.4 Installation of Motors: Motors shall be mounted on a common foundation with the driven 

machine or equipment coupled through a flexible coupling or through belt drive. The drive 

arrangement shall be provided with a safety guard. Motors shall generally be provided with slide 

rails fixed to the base with nuts and bolts to facilitate belt installation and subsequent belt 

tensioning. Motors shall wired as per the detailed specifications and drawings. Motors shall be 

tested in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard / British Standard specifications and test 

certificates shall be furnished in triplicate. Motors shall be tested at site after erection for 

insulation resistance. All the motors, starters and frames shall be painted with two coats of 

synthetic enamel paint. 

4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE 

4.1 General: Motor control centre shall be provided and installed wherever specified for controlling 

motors. Motor control centre shall comprise of circuit breakers, switch fuses, starters, control 

and indicating equipment as specified. The motor control centre shall be totally enclosed metal 

clad, flush front and back, cubicle pattern suitable for front and rear access. The motor control 

centre shall conform to NEMA Class-I or Class-II as required. 

The MCC shall be constructed of high quality heavy gauge sheet steel stiffened and reinforced 

by a sturdy angle iron frame work. The steel sheets shall be taken to ensure that it is termite 

and vermin proof. The housing shall be sectionalized construction. All portions should be used 

for accommodating accessories as detailed above, according to the size of the equipment to be 

accommodated. 

The bus bars and connections shall consist of hard drawn high conductivity aluminium strip with 

PVC sleeves of appropriate phase colour. The bus bars shall be mounted edgewise on insulated 

bases which will permit sufficient movement for compensation of temperature stresses and also 

to withstand the electro-magnetic forces produced during short-circuits. The neutral bus bar 

shall be rated for 60% of the phase rating. 

The panel shall be powder coated battleship grey or any other approved colour. Name plates to 

indicate the equipment controlled through individuals switch fuse unit shall be fixed on the 

panels. 

4.2 Construction: Motor control centers shall be free standing type/wall mounted type with basic 

structure being fabricated out of 12 gauge / 14 gauge steel with reinforcing channels welded in 

place. All the doors shall be of 14 gauge steel. The enclosure of motor control centers shall be 

rigid and strong. The motor control centers shall have a bus bar chamber at the top or bottom 

and feeder compartments of modular dimensions in vertical section. Vertical bus bars 

connected to the main bus bars shall be located behind each vertical feeder compartment. 



Page 52 of 74



NRDA 

Individual compartments shall be of adjustable type and shall be of convertible design such that 

rating of feeder control units can be changed if required. Breaker and switch handles and 

starter push button shall be mounted on the devices and on the doors. Suitable screw and rawl 

device shall be provided on each compartment door for locking the doors in position. On the 

right hand side of each vertical feeder/control compartment, a vertical wire way cable shall be 

provided. Cable Alley wire ways shall be provided with separate doors. Cable doors shall be of 

bolted type or otherwise as specified. 

4.3 Bus bars: All bus bars shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 HZ, AC supply. Main and 

vertical bus bars shall be made of high conductivity aluminium. The thermal short circuit 

capacity of horizontal bars shall not be less than 45 KA rms, and that of vertical bus shall not be 

less than 37 KA rms. Bus bars shall be supported and braced at regular intervals on suitable 

insulating material such as hylam or permali. All the bus bars shall be adequately shrouded and 

isolated from unit compartments and wire ways. Special care shall be taken in the design of bus 

bars with regard to the safety aspects. Horizontal bus bars and horizontal wire ways shall be 

separated by non-metallic barrier (preferably fiber glass polyester of hylam). The vertical bus 

bars shall be isolated from unit/feeder/control compartments with non metallic barriers. 

4.4 Earthing: Entire motor control centre shall be provided with copper earth bus running 

throughout the length of the panel. In addition, a vertical earth bus shall also be provided in 

each vertical section to facilitate earthing of various feeder/Control compartment trolleys. 

Feeder compartment trolleys shall be provided with earth pin which make first and brakes after 

the main plug in contacts. Motor control centers shall be provided with 2 Nos. earthing bolts for 

connections to the local earth grid. 

4.5. Unit Compartments: Each compartment in a vertical section shall be provided with screw 

arrangement for jacking of the feeder trolleys. The trolleys shall be available in various modular 

dimensions. The movement of the feeder trolley shall be controlled by only the screw jacking 

arrangement. The feeder / control equipment shall be mounted on the vertical wall of the 

trolley and all the components of feeder / control equipment shall be easily accessible from the 

front. Plug in copper contacts of the trolley shall be provided with a locking arrangement such 

that the movement of the trolley can be prevented in both fully 'Plugged-in' and 'Isolated' 

position. It shall be possible to clamp the trolleys to the motor control centre structure when in 

fully plugged-in' position by a screw. All the equipment mounted in the compartment trolleys 

shall be marked with proper designation as per the drawings. 

Each feeder / control unit compartment shall be provided with an independent door. Unit doors 

shall be fastened to the stationary structure by a removable hinge. Unit doors shall be held 

closed by a slotted, knurled quarter fastener. Suitable padlocking arrangement shall also be 

provided. All units doors shall be provided with rubber gaskets. 

4.6. Interlocking arrangements: Motor control centers shall be provided with the following safety 

interlocks. 

a) All the switches / breakers shall be interlocked with door so that the unit cannot be 

closed unless the unit door is closed. This interlock shall also prevent opening the unit 

door unless the switch/breaker is in 'off'position. 

b) All the switches/breakers handles can be locked in 'ON/OFF' position. 

c) An integral operating handle shall be provided for each switch/breaker. The position of 

the breaker/switch shall be indicated by the operating handles. 



Page 53 of 74



NRDA 

4.7. Wiring: Control and auxiliary wiring shall be carried out with copper conductor, PVC insulated 

wires. Wiring shall be properly colour coded and laid out neatly in bunches and firmly fastened 

to the sides in the trolley. The terminations for conductors shall be done by crimping lugs on to 

the conductor ends. Suitable printed PVC ferrules shall be provided for easy, identification of 

wires. Power wiring from the unit switches / circuit breakers to the starters shall be carried out 

using Aluminium armoured conductor PVC insulated wires of adequate current ratings suitable 

for the equipment. The wiring shall be colour coded using red, yellow, blue and black for 3 phase 

and neutral respectively. All terminations shall be carried out by crimping lugs on to the 

conductor ends. The lugs shall be fastened to the equipment using suitable washes and screws. 

All the wiring shall be neatly bunched and fastened to the sides of the trolley. Wiring selection 

for power shall be done considering the effects of temperature rise, bunching. All conductors 

shall be provided with printed PVC ferrules for easy identification. 

4.8. Terminals Suitable fixed or plug and socket type terminals shall be provided for each 

compartment of MCC for terminating the power cables. The terminals shall be of adequate 

rating to suit aluminum conductor, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed armored cables. All the 

terminations shall be suitably numbered as per the wiring diagram. 

4.9 Enclosure and Surface Treatment Motor control centre shall be of dust and vermin proof 

construction suitable for indoor installation. Enclosure shall have degree of protection IP-54 as 

per IS: 2147 or relevant BSS. All doors shall have rubber gaskets. Adequate protection shall be 

provided so that ingress of dust and vermin moisture encountered in indoor installations shall 

not in any amount be sufficient to interfere with the satisfactory operation of the enclosed 

equipment. Sheet metal components and accessories of motor control centers shall be given a 

rigorous antirust treatment comprising of degreasing, hot dip phosphating before the primer 

paint is applied. The sheet metal shall then be stove enameled with enamel paint to the 

approved finish. The interior of the motor control centers shall be painted to an off white 

shade. 

4.10 Name Plate Motor control centers as well as their individual compartments shall be provided 

plastic or black anodized screwed name plates. 

4.11 Diagram: Each compartment of MCC shall be provided with a circuit diagram of its components 

and wiring and fixed on to the inner surface of door or lid. 

4.12 Painting All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold 

rinsing, phosphating, passivaiting (seven tank processing) and then painted with electrostatic 

paint (Powder coating). The shade of colour of panel inside/outside shall be as per relevant BIS 

code. 

4.13 Labels: Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder. Circuit 

diagram showing the arrangements of the circuit inside the control panel shall be pasted on 

inside of the panel door and covered with transparent plastic sheet. 

4.14 Drawings: Shop drawings for control panels and for wiring of equipment showing the route of 

conduit & cable shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of Engineer in charge before 

starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work. On completion, four sets of complete 

“As-installed” drawings incorporating all details like, conduits routes, number of wires in 



Page 54 of 74



NRDA 

conduit, location of panels, switches, junction/pull boxes and cables route etc. shall be furnished 

by the Contractor. 

5 SWITCHGEAR 

5.1 General: All material shall be of the best quality complying with the appropriate IS / BS 

specification and shall conform to the list of makes given in the tender. Materials used shall be 

subjected to the approval of engineer in charge and samples of the same shall be furnished 

where required. All switchgear shall be suitable for a system short circuit capacity of 35 MVA at 

415 volts. The isolators / HRC switch fuse units shall be of the heavy duty pattern with a quick 

make and break down. The isolators/HRC switch fuse units shall be able to carry rated current 

continuously without excessive temperature rise or softening of welding of contacts. Provision 

shall be made for the incoming and outgoing conduits or cable entries as required. 

5.2 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) All MCCB’s shall be motor duty and Current Limiting 

type and comprise of preferably Double Break Contact system, arc extinguishing device and the 

tripping unit shall be contained in a compact, high strength, heat resistant, flame retardant, 

insulating moulded case with high withstand capability against thermal and mechanical stresses. 

All MCCB’s shall be capable of defined Variable overload adjustment. All MCCB’s rated 200 

Amps and above shall have adjustable Magnetic short circuit pick up. The trip command shall 

override all other commands. The breaking capacity of MCCB’s shall be asked for in the schedule 

of quantities. The breaking capacities specified will be ICU=ICS i.e type-2 Co-ordination as per 

relevant BIS and IEC Codes. The MCCB’s shall be provided with rotary handle operating 

mechanism. In case of 4 pole MCCB the neutral shall be defined and capable of offering 

protection. 

5.3 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) Miniature Circuit Breaker shall comply with relevant BIS Codes 

and shall be quick make and break type for 230/415 VAC 50 Hz application with magnetic 

thermal release for over current and short circuit protection. The breaking capacity shall not be 

less than 10 KA at 415 VAC. MCBs shall be DIN mounted. The MCB shall be Current Limiting type 

(Class-3). The housing shall be heat resistant and having high impact strength. The terminals 

shall be protected against finger contact to IP20 Degree of protection. All DP, TP and TPN 

miniature circuit breakers shall have a common trip bar independent to the external operating 

handle. 

5.4 Current Transformers: Current transformers shall be provided for Control panels carrying 

current in excess of 60 amps. All phase shall be provided with current transformers of suitable 

VA burden with 5 amps secondaries for operation of associated metering. The CTs shall confirm 

to relevant Indian Standards. The design and construction shall be dry type, epoxy resin cast 

robust to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short circuits. Secondary terminals of 

CTs shall be brought out suitable to a terminal block which shall be easily accessible for testing 

and terminal connections. The protection CTs shall be of accuracy class 5P10 and measurement 

CTs shall be of accuracy class I. 

5.5 Selector Switch: Where called for, selector switches of rated capacity shall be provided in 

control panels, to give the choice of operating equipment in selective mode. 



Page 55 of 74



NRDA 

5.6 Starters: Each motor shall be provided with a starter of suitable rating. Starters shall be in 

accordance with relevant IS Codes. All Star Delta shall be fully automatic. 

5.7 Contactor: Contactor shall be built into a high strength thermoplastic body and shall be provided 

with an arc shield for quick arc extinguishing. Silver alloy tips shall be provided to ensure a high 

degree of reliability and endurance under continuous operation. The magnet system shall 

consist of laminated yoke and armature to ensure clean operation without hum or chatter. 

Starters contactors shall have 3 main and 2 Nos. NO / NC auxiliary contacts and shall be air break 

type suitable for making and breaking contact at minimum power factor of 0.35. For design 

consideration of contactors the starting current of connected motor shall be assumed to be 

6times the full load current of the motor in case of direct-on-line starters and 3 times the full 

load current of the motor in case of Star Delta and Reduced Voltage Starters. The insulation for 

contactor coils shall be of Class “E”. Coil shall be tape wound vacuum impregnated and shall be 

housed in a thermostatic bobbin, suitable for tropical conditions and shall withstand voltage 

fluctuations. Coil shall be suitable for 220/415±10% volts AC, 50 cycles AC supply. 

5.8 Thermal Overload Relay: Thermal over load relay shall have built in phase failure sensitive 

tripping mechanism to prevent against single phasing as well as on overloading. The relay shall 

operate on the differential system of protection to safeguard against three phase overload, 

single phasing and unbalanced voltage conditions. Auto-manual conversion facility shall be 

provided to convert from auto-reset mode to manual-reset mode and vice-versa at site. 

Ambient temperature compensation shall be provided for variation in ambient temperature 

from -5° C to +55°C. All overload relays shall be of three element, positive acting ambient 

temperature compensated time lagged thermal over load relays with adjustable setting. Relays 

shall be directly connected for motors upto 35 HP capacity. C.T. operated relays shall be 

provided for motors above 35 HP capacity. Heater circuit contactors may not be provided with 

overload relays. 

5.9 Time Delay Relays: Time delay relays shall be adjustable type with time delay adjustment from 

0-180 seconds and shall have one set of auxiliary contacts for indicating lamp connection. 

5.10 Indicating Lamp and Metering: All meters and indicating lamps shall be in accordance with BS 

37 and BS39. The meters shall be flush mounted type. The indicating lamp shall be of low 

wattage. Each MCC and control panel shall be provided with voltmeter 0-500 volts with three 

way and off selector switch, CT operated ammeter of suitable range with three nos. CTS of 

suitable ratio with three way and off selector switch, phase indicating lamps, and other 

indicating lamps as called for. Each phase indicating lamp shall be backed up with 5 amps fuse. 

Other indicating lamps shall be backed up with fuses as called for in Schedule of Quantities. 

5.11 Toggle Switch: Toggle switches, where called for in Schedule of Quantities, shall be in conformity 

with relevant IS Codes and shall be of 5 amps rating. 

5.12 Push Button Stations: Push button stations shall be provided for manual starting and stopping 

of motors / equipment Green and Red colour push buttons shall be provided for ‘Starting’ 

and ‘Stopping’ operations. ‘Start’ or ‘Stop’ indicating flaps shall be provided for push buttons. 

Push Buttons shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front without opening 



Page 56 of 74



NRDA 

door, Lock lever shall be provided for ‘Stop’ push buttons. The push button contacts shall be 

suitable for 6 amps current capacity. 

6 ELECTRICAL CABLING AND WIRING 

6.1 Wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and armored cables. Wiring shall 

be suitable for a 3 phase, 50 Cycles, 4 wire supply with 415 volts between phases and 230 volts 

between phase and neutral. The voltage and frequency of supply shall be subjected to 

variations permissible under the Indian Electricity Act and Rules. 

6.2 Cable Laying Cable shall be laid generally in accordance with Indian Standard Code of Practice. 

Cables shall be laid in trenches or buried or carried on walls as stated in the schedule, indicated 

on the drawings. Where more than one cable is running, proper spacing shall be provided to 

minimise the loss in current carrying capacity. Cable racks and trays shall be provided wherever 

specified. Cables shall be suitably supported with angle iron clamps mounted on MS supports 

when run on walls. The distance between supports shall not be more than 0.5 Meter. Special 

care shall be taken to ensure that the cables are not damaged at bends. The radius of bends of 

the cable when installed shall be sufficiently large to ensure that no undue stress is caused on 

the insulation / conductor. Where cables pass through pipes, wooden / PVC bushes shall be 

provided at the ends. When these pass through floors or walls the cable holes shall be sealed in 

a manner approved by Owner. 

6.3. Equipment Wiring Final connections to the equipment shall be through flexible wiring 

particularly for equipment mounted on guide rails and which are liable to be moved. 

6.4 Earthing shall be as per IS: 3043 - 1963 in all respects. The earth station shall consist of GI pipe 

and accessories as per IS: 3043. The connection between earth plate and main earth bar shall be 

by means of 3 Nos. 3/8" brass bolts and nuts. These bolts shall be fixed atleast 4" apart. The 

earthing station shall be preferably located in a grassy lawn/near flower beds / near water taps. 

These shall be kept atleast 2 meter away from the foundation of the building or outer face of 

the building. The distance between earth stations shall be atleast 5 meters. No earth electrode 

shall have greater ohmic resistance than 0.5 ohms as measured with approved earth testing 

equipment. In case of rocky soil, it may be relaxed to 0.8 ohms. 

All switches/isolators shall be connected to the earth and size of earth conductor shall be 

depending upon the size of the cable connected with the switch / isolator: 

Cross sectional area of current carrying conductor 

size of earth copper conductor (SWG) 

1. 4/ 6/10 8 

2. 16/25/35 6 

3. 50/70/95 4 

4. 120/150/185/225/240 25x3mm strip 

5. 300/400 40x5mm strip 

6.5 Control/Indication/Interlocking wiring The control/indication/interlocking wiring shall be done 

with 1.5 sq.mm PVC insulated and PVC sheathed copper conductor cables of 2/3/4/6 cores as 

per requirement. All the machines as detailed in the drawing shall be remote controlled at the 

main panel board through push buttons (ON/OFF Buttons). All the machines shall have 

red/green lamp indicators to shown the working/off position of individual machined. An 

electrical interlocking shall be provided for safe running of refrigeration machines i.e. the 



Page 57 of 74



NRDA 

refrigeration machine shall only start after CT fans, condenser water pumps, chiller water pumps 

have started working. Control wiring for individual fan coil units shall be done with 2.5 sq.mm 

copper conductor single core cables drawn in recessed conduit. 

6.6 Conduits: Conduits and Accessories shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. Wall thickness 

shall be 16 gauge upto 32 mm dia and 14 gauge above 32 mm dia conduit. Screwed G.I. conduits 

shall be used. Joints between conduits and accessories shall be securely made, to ensure earth 

continuity. All conduit accessories shall be threaded type only. All raw metal shall be painted 

with bitumastic paint. Only approved make of conduits and accessories shall be used. Conduits 

shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each length of conduit shall 

bear the label of the manufacturer. 

The minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 sq. mm PVC insulated stranded soft drawn 

copper conductor wires drawn through conduit to be provided for connecting equipment and 

control panels. Power cabling shall be of the following sizes: 

Horse power of motor 

Size of conductor 

Upto 5 HP motors 

3 x 4 sq. mm. (copper) 

From 6 HP to 10 HP motors 3 x 6 sq. mm (copper) 

From 12.5 HP to 15 HP motors 2 Nos. 3 x 6 sq. mm (copper) 

From 20 HP to 25 HP motors 2 Nos. 3 x 10 sq. mm (copper) 

All the switches, contactors, push button stations, indicating lamps shall be distinctly marked 

with a small description of the service installed. The capacity contactors and overload relays 

shall be provided for different capacity motors as per manufacturer’s recommendation. 

Two speed motors when specified, shall be provided with DOL starter irrespective of it rating. 

7 Completion Drawings: Four sets of completion drawings giving single line diagram run of cables 

location along with detail wiring panels, indication/interlocking circuits cable with sizes with in 

the building/under ground cables showing the location of straight through joint boxes, location 

of main earthing stations shall be furnished within one month from the date of completion of 

the work. 

8. Testing: Before the commissioning of the plant, the entire installation shall be tested in 

accordance with Guide of practice IS: 732-1963 or relevant BSS and the test report furnished by 

the qualified and authorized person. The electrical installation shall be got passed from local 

Electrical Inspector. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of Engineer in charge. 

9 Rubber Mat: Rubber mat shall be provided in front to cover the full length of all panels. Where 

back space is provided for working from the rear of the panel, rubber mat shall also be provided 

to cover the full length of panel. 



Page 58 of 74



NRDA 

SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA 

1 AIR WASHING UNIT 

1.1 General 

a. Manufacturer 

b. Type of unit (draw-thru/blow thru) 

c. Material and thickness of casing (inner/outer) 

d. Material and thickness of drain pan. 

e. Material and thickness of sandwiched insulation for drain pan 

f. Type of flexible connection 

g. Type of vibration isolator 

1.2 Fan Section. 

a. Manufacturer. 

b. Type of fan 

d. Material and thickness of fan wheel blades 

e. Material and thickness of housing. 

f. Confirm statically and dynamically balanced 

g. Type of bearings. 

h. Fan RPM 

1.3 Motors 


b. Type 

c. Electrical characteristics (±10% voltage variation) 

d. Motor speed (RPM) 



Page 59 of 74



NRDA 

e. Motor Efficiency 

f. Class of Insulation 

1.4 Cooling Pad 

a 

b 

c 

d 

Manufacturer 

Material of construction 

Thickness of pad 

Saturation efficiency 

1.5 Air Filters 


b. Type of filters 

c. Filter medium 

d. Pressure drop across filters (mm. of water) / Clean & Dirty 

e. Efficiency 

1.6 Pumps 

a. Manufacturer & Model. 

b. Type 

c. Capacity (USGPM) 

d. Head (ft.) 

e. Efficiency (%) 

f. Pump (RPM) 

g. Motor (HP) 

j. Electrical characteristics (±10% voltage variation). 

l. Motor efficiency and class of insulation. 

m 

Full load current (Amps) 



Page 60 of 74



NRDA 

n 

o 

Starting current (Amps) 

Locked rotor current on full load (Amps) 

p. Impeller material 

q. Type of water seals. 

r. Vibration isolation 

s. Operating weight (Kg) 

1.7 AIR WASHING UNITS (OPERATING DATA) 

a) AWU No. 

b) Air Qty (Cfm) 

c) SP (Mm) 

d) Pad Face Area (Sft) 

e) Face Vel (Fpm) 

f) Filter Face Vel (Fpm) 

g) Fan Outlet Vel (Fpm) 

h) Thickness Of Pad 

i) Fan Motor (Hp) 

j) Overall Dimensions Lxwxh (Metres) 

k) Operating Weight 

2 CENTRIFUGAL/VANEAXIAL FANS/ INLINE FANS 

2.1 GENERAL 


b. Type 

c. Bearings 



Page 61 of 74



NRDA 

d. Casing Material 

e. Impeller Material 

f. Shaft Material 

g. Vibration Isolators 

h. Fan Size and Model 

j. Fan speed 

k. Fan efficiency 

l. Noise level 

m. Motor 

i. manufacturer 

ii. type 

iii. operating speed 

iv. motor efficiency and class of insulation. 

v. Electrical Characteristics (±10% voltage variation). 

vi. Type of starter & manufacturer 

p. Type of drive 

q. Material of flexible connection 

r. Type of vibration isolators 

2.3 OPERATING DATA 

a) Fan Model 

b) Fan CFM 

c) Fan Outlet Velocity (FPM) 

d) SP (mm) 



Page 62 of 74



NRDA 

e) Fan RPM 

f) BHP 

g) Limit Load HP 

h) Motor (HP) 

i) Full Load Current (Amps) 

j) Starting Current (Amps) 

3 PROPELLER FANS 


b. Motor HP 

c. Capacitors provided. 

d. Speed Regulator for single phase fans 

e. Gravity louvers 

f. Single phase preventor for 3 phase fans 

g. Back draft damper. 

h. Bird Screen 

j. Wire guard 

4 Make and model of following controls / instruments. 

a. Float switch 

d. Flow switch 

e. Airstat 

f. Pressure gauge 

g. Thermometer 

h. Static pressure gauge 



Page 63 of 74



NRDA 

j. Thermometer 

5 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES 

Make of the following : 

a. Motor Control Centre (Electrical Panel) 

b. MCCB 

c. MCB 

d. Rotary switch 

e 

Automatic Star Delta Starter 

f. Direct on line Starter 

g. Contactor 

h. Current Transformer (cast resin type) 

i. Single phase preventor 

j 

k 

Push Button 

Change over switch 

l. Ammeter & Voltmeter 

m. Relay 

n. Indication lamp 

o. Cables 

p. Wires 

6. WATER PIPING 

a. Make of pipes / class of pipes 

b. Pipe Wall thickness 

c. Pressure Gauge 



Page 64 of 74



NRDA 

i. Make 

ii. 

iii. 

Range 

Dial Size 

d. Thermometer 

i. Make 

ii. 

iii. 

Range 

Dial Size 

7 GALVANISED STEEL SHEETS 

a. Make 

b. Thickness/Gage 

c. Class of Galvanising 

8. GRILLES / DIFFUSERS / DAMPERS 

Make, material and gauge of the following : 

a. Fire damper, rating, make of damper motor 

b. Smoke damper, rating, make of damper motor 

c. Grilles/Diffuser 

d 

Duct Damper 

e. FA Damper 

f. Access Panel. 

9 INSULATION 


b. Duct acoustic lining material & density 

c. Duct insulation material & density 



Page 65 of 74



NRDA 

d. Pipe insulation material & density 

10. VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEM 


b. Type 

c. Deflection 

11. TESTING AND BALANCING EQUIPMENT 

Furnish below the complete list to be used on this Project. 



Page 66 of 74



NRDA 

PREAMBLE TO MODE OF MEASUREMENT 

1 All equipment described hereafter shall be in accordance with the specifications. All equipment 

shall be selected and installed for the lowest Operating noise level. 

2 Supply of various equipment shall include all expenses for correspondence with 

manufacturers, submission of shop drawings, documents and their approval by the Consulting 

Engineer, procurement of equipment, transportation, shipping, payment of all taxes and levies, 

storage, supply of equipment at the point of installation, furnishing all 

technical literature required, replacement of defective components, and warranty obligations 

for the individual equipment. 

3 Installation of various equipment shall include all material and labour associated with hoisting 

and lowering of equipment in position, insulation of the components and vibration isolation as 

required, grouting and anchoring or suspension arrangements and all incidentals associated with 

the installation as per the specifications and manufacturer's recommendation. 

4 Vibration isolators as specified or as recommended by the manufacturer shall be installed 

with each component. Performance ratings, power consumption and power data for each 

component shall be verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation, against 

the data submitted with the tenders. 

5. Shop coats of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off 

with mineral spirit, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with 

enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surfaces. 

6. Testing and commissioning shall include furnishing all labour, materials, equipments, 

instruments, and incidentals necessary for complete testing of each component as per the 

specifications and manufacturer's recommendations, submission of test results to the 

Consulting Engineer and obtaining their approval and submission of necessary documents and 

completion drawings. 

7 All ducts shall be fabricated and installed conforming to the relevant Indian standards, approved 

shop drawings and the specifications. 

8. Duct installation shall include fabricating and installing the ducts, splitter dampers, turning 

vanes, and distribution grids within the ducts in position, and providing, installing and making air 

tight all joints with slips, bonded felt insertions, nuts, bolts and screws as required. In addition 



Page 67 of 74



NRDA 

multi-louvered manually adjustable dampers shall be provided in various branch ducts as 

required or shown on drawings for proper balancing of air flows. 

9 All registers and diffusers shall be provided with a soft continuous rubber gasket between 

their periphery and the surface on which these have to be mounted. 

10 Registers and diffusers shall be given, at the factory, a rust resistant primer coat and enamel 

paint finish of approved colour. 

11 After completion of the installation, the entire air distribution system shall be tested for air leaks 

and balanced in accordance with the specifications. 



Page 68 of 74



NRDA 

MODE OF MEASUREMENT 

1 Measurement of Equipment: 

• VRV/ VRF/ ductable unit – to include compressor, condenser, controls, motor etc on skid 

mounted platform complete factory assembled including chiller insulation and standard 

accessories as supplied by the OEM. – Unit nos. 

• Indoor units and cassette type FCU – to include blower with motor, casing, Unit nos. 

• Electrical Panel: Panels shall be counted as number of units. Quoted rates shall include as 

lumpsum for all internal wiring, earthing connections within panel box. The quoted rate of 

panel shall also include all accessories, switchgear, contactors, indicating meters and lights 

as per the Specifications and Schedule of Quantities. 

2 Measurements for Ducting: All ducts fabricated and installed should be accompanied and 

supported by proper documentation. Bill of material / Packing list for every duct section 

supplied. Measurement sheet covering each fabricated duct piece showing dimensions and 

external surface area along with summary of external surface area of duct gauge-wise. Each and 

every duct piece to have a tag number, which should correspond to the serial number, assigned 

to it in the measurement sheet. The above system will ensure speedy and proper site 

measurement and verification. Unless otherwise specified, measurements for ducting for the 

project shall be on the basis of centerline measurements described herewith. Ductwork shall be 

measured on the basis of external surface area of ducts. Duct measurements shall be taken 

before application of the insulation. The external surface area shall be calculated by measuring 

the perimeter comprising overall width and depth, including the corner joints, in the center of 

each duct section, multiplying with the overall length from flange face to flange face of each 

duct section and adding up areas of all duct sections. Plenums shall also be measured in a similar 

manner. For tapered rectangular ducts, the average width and depth shall be considered for 

perimeter, whereas for tapered circular ducts, the diameter of the section midway between 

large and small diameter shall be adopted, the length of tapered duct section shall be the 

centerline distance between the flanges of the duct section. For special pieces like bends, tees, 

reducers, branches and collars, mode of measurement shall be identical to that described above 

using the length along the centerline. The quoted unit rate for external surface of ducts shall 

include all wastage allowances, flanges and gaskets for joints, nuts and bolts, hangers and angles 

with double nuts for supports, rubber strip 5mm thick between duct and support, vibration 

isolator suspension where specified or required. The following accessories will be part of ducting 

and shall NOT be separately measured nor paid for 

• inspection chamber / access panel, 

• splitter damper with quadrant and lever for position indication, 

• turning vanes, 

• straightening vanes 

• all other accessories required to complete the duct installation as per the specifications. 



Page 69 of 74



NRDA 

3 Air Distribution accessories shall be measured by the cross-section area perpendicular to air 

flow, as identified herewith: 

• Grilles and registers - width multiplied by height, excluding flanges. 

• Volume control dampers - width multiplied by height, excluding flanges 

• Diffusers - cross section area for air flow at discharge area, excluding flanges. 

• Fire dampers - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular to the direction 

of air flow. Quoted rates shall include the necessary collars and flanges for mounting, 

inspection pieces with access door, electrical actuators and panel. No special allowance 

shall be payable for extension of cross section outside the air stream. 

• Flexible connection - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular to the 

direction of air flow. Quoted rates shall include the necessary mounting arrangement, 

flanges, nuts and bolts and treated-for-fire requisite length of canvas cloth. 

• Motorised Volume control damper - width multiplied by height, excluding flanges. 

• Exhaust air / Fresh air Louvers - shall be measured by their cross sectional area 

perpendicular to the direction of air flow. 

4 Measurement of Duct Insulation: Unless otherwise specified measurement for duct insulation 

for the project shall be on the basis of centre line measurements described herewith Duct 

Insulation shall be measured on the basis of surface area along the centre line of insulation 

thickness. Thus the surface area of externally thermally insulated or acoustically lined be based 

on the perimeter comprising centre line (of thickness of insulation)width and depth of the cross 

section of insulated or lined duct, multiplied by the centre-line length including tapered pieces, 

bends, tees, branches, etc. as measured for bare ducting. 

5 Measurement For Piping: Unless specified otherwise, measurement for piping for the project 

shall be on the basis of centre line measurements described herewith Piping shall be measured 

in units of length along the centre line of installed pipes including all pipe fittings, flanges (with 

gaskets, nuts, and bolts for jointing), unions, bends, elbows, tees, concentric and / or eccentric 

reducers, inspection pieces, expansion loops etc. The above accessories shall be measured as 

part of piping length along the centre line of installed pipes, and no special multiples of pipe 

lengths for accessories shall be permitted. The quoted rates for centre line linear 

measurements of piping shall include all wastage allowances, pipe supports including 

hangers, MS channel, PUF supports, nuts, check nuts, vibration isolator suspension where 

specified or required, and any other item required to complete the piping installation as per 

the Specifications. None of these items will be separately measured nor paid for. However, all 

valves (gate / globe / check / balancing / purge / butterfly / drain etc), strainers, thermometers, 

pressure gages shall be separately counted and paid as per their individual unit rates, which 

shall also include their insulation as per Specifications. Piping measurements shall be taken 

before application of the insulation. Contractor shall get pressure testing of pipes / 

measurements etc verified by the representative of Engineer in charge at site. 



Page 70 of 74



NRDA 

6 Measurement of Pipe Insulation: Pipe Insulation shall be measured in units of length along the 

centre line of the installed pipe, strictly on the same basis as the piping measurements 

described earlier. The linear measurements shall be taken before the application of the 

insulation. It may be noted that for piping measurement, all valves, orifice plates and strainers 

are separately measurable by their number and size. It is to be clearly understood that for 

the insulation measurements, all these accessories including cladding, valves, orifice plates and 

strainers shall be considered strictly by linear measurements along the centre line of pipes 

and no special rate shall be applicable for insulation of any accessories, fixtures or fittings 

whatsoever. 

7 Measurement of cabling: All power cabling, control cabling and earthing the same shall be 

measured for actual length and paid as per the unit rates available in the tender quotes. 



Page 71 of 74



NRDA 

INSPECTION AND TESTING PROCEDURES 

All major equipments such as VRV/VRF, Air handling units, panels, fans shall be got inspected by the 

engineer in charge / customer at works by the AC contractor, if he so desires. All routine and Type tests 

shall be carried out and the test reports shall be submitted for approval before dispatch. The engineer in 

charge is free to witness any or all tests. In any case the OEM test certificates shall be submitted to the 

engineer in charge for verification of the same before the payments for the same can be processed. The 

AC contractor shall inform the engineer in charge well in time about the date of readiness of the 

equipment for inspection and testing. The inspection process shall be as under: 

Equipment like VRV/VRF units, Ductable units, fans, Indoor units 

• Salient features such as model and make shall be checked as per the contract requirement and shall 

be related with name plate/performance curves. 

• The manufacturer’s test certificate shall be furnished and verified. 

• The test certificates shall be correlated with the equipment serial no. 

Electric Motor 

• The motor shall be of approved make. The OEM’s test certificates shall be furnished and verified 

with the name plate and serial no. The requirement shall be as per technical dat submitted. 

Pipes 

• Make, wall thickness for the pipe shall be checked at random for 5% of pipe lengths and shall be 

correlated with relevant IS codes. 

Ducting 

• The GI sheet to be used shall be physically checked for gauge as per IS 277. The bend test shall be 

performed at site. Randomly one sample of each gauge shall be checked chemically for composition 

and galvanizing by a reputed lab and report shall be submitted before starting work at site. 

Insulation 

• All type of insulation material shall be physically checked for quality, thickness as per tender 


• The samples shall be checked for density at site. The same shall be correlated with the OEM test 

certificates. 

• The material shall be having required thermal conductivity which will be verified from TC. 

Final Inspection 

After completion of entire installation as per specifications in all respects, the AC contractor shall 

demonstrate trouble free operation of the entire installation simultaneously. The test readings shall be 

recorded in a mutually acceptable format. All tests shall be carried out by the AC contractor at his own 



Page 72 of 74



NRDA 

expenses. However necessary utilities such as power and water shall be provided by the owner free of 

cost. The tests shall include but will not be limited to the following: 

• To check satisfactory functioning of all equipment installed 

• Clean all equipment to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust with Vacuum cleaner. 

• Verify that the equipment is secure on mounting and supporting devices and that connections for 

piping, ductwork and electrical are complete. 

• Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 

• Perform cleaning and adjusting specified as per OEM. 

• Check proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel / pump free rotation and smooth 

bearing operations. 

• Reconnect drive system and align belts. 

• Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory recommended lubricants. 

• Set outside-air / supply air dampers to minimum outside-air setting. 

• Install temporary throw away filters for initial run and finally install clean filters. 

• Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire dampers in connected ductwork system are in 

the full-open position. 

• Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 

• Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 

• Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators. 

• Cooling / heating capacity of various Indoor units shall be computed from the measurements of air 

flow and dry and wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow measurements 

shall be by a calibrated rotating vane anemometer and temperature measurements by accurately 

calibrated mercury-in-glass thermometers. Computed ratings shall conform to the specified 

capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of 

incoming voltage and input current, whereas, noise level at various locations within the conditioned 

spaces shall be measured by a sound pressure level meter. 

NOTE: 

• All measuring instruments such as thermometer, Psychrometer, Pressure gauges, anemometers, 

Flowmeter, dB Meter, Tong tester, etc or any other necessary instrument shall be arranged by the 

AC contractor at his own expense. 

• The instruments shall be new and shall have a valid calibration certificate from a renowned test lab. 

• The plant shall be run initially and all equipments shall be adjusted to give desired results as per 

contract. Thereafter the plant shall be test run for 96 hours as described above and the readings 

shall be demonstrated in the required format. The test shall be witnessed by the owners and 

engineer in charges representative. In case the conditions are not achieved during the initial run test 

the plant shall be readjusted and the new dates for tests shall be determined. The entire test shall 

be repeated and satisfactory results shall have to be obtained. Only after satisfactory test the 

installation shall be taken over by the customer and warranty period for one year shall commence. 

• The test readings shall be suitably adjusted for the absence of Peak ambient conditions, fouling 

factor, and available load. 



Page 73 of 74



NRDA 

• The snag list prepared jointly after initial test shall be attended to by the vendor during a maximum 

of 30 days from the start of warranty period. Failure to do so shall result in corresponding increase 

of warranty period. 



Page 74 of 74



NRDA 



Page 75 of 74

NRDA F-1-Schedule-D- Section-IV –SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

Section-IV 

Special Conditions of Contract 

Signature of Contractor…………………… 

Signature of NRDA…………………………… 

Page 1 of 36



NRDA 

Special Conditions of Contract 

1. GENERAL 

The Special Conditions of Contract are to be read in conjunction with General Conditions of 

Contract. If there are any variations or discrepancies or conflicting provisions, the provisions 

in Special Conditions shall take precedence over the provisions in the General Conditions of 

Contract. 

All additional facilities/equipment/ office etc to be provided by the contractor, as mentioned in 

the tender, document outside the BOQ shall not be paid separately, and shall be deemed to have 

been included in the rates quoted by the contractor. 

2. ACCESS 

The Contractors are to verify the work site details including:- 

a) Access, 

b) Availability of water supply and electrical energy, 

c) Space for dumping stores and materials and 

d) Space for erection of site office, 

The Contractors are deemed to have catered for all contingencies connected with the site, 

access, water & electricity. 

3. SUPPLY OF WATER 

Water will not be supplied by NRDA and the Contractor shall make his own 

arrangements. NRDA will give recommendatory letter to the concerned authority if so 

requested by the Contractor. However, NRDA shall be in no way responsible for obtaining 

permission and no claim on account of this will be entertained. 

4. ELECTRIC SUPPLY 

(a) Electric power both for construction and lighting shall not be made available to 

contractor. Contractor shall arrange at his own cost power with necessary switch boards, 

energy meter etc. and shall be responsible for their maintenance. 

(b) Further distribution by the Contractor at his cost shall be done as per approved layout. He 

shall provide required clearances for overhead lines to facilitate easy movement of heavy 

machinery such as cranes etc. These shall be shifted and rerouted at Contractors cost during 

execution of work if the same are found to obstruct any other work of any agency working at 

site or requires shifting due to unforeseen reasons. 

(c) On completion of the work the Contractor shall remove all wiring installed by him 

and make good to the satisfaction of Engineer if any disturbance or damage is done. 

(d) The Contractor shall employ an Electrical Agency as approved by the Engineer for carrying 

out this work. 



Page 2 of 36



NRDA 

(e) The Contractor has to keep alternative arrangement ready at his own cost for 

any failure/interruption of electric power that takes place and under no 

circumstances can this be deemed to be reason for any consequential delay in the 

works. 

(f) 

Any disputes in sharing of power obtained directly/ indirectly from CSEB with 

other agencies shall be resolved by the contractor at his risk and cost. NRDA shall 

not be responsible or a party for such disputes. 

5. DEFECT LIABILITY 

The Contractor shall be responsible for rectification of defects, during the defect liability 

period as per clause 17 of GCC after the certified date of completion by the NRDA. This 

period shall be known as Defects Liability period as defined in CL. No. 17 of the General 

Conditions of Contract. Subsequent to the taking over of the works and after it has 

been in use, its removal/correction of defects would be the responsibility of the 

Contractor. Any defects or failures during this period shall be rectified by Contractor 

within one week of intimation in writing. If the same is not carried out in the stipulated 

time, NRDA shall have the right to get it repaired departmentally or through any other 

agency, entirely at the risk and costs of the Contractor as detailed in the GCC clause. No. 

17. 

6. SAMPLES 

6.1 Material 

(a) The Contractor shall furnish to Engineer for approval, with reasonable 

promptness and with reasonable time for consideration, adequate numbers of 

samples of all the materials to be used in the work, irrespective of whether 

material/product is from approved list given in tender. He shall permit and account 

for all costs in his quotation toward supply, testing, examination at site or at any 

approved place by the Engineer. The choice of approval of materials rests with NRDA 

unless otherwise specified. 

(b) All material samples shall be delivered to the Engineer's office at the 

Contractor's cost. Each sample shall be in duplicate and properly labeled as under- 

‣ Name of Project 

‣ Name of Contractor 

‣ Name of Product 

‣ Name of Manufacturer 

‣ Item reference of BOQ 

‣ Date of Submission 

(c) Samples shall be accompanied with technical specifications / catalogues / test 

results of manufacturer. 



Page 3 of 36



NRDA 

(d) In case the Contractor intends to keep an approved sample in his possession, 

he shall submit additional set of samples for Engineer's approval. 

6.2 Standards of Acceptability 

(a) In order to establish the standards of acceptability for materials and finishes, the 

Contractor shall finish in all respect a mock up for each pro-type room. The 

material used in this shall be as approved and special attention shall be paid to 

establish the workmanship and finishing standards to be achieved for the project. 

Works such as form finished concrete & finishing items such as joinery, floor finishes, 

false ceiling, wall finishes, toilets including sanitary fittings and fixtures, electric 

fitting and fixtures etc. shall be provided as per drawings and specifications. All 

mock-ups, except for exposed concrete finish to be made within the building 

blocks. For exposed concrete finish a maximum of 3 (three) mock-ups (approx. 36 

(thirty six) SqM each), independent of the main building block shall be 

prepared for approval jointly by C E & Architect. 

(b) 

The Contractor shall give notice in writing in this respect and shall obtain 

approval through Engineer in Charge from the CE NRDA. Approval should be taken 

well in advance so as not to delay execution of work. 

7. TESTING OF MATERIALS IN OTHER LABORATORY 

In addition to establishing testing a full fledged site laboratory, 10 % (ten percent) of the 

samples shall be sent every month for testing in one of the following laboratory:- 

i) Chief Engineer (PWD) Laboratory, Raipur 

ii) National Institute of Technology, Raipur 

iii) Govt. Engineering College, Raipur 

iv) B.I.T., Durg 

v) Sriram Test House N. Delhi 

vi) National Test House N. Delhi 

7.1 In case, certain testing facility for typical/ special materials are not 

available in Chhattisgarh, then it can be tested at a recognized laboratory 

anywhere in India. 

7.2 All testing charges for the above shall be borne by the Contractor. In 

case, the testing charges demanded by the testing authorities is not paid by 

the Contractor within 15 (fifteen) days, then the same will be paid by NRDA with 

due recovery from the Contractor's bill for the project. 

8. CRECHE FACILITIES FOR THE CHILDREN OF CONSTRUCTION LABOURER 

Contractor undertakes to provide creche facilities for the children of 

construction labour through a volunteer agency within one month from start of 

work. The facility is open to children of construction labourers employed by the 



Page 4 of 36



NRDA 

Contractor. In case the Contractor fails to provide this facility within stipulated 

time,following charge shall be levied on the Contractor. 

Range of Contract Amount 

Upto Rs. 50 lacs 

Amount of Creche fund 

Nil 

Above Rs. 50 lacs to Rs. 5 Crores Rs. 50000/- 

Above Rs. 5 Crores 

Rs. 5 lacs. 

8.1 The amount shall be recovered if such facility is not provided by the 

Contractor from running account bills in one or more installments but not 

exceeding 6 (six) installments. 

8.2 IF THE FACILITY IS PROVIDE AFTER 3 MONTH 50% OF The amount shall be refunded to the 

contractor, after 6 month 25% will refunded. 

9. SUBMISSION OF DETAILED BAR/ PERT CHART OF COMPLETION 

The Contractor shall, within the stipulated time in Tender, submit to the 

Engineer for his approval a detailed programme covering- 

a) Descriptive note explaining sequence of various activities. 

b) Network (PERT/ CPM), bar chart. 

c) Quarterly programme of supply of materials by the Employer. 

d) Quarterly cash flow indicating money to be earmarked by the Employer 

for the purpose of the contract. 

e) Programme for supply of working drawing. 

f) Phased requirements of plant and equipment to be deployed by the 

Contractor. 

10. Method of Working 

After award of Contract and before starting Work at the site, Contractor, NRDA's 

representative/ Engineer, and Architect shall together make a thorough survey of the 

grounds where Work under this Contract will occur and areas to be used as access ways 

to the Work areas. Contractor shall list, and photograph, if Contractor desires, existing 



Page 5 of 36



NRDA 

conditions not requiring alterations, shall note discrepancies between Drawings and 

existing conditions, and shall designate areas of storage and routes of access agreed 

upon by NRDA. 

The Contractor shall, within the stipulated time in Tender, submit to the Engineer for his 

approval the following information, 

a) A general tentative lay-out plan of construction plant and equipment for the 

execution of work within time period stipulated in schedule. 

b) Drawings or prints showing the location of major plants and other facilities 

which he propose to put up at the site, including any changes in the general 

layout, at least 15 (fifteen) days prior to the commencement of the respective work. 

c) Layout and details of temporary works that the Contractor wants to carry out to 

fulfill his obligation under the contract. 

d) Indication of shuttering system to be followed. 

11. Project Monitoring 

11.1 Within 7 (seven) days the Engineer shall give their approval to proceed with the 

work, with or without modification. However acceptance of programme and method of 

working as submitted by the Contractor or with any modification there to in the 

opinion of the Engineer, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his contractual 

obligation. 

11.2 All these programmes and plans submitted by the Contractor and approved by 

the Engineer shall become part of the contract. 

11.3 The acceptance of programmes as submitted by the Contractor or with any 

modification thereto in the opinion of the Engineer, shall not relieve the Contractor 

of any extension of time unless delay, if any, is expressly sanctioned by the Engineer. 

11.4 Construction Photographs- 

A. General: Contractor will provide construction photographs taken, developed, 

printed, and mounted by a recognized commercial photographic studio or reputable 

photographer acceptable to Owner, in the number and type and at construction stages 

enumerated below:- 

(i) Before Starting Work: Have photographs taken at site from different points of 

view sufficient in number to show site (and conditions at existing structures) but not 

fewer than 30 photographs. 

(ii) During Progress of the Work: Have not fewer than 15 photographs taken at least 

once a week from points of view (both inside and outside), as necessary to show progress 



Page 6 of 36



NRDA 

of construction and site development for each part of the Work. Co-ordinate taking 

photographs with utility Work and back filling. Photograph each buried utility line 

before back filling. During later stages of the Work, have photographs taken from 

suitable locations inside the building 

showing the progress of various stages of the Work, such as piling, centering, 

reinforcement, water proofing, concreting, etc. Size of photographs will be 125 mm X 

250mm. Photographs shall be supplied with negatives/ CD to the Engineer. Each 

photograph shall be attached with date of photograph and location of work. These 

photographs shall be from location as fixed by the Engineer at start of work. 

12. QUARRY RELATED DEDUCTIONS 

The royalty for Minor minerals used in the work like murrum, stone metals, sand, 

rubble etc. will be levied as per prevailing practice in PWD of Chhattisgarh and shall be 

recovered suitably through R.A./ Final bill and will be kept in deposit. The above royalty 

charges kept under deposit shall be refunded as soon as the Contractor submits 

relevant NOC from Collector, Raipur, Chhattisgarh. 

13. CONTRACTORS ALL RISK POLICY (C.A.R. POLICY) 

The successful Contractor shall take out a C.A.R. policy from any approved 

company by IRDA India. Chhattisgarh Govt., administered by Directorate of Insurance. The 

policy so obtained shall cover the entire period of construction (including all 

extensions) and also shall cover the defects liability period. The policy shall be for the 

total contract amount including cost of free supply material by NRDA, if any. All 

amounts/ charges towards premium etc. on this account shall be borne by the 

Contractor. 

14. INDEMNITY BOND 

The Contractor shall require to execute an Indemnity Bond for satisfactory 

performance of the entire project on stamp paper of Rs.100/- (Rupees Hundred only) 

in the format approved by the NRDA Ltd. This Indemnity Bond shall remain in force for the 

Defect Liability period after completion of the project to be furnished in contract form E 

of GCC. 

15. ACCIDENTS 

Should any accidents, fatal or otherwise occur, a detailed report about the same 

shall be made promptly by the Contractor to the Engineer. The Contractor should at 

all times during execution of work keep the NRDA fully indemnified against all risks, 

claims, litigations and financial burdens arising out of all incidental operations on work 

and accidents. 



Page 7 of 36



NRDA 

16. TRAFFIC 

The Contractor shall have to make all necessary arrangements for regulating traffic day 

and night during the period of construction and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. This 

includes the construction and maintenance of diversion, if necessary, at no extra cost to the NRDA. 

The Contractor shall provide necessary caution boards, barricades, flags and lights, watchmen 

etc. so as to comply with the latest Motor Vehicle Rules and Regulations and for traffic safety. The 

Contractor shall be responsible for all claims for the accidents which may arise due to his 

negligence whether in regulating traffic, in stacking materials on the road or by any other reason. 

The contractor must comply with the following:- 

A. General: Plan and control use of site and access to site in co-operation with 

Owner and other contractors working at site to minimise disruption of use of other 

facilities; portions of buildings and site areas affected by this Contract and to remain in 

use; and the work of other contractors. 

B. Temporary Access Drives: Construct on the premises as necessary, and 

maintain in good usable condition; remove when no longer needed. Until permanent 

improvements have been completed, when necessary to prevent excessive dust, 

periodically water temporary unpaved access roads. 

C. Construction Site Access: Use most direct route from public streets as agreed to by 

Owner. Construction traffic elsewhere on Owner's property is prohibited. 

D. Driveways Between and Around Combustible Storage Piles: Maintain at least 15 

feet wide and free of accumulation of rubbish, equipment, and materials. 

F. Access for Fire-Fighting Equipment: Maintain. 

G. Access: Refer to other sections for requirements to keep access to site and 

buildings open to Owner, other contractors, and fire-fighting equipment. 

H. Use of Streets and Sidewalks on Public Property: Make arrangements with 

authorities having jurisdiction for use. Restrictions shall be those of the Municipal 

Authorities. Be solely responsible for adherence. 

J. Roadways, Driveways, and Walkways: Where outside indicated Contract limit on 

Owner's property and on public property, keep open to pedestrian and vehicular traffic 

at all times. When temporary closing of a roadway, driveway, or walkway is absolutely 

unavoidable, provide alternative access routes. Such temporary closings shall be approved 

by Owner in each case and shall be for the shortest possible time. Strictly adhere to 

requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. 

K. Parking: Owner will issue temporary parking permits for use by construction 

personnel and will make available, at the location shown. Construction personnel shall 

not park in any other location on Owner's property, even when bearing permits. Access to 

allocated parking spaces shall be by most direct route from public streets. Construction 

personnel shall not drive vehicles elsewhere on Owner's property and shall take the most 

direct pedestrian way along walks and roadways (not on lawns) from parking lot to 

construction site. 

L. Barricades and Signs: Should barricades or directional signs for traffic control be 

necessary, prepare and install such signs and barricades of approved size, colour, and 

lettering or other markings. Remove signs when no longer needed, or at Substantial 

Completion, whichever is latest. 



Page 8 of 36



NRDA 

M. Restricted Use of Premises: Enforce Contract requirements, local ordinances and 

Owner's instructions pertaining to signs, fires, smoking, trucking, parking, and other use of 

premises. 

N. On-Site Storage:- 

1. General: Extent of Work and site area available limits amount of 

on-site material and equipment storage. Do not unnecessarily encumber job 

site with excess materials or equipment and means of delivery of materials, 

equipment, and supplies, removal of rubbish, and, hours during which 

deliveries may be made. Determine, and take into account in the Work, 

limitations on storage space and of times, rates, and means of deliveries to and 

removals from the job site whether such limitations are imposed by laws, rules, 

ordinances, or physical conditions. Owner will not pay extra amounts due to 

such limitations. Co-ordinate arrangements for delivery and storage of materials. 

2. Paved Areas: Do not use paved areas on Owner's property to 

stockpile excavated materials or to store construction materials except where 

shown. Use of paved areas on public property is subject to requirements of 

authorities having jurisdiction, and arrangements for such use are solely 

Contractor's responsibility. 

3. Protection and Repair: Protect roadways, walks, and other permanent 

site improvements, and access ways subject to damage. Satisfactorily repair 

improvements and surfaces damaged during construction operations, or 

remove damaged improvements or surfaces and provide new acceptable 

improvements or surfaces. Except where new Work is required, return areas used 

for temporary access to original condition. 

17. ALIGNMENT AND BENCH MARKS 

The alignment of the work to be carried out under the contract shall be marked on the 

ground as per the drawing and as per the instructions of the Engineer. For the purpose of 

facilitating the work, the series of temporary bench marks on masonry pillars will have to be 

established. These pillars will be constructed along with the alignment and such other locations as 

may be initiated by the Engineer. The temporary bench-marks shall be established for the work 

line-out and its connections to other proposed roads in Naya Raipur using the DGPS instrument 

and Total Station software. All expenses involved in the process of marking alignment on 

ground, checking the alignment, constructing masonry pillars in establishing bench marks 

thereon, shall be borne by the Contractor. It will be responsibility of the Contractor to ensure 

that the masonry pillars so constructed are not damaged during the period of work in 

progress. 

18. PREVENTION OF MOSQUITO BREEDING AT CONSTRUCTION SITE 

The Contractor shall on the respective construction site install mosquito proof and 

accessible water storage tanks or to cover/protect the present water storage tanks 

properly. The Contractor shall periodically give larvaecidal treatment to water storage 

tanks, sites of water stagnation, water collection. 



Page 9 of 36



NRDA 

Any expenditure that may be incurred by NRDA to ensure that the above conditions are 

fulfilled by the Contractor will be debitable to Contractor's account and will be 

recovered from the bills of the Contractor from time to time. 

19. INSPECTION OF SITE AND SUFFICIENCY OF THE TENDER 

If the NRDA is not in a position to deliver to the Contractors the site of the 

Contract work for any reason whatsoever at the agreed time, delaying the 

commencement of the contract work, or part thereof not beyond 50 % (fifty percent) 

of contract period for completion, such omissions of the NRDA shall not be breach of 

any its obligations under the contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim 

from the NRDA for loss or damage, if any, caused thereby, but shall be entitled to a 

reasonable extension of the period agreed for the completion of contract work. If the 

contractor shall be obstructed in the execution of the work by any person other than an 

agent or servant of the NRDA, the Contractor shall exclusively deal with such set by the 

due process of law but shall not be entitled to attribute thereby the beach of any 

obligation under the contract to the NRDA compensation for damage or loss, if any, 

thereby suffered but shall be entitled to an appropriate extension of period agreed for 

the completion of the contract work, provided that the contractor has reported to 

the NRDA every such act of obstruction with particular soon after its occurrence and 

the NRDA has after enquiry found the same to be substantially true and has determined 

the duration of such obstruction. 

20. PROGRESS OF WORK 

The Contractor shall carry out the work as per the programme approved by the 

Department from time to time. He will also not be allowed to proceed with the work in a 

scattered manner. 

21. FIELD LABORATORY 

The Contractor shall establish a field laboratory for the various field tests for items like concrete 

cubes, cement, aggregates, sand, blocks for masonry, tiles, wood and for similar items as directed 

by the Engineer. A Site Laboratory of approximately 7.0 x 7.0 m. area with platform, display boards, 

storages, IS Codes, etc. shall be constructed for items similar as directed by the Engineer. 

The Laboratory must have the following equipment; 

Slump Cone 

Cube moulds for concrete 

Cube moulds for cement mortar 

1 nos. as per ISI 

24 nos. 

9 nos. 



Page 10 of 36



NRDA 

Cement testing equipment 

soundness accelerated 

(initial and final setting, fineness, 

compressive test equipment, etc.) 

1 set 

Oven 

Universal Testing Machine 

Weigh Balance (Digital) 

IS Sieves for sand& metals 

Glass-measuring Cylinders 

Micro Meter 

Vernier caliper 

Rebound Hammer 

1 no. 

1 no 

2 nos. 

4 sets 

12 nos. 

2 no. 

2 no. 

1 Set 

Construction of Laboratory building well-equipped with equipments as listed above is incidental 

to the work and no separate payment will be made for this. 

The Contractor shall carry out other various tests for various items and materials at National 

Institute of Technology or any other approved laboratory as directed by the Engineer at 

Contractor's own cost. At the end of each month for each category of the work, e.g. RCC work, 

masonry work, etc. the Contractor shall give statistical analysis of all the test results in the format 

prescribed by the Engineer and take corrective action in the work in accordance with these 

results. 

The Contractor shall keep all relevant IS/ BIS/ special publications at site lab for various items of 

works covered in the present Contract. 

22. ENGINEER 

22.1 Engineer for this project shall be the Engineer or the person nominated or 

appointed by NRDA from time to time and shall include any person duly authorised 

by them. 

22.2 Engineer shall be responsible for the execution of the project with regards to 

management and supervision. Instructions issued by the Engineer to the Contractor 

shall be deemed to be the Employer's instructions in respect of- 

1. Day to day supervision including material testing using ISO formats 

proforma of which should be got approved from Engineer. 

2. Approval of material and workmanship using ISO formats proforma of 

which should be got approved from Engineer. 



Page 11 of 36



NRDA 

3. Matter of urgency involving safety or protection of person or property. 

4. Monitoring progress of work using System Application of Projects (SAP). 

5. Interpretation of drawings 

6. Interpretation of specifications 

7. Issue of additional drawings 

8. Certification of measurements and bills and issue of certificates 

accordingly for interim and final bills. 

22.3 Engineer shall hold fortnightly progress meetings at site for evaluation and 

execution of works. The Contractor shall assist in providing revised programmes, 

cash flow charts in the format required by Engineer/ NRDA. 

22.4 The Engineer shall coordinate works at site of all agencies appointed by the 

Employer. 

23. EXCAVATED OBJECTS 

All the materials obtained during the process of excavation shall remain the property of 

the NRDA and shall be disposed off as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor is supposed to 

use the selected materials for filling in plinth, pipe bedding, and providing embankment where 

required, filling the trenches and also filling low lying areas. All operations including loading, 

unloading, transportation of materials where required with all leads and lifts and handling them 

and leveling at disposal site etc., shall be included in the quoted cost and no extra payment 

whatsoever shall be made to the Contractor on the account. 

24. AS BUILT DRAWINGS 

The Contractor shall during the course of execution, prepare and keep updated a 

complete set of 'as- built' drawings recording all works on the blue prints, which shall be 

corrected daily, if necessary, to show each and every change from the Contract Drawings as a 

approved working drawings, shop drawings and the exact 'as-built' location, sizes and kinds of 

work etc. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used for record purposes. 

Changes recorded shall be countersigned by the Engineer and the Contractor. Copies of 'as-built' 

drawings shall be supplied to the CE), NRDA/ and the Engineer on request. 

The Contractor shall submit complete 'as-built' drawings on reproducible tracings and ammonia 

prints 10 (ten) sets in form of hard copies and Compact Discs 2 nos. for building work and all 

services as directed by the Engineer within 30 (thirty) days of the completion of entire work by 

using AutoCAD facility. Maintenance manuals and original warranties shall be submitted at the 

time of submitting the As-built drawings. In case the Contractor fails to submit complete 'asbuilt' 

drawings as aforesaid [in form of hard copies [10 (ten) sets] and Compact Discs [2 (two) 

nos.], he shall be liable to pay a sum equivalent to 0.1 percent of the value of work subject to 

maximum of Rs.10 lakhs (Rupees ten lac only) or as may be fixed by NRDA and this decision shall 

be final and binding. Pre-final & Final Bill shall not be released until all the as-built drawings are 

submitted & approved. 

25. ENGINEER'S SITE OFFICE 

The Contractor shall provide site office for the Engineer's use of area admeasuring about 

120 (One hundred twenty) Sq.mt. with Split Air Conditioners & ceiling insulation for entire office 



Page 12 of 36



NRDA 

premises including conference hall (Upto 15 person) as per the detailed drawings approved for 

the site office. 

Broad details about construction of office and other facilities to be provided at the minimum 

shall be as follows:- 

(a) Overall size of the office shall be 15m x 8.0 m. This shall include 

individual cabins, Conference hall and Computer rooms. 

(b) The above office shall be fully furnished including furniture, fittings, 

fixtures etc. such as Lockers, Chairs, Sofas for waiting, Cabinets for storage of 

drawings/ tracings, Cabinets for storage of books, Cupboards for storage of 

box files & flat presentations, Soft boards – 3 nos for display of CPM charts, White 

board - 2 nos, Office stationary incl. papers, CDs, envelopes, pen holders etc 

.Minimum equipments required for providing tea /coffee / snacks etc shall be 

arranged by the contractor. 

The Contractor shall arrange to maintain this office by daily sweeping the floor and 

keeping the premises clean. The Contractor shall also arrange to deploy 2 (two) office 

boys for the pantry and for Engineer. 

Cost of all this shall be deemed to have been included in the tender as incidentals and 

no separate payment shall be made for providing these facilities. 

26. TRANSPORTATION 

The Contractor shall provide 1 (One) number new vehicle, Mahindra Bolero SLX 

4WD (air-conditioned) fully loaded or equivalent along with chauffeur and fuel at the 

disposal of the Engineer for the use by NRDA and its representatives in connection with the 

project during the period of the execution of the Project. The Contractor will bear all 

expenses, connected with the operation and maintenance of this vehicle including driver’s 

wages, overtime and other benefits, cost of the fuel, lubricant, repairs and maintenance, 

insurance, etc. to the satisfaction of NRDA. The Contractor shall be required to bear the 

fuel expenses towards 3000 kilometers of cumulative distance traveled by the vehicles per 

month. Vehicle shall be subject to an average maximum mileage of 36,000 kilometers per 

annum per vehicle. The vehicle shall be replaced with new vehicle after maximum run of 

1,00,000 kilometers. In case of break down or non availability of vehicle the NRDA will hire 

the vehicle at the risk and cost of the contractor. The vehicle may be withdrawn after 3 

(three) months of from the date of completion of work. 

27. PROVIDING COMPUTER & OTHER EQUIPMENTS AT SITE OFFICE 

The Contractor shall install 2 (two) new computers for the office, design and 

project monitoring in the office of Engineer and provide necessary stationery and 

furniture. The Contractor is also required to provide 1 (one) Laptop computer with 

One computer operator and stenographer for Engineer. 

The configuration of both computer and laptop is as under:- 

a) 2 (one) SONY/DELL/HP/ LENOVO with Intel I3 Processor, 4GB Ram, Hard drive 

500GB , 17” TFT LCD Color Monitor and 3 years warranty. 



Page 13 of 36



NRDA 

b) 1 (one) LAPTOP – SONY/DELL/HP/ LENOVO with 15.6 : display, Intel I3 Processor, 

4GB Ram, Hard drive 500GB Ram and 3 years warranty. 

c) LICENSED SOFTWARE (Latest versions, where available),Window Vista Professional / 

window XP Professional, AutoCad 2012, Microsoft Office 2007 ,Microsoft Project 2010 

d) PRINTERS AND OTHER PERIPHRALS 

HP Laser Jet 1320 Printer 

HP LaserJet 3050 All-in-one Printer 

Video camera 

Digital camera (10 mega pixel) 

Photo printer 

UPS for all equipments 

1 Nos 

1 Nos 

1 Nos 

1 Nos 

1 Nos 

All computers at site and head office shall be interconnected by LAN connection 

as well as with a 24 hour broadband internet connection. 

e) Safety Helmets 20 Nos 

28. TELEPHONE CONNECTION 

The Contractor shall provide 2 (two) nos. of Mobile phones (Nokia, Sony Erickson, 

Samsung/ ) for use of NRDA staff including instrument with prepaid card of minimum value Rs.1 

,000 (Rupees one thousand only) per instrument per month. . This arrangement may be withdrawn 

after 3 (three) months of completion of the work. 

29. TIME SCHEDULE FOR COMPLIANCES 

The tenderers should please note the following time schedule for various 

compliances and follow the same: 

a) The Contractor should construct the site office within 1 (one) month of date of 

work order. The site office should be as per relevant clause in the tender 

document. 

b) The CAR policy and Labour license shall be taken by the Contractor within 1 

(one) month from the date of work order. 

c) The M.S. Project formatted programme (Physical and Financial Programme) 

shall be submitted by the Contractor within 10 (ten) days of the date of work 

order and detailed breakup of quantities. The successful tenderer has to furnish 

Quality Assurance Manual along with programme within 15 (fifteen) days from the 

date of paying Initial Security Deposit. 

30. APPROVAL OF ENGINEER 

The foundation strata as well as steel reinforcement provided in all RCC 

members shall be got approved from the NRDA/ Engineer or his authorised 

representative. At every stage of work, approval of the Engineer shall be taken by the 

Contractor. Before starting any work like concreting, block masonry, water proofing, 

concrete, etc. detailed information of the work in the prescribed proforma shall be 



Page 14 of 36



NRDA 

given to the Engineer and his approval shall be taken by the Contractor. It is the 

responsibility of the Contractor to get all the hidden measurements like foundation 

work, reinforcement, etc. recorded before covering the same. All the 

measurements shall be taken jointly by NRDA's representative and the Contractor's 

authorized representative and then only the measurements will be forwarded by the 

Engineer, who will forward it for payment to Chief Executive Officer, NRDA through 

Chief Engineer, NRDA and directions on any matter whether mentioned explicitly or 

otherwise. 

31. PERMISSION FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SITE OFFICE/ GODOWN/ LABOUR HUTS: 

The Contractor shall be permitted to construct temporary structures such as site office, godown, 

labour huts, Engineer site office, etc. on the land of NRDA within 1 Km radius of site. 

The Contractor will have to submit requirement of land for Godown/ Labour Camp/ Batching 

Plant etc. with logistic layout in Technical Bid. The land shall be provided to the Contractor on 

Lumpsum lease rent of Rs. 100/- (Rupees Hundred only) per year with Lease Agreement as per 

prevailing NRDA format. However the Contractor shall require permission of NRDA for erecting site 

office, labour huts. In the event the Contractor fail to remove site office/ godown and labour 

huts from the land immediately after construction is over, NRDA will charge rent as per 

the rules prevalent at the time. No final bill payment shall be made, unless the site is 

cleared by the contractor in all respects. 

The Contractor shall number the structures and display name of the Company, 

period for which permission is granted, etc. at such approved sites. 

No final bill payment shall be made unless the site is cleared in all respects by the 

Contractor. 

32. CONDITIONAL TENDER 

The Tenderer shall note that the clarifications shall be obtained in the pretender 

meeting and the tender should be submitted without any conditions, whatsoever. 

Clarifications given to the various tenderers in the pre-tender meeting would be 

summarized by NRDA and would be issued to every tenderer as "Minutes of Pre-Tender 

Meeting". The same will be binding on all the tenderers irrespective of whether they 

have attended the pre-tender meeting or not. The Minutes of the Pre-Tender Meeting 

would form part of the Contract Agreement and the Tenderers should submit the 

Financial Offer taking into consideration the same. The Tender submitted with 

conditions would be summarily rejected. 

33. SITE ORDER BOOK& OTHER BOOKS REQUIRED 

The Engineer will maintain Site Order Book at the site of work. The Contractor or his 

authorized representative shall sign all the instructions received therein, in token of 

having received the same and shall comply with them forthwith. 

All other books of record at site shall have to be maintained as required in the CPA Code 

of works 



Page 15 of 36



NRDA 

34 POURCARD SYSTEM 

Pour card system/RFI system to be introduced for approval of individual activity. Format 

to be got approved from engineer before start of work. 

35. CLEANING Of SITE 

35.1 All water which may accumulate on the site during the progress of the works or in 

trenches and excavation shall be removed from the site to the satisfaction of the 

Engineer In charge, at the Contractor's cost. Site shall be maintained free from rubbish. 

Proper stacking of scaffolding material, shuttering material bricks/ brickbats, steel pieces, 

etc. needed for work on day to day basis shall be organized in proper stacks. Heaps of 

material lying around in unplanned manner and disorderly fashion shall not be permitted. 

Engineer's decision in this matter shall be final. 

35.2 The Contractor shall not, at any time, do cause or permit any nuisance on the site 

or do anything which shall cause unnecessary disturbance or inconvenience to 

Employer, tenants or occupiers of other properties near the site and to the public in 

general. The Contractor shall install mosquito proof and accessible water storage tanks for 

construction and drinking water. 

35.3 The Contractor shall periodically give largasidal treatment to water storage 

tanks, sites of water stagnation, water collection. 

35.4 Prior to handing over the contractor shall appoint Professional Cleaning Agency 

to clean the building works prior to handing over. The Agency shall have minimum 5 

(five) years prior experience in the hospitality industry and shall be appointed with the 

prior approval by the Engineer. 

33.5 Any expenditure that may be incurred by NRDA to ensure that the above 

conditions are fulfilled by the Contractor will be debitable to Contractor's account and will 

be recovered from the running bills of the Contractor from time to time. 

35.6 Cleaning: Remove staining or reactive materials from new surfaces 

immediately during course of the Work. 

35.7 Debris: Remove hazardous accumulations of debris promptly, at least daily. 

35.8 Dust: Confine dust producing operations during painting and finishing .Vacuum 

immediately after completion. 

35.9 TRASH DISPOSAL 

35.10 General: Keep new buildings and site free from accumulations of waste 

materials. 

35.11 Removal: Remove cartons, crates, wrappings, lunch trash, and other trash from 

each room daily. Provide trash receptacles on each floor of each 

building and in convenient locations on the site. 

35.12 Burning: Do not burn trash or other materials on Owner's property. 

35.13 EXCESS MATERIAL 

a) General: Remove excess materials, including demolished materials, excess earth, 

and excess building materials from Owner's property and dispose of legally. 



Page 16 of 36



NRDA 

b) Clean: Keep paved drives on Owner's property and public streets and alleys 

clean, by cleaning daily, or more often if necessary, of earth and debris 

spillage from trucking involved in construction operations. 

36. FENCING 

During the construction, care shall be taken so that, areas around are not polluted and 

where required Hessian cloth shall be tied around, while work is in progress. 

Further, it is obligatory on the part of the Contractor to fence the area allotted and 

earmarked by NRDA for labour camp, batching plant of the Contractor within a month 

of issuance of work order. The temporary fencing shall be provided in the area as 

directed by Engineer using vertical blinds using corrugated GI sheets about 3m high 

with necessary metal frame work and staging to cordon off the view of the premises. 

The Contractor shall maintain the fencing properly throughout the construction period. 

37. WATCH AND WARD 

The Contractor shall make necessary watch and ward arrangement for a period of 

three months from the date of total completion of work. No claim shall be paid to the 

Contractor towards the watch and ward during this period. 

37.1 Protection General Requirements: 

37.1.1 Laws: Comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and 

orders of authorities having jurisdiction for safety of people and protection of 

property from damage, injury, or loss. 

37.1.2 Responsibility: Be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and 

supervising safety precautions and programs concerning Project security, but 

obtain Owner's approval of methods to be used and location of safeguards. 

Submit to NRDA, through Engineer, drawings and written description of methods 

and devices Contractor intends to use and do not begin Work at the site until such 

means and methods are mutually agreed on by Owner and Contractor. 

37.1.3 On Public Property: In addition to other means used in the interest of 

safety or security, comply with the requirements of governmental agencies 

having jurisdiction. 

37.1.4 Safeguards: Erect and maintain, as required by conditions and progress of 

the Work, necessary safeguards, for safety and protection, including temporary 

fences, guards, railings, barricades, canopies, lighting, shoring, directional and 

danger signs, signals, and other warnings against hazards. 

37.1.5 Security: Protect and secure the site, new materials and equipment from 



Page 17 of 36



NRDA 

theft and damage by whatever reasonable means are effective. Use methods 

such as the following, singly or together: locks, fences, signs, patrols, radio, 

alarms, locked storage on-site, and off-site warehousing. 

37.1.6 Wall Closures: Unless other acceptable means are provided, 

provide temporary closures for openings in walls along adjoining to make the 

building and site secure. Secure temporary closures when Work is not in progress 

using suitable means such as dead bolts inaccessible from the public side or locks or 

padlocks construction master keyed in accordance with Section, "Finish 

Hardware." 

37.1.7 Entrances: Do not block entrances to premises to remain in use or in any way 

inhibit access to them. 

37.1.8 Design Live Loads: Do not permit placing materials or equipment on new to 

exceed design load of structure or endanger structure or people. 

37.1.9 Trenches: Do not permit trenches to remain open for prolonged periods 

without adequate board covering or fencing. 

37.1.10 Broken Glass: Be responsible for glass broken during construction period; at 

completion, replace broken glass. 

37.1.11 Weather Protection: During construction, provide protection against weather 

(rain, wind, storms, frost, or heat), and maintain work, materials, apparatus, and 

fixtures free from damage. At end of each workday, cover new work likely to be 

damaged. 

37.1.12 Dust: Take precautions necessary to keep Work under this Contract and 

adjoining property reasonably free of dust. 

37.1.13 Protection of Construction Materials: Refer to other specification sections for 

specific requirements. 

37.1.14 Materials Hoist: Do not permit transporting of people on materials hoisting 

facilities. 

37.1.15 Removals: Except for fences, remove temporary construction and protection 

specified in this section promptly when no longer needed and when removal is approved. 

37.1.16 Maintain temporary fences until date of Substantial Completion, unless approval is 

obtained for earlier removal; then remove the temporary fence. 

37.1.17 Damaged Site Improvements: Repair and restore to condition at beginning of 

construction, or better, existing site improvements, such as pavements, curbs, buildings, 

fences, lawns, plantings, and lighting which are not to be removed under this Contract 

but are damaged or defaced by Contractor's operations, except where new Work is 

required by the Contract. 



Page 18 of 36



NRDA 

37.1.18 First Aid Equipment: Provide at the site. Also provide continually available 

trained and qualified personnel to render first aid when needed. 

37.1.19 Emergency Signs: Provide signs posted at telephones listing telephone numbers of 

emergency medical services, physicians, ambulance services, and hospitals. 

38. MOBILISATION PERIOD 

This clause shall be read in continuation of Clause No 10 (B) (ii) of GCC. The mobilization 

advance shall be limited up to 5% of value of work order. The mode of payment of mobilization 

advance shall be as follows:- 

Part I: 1% shall be released after issue of work order. 

Part II: 2% shall be released after completion of activities listed below. 

Part III: 2% shall be released after successful installation of Batching Plant. 

Mobilization period for the Contractor shall be 30 (thirty) days from date of letter of intent. It 

shall be paid in parts and the Contractor is obliged to adhere to these timings. 

Part II: 

This shall be of 15 (fifteen) days and the Contractor shall carry out following: 

• Compound/ Fencing to Site where required as per directives of Engineer. 

• Contractor's Site Office (part). Engineer 's Site Office. 

• Construction of temporary hutment of labour. 

• Arrangement for water supply. 

• Arrangement for electric supply. 

• Submission of Bar Chart programme for approval by Engineer with details of 

temporary works, plants, equipment and machinery list. 

Part III 

This shall be of balance 15 (fifteen) days and shall cover the following activities:- 

• Establishing full site godown for cement and steel yard. 

• Establishing internal water supply for construction activities. Establishing 

internal electric network for construction activities. 

• Submitting for approval a list & appointment of specialized sub 

contractors intended to be engaged at site with detailed credentials/ profile 

of the contractors. 

• Appointment of Anti-termite sub-contractor. 

• Establishing laboratory with testing equipments. 

• Submitting proposal for concrete mixes and casting trial cubes. 

• Approval of Bar Chart programme by Engineer with details of temporary 



Page 19 of 36



NRDA 

works, plants, equipment and machinery list. 

• Arrival of centering & shuttering material. 

• Line out including establishing of grid lines for project and its approval by 

Architect through Engineer. Line-out shall include the establishing of the critical 

Capitol Complex line-out and its connections to other proposed roads in Naya 

Raipur. 

39. METHOD OF CARRYING OUT THE WORKS 

39.1 The Contractor shall, within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of the Employer's 

order to commence work under respective clause of General Conditions of 

Contract submit for his approval a detailed programme and statement with 

drawings and diagrams showing how he proposes to carry out the works based 

on the tender programme. The statement shall describe the methods to be 

employed in carrying out the works, the Constructional Plant and temporary 

works which the Contractor intends to supply or use and shall include a list, 

classified into trades of labour force envisaged. The programme shall give the 

estimated dates on which the various sections of the works will commence 

together with the estimated date of completion and estimated output so that 

the whole of the works may be completed within the Contract Period. 

39.2 In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer drawings and 

full particulars of Temporary Works he intends to construct at least 8 (eights) days 

before he intends to commence such works. The Engineer may require 

modifications to be made if he considers the proposals to be insufficient and the 

Contractor shall give effect to such modifications at his own cost but shall not be 

relieved of his responsibility for the sufficiency thereof. 

39.3 The Contractor shall prepare a detailed survey of existing services on the 

site which he shall clearly mark up on a drawing for the approval by the 

relevant service authorities prior to commencement of the works. 

39.4 The Contractor is to progress the works thoroughly and to take such action 

as is necessary in order to ensure that the approved programme is strictly 

adhered to in all its stages. The Contractor shall submit detailed programmes of 

the various sections of the works as and when required by the Engineer, the 

Contractor shall take all precautions and cover all contingencies to ensure that 

adequate spare equipment and materials are available at all times to ensure 

completion of this work in accordance with the agreed programme. 

39.5 The acceptance of programmes as submitted by the Contractor or with 

any modification thereto, in the opinion of Engineer, shall not relieve the 

Contractor of his responsibility to complete the work within period specified in as 

per Annexure 'A' unless extension of time limit is expressly sanctioned under 

respective clause of standard General Conditions of Contract or Special 

Conditions of Contract. 

39.6 The Contractor shall prepare the CPM programme on computer and 

the same to be monitored by proper installation of PC and printer facilities at the 

site. 



Page 20 of 36



NRDA 

The bills shall be on computer and the programme will incorporate the 

deductions of Mobilisation Advance and other items. 

40. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR SUFFICIENCY OF MEANS EMPLOYED 

The Contractor shall take upon himself the full and entire responsibility for the sufficiency 

of plant, centering, scaffolding, timbering, machinery, tools or implements and 

generally for all means used for the fulfillment of the Contract. In the event of any 

of these means proving insufficient, the Contractor is still fully and entirely 

responsible for the sufficiency of these means notwithstanding any previous approval 

or recommendation that may have been given by the Engineer. 

41. DRAWINGS 

Drawings are available with the tender documents, however working drawings shall be 

progressively issued as per the approved construction schedule submitted by the 

contractor & approved by NRDA. 

42. STANDARDS 

In various places throughout this specification and the bills of quantities, reference is 

made to the standards, specifications and byelaws issued by the Indian Standard 

Institutions and other similar organizations. These references shall in every case be 

deemed to include the latest edition or issue of such standards, specifications and 

byelaws including all revisions, amendments and addendum subsequently issued. 

Where materials are not specified and standard exists in respect of such materials, then 

the materials shall in all respects comply with relevant and current I.S.I. In such cases 

where I.S.I. do not exist, the best manufacturers' specification shall be followed; in 

absence of all these, Engineer's instruction shall be followed. 

43. SUPERVISORY STAFF (As per clause 36 (i) of schedule F of the tender) 

The Contractor shall engage on the work a qualified and experienced Engineers, 

Supervisor, capable of managing and guiding the work properly as detailed in Cl36(i) of 

schedule F of the tender Form F-1. This supervisor shall be authorized by the Contractor 

in writing to receive the orders issued by the Engineer from time to time. The Contractor 

shall be responsible for carrying out these orders promptly. 

44. FIRE PRECAUTIONS 

The Contractor shall comply with fire regulations of the controlling authority in force at 

the site of the works relating to the precautions to be taken against fire hazards. 



Page 21 of 36



NRDA 

45. USE OF SITE 

The Contractor shall not use any portion of the site for purpose not connected with the 

works without the prior written approval of the Engineer. He shall maintain permanent 

and site access roads free of spillage and shall not interfere with the flow of traffic. 

Also same shall apply to terraces and other developed areas. This clause shall be read in 

conjunction with clause no. 15 of the Special Conditions of Contract. 

46. SAFETY ENGINEER 

The Contractor shall employ and depute at site on full time basis a fully qualified 

Safety Engineer(s) who shall be responsible to ensure observance of safety precautions 

and measure required to be taken at site. Further he shall make sure stipulations laid 

down in safety code as provided in GCC. 

47. QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL AND SAFETY MANUAL 

47.1 Successful tenderers will be required to submit Quality Assurance Manual 

and Safety manual made as per applicable specification for various items of 

work and get the same approved from Engineer before start of work and the 

adhere the same during actual execution of work. 

Quality Assurance Manual (QAM)- 

A quality assurance manual constituting a base document outlining quality policy 

of the agency, procedures, name of action, compliance, acceptance criteria and 

documentation etc. Shall be prepared by the successful tenderer and submitted 

to the Engineer for approval within 15 (fifteen) days from the date of receipt of 

work order.The QAM shall be preprared in such a way that it follows all the 

applicable specifications. The document shall generally cover aspects listed 

below, but not limited to the same. 

a) Scope of work 

b) Planning for items to be executed including method statement and 

resource deployment both physical and financial. 

c) Identification of all parties involved in QA and their inter-relationship. 

d) Execution plan of Quality System giving reference - standard - 

frequency and acceptance criteria. 

e) Levels of cross checking/ verification in case of multiple verifications/ 

controls, including systems of inspection and audit, wherever applicable. 

f) Organization of personnel, responsibilities and lines reporting for QA 



Page 22 of 36



NRDA 

purpose. 

g) Testing and statistical analysis. 

h) Inspection reports at the end and during defect liability period/ 

maintenance period. 

i) Items to be covered for maintenance manual, 

j) Check list viz. Forms and formats. 

47.2 Inspection of Works at Factory/ Workshop 

For any visits that maybe necessary for the purpose of performance of testing, 

inspection of factory made goods/ equipments, at a location other than the site 

,or Raipur, the actual cost of travel (to & fro airfare/ train A/c 1st class), 

boarding & lodging, local transport & per diem (per person per day) costs at the 

rate of Rs. 3000 (Rupees three thousand only) for any visit made by officials from 

NRDA/ PMC/ Architect/ Consultant (maximum 3 (three) persons per instance), 

shall be borne by the Contractor. Such visits may be necessary for the inspection of 

chillers, panels, elevators, transformers, DG sets, fabricated doors, etc. that 

require inspection prior to shipping from the place of its manufacture. Any other 

item which is required to be tested before being processed / fabricated in the 

factory, such visits shall require the prior written approval from the NRDA. 

48 BATCHING PLANT 

The batching plant shall be erected by the contractor only on the location approved by 

Engineer. The batching plant shall be enclosed properly with necessary acoustic material to 

reduce the noise pollutions upto the permissible limit. Necessary arrangement shall be made to 

reduce air pollution to maintain the good, healthy environment in the surrounding residential area. 

49 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM 

49.1 A quality assurance procedure covering all aspects of the work shall be 

adopted for this work to ensure the desired quality. Details of the procedure 

shall be decided by mutual consultation between the Engineer and the 

contractor at the start of the works. 

49.2 The contractor shall submit within the time stipulated by the Engineer 

in writing, the details of actual methods that would be adopted by the 

contractor for the execution of any item as required by the Engineer at each of 

the locations, supported by necessary detailed drawings and sketches 

including those of the equipment and machinery that would be used, their 

locations, arrangements for conveying and handling materials etc., and 

obtain prior approval of Engineer well in advance of starting of such item of 

work. 



Page 23 of 36



NRDA 

The Engineer reserves the right to suggest modifications or make complete 

changes in the methods proposed by the contractor, whether accepted 

previously or not, at any stage of work, to obtain the desired accuracy, quality 

safety and progress of work which shall be binding on the contractor and no 

claim on account of such change in method of execution will be entertained by 

the Employer so long as Specifications of the items remains unaltered. 

49.3 The Contractor shall furnish within the period of 15 (fifteen) days a 

detailed programmed schedule using PERT/ CPM technique in quadruplicate 

including the date of actual start, the monthly progress expected to be achieved 

and the anticipated completion date of each major item of work to be done 

by him, also indicating, plant and machinery and material procurement 

schedule. 

The schedule is to be such as is practicable of achievement towards the 

completion of the whole work in the time limit and of the particular items, if 

any, on the due date specified in the contract and shall have the approval of the 

Engineer. No revised schedule shall be operative without such acceptance in 

wiring. The Engineer is further empowered to ask for more detailed schedule or 

schedules say weekly for any item or items, in any case of urgency of work as will 

be directed by him and the contractor shall supply the same as and when asked 

for. 

49.4 The contractor shall furnish sufficient plant, equipment and labour as may 

be necessary to maintain the progress schedule. The working and shift hours for 

operations to be done under. 

49.5 Further, the contactor shall submit the progress of work in forms and 

statements etc. at periodical intervals in the form of progress charts, forms, 

statements and / or reports as may be approved by the Engineer. 

49.6 The contractor shall maintain proforma, charts, details regarding 

machinery, equipment, labour, materials, periodical returns thereof as may be 

specified by the Engineer. 

50. EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

The Contractor shall mention the list of machinery procured at site for the work in this manual. 

This manual shall also reflect the name of the manufacturer, age of machinery and the agency 

entrusted with the maintenance work of the machinery listed in the manual. 

51. Minimum Plants, Equipment and shuttering 

Sr. No Particulars Quantity 

1 Computerised and Fully Automatic Concrete batching 1 No. minimum or 



Page 24 of 36



NRDA 

Sr. No Particulars Quantity 

plant of minimum 15 Cum /hr capacity 

as required 

Cement Silos for 2 (two) days capacity with direct feeding 

and batching facility 

Hoopers for fine and course aggregate 

Approved Plasticizer dozing facility 

Software programme compatible to make corrections to 

batching /mix design. 

2 Concrete Pump of 15 Cum/Hr. 2 Nos. 

3 Transit Mixer of 6 Cum capacity 2 Nos. 

4 MS concrete Piping system for pumping 1 set per Pump 

set 

5 Steel lifting Electric winch 2 Nos. 

6 JCB 2 Nos. 

7 Poclain with Rocker Breaker 1 No. 

8 Vibrators 

A Electric with low noise 2Nos. 

B Petrol ( Stand by) 2Nos. 

C Needle Vibrator - 20 3 Nos. 

D Needle Vibrator - 40 3 Nos. 

E Needle Vibrator - 65 1 No. 

9 Bar Bending Machine up to 40mm dia. 1 No. 

10 Bar cutting Machine up to 40mm dia. 1 No. 

11 Material Hoist 2 Nos. 

12 Curing Pumps 4 Nos. 

13 Double legged tubular scaffolding System As per 

requirement 

14 Pan mixer of not less than 0.5 Cum 2 Nos. 

15 Plate Vibrators of 1 ton capacity 2 Nos. 

16 Minimum shuttering material to be provided by the 3000sqm 

contractor 

( Good quality steel plates inc steel propos etc.) 

Note :The details referred to herein above are only for the purpose of quantitative assessment. 

The specifications & qualitative aspects of the shuttering material shall be in accordance with the 

BOQ & Technical specifications. 

53. SUBMITTALS 

Unless otherwise specified or directed by NRDA, the Contractor shall submit to NRDA for his review 

and approval all Co-ordinated services drawings, shop drawings, samples, materials lists, equipment 

date, instruction manuals, record documents, manufacturers' equipment manuals, design 

calculations for proprietary items of work, technical submittals, and other information required 

by the Contract Documents. Submittals and their contents including deviation shall be properly 

prepared, identified, and transmitted as provided herein or as the Owner may otherwise 

direct. Except for record documents and instruction manuals for operation and maintenance, 

submittals including deviation shall be approved before the material or equipment covered by 



Page 25 of 36



NRDA 

the submittal is delivered to the site. The contractor shall furnish an authority if required from 

material suppliers. 

54. PLANT, MACHINERY AND SHUTTERING 

The contractor is required to submit details of plants and machineries to be deployed by him in a 

proformas indicating all details such as make, year of manufacture .registration etc be 

submitted. 

The shuttering materials proposed to be provided by the contractor should be submitted in the 

prescribed format enclosed in Volume-I to be submitted in Envelope no. 1. 

55. SUB-CONTRACTORS 

55.0 All specialised works will be carried out by licensed (where applicable) 

sub contractors approved by NRDA. 

55.1 It may be noted that the contractors will have to submit credential of 

the selected sub contractors to NRDA for approval. 

It may further be noted that even if the contractor has in house licensed subcontractors 

for these works, they will have to select and engage contractors with 

prior approval of NRDA. 

55.2 All specialists, merchants, tradesmen and other agency executing any work 

or supplying and fixing any goods which items have been included in the 

Schedule of Quantities and/ or Specifications or for Extra/ Substituted items of 

works, who may be nominated or selected by the Engineer/ Contractor are 

hereby declared to be Sub-contractors employed by the Contractors. No 

nominated Sub-contractor shall be employed on or in connection with the 

works against whom the contractor shall make reasonable objection or (save 

where the Engineer and contractor shall otherwise agree) who will not enter 

into a contract provided: 

a) That the nominated sub-contractor shall indemnify the Contractor 

against the same obligations in respect of the sub-contractor as the 

contractor is under in respect of this contract. 

b) That the nominated sub-contractor shall indemnify the Contractor 

against claims in respect of any negligence by the Sub-contractor, his 

servants or agents or any misuse by him or them or any scaffolding or other 

plant, 

the 

property of the Contractor or under any Workmen's Compensation Act in 

force. 

c) That the nominated sub-contractor shall submit his bills to the 

Contractor. 

d) That the Contractor shall make payment to the nominated 

Sub- Contractor within 3 (three) days of the Contractor's receipt of 

the payment from NRDA against the Engineer certificates of 

payment providing that before any Certificate is issued, the Contractor 

shall upon request, furnish to the Engineer proof that the nominated subcontractor's 

accounts included in previous certificates have been duly 



Page 26 of 36



NRDA 

discharged in default whereof NRDA may pay the nominated Subcontractors 

upon a 

certificate of the Engineer and deduct the amount thereof from any sums 

due to the Contractor. The exercise of this power shall not create privity of 

contract as between NRDA and Sub-Contractors. 

e) The Engineer in his absolute discretion may recommend payment to 

the nominated Sub-Contractor directly by NRDA and deduct the 

amount thereof from any sums due or which may become due to the 

Contractor 

or recover the same amounts from the Contractor. 

f) No Labor contracts shall be permitted. 

g) Prior approval of the Sub-contractor by the NRDA is mandatory. 

h) The contractor shall submit an option of atleast two sub contractor , 

out of which NRDA shall select one. 

i) Further sub-contracting/ sub-letting of the work shall not be 

permitted. 

j) NRDA shall not permit under any circumstances Assigning, Transferring or 

Subletting of entire work or substantial part of work to be executed under 

this contract. If the Contractor attempts or assigns, transfers and sublets 

the entire or substantial work, the contract shall be terminated by the 

NRDA without prejudice to any right or remedy which shall have accrued 

or shall accrue thereafter to the NRDA. 

k) The Contractor shall not be permitted to give power of attorney for 

executing the work to any other agency or person on their behalf. The 

power of attorney for executing the work shall only be given to regular 

employee of the agency with prior approval of NRDA. 

55.3 Works to be Sub-Contracted & Prequalification criteria:- 

The details of work to be subcontracted and PQ criteria shall be governed as 

mentioned in detailed NIT 

55.4 ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELETRICAL WORKS:- 

1. The Sub-contractor for carrying out the electrical works under the 

contract should strictly be in accordance with the above criteria. 

2. All above referred works will have to be carried out under the supervision of 

Engineer. 

3. Power supply distribution scheme given in tender document is only for 

guideline purpose. However, successful agency will be responsible for obtaining 

necessary sanctions to over all power supply distribution scheme, from CSEB / 

applicable local authority and Engineer before starting execution of work. No 

extra charges will be paid for obtaining 

necessary approvals/ sanctions to power supply distribution scheme sanctioned 

by concerned power supply authority CSEB / applicable local authority, successful 

agency will have to take up and complete the work accordingly. 

4. Successful agency will have to obtain the required approvals to the total 

electrical works such as, HT/ LT distribution, Sub-station, Meter rooms, DG sets, etc 

from CSEB / applicable local authority/ concerned power supply authority, Electrical 

Inspector, authority or 



Page 27 of 36



NRDA 

any other statutory body at their own cost before starting execution of the work and 

the original sanctions obtained should be submitted to NRDA's concerned Electrical 

Division before execution of the work. Any statutory cost for obtaining the approval will 

be reimbursed on production of original receipts. 

5. It will be the responsibility of the agency to get the energy meters of the DG sets 

approved/ tested/ sealed from the necessary authorities. 

6. The electrical works under the scheme should be carried out strictly in Coordination 

with the concern CSEB / applicable local authority and necessary approvals 

should be obtained from time to time. 

7. Activity Bar Chart and the makes of material should be submitted for electrical 

works for necessary approvals from the competent authority from NRDA before execution 

of the work and work should be started only after the approvals. 

8. It will be the agency's responsibility to obtain the following listed documents 

from CSEB / applicable local authority. Electrical Inspector authority and other concerned 

Statutory Body towards completion of the work at their own cost, without which work 

will not be treated as completed. 

a) Sanction papers for the total external electrification works along with BOQ of 

material, demand note for supervision charges, if any. 

b) Charging permission of the installation. 

c) Inspection report of the various equipments & material supplied under the 

electrification work certified by CSEB / applicable local authority and NRDA authorities. 

d) Manufacturers test certificates and guarantee certificates in original for all the 

equipments and material supplied for execution of electrification work under the 

scheme. 

e) As Built drawings as stated Volume I for substation, HT/LT network, meter room, 

etc. showing all the details and certified by CSEB, Electrical Inspector authority (along with 

soft copy). 

f) As Built Drawings as stated Volume I for internal electrification work, area lighting 

work, water pumps, etc. (along with soft copy) 

g) Earth test report for the total installation. 

h) Work completion report from CSEB / applicable local authority for the 

total electrification work including substation, HT/LT distribution, Meter Room etc. 

should be submitted. 

i) Handing over of the total electrification work under the scheme, such as 

substations, including equipments, HT/LT distribution, meter room with energy 

meters to CSEB / applicable local authority. The letter in writing for taking over 

of the installation as above addressed to Engineer should be obtained form CSEB 

and should be submitted along with details of scheme. 

j) Separate guarantee, from the electrical agency should be submitted to 

NRDA against the electrical works carried out under the scheme, for a period of 

24 (twenty four) months including defects liability period in order to avoid any 



Page 28 of 36



NRDA 

inconvenience in connection with releasing and common services under the 

scheme and also to attend any defects in installation during this period. 

k) Required electrician/ Helpers are to be deployed round the clock for 

Operation & Comprehensive Maintenance of total Utility works & installations 

for a period of 24 (twenty four) months from the date of completion OR taking 

over of the installation whichever is later. 

9. All material & equipments to be supplied under this contract shall be 

offered for inspection at the manufacturing place. No material shall be supplied 

by the agency without the clearance from the Engineer. 

10. The total electrification work under the scheme will have to be carried out 

as per the terms & conditions mentioned in various sections of the Tender 

Document. 

11. Electrical works under the contract will not be treated as completed 

unless and until above listed activities are completed by successful agency. 

56. Subject work is strictly to be completed within stipulated work completion 

period and in accordance with the activities listed below completely as per the 

directives from Engineer. The charges and the expenses for completing the following 

listed activities should be included in the quoted offer and no separate payments against 

this will be made. 

1. Successful agency will have to obtain and submit the Contractor All Risk 

Insurance Policy (CAR) in original within 1 (one) week from date of work order from 

Any insurance company approved IRDA. The Contractors All Risk (CAR) Policy as 

said above shall be inclusive of insurance coverage under workman's 

compensation insurance policy for all workmen employed by contractor to 

complete the works covered under present contract. Further the contractors All 

Risk Policy period completely as stated in the tender. In case of time period 

extension (If any), it is essential that, premium of CAR policies should be timely 

paid by agency in order to ensure the continuity of CAR policy without any break in the 

same, suitable action will be taken against defaulters as per General Conditions of 

Contract unless and until the Contractors All Risk Policy as stated in above manner is 

submitted to the office of Engineer no payments will be released against any work 

executed. 

2. Obtaining necessary scheme sanctions in detail towards execution and 

completion of subject work in all respect, from concerned CSEB / applicable local 

authority. This activity includes required co-ordination and follow-up with concerned 

CSEB / applicable local authority for obtaining necessary scheme sanctions. The scheme 

sanction 

should 

be inclusive of specifications and required layout and other drawings etc. completely as 

per the requirement. 

The payment towards the supervision charges of CSEB / applicable local authority shall 

be paid directly to CSEB / applicable local authority on behalf and in the name of NRDA 

by the agency. 



Page 29 of 36



NRDA 

The original scheme sanctions along with original certified drawings, specification details, 

quotations, payment receipt against supervision charges etc. should be submitted to the 

Engineer. 

The supervision charges paid in the name of NRDA as mentioned above shall be 

reimbursed on submission of original payment receipts. 

3. If required, preparation and submission of execution drawing in co ordination 

with concerned planning authority of NRDA by engaging Govt. approved Surveyor for 

confirmation and marking of proposed cable routes, location of control pillar, existing 

services along the proposed route under the present contract as per the sanctioned 

scheme obtained from CSEB Reports and marked computerized plans duly certified by 

surveyor in 3 sets of should be submitted after carrying out the details survey as 

mentioned above. 

4 Obtaining necessary road/ soil/ footpath etc. cutting permission for cable 

trenching from concern authorities like NRDA/ CSEB/applicable local authority/ RMNN/ 

PWD etc. as applicable along the approved route and submit the approval in original 

along with the drawings and permission to Engineer. 

The charges required for obtaining the approvals and permission as mentioned above 

should be directly paid on behalf and in the name of NRDA by the agency. 

The charges paid in the name of NRDA as mentioned above shall be reimbursed on 

submission of original payment receipt to the Engineer 

5. Preparation and submission of shop/ execution drawing to Engineer for 

approvals. Submitting list of Makes of various items and material to be used under present 

contract for approvals. 

The Contractor or his qualified engineer having updated technical knowledge 

for execution of the subject work should invariably remain present and co-ordinate 

during every inspection and testing programme at manufacturers works, similarly 

during every joint site visits and when required. 

7. After supply of material at site, all the documents such as delivery challan, 

excise gate pass, material test report (in original), etc. should be submitted to Engineer for 

obtaining installation clearance.* 

The complete work under the present contract shall be carried out with required 

supervision, stage-wise inspection from concerned authority of CSEB / applicable local 

authority & Electrical Inspector authority in co-ordination with Engineer complete with 

required power shutdowns. The record of all inspection and shutdowns shall be submitted 

to Engineer. 

8. The execution work of cable trenching/ foundation for poles/ foundation 

of feeder pillar/excavation and trenching in all types of surfaces rocks, soils etc. shall 

be carried out as per approved route plan by using appropriate tools and machines in 

close co-ordination with concerned authorities from NRDA, CSEB/ applicable local 

authority, etc. completely as per the requirement so as to avoid the damages to the 

existing services. 

9. Obtaining clearance certificate from concern authority of NRDA, RNN, PWD, 



Page 30 of 36



NRDA 

CSEB/ applicable local authority, etc. as applicable, towards completion of resurfacing 

work of cable trenches, excavated surfaces and removal of debris and 

submission of this clearance certificate in this regard obtained from concerned 

authorities to Engineer. 

*In absence of activity No. 1 & 9 above, the payment towards 

construction, erection and installation of the item 8 to 9 will not be released. 

10. Arranging and carrying out pre & post testing and commissioning of the 

completed installation in presence of Engineer, his representative and the representative 

of any other statutory authorities like CSEB / applicable local authority & Electrical 

Inspector etc. as required. 

11. Excess saving statement as per final execution of work, item wise 

measurement break up in detail and escalation claim as applicable along with detail 

calculations and copies of confirmed indices etc. to be submitted to Engineer. 

It is mandatory to complete all the activities listed above from Sr.No.1 to 11 for releasing 

the final payment. 

57. Following conditions are the essential conditions of contract for carrying out and 

completing the subject work in all respect within stipulated time period. The successful agency 

will be responsible for completing the same as per the directives of Engineer. The charges and 

expenditure if any required for completing the same should be including in the quoted offer, 

and no separate payments against this will be made. 

1. The contractor shall visit the site to access the actual quantum of work and 

period required for completing the same before quoting the offer. 

2. Scheme specifications and quantity of the material to be used for the subject work 

under the contract and specified in the tender document is only for guideline 

purpose. However it will be the responsibility of the successful agency to obtain the 

measurements and specifications in detail of each and every item before starting the 

execution of work and complete the work in accordance with the approvals, 

clearances obtained for the same. All cost required for completion of work 

as per statutory approval, shall deemed to have included in the offer quoted. 

3. The foundation and excavation for feeder pillar and control pillar, grouting of 

frames in wall/ ground etc, are require to be carried out by the agency, and cost for 

the same shall be include in the offer quoted. 

4. It will be Agency's responsibility to obtain necessary sanctions and 

permissions by paying necessary charges towards; 

a) Obtaining necessary scheme sanctions and permissions for completing the 

subject work in all respect form any concerned statutory authority. 

5. The successful agency will be completely responsible for accidents occurred if 

any during the execution of work as well as during 24 (twenty four) months defect 

liability period under this contract. It will also be the responsibility of agency, for 



Page 31 of 36



NRDA 

making police complaints against any thefts and accidents etc. under intimation to 

NRDA. 

6. Charges against following listed activates should be included in the quoted offer 

itself and no separate payments will be made against same. 

a) Arranging and carrying out the material inspecting at respective 

manufactures unit . 

b) Arrangements for performing site visits and other connected activities as and 

when required by Engineer or his representative. 

c) Carrying out necessary co-ordination and follow up with concern authorities 

for obtaining necessary sanctions and permissions as required towards completion 

of work in all respects. 

d) Appointing Govt. approved surveyor for carrying out site survey and 

preparation of computerized shop drawing, Execution drawing, As built drawing etc. 

with soft copy. 

e) Any other incidental charges required towards completion of work in all respect. 

7. Bills submitted against the executed and completed works at site, will be 

processed further by Engineer, after necessary scrutiny and verification. 

58. The services/ tasks/ works as referred to under clauses shall be suitably applicable to 

all Utility services executed by the contractor, whether specifically mentioned herein above 

or no. 

59. Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment 

59.1 The Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the 

remedying of any defects therein: 

(a) have full regard for the safety of all persons entitled to be upon the Site and 

keep the Site (so far as the same is under his control) and the Works (so far as the 

same are not completed or occupied by the Employer) in an orderly state 

appropriate to the avoidance of danger to such persons, 

(b) provide and maintain at his own cost all lights, guards, fencing, warning signs 

and watching, when and where necessary or required by the Engineer or by any duly 

constituted authority, for the protection of the Works or for the safety and 

convenience of the public or others, and 

(c) take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the Site and 

to avoid damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the public or others 

resulting from pollution, noise or other causes arising as a consequence of his 

methods of operation. 

60. HANDING OVER PROCESS:- 



Page 32 of 36



NRDA 

The handing over process shall be based on a performance comprising individual activities. The 

process shall be approved by the Engineer. 

61. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 

61.1 General: Prevent pollution of land, air, and water; control erosion, 

washout, and surface runoff of earth and stockpiled materials. Preclude 

sedimentation in general and especially in existing on-site and public storm-water 

system and public right of way. 

61.2 Procedures: Perform erosion, sedimentation and temporary storm-water 

control. Follow procedures stipulated in local laws and regulations and as 

shown on Sitework drawings. 

61.3 Maintenance: Maintain controls in place until permanent controls 

are functioning. Remove when no longer needed. 

62 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 

56.1 Noise and Existing Building Structure Vibration Generated by Construction 

Procedures, Equipment, Tools, and Operations: Keep to minimum practicable 

during demolition and removal from building and site, including loading and 

removing storage containers. Equipment generated noise levels shall not 

exceed the following in decibels:- 

1. Concrete mixer: 85 

2. Concrete pump: 82 

3. Crane: 83 

4. Materials elevator: 

5. Pumps: 76 

6. Generators: 78 

7. Compressors: 81 

8. Pneumatic tools: 86 

9. Saws: 78 

10. Vibrators: 76 

11. Other tools: 85 

62.2 Operation of Air Hammers, Compressors, and Reciprocating Equipment: 

Not permitted inside existing buildings unless specifically approved in writing by 

Owner. 

62.3 Laws: Comply with applicable noise control laws, ordinances, and regulations. 

62.4 Acoustical Enclosures: Stationary equipment may be enclosed to 

produce required sound attenuation subject to continued maintenance of such 

enclosures to ensure that specified sound levels are not exceeded. 

62.5 Violations: Where field sound measurements reveal sound levels exceeding 



Page 33 of 36



NRDA 

those specified, cease operating such equipment and repair or replace it with equipment 

that complies with the sound levels specified. 

62.6 Cutting and Drilling Concrete: Use only rotary or core drilling for holes through 

concrete. Do not use impact tools to cut or otherwise remove concrete or to install 

inserts. 

62.7 Power-Activated Tools: Not permitted in or immediately adjacent to existing 

buildings, except with Owner's written approval in each specific case, except where such 

use is specifically specified. 

63. EXISTING CONDITIONS 

63.1 Contractors Examination of Site:- 

1. By executing Contracts, Contractor and subcontractors represent 

that they have: 

a. Visited the site and made due allowances for 

difficulties and contingencies; 

b. Compared Contract documents with existing conditions and 

informed themselves of conditions to be encountered, including 

work by others, if any, being performed; and 

c. Notified Architect of ambiguities, inconsistencies, and errors 

they have discovered within Contract documents or between 

Contract documents and existing conditions. 

2. Failure to visit the site and become familiar with conditions shall 

not relieve Contractor or a subcontractor from furnishing materials or 

equipment or completing the Work in accordance with Contract 

documents at no additional cost. 

3. Contractor or subcontractors will not be given extra payment for 

Work related to conditions they can determine by examining the site 

and Contract Documents. 

4. Contractor or subcontractors will not be given extra payment for 

work related to ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors within Contract 

documents, or between Contract documents and existing conditions, 

when such ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors are known to 

Contractor or subcontractor before Contract execution unless Contractor 

or subcontractor has notified Architect in writing of such condition 

before execution of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. 

63.2 Make use of public property and make arrangements for that use. No extra 

compensation will be paid due to costs associated with using public property. 

63.3 Access by Contractor to portions of Owner's property beyond the actual 

area of Work under this contract is denied, except where necessary to perform 



Page 34 of 36



NRDA 

the Work, and then only with specific written approval in each case. Refer to 

other sections for additional requirements. 

63.4 Contractor shall accept the site in the condition in which they exist at the time 

Contractor is given access to begin the Work. 

63.5 Damage caused by Contractor to existing structures, grounds plants, 

pavements, utilities, work by others, fixtures, or furnishings, shall be repaired by Contractor 

and left in as good condition as existed before the damaging, unless such existing work 

is shown to be removed or replaced by new Work. 

63.6 Immediately upon entering the site for purposes of beginning Work, locate 

general reference points and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; 

lay out Work and be responsible for lines, elevations, and measurements, and Work 

executed under this Contract. Exercise proper precautions to verify figures shown on 

Drawings before laying out Work. See 

Section "Field Engineering" for additional requirements. 

63.7 Contractor and each subcontractor, before starting work, shall verify 

governing dimensions at the premises, including floor elevations, floor-to-floor heights, 

and column locations and shall examine adjoining Work on which Contractor's or 

subcontractor's Work is in any way dependent. No "Extra" or additional compensation 

will be allowed on account of differences between 

actual measurements and dimensions shown. Submit differences discovered during the 

Work to Architect for interpretation before proceeding with associated Work. 

63.8 Employment of local labour shall be given priority wherever possible. However, 

this shall not in anyway affect/ dilute the Contractors obligations listed within the Tender 

document. 

63. LAMINATION OF DRAWINGS 

All drawings issued to site shall be kept in lamination condition. 

1. Maintainance of installed equipments ,macheneries and fixtures : 

The Contractor, at the time of bidding, will be responsible to ensure the completeness and 

adequacy of his Bid Price to fulfill the entire responsibilities for Maintaining the installation of 

all installed equipments , machineries and fixtures minimum for a period of 1 year from the 

date of commissioning and imparting training to the workers/staff as asked for maintaining 

the installations as per IS requirement and exercising. 

2. Handing Over: 

At the time of handing over after completion of defect liability period, all the equipment, 

spare including standby equipment etc. must be in good working order as were taken over 

before commencement of defect liability period. 



Page 35 of 36



NRDA 

3. Penalties for failure to achieve the functional guarantees : 

In case of failure to deliver the required quality of work, liquidated damages shall be imposed 

for such failure to meet the performance criteria, as described. The Employer will be entitled 

to recover any such damages from the secured deposits of the contractor.However, the 

contractor shall be allowed to take up routine / periodical maintenance as per IS guidelines, 

with prior permission of the Authority. 

i. For each breakdown of any equipment/machinery for more than 12 hour: Penalty @ 

Rs. 2000.00 each time 

ii. Non redressel of any complaint within 48 hours: Penalty @ Rs. 5000.00 for each such 

complaint. 

iii. 

Penalties for absence of Supervisory / Operating staff shall be as follows: 

Sl. 

No. 

Staff Category No. of Staffs Penalty for abscence 

1 Electrician 1 Rs. 300.00 per day 

2 Mechanic cum 1 Rs. 300.00 per day 

Fitter 

3 Watchman 2 Rs. 200.00 per day 

Note: However contractor can depute substitute staff with permission of the 

Authority in case leave of any staff member. In such case this penalty shall not be 

levied. 

65. Order of Precedence 

In case of any discrepancy between the items mentioned in the BoQs/Specifications/Drawing, the 

Order of precedence should be as follows: 

i. Item details as mentioned in the BoQs, read along with the specification shall prevail. 

However in case of conflict specification shall hold good. 

ii. 

Drawings. 


Date : 

For 


NRDA, Near Mantralaya Mahanadi Dwar, 

Raipur 492 001, Chhattisgarh. 

Date : 

* * * * * 



Page 36 of 36

NRDA F-1- Schedule-D- Section-V- List of approved makes 

CONSTRUCTION OF FOREST AND WATER RESOURCE DEPARTMENT BUILDINGS, NORTH BLOCK AT NAYA RAIPUR 

NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

Section-V 

List of approved makes 

Page 1 of 9



NRDA 

For the items missing in the list, the relevant IS Code and specification should be binding on the 

contractor.The contractor should take approval wrt the approved vendor list prior to any 

procurement from the Engineer in charge. 

APPROVED MAKE LIST FOR CIVIL WORKS 

Sr. No. Item Approved Make 

1 Cement PPC/OPC Ultratech/Lafarge/Ambuja/ACC/Birla /Century 

2 TMT TATA/SAIL/RINL/Jindal/ Essar 

3 Fly ash bricks Fly ash bricks confirming to IS 12894-1989 

4 Water proofing compound Siko/Foas rock/BASF/MC bauchemie/Dr. Fixit 

5 MS Steel (Angle/channel/I beam etc ) Jindal /SAIL/ TATA 

6 

Aluminium standard tubular sections/ 

Appropriate Z sections and other section 

Jindal/ Hindalco 

7 Glass/Mirror Saint Gobain / Modi /Pilkington 

8 Plastic Emulsion Paint Asian/Berger/Nerolac 

9 Synthetic Enamel Paint /Primer Asian/Berger/Nerolac 

10 Wall putty Birla , JK 

11 Spider Fittings, WCP profiles ,Patch Fittings Dorma/ Dline/Heffle/Hattich 

12 Texture Paints (Exterior) Heritage/ Ultratech/Asian Paints 

13 Texture Paints(Interior) Heritage/Ultratech/Asian Paints 

14 GRC Screens/Louvers Unistone 

15 Composite Aluminium Panels Alucobond/Eurobond 

16 Polycarbonate Sheets G.E. / WILSON 

17 Adhesives, Grouts and Sealers 

FerrousCrete / Weber (Saint Gobain) / 

Laticrete / Bal-Endura 

18 Pest Control PCI, Godrej, Pest & Hygiene Solutions 

19 Water Proofing Admixtures 

Dr.Fixit/ Pidilite/Kryton/McBouchair/Forsroch/ 

BASF 

Interior Finishes 

20 Gypsum Ceiling Lafarge/ Saint Gobain / India Gypsum 

21 Mineral Fibre Grid Ceilings Armstrong / DIAKIN 

22 Metal Ceilings Armstrong / Hunter Douglas 

23 Acoustical Ceiling tiles Armstrong / Anutone 

24 Wooden Finish Ceilings Armstrong / Anutone 

25 MDF Boads Panelmax (Greenlam) / TESA(action), 

26 Vitrified Tiles/Ceramic Tiles NITCO/ HINDWARE /ASIAN/ KAJARIA/RAK 

27 Glass mosaic tiles Nitco/Bissazza/Alitalia 

Page 2 of 9



NRDA 

28 

Ply, Commerical board, Blockboards, 

Particle Boards 

Tesa(Action)/ARCHID/Century/Bhutanboad 

29 Veneers and Laminates Greenlam / Century/Merino/Euro 

30 Cement Board Everest/Bison/Hyderabad Industries 

APPROVED MAKE LIST FOR PLUMBING WORKS 


1 Sanitary ware Hindware/Parryware /Cera/RAK 

2 Concealed Cisterns Hindware/ Parryware /Cera/Jaguar 

3 C.P. Fittings Jaquar/ Parko / Parryware/Hindustan (Hindware) 

4 HDPE pipe Duraline/ Jain/Finolex 

5 uPVC pipe SUPREME/KML CLASSIC/Oriplast/Prince 

6 Ductile Iron(DI) pipe Electro steel casting ltd./Jindal saw ltd. 

7 Sluice valves and non return valves Kirloskar/ IVC/IVI 

8 FRP/GRP EVERLAST/TECHNOCRATS/THERMOSET 

9 Specification for EPDM Gasket Anand Reddiplex, Enviro Seals 

10 Manhole Covers & Frame SFRC K.K/ PERGITY/Neco/SRIF 

11 CPVC Pipes & Fittings up to 50 mm dia ASTRUL/Ashirvad/Supreme 

12 CPVC Pipes & Fittings above 50 mm dia ASTRUL/Ashirvad/Supreme 

13 CPVC Valves up to 50 mm Dia ASTRUL/Ashirvad/Supreme 

14 S.S. Sink Franke / Jayna / Nirali 

15 G.I. Pipes Jindal-Hissar/ Tata/Zenith 

16 G.I. Fittings Unik/ K.S./ Zoloto 

17 Gunmetal Valves Zoloto/ Leader/ Sant/ Kilburn 

18 Brass stop & Bib Cock L&K/ Jaquar/Hind 

19 Ball valve with floats Zoloto/ Leader/ Sant/ Jayco 

APPROVED MAKE LIST FOR FIRE FIGHTING WORKS 


1 

Pumps 

Kishor/KSB/Grundfos/ Kirloskar/BEACONS / 

MATHER & PLATT / CROMPTON / WASP JYOTI / BE 

/ VOLTAS / GREAVES 

2 Motors KIROLSKAR / ALSTOM / SIEMENS / JYOTHI / ABB / 

CROMPTON 

3 Butterfly/Check Valve Audco/ AIP Valve 

4 CP GM Ball Valve Zoloto/AIP Valve 

5 Air Release Valve Sukan/Leader 

6 RRL Hose Geetach/Safeguard 

7 STARTERS SIEMENS / L & T / CUTLER HAMMER / GE POWER / 

ABB /CONTROL & SWITCHGEAR 

8 SINGLE PHASING PREVENTOR/ OVER L & T / GE POWER / SIEMENS / ABB 

Page 3 of 9



NRDA 


LOAD PROTECTION UNIT. 

9 Fire Extinguishers Geetach/Safegard / LINTEX / MINIMAX / SAFEX / 

BHARAT 

10 Rubber Tube for Hose reel Jyoti/Newage 

11 Paint J&N/ Nerolac 

12 Welding rods Victor/Maruti 

13 Fasteners(Galvanised) GKW/Canon 

14 Dash fastners/clamps Cannon/Chilly/Hilti 

15 Hose Box/Hose reel drum Geetach/Safegard 

16 Anti vibration pads Kanwal/Dunlop 

17 Mechnical Seal As per OEM Cert./Duramat 

18 Pressure switch Indfoss /DANFOSS / SWIZER. 

19 Pressure Gauge ,THERMOMETERS, JAPSIN / FIEBIG / GURU / H.GURE /BESTOBELL 

20 Cables/wire Kalinga/National/Polycab 

21 PVC conduit AKG/BEC 

22 Sprinklers SPRAY SAFE / HD/NEWAGE. 

23 FIRE HYDRANT LANDING VALVES, FIRE 

BRIGADE CONNECTION (ISI MARKED). 

MINIMAX / SAFEX / NEWAGE / VIJAY / SAFE 

GUARD. 

24 INSTALLATION VALVE (ISI MARKED). SPRAY SAFE / HD. 

25 FIRE HOSE PIPES, FIRST AID HOSE REEL JAYSREE / MINIMAX / NEWAGE / SAFEX. 

(ISI MARKED) 

26 PRESSURE GUAGE. JAPSIN / FIEBIG / GURU. 

27 HP /LP /OFF SWITCH THERMOSTATS 

/HUMIDISTATS STRIP HEATERS. 

PENN / HONEY WELL / INDFOSS / ESCORTS / 

DASSPASS. 

28 PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATE HONEY WELL / JOHNSONS / LANDIS & STEAEFA 

29 FILTERS DYNA / KIRLOSKAR / PUROMATIC / PURAFILL / 

AITECH /THERMODYNE / AEROSOL / SMIL / PURE 

AIR 

30 GRILLES /DIFFUSERS. CARRYAIRE / AIRMASTER / VINAYAGA / MATASYS 

CORPORATION / AJANTA / RAVI STAR 

31 INSULATION MATERIAL. FGP / UP TWIGA / PILKINGTON / BEARDSELL / 

LLOYDS / KIMMCO 

32 AIR CURTAINS. ALMONARD / BECON / TECHNOMECH / RUSSEL / 

AERODYNAMICS 

33 

MODULATING MOTOR 

HONEY WELL / JOHNSON / STEFA CONTROL / 

RAPID COOL. 

34 MODULATING VALVE, SOLENOID VALVE RAPID COOL / HONEYWELL / JOHNSON 

FOR AHU 

35 BALANCING VALVE ADVANCE / SANT / CASTLE 

36 REFRIGERENT VALVE BRASMATIC / SANT 

37 FILTERS DYNA / KIRLOSKAR / PUROMATIC / PURAFILL / 

AITECH /THERMODYNE / AEROSOL / SMIL / PURE 

AIR 

38 HP /LP /OFF SWITCH THERMOSTATS 

/HUMIDISTATS STRIP HEATERS. 

PENN / HONEY WELL / INDFOSS / ESCORTS / 

DASSPASS. 

Page 4 of 9



NRDA 


39 PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATE HONEY WELL / JOHNSONS / LANDIS & STEAEFA 

40 BMS HARDWARE COMPAQ /DELL / IBM / ACER /SIEMENS-NITEL / 

HCL 

41 BMS SOFTWARE SIEMENS ( DESIGA INSIGHT)/JHONSON CONTROLS 

(METASYS MS / LALNDIS & STEAEFA / HONEYWELL 

42 BMS DDC CONTROLLER SIEMENS / JHONSON CONTROL / HONEYWELL 

43 VVVF DRIVE FOR AHU / COOLING DANFOSS / ALAN BRADLEY./ SIEMENS /ABB 

TOWER MOTOR 

44 FIRE DAMPER MOTORS BALEMO /JUVANTO / SIEMENS 

45 MIXING VALVE WITH MOTOR SIEMENS / JHONSON CONTROL / HONEYWELL / 

RAPID COOL 

46 Fire Alarm Honeywell/IAS Morley/Notifier 

APPROVED MAKE LIST FOR HVAC WORKS 


1 

VRV Units (Heat pump type) 

Daikin / Toshiba / Blue star/Mitsubishi Heavy 

Industries / LG 

2 Cassette / Hiwall indoors for VRV Daikin / Toshiba / Mitsubishi Heavy Industries / 

Samsung / LG / Carrier 

3 Propeller fan Vents / caryaire 

4 In-Line fan Systemair / Caryaire / Airflow / 

5 Grilles/ Diffusers Caryaire / Ravistar / Airflow 

6 G.I. Sheet Metal Duct SAIL/ Tata/Jindal 

7 PVC Pipe Prince / Supreme. 

8 Copper Pipe Rajco/ Mandev 

9 Closed cell Nitrile rubber Armacell / K flex / kaimenflex 

10 Fibre glass UP twiga / Owen corning 

11 Anchor fastners Hilti /fishner 

12 Paints ICI/ Asian/ Narolac/ Berger 

13 Air washing unit Blue Star / Roots cooling / Edgetech/ 

Flaktwood/Humidin/Zeco 

14 Centrifugal Fan for AWU Kruger / Nikotra /Flaktwood/ Humidin/ Zeco/ 

comfrei 

15 Air Washer cooling Pad (imported) Munters / Glacier Cor 

16 Exhaust air unit Kruger / Systemaire / Edgetech 

17 Centrifugal blowers for exhaust air units Kruger / Nicotra / Comfrei 

18 Rectangular Duct fans (Inline fans) Systemaire / Flakt / Greenheck 

19 Axial Flow Fan Systemaire / Kanalflakt / Kruger 

20 Jet Fans Systemaire / Wolter / Greenheck 

21 Pre filters Thermodyne / Anfilco / Spectrum 

22 GI Pipe Tata Steel /Jindal /Zenith 

23 PVC Pipe Prince / Supreme / Finolex. 

24 Ball Valve Rapid cool / Anergy / Audco 

Page 5 of 9



NRDA 


25 

Vibration Isolator 

Resistoflex / kanwal industries 

26 

GSS Sheets (lock former quality) 

SAIL / Jindal /TATA 

27 Factory fabricated Rectangular duct Ecoduct / Zeco / Rolastar 

28 Extruded AL Grille / diffuser Carrier / Ravistar / Airflow 

29 Extruded Al / MS Painted Volume Carrier / Ravistar / Airflow 

control damper 

30 Fresh air / exhaust air grills with Carrier / Ravistar / Airflow 

dampers, bird screen, filter fixing 

arrangement 

31 Duct Dampers Carrier / Ravistar / Airflo 

32 Fire Damper UL listed Carrier / Ravistar 

33 Anchor Fasteners Hilti / Fischer 

34 Protective Coating over Closed Cell Polybond / pidilite 

Elastromeric insulation 

35 Motor Control Centre International Switchgear / ESS ESS switches / 

UPS / IPC 

36 Starter, Contactor, Push Button Larsen & Toubro / Siemens 

37 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Larsen & Toubro / Siemens 

38 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) GE Power Controls/ Siemens / Havels/Enkey 

39 Overload relays with built in Single Larsen & Toubro / Siemens 

Phase Preventer 

40 Current Transformer (Epoxy Cast Resin) Automatic Electric / Indcoil / Pragati 

41 Switch Fuse Unit, HRC Fuse Larsen & Toubro / GE Power Controls / Siemens 

42 Rotary Switch Larsen & Toubro / GE Power Controls / Siemens 

43 Timer Delay Relay Larsen & Toubro / GE Power Control / Siemens 

44 Timer Larsen & Toubro / Siemens 

45 Selector Switch, Toggle switch Larsen & Toubro / Kaycee 

46 Change Over Switch Larsen & Toubro / siemens 

47 Ammeter and Voltmeter Rishabh (L& T) / Automatic Electric 

48 Indicating Lamps LED type , Push Button Larsen & Toubro / Siemens / Vaishno Electricals 

49 Cables Finolex / CCI / Glostar 

50 Conduits BEC / AKG 

Page 6 of 9



NRDA 

APPROVED MAKE LIST FOR ELECTO MECHANICAL WORKS 

Sr. No. Item 

Approved Make 

1 Distance Transformers EMCO/ Vijay/ Volt Amp/ Kirloskar/ Approved vender of CSPDCL 

2 11 KV Lightning Arrestor Lamco/ Elpro/ Oblum/ Areva/ Raychem 

3 L.T. Panels Schneider/ L & T/ Siemens/ ABB/ C & S/ Legrand 

4 Indicating Lamps L & T/ Siemens/ Schneider 

5 Energy Analyser Ducati/ L & T/ Schneider 

6 Push Buttons L & T/ Siemens/ Schneider 

7 Timers L & T/ Siemens/ Schneider 

8 ACB L & T/ Siemens/ Schneider/ ABB/ C & S 

9 HRC L & T/ GE/ Schneider/ Standard/ ABB/ C & S 

Metal clad rewirable 

10 

porceline switch fuse unit 

SSK/ Standard/ Havells/ C & S 

Switch disconnector fuse 

11 

unit 

GE/ L & T/ Schneider/ Siemens/ ABB/ C & S 

12 Changeover switch 

i Onload HPL/ Gerard/ GE/ L & T/ ABB/ C & S 

ii Off Load Standard/ Havells/ Gerard/ C & S 

13 Volt meters, Ampere meters 

i Analog type meters Mecon/ ESSVEE/ AE 

ii Digital type meters Mecon/ ESSVEE/ C&S 

14 Current Transformer C & S/ AE/ Kappa 

15 Selector Switches GE/ C & S/ Siemens/ ABB 

Static watt-hour meter (kwh 

16 

meter) 

L & T/ Sems/ Genius 

17 Starters/Contactors GE/ L & T/ Schneider 

18 Relay Siemen/ ABB/ Schneider 

19 MCCB GE/ L & T/ Schneider/ Siemens/ Legrand/ Andrew Yule/ ABB 

20 Connectors Elmex/ Connect well/ Raychem/ Andrew Yule 

MCB/ Isolator/ RCCB/ DBs/ 

21 

enclosures 

L & T/ ABB/ GE/ Schneider/ Legrand/ Andrew Yule 

22 Metal Clad industrial plug top & socket 

i Pin & sleeve type Havells/ Legrand/ Schneider/ ABB 

ii Butt Type BCH/ Millborn 

Self Extinguishable Polymer 

iii 

type 

Legrand/ Schneider/ ABB 

23 Capacitors 

i Standard duty 

ii Heavy duty 

Epcos/ Ducati/ Areva/ Unistar/ Schneider 

iii Gas filled 

24 Power Switch (upto 32A) L & T/ GE/ Schneider/ Siemens/ ABB 

25 Exhaust Fan/ Light Fitting T- GE/ Crompton/ Bajaj/ Orient/ Usha/ Havells 

Page 7 of 9



NRDA 

Sr. No. Item 

5 

Approved Make 

26 Ceilling Fans GE/ Crompton/ Bajaj/ Orient/ Usha/ Havells 

27 Fresh Air Fans GE/ Crompton/ Bajaj/ Orient/ Usha/ Havells 

Wall mounting/ Cabin/ 

28 

Pedestrial Fans 

GE/ Crompton/ Bajaj/ Orient/ Usha/ Havells 

29(a) Light Fittings Philips/ Wipro/ Bajaj/ Schreder/Thorn 

29(b) Lamps Osram/Philips/GE 

29(c) LED CREE/ Osram/ Philips 

Storage Water Heater and 

30 

accessories 

Bajaj/ CG/ Usha 

31 Solar Heating System Tata/ BP/ BHEL 

32 Air Conditioner LG/ Voltas/ Samsung/ General/ Hitachi/ Diakin 

33 Wires Finolex/ Polycab/ RR Cables/ Gloster/ Havells 

34 LAN, UTP Wires As per IS code 

35 Earthing As per IS code 

36 LT Cable 

Finolex/ Universal/ Polycab/ Prime-cab/ Gloster/ CCI/ 

Havells/Ravin 

37 Cable Accessories: 

i Brass Gland Comet/ Metal Craft Industries/ Raychem 

ii Aluminium Lugs Dowells/ Metal Craft Industries/ Raychem 

Unarmoured Telephone 

38 

Cable 

Delton/ Finolex/ National/ Havells 

39 Armoured Telephone Cable Delton/ Finolex/ National/ Sterlite/ Birla Erricson/ Havells 

XLPE insulated 33 & 11 KV 

40 

HT cable 

Universal/ Gloster/ CCI/ Polycab/ Ravin cable/ Prime Cab 

Outdoor straight through 

41 

joint 

Denson/ Raychem/ 3M 

Heat shrinkable type indoor/ 

42 

outdoor terminations/ joint 


Push -on type indoor/ 

43 

outdoor terminations/ joint 


44 MS cable tray Venus/ Pasco/ Dolphin/ Metalem/ Asian Ancillaries 

Copper Bus Trunking 

45 

arrangement 

L & T/ Schneider/ EAE(Alcu-Bar) 

Power transformers 33/11 

46 

KV 

Crompton/ BHEL/ EMCO/ Vijay/ Volt Amp 

47 Ring Main units 11 KV Areva/ Crompton/ BHEL/ Siemens/ ABB/ Schneider 

48 

11/33 KV Vacuum Circuit 

Breaker 

BHEL/ Crompton/ Siemens/ Schneider/ ABB/ Biecco lawrie/ 

Areva/ Jyoti/ Andrew Yule 

49 Load break switch Areva/ Crompton/ BHEL/ L & T/ Siemens/ ABB/ Schneider 

50 Octagonal Poles Bajaj/ BP/ Gammons 

51 Tubular Poles Bajaj/ BP/ Gammons 

52 DG Set with panel board Cummins/ Kirloskar/ Caterpillar/ Jackson/ Sterling Wilson 

53 Lift/ Elevator Otis/ Johnson/ Thyssen/ Mitsubishi/ Schindher 

Page 8 of 9



NRDA 

Sr. No. Item 

Approved Make 

Packaged Substation 

(All the components in the 

54 

Schneider/ ABB/ C&S/ Crompton Greeves 

package substation shall be 

as per this list only) 

Mechanical works 

1 Submmersible Pumping Sets Kishor/ KSB/ Grundfos 

2 Motors Kirloskar/ Jyoti/ NGEF/ GE 

3 EOT Crane Wh Brady/ Crompton Greaves/ Jay Engineering 

4 Actuator AUMA/ Rotork/ Blue star 

5 MS Pipes Confirming to IS 2062 

6 Valves IVC/ Kirloskar/ IVI/ Kilburn/ Zoloto/ Castle/ CIM 

Instrumentation Works 

1 Pressure Gause 

i Bourdon type 

Fiebig/ H Guru Insturmrnts Pvt Ltd/ Resrohel 

ii Diaphram type 

2 Pressure Transmitter Rosemount/ YBL/ Micro 

Level Switches in Sludge, 

3 Sump/ thickner. 

V Automat/ Levcon/ Petrole Services/ NIVO/ Siemens 

Recirculation 

4 Ultrasonic flow meter Khrone/ Yokogawa/ Krohne Marshell/ Emerson/ Rosemount 

5 PLC/ SCADA system Schneider/ Allan Bradley/ ABB/ Siemens 

6 UPS APC/ Sukam/ Hirel 

Computer (Servers & 

7 

HCL/ IBM/ HP-Compaq/ DELL 

Workstation) 

8 Printer HP/ Canon/ Xerox 

9 Remote Control Desk Crompton/ Andrew Yule/ Siemens/ Sellwin electrical/ Positronics 

10 Batteries Shreetron India Ltd/ Caldyne/ Chabbi electrical/ Exide/ Amar Raj 

Page 9 of 9

NRDA F-1-Schedule-D- Section VI – Drawings 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE– D 

S ection – V I 

Drawings 



Page 1 of 2

NRDA F-1-Schedule-D-Section VI – Drawings 


NRDA 

LIST OF DRAWINGS 

LIST OF DRAWINGS of FOREST DEPARTMENT BUILDING 

ARCHITECTURE 

1 SITE PLAN 

2 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN 

3 GROUND FLOOR PLAN 

4 FIRST FLOOR PLAN 

5 SECOND FLOOR PLAN 

6 THIRD FLOOR PLAN 

7 TERRACE PLAN 

8 ELEVATIONS-1 


10 SECTIONS 

ELECTRICAL 

1 SLD 

LIST OF DRAWINGS of WATER RESOURCES DEPARTMENT BUILDING 

ARCHITECTURE 

1 SITE PLAN 

2 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN 

3 GROUND FLOOR PLAN 

4 FIRST FLOOR PLAN 

5 SECOND FLOOR PLAN 

6 THIRD FLOOR PLAN 

7 TERRACE PLAN 



10 SECTIONS 

ELECTRICAL 

1 SLD 



Page 2 of 2

NRDA F-1- Schedule-E 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE– E 

Reference to General Conditions of contract. 



Page 1 of 2

NRDA F-1- Schedule-E 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE-E 

Reference to General Conditions of contract. 

Name of Work : “Construction of Forest and Water Resources Department Buildings at Sector-19 of Naya Raipur”. 

Estimated cost of work 

: Rs. 50.88 Crores 

(i) Earnest Money : Rs. 50.88 Lacs 

(ii) 

Performance 

Guarantee 

: 5% of tendered value 

(iii) Security Deposit 

: 5% of tendered value 



Page 2 of 2

NRDA F-1- Schedule-F 


NRDA 

SCHEDULE– F 

General Rules & Directions 



Page 1 of 7



NRDA 

SCHEDULE-F 

GENERAL RULES & DIRECTIONS : Officer inviting tender 

Maximum percentage for quantity of 

items of work to be executed beyond 

which rates are to be determined in 

accordance with Clauses 12.2 & 12.3: 

See below 

Definitions: 

2(v) Engineer-in-Charge Executive Engineer ( C ) IV, NRDA or Any 

Officer Appointed by CEO, NRDA 

2(viii) Accepting Authority Chief Executive Officer, NRDA 

2(x) 

Percentage on cost of 

materials and Labour to cover 

all overheads and profits: 15 % 

2(xi) Standard Schedule of Rates CG PWD SoR with Updated Amendments 

2(xii) Department Naya Raipur Development Authority 

Clause 1 

(i) 

(ii) 

Time allowed for submission of Performance 

Guarantee from the date of issue of letter of 

acceptance 

Maximum allowable extension beyond the period 

provided in (i) above 

7 days 

7 days 



Page 2 of 7



NRDA 

Clause 2 

Authority for fixing 

compensation under clause 2 

CEO, NRDA 

Clause 2A 

Whether Clause 2A shall be applicable 

No 

Clause 5 

Number of days from the date of issue 

of letter of acceptance for reckoning 

date of start 

15 days 

Mile stone(s) as per table given below:- 

To be submitted by the tendered on award of work 

Sl. No. 

Description of Milestone 

Time allowed in 

Amount to be with-held in case 

(Physical) 

days(from date of start) 

of non achievement of mile 

stone 

1. NA 

2. NA 

3. NA 

4. NA 

5. NA 

Time allowed for execution of work 

24months including Rainy Season 



Page 3 of 7



NRDA 

Authority to decide: 

(i) 

(ii) 

Extension of time CEO, NRDA 

Rescheduling of mile stones Chief Engineer ( Engineering), NRDA 

Clause 6, 6A 

Clause applicable - (6 or 6A) 

6A 

Clause 7 

Gross work to be done together with 

net payment /adjustment of advances 

for material collected, if any, since the 

last such payment for being eligible to 

interim payment 

Rs 100 Lakhs 

Clause 10A 

All the materials as per contract. 

1. ……………… 2. …………… 3. …………………… 

4. ………………… 5. …………… 6. …………………… 

Clause 10B(ii) 

Whether Clause 10B (ii) shall be 

applicable 

Applicable Subject to clause as per special 

condition of contract 

Clause 10C 

Component of labour expressed as 

percent of value of work 

Applicable 

Clause 10CA 

Applicable 



Page 4 of 7



NRDA 

Sl. No. 

Material covered 

Nearest Materials (other than cement, 

Base Price of all 

under this clause 

reinforcement bars and the structural steel) for 

Materials 

covered 

which All India Wholesale Price Index to be 

under clause 10 CA* 

followed 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

* Base price of all the materials covered under clause 10 CA is to be mentioned at the time of 

approval of NIT. 

Clause 11 

Specifications to be followed for 

execution of work 

Tender specification attached with Tender 

document, CPWD, MOSRTH, CPHEEO, NBC 

and relevant IS Specifications. 

Clause 12 

12.2. & 12.3 Deviation Limit beyond which clauses 12.2 & 12.3 

shall apply for building work……………………………. 25% 

12.5 Deviation Limit beyond which clauses 12.2 & 12.3 shall 

apply for foundation work………………………………… 25% 

Clause 16 

Competent Authority for deciding 

reduced rates. 

Chief Engineer ( Engineering), NRDA 



Page 5 of 7



NRDA 

Clause 18 

List of mandatory machinery, tools & plants to be deployed by the contractor at site:- 

As mentioned in special Condition of contract 

Clause 36 (i) 

Requirement of Technical Representative(s) and recovery Rate 

Sl. 

No. 

Minimum 

Qualification of 

Technical 

Representative 

Discipline 

Designation 

(Principal 

Technical/ 

Technical 

Representative) 

Minimum 

Experience 

Number 

Rate at which recovery 

shall be made from 

the contractor in the event 

of not fulfilling 

provision of clause 36(i) 

Figures Words 

1. Graduate 

Engineer 

Civil Project Manager 10 1 2000/day Two thousand 

per day 

2. Diploma Engineer Civil Site Engineer 5 3 1000/day One thousand 

per day 

3. Diploma Engineer Electrical Site Engineer 5 1 1000/day One thousand 

per day 

4# DTP Operator Thorough 

knowledge in 

AutoCAD & 

MS Office 

Computer 

Operator 

4 1 500/day Five hundred 

per day 

# DTP Operator should be placed with Engineer in Charge in his office within ten days from the signing of 

agreement and upto 30 days beyond the date of completion of work. He shall assist the Engineer in charge 

in day to day activities. 



Page 6 of 7



NRDA 

Clause 42 

(i) (a) Schedule/statement for determining 

theoretical quantity of cement & bitumen on 

the basis of C.G. PWD S.O.R 

Not Applicable 

(ii) 

Variations permissible on theoretical quantities: 

(a) 

Cement 

For works with estimated cost put to tender 

not more than Rs. 5 lakh. 

For works with estimated cost put to tender 

more than Rs.5 lakh. 

3% plus/minus. 

2% plus/minus. 

(b) Bitumen All Works 2.5% plus & only & nil on 

minus side. 

(c) 

Steel Reinforcement and structural steel 

sections for each diameter, section and 

category 

2% plus/minus 

(d) All other materials. Nil 

RECOVERY RATES FOR QUANTITIES BEYOND PERMISSIBLE VARIATION 

Sl. 

No. 

Description of Item 

Rates in figures and words at which recovery shall be 

made from the Contractor 

Excess beyond Less use beyond permissible 

permissible variation 

variation 

1. Cement NA NA 

2. Steel Reinforcement NA NA 

3. Structural Sections NA NA 

4. Bitumen issued free NA NA 

5. Bitumen issued at stipulated fixed price NA NA 



Page 7 of 7

Modified Part 2 Tender Document - Naya Raipur

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?